Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
H21
DP-3510/4510/6010
DP-3520/4520/6020
DP-3530/4530/6030
[ Version 5.2 ]
WARNING
This service information is designed for experienced repair technicians only and is not intended for use by the general public.
It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non-technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product.
Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians. Any attempt to service
or repair the product or products dealt within this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death.
The contents of this Service Manual and the Specifications are subject to change
without notice.
Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. reserves the right to make improvements in
the product design without reservation and without notice.
Published in Japan.
Important Notice
Please read this notice completely BEFORE installing any
optional accessories. As failure to properly install the additional
board or connector with the power ON (only the front power
switch Off) could damage the copiers SPC or SC board.
Please follow the instructions below:
1. It is essential that you turn OFF power to the Main Power
Switch located in the rear of the copier.
2. It is essential that you unplug the Main AC Power Cord from
the wall outlet.
3. Please carefully read the installation instructions and follow
each step.
Note 1:
The Main Power Switch location may differ slightly depending on the model.
Note 2:
O = Power OFF, l = Power ON
Note:
If the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Disk Scan Function from being
performed (similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is
important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switches on
the machine.
1. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position first.
2. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disk
Drive Unit.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position.
(This interrupts all the power to the machine, but does not disconnect the main line.)
4. Unplug the AC Power Cord to shut the power Off completely.
* The specifications are subject to change without notice. Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. reserves
the right to make improvements in the product design without reservation and without notice.
<Beispiel: DP-6530/4530/6030>
Hinweis:
Precautions
For Your Safety
To prevent severe injury and loss of life, read this section carefully before servicing the Panasonic
machine to ensure proper and safe operation of your machine.
Please ensure that the machine is installed near a wall outlet and is easily accessible.
This section explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual.
WARNING: Denotes a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION: Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.
This section also explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual.
These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure
that must not be performed.
These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure
that must be emphasized in order to operate the machine safely.
WARNING
Power and Ground Connection Cautions
Ensure that the plug connection is free of dust. In a damp environment, a contaminated
connector can draw a significant amount of current that can generate heat and eventually
cause fire if left unattended over an extended period of time.
Always use the power cord provided with your machine. When an extension power cord is
required, always use a properly rated cord.
120 V/15 A or AC 220 - 240V/10 A
If you use a cord with an unspecified current rating, the machine or plug may emit smoke or
become hot to the touch.
Do not attempt to repair, pull, bend, chafe or otherwise damage the power cord. Do not
place a heavy object on the cord. A damaged cord can cause fire or electric shocks.
Never touch a power cord with wet hands. Danger of electric shock exists.
If the power cord is damaged or insulated wires are exposed, contact the authorized
Panasonic dealer for a replacement. Using a damaged cord can cause fire or electric
shocks.
Stop operation immediately if your machine emits smoke, excessive heat, unusual noise, or
abnormal smell, or if water is spilt onto the machine. These conditions can cause fire.
Immediately switch Off and unplug the machine, and contact the authorized Panasonic
.
dealer.
Do not disconnect or reconnect the machine while the power switch is in the On position.
Disconnecting a live connector can cause arcing, consequently deforming the plug and
cause fire.
When disconnecting the machine, grasp the plug instead of the cord. Pulling on a cord
forcibly can damage it and cause fire or electric shock.
When the machine is not used over an extended period of time, switch it Off and unplug it.
If an unused machine is left connected to a power source for a long period, degraded insulation
can cause electric shocks, current leakage or fire.
Be sure to switch Off and unplug the machine before accessing the interior of the machine
for cleaning, maintenance or fault clearance. Access to a live machine's interior can cause
electric shock.
Once a month, unplug the machine and check the power cord for the following. If you notice any unusual
condition, contact the authorized Panasonic
.
dealer
The power cord is plugged firmly into the receptacle.
The plug is not excessively heated, rusted, or bent.
The plug and receptacle are free of dust.
The cord is not cracked or frayed.
Operating Safeguards
Do not touch areas where these caution labels are attached to, the surface may be very hot and may cause
severe burns.
Do not place any liquid container such as a vase or coffee cup on the machine. Spilt water can cause fire or
shock hazard.
Do not place any metal parts such as staples or clips on the machine. If metal and flammable parts get into the
machine, they can short-circuit internal components, and cause fire or electric shocks.
If debris (metal or liquid) gets into the machine, switch Off and unplug the machine immediately.
Operating a debris-contaminated machine can cause fire or electric shock.
Do not try to alter the machine configuration or modify any parts. An unauthorized modification can cause
smoke or fire.
Consumable Safeguards
Never dispose of toner, toner cartridge or a waste toner container into an open flame. Toner remaining in the
cartridge can cause an explosion, burns and/or injuries.
Keep button batteries/stamp out of the reach of children. If a button battery/stamp is swallowed accidentally,
get medical treatment immediately.
CAUTION
Installation and Relocation Cautions
Do not place the machine near heaters or volatile, flammable, or combustible materials such as curtains that
may catch fire.
Do not place the machine in a hot, humid, dusty or poorly ventilated environment. Prolonged exposure to
these adverse conditions can cause fire or electric shocks.
Place the machine on a level and sturdy surface that can withstand the weight of the machine.
The weight of the machine : 43.6 kg / 96.12 lb
If tilted, the machine may tip-over and cause injuries.
When relocating the machine, remove the toner and/or developer, and pack the machine
e with proper
packing materials for shipping.
When moving the machine, be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet. If the machine is moved with the
power cord attached, it can cause damage to the cord which could result in fire or electric shock.
CAUTION
Operating Safeguards
Do not place a magnet near the safety switch of the machine. A magnet can activate the
machine accidentally, resulting in injuries.
Do not use a highly flammable spray or solvent near the machine. It can cause fire.
When copying a thick document, do not use excessive force to press it against the scanning
glass. The glass may break and cause injuries.
Never touch a labelled area found on or near the heat roller. You can get burnt. If a sheet of
paper is wrapped around the heat roller, do not try to remove it yourself to avoid injuries or
burns. Switch Off the machine immediately, and wait until it cools down.
Do not use conductive paper, e.g. folding paper, carbon paper and coated paper. When a
paper jam occurs, they can cause a short circuit and fire.
Do not place any heavy object on the machine. An off-balance machine can tip-over or the
heavy object can fall, causing damage and/or injuries.
Keep the room ventilated when using the machine for an extended period of time to minimize
the ozone density in the air.
When copying with the document cover open, do not look directly at the exposure lamp.
Direct eye exposure can cause eye fatigue or eye injury.
Pull out paper trays slowly to prevent injuries.
When removing jammed paper, make sure that no pieces of torn paper are left in the machine.
A piece of paper remaining in the machine can cause fire. If a sheet of paper is wrapped
around the heat roller, or when clearing a jammed paper that is difficult or impossible to see,
do not try to remove it by yourself. Doing so can cause injuries or burns. Switch Off the
machine immediately, and wait until it cools down.
Consumable Safeguards
Never heat the drum cartridge, or scratch its surface. A heated or scratched drum can be
hazardous to your health.
Do not mix new and old batteries together, as they can burst or leak, causing a fire or
injuries. Be sure to use the specified type of batteries
.
only.
Ensure that batteries are installed with correct polarity. Incorrectly installed batteries can
burst or leak, resulting in spillage or injuries.
Others
When clearing a paper jam or other fault, follow the appropriate procedure given in this manual.
The machine has a built-in circuit for protection against lightning-induced surge current. If lightning
strikes in your neighborhood, maintain an ample distance from the machine, and do not touch it
until the lightning stops.
If you notice flickering or distorted images or noises on your audio-visual units, your machine may
be causing radio interference. Switch it Off and if the interference disappears, the machine is the
cause of the radio interference. Perform the following procedure until the interference is corrected.
Move the machine and the TV and/or radio away from each other.
Reposition or reorient the machine and the TV and/or radio.
Unplug the machine, TV and/or radio, and replug them into outlets operating on different circuits.
Reorient the TV and/or radio antennas and cables until the interference stops. For an outdoor
antenna, ask your local electrician for support.
Use a coaxial cable antenna.
Table of Contents
Specifications Table................................. 10
1.1.
Copy Function........................................ 10
6.1.
1.2.
6.2.
6.3.
1.3.
System Combination.............................. 27
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.
6.4.
1.7.
6.5.
1.8.
Sensors.................................................. 35
1.9.
1.10. PC Boards.............................................. 36
General Disassembly............................. 37
2.2.
2.3.
7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.
8.5.
8.6.
8.7.
8.8.
8.9.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
3.8.
3.9.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.
4.7.
4.8.
5.1.
5.2.
Table of Contents
8.14. Installing the Fax Communication
Board (DA-FG600)................................323
9.3.
9.4.
9.5.
9.6.
SMTP
(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)............ 446
9.7.
9.8.
9.9.
POP
(Post Office Protocol Version 3) ........... 456
9.2.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1 Specifications Table
1.1.
Copy Function
Items
Basic Specifications
1 Type
2 Platen
3 Original Position
4 Recording Paper Path
5 Face Up / Face Down
6 Drum
7 Copy Process
8 Developing Process
9 Toner Recycle
10 Fusing System
11 Max Original Size
DP-3510/
3520/3530
Description
DP-4510/
4520/4530
Remarks
DP-6010/
6020/6030
Console
Fixed
Left
Center
Face Down
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC)
Dry Electrostatic System
Magnetic Dual Component Development
System
No
Heat & Pressure
Ledger (11 x 17 in) /
A3 (297 x 420 mm)
12 Paper Size
1st Paper Tray
(1,550 Sheet Paper Tray)
Paper Tray
Sheet Bypass
Sheet Bypass Envelope
13 Warm-up Time
Ver. 5.2
LTR
A4
A4
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R
A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4 (FLS)
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R
A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4 (FLS)
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R
No
Less than
Less than
30 sec.
180 sec.
Less than
5.8 sec.
Less than
4.5 sec.
Less than
3.5 sec.
20 cpm
23 cpm
28 cpm
27 cpm
35 cpm
27 cpm
31 cpm
37 cpm
36 cpm
45 cpm
34 cpm
39 cpm
49 cpm
48 cpm
60 cpm
10
1% Step
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Items
17 Maximum Tray Capacities
Paper Tray
Description
DP-3510/
DP-4510/
DP-6010/
3520/3530
4520/4530
6020/6030
Front loading universal Paper Tray
Capacity
Auto Size Setting
Low Level Warning
Sheet Bypass
Capacity
Auto Size Setting
Paper Capacity
(Std. Configuration)
Max. Paper Capacity
18 Acceptable Paper Weight
Paper Tray
Remarks
1,550 sheets x 1
550 sheets x 1
Yes (2nd Tray only)
Empty only
50 sheets
Yes
Other Destinations
A4 : 80 g/m2
2,150 sheets
6,250 sheets
16-24 lb / 60-90 g/m2
15-35 lb / 55-133 g/m2
Sheet Bypass
19 Inverting ADF (i-ADF)
Duplex Type
Original Set
Scanning Method
Option
Yes (Standard)
Yes (Standard)
Face Up
Sheet Through
SADF Mode
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Free Stop
Multi Copy Range
Gradation
Text
Text / Photo
Photo
Resolution
Standard Sorting Memory
Size
Standard Page Memory Size
Exit Tray Capacity
Color
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
Ver. 5.2
Yes
Yes
1-999 sets
2 steps
2 step error diffusion
256 steps
600 dpi
Other Destinations
A4 : 80 g/m2
Available for single side
scanning only.
From 30 to 70 degrees.
32 MB
20 MB
250 sheets
No
23.6 x 29.6 x 29.0 in
(600 x 753 x 736 mm)
23.6 x 29.6 x 35.4 in
(600 x 753 x 900 mm)
11
For Printing.
H: Up to Platen Glass.
H: Up to i-ADF.
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Items
DP-3510/
3520/3530
Description
DP-4510/
4520/4530
DP-6010/
6020/6030
Remarks
28 Occupancy Area
(W x D)
29 Weight
47.2 x 29.6 in
(1,200 x 753 mm)
251 lb
258 lb
258 lb
(114 kg)
(117 kg)
(117 kg)
283 lb
290 lb
290 lb
(128.5 kg)
(131.5 kg)
(131.5 kg)
Options
1 Paper Feed System
550 sheets x1 (3rd)
Paper Feed Module
Paper Size Detection
Low Level Paper Warning
Dimensions
Yes
(W x D x H)
Weight
550 sheets x 2 (3rd/4th)
Paper Feed Module
Paper Size Detection
Low Level Paper Warning
Dimensions
Weight
3000 sheets
Paper Feed Module
Paper Size Detection
Low Level Paper Warning
Dimensions
Weight
2
3
4
5
6
Other Destinations
A4 : 80 g/m2
Other Destinations
A4 : 80 g/m2
<DA-MA301>
LTR / LGL : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
DA-FS355A
DA-FS330
DA-FS600
DA-FS605
Yes
7 Dehumidifier
Ver. 5.2
<DA-DS602>
(W x D x H)
<DA-DS601>
Yes
(W x D x H)
Yes
12
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Items
8 Electronic Sorting Board
Optional Image Memory 1
(16 MB)
Optional Image Memory 2
(64 MB)
Optional Image Memory 3
(128 MB)
Features
1 Automatic Features
Auto Magnification Selection
Auto Paper Selection
Auto Density Control
Auto Paper Tray Selection
Description
DP-3510/
DP-4510/
DP-6010/
3520/3530
4520/4530
6020/6030
Standard (32 MB)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (20W)
Yes (4W)
Auto Off Mode
Yes (3W)
Remote Diagnostic
Ver. 5.2
Yes
Yes
CODEC + 32 MB memory
Yes
Auto Start
Sleep Mode
Remarks
Yes
Yes
Empty only
Yes
Yes
Edit / Effects
Book Mode
Edge Mode
Margin Mode
X-Y Zoom
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page Numbering
Yes
Yes
13
25 - 400%
Available only when using
the ADF.
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Items
Centering Mode
Mirror Mode
Others (Inverting ADF &
ADU)
DP-3510/
3520/3530
Description
DP-4510/
4520/4530
Yes
No
Yes
2 in 1
4 in 1
6 in 1
8 in 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Booklet Mode
Yes
Duplex Copy
12
21
22
Book2
Book Format
Facing Pages
Image Rotation (90 degrees)
Electronic Sorting
Rotation Sorting
Insertion Job
Cover Mode
Page Insertion Mode
OHP Interleave Mode
Presentation Mode
Department Counter
i-ADF
Ver. 5.2
Remarks
LDR LTR x 2
(A3 A4 x 2, B4 B5 x 2)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DP-6010/
6020/6030
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Non-copy / Copy
Yes
300 Departments
Yes
No
Yes (5)
No
Yes (12)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
14
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Items
Electronic Counter
Digital Sky Shot Mode
Check / Slip Mode
3 Control Panel
Display
DP-3510/
3520/3530
Description
DP-4510/
4520/4530
Yes
Yes
Yes
DP-6010/
6020/6030
Remarks
Status Lamp
Yes
Key
Original Size
Copy Size
Keypad
Clear
Stop
Start
Energy Saver
Function
Interrupt
Reset
One-Touch Key
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Mode Change
Yes
GREEN : Scanning /
Printing
RED
: Alarm / Warning
Copier / Printer / NW
Scanner / Fax and Internet
Fax Mode change.
Ver. 5.2
English (American)
Specified Language
Yes
(with Image)
Yes
(with Image)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
15
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Items
Toner Waste Container
Full
Add Paper (No Paper)
Add Paper
(Under 50 Sheets)
Paper Jam Indication
Paper Jam Location
Service Alert Call
User Error
Machine Error
History of Jam Errors
4 Main Unit
Total Counter
Max. Weight of Documents
on the Platen Glass
ADF with Document Guide
Clip Pocket
Operating Instructions
Pocket
Warning / Caution Label
5 Optical System
Original Detection Method
Scanning Method
DP-3510/
3520/3530
Description
DP-4510/
4520/4530
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (Standard)
Yes
Yes
No
Specified Language
Reflective Photo Sensor Type
600 dpi CCD
Ver. 5.2
No
Separate OPC Unit and
Developer Unit Type
24K
35K
240K
240K
240K
Dehumidifier
Yes
Yes
Efficiency
1 Productivity
Warm-Up Time from
Standby
ADF Productivity (LTR / A4)
Inverting ADF
Yes
Toner
Developer Life
Drum Life
Toner Waste Container
Mechanical Counter
11 lb (5 kg)
Dehumidifier
Type
Remarks
DP-6010/
6020/6030
Approx.
30 sec.
Approx.
180 sec.
100%
16
LTR / A4
68 F (20 C)
Throughput
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Items
ADU Copy Productivity
(LTR / A4)
Transport Method
12
1 copy
5 copies
10 copies
PM Cycle
1 PM Cycle
Major PM
Minor PM (Cleaning)
Packing Configuration
1 Packing Dimension
(W x D x H)
2 Packing Weight
3 Accessories
OPC Unit
Developer
Toner
Toner Waste Container
DP-3510/
3520/3530
Description
DP-4510/
4520/4530
Stackless
45%
75%
90%
120K
-
120K
-
3 Safety
4 Energy Saver
5 EMI
6 Lead Free Solder (PbF)
Ver. 5.2
Throughput
240K
120K
Operating Instructions
Power Supply
2 Power Consumption
Ambient Conditions
1 Temperature
2 Relative Humidity
Remarks
When ejecting to Outer
Tray
Outer Tray
1 Power Requirement
DP-6010/
6020/6030
Yes
99 - 138 VAC, 47 - 63 Hz
Single phase
180 - 264 VAC, 47 - 63 Hz
Single phase
Less than 1500 W
50 - 80 F (10 - 30 C)
30 - 80%
UL1950 / CSA C22.2 No.950
EN60950
17
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1.2.
1.2.1.
Fax Function
Items
Main Specifications
1 Compatibility
2 PSTN Line Port
3 Leased Line Port
4 V.24 Line Port
5 Modem Speed
6 Coding Scheme
7 ECM
8 Short Protocol
9 Transmission Speed
10
Communication Resolution
(pels/mm x lines/mm)
Scanner Mechanism
1 Scanning Device
2 Scanning Speed
Resolution
Std:
8 x 3.85
(pels/mm x lines/mm)
Fine:
8 x 7.7
(pels/mm x lines/mm)
S-Fine:
16 x 15.4
(pels/mm x lines/mm)
600dpi:
600 x 600
Scanning Resolution
(pel/mm x lines/mm)
4
5
6
7
Ver. 5.2
DP-3510/
3520/3530
Description
DP-4510/
4520/4530
DP-6010/
6020/6030
G3
Yes
No
No
33.6 - 2.4 kbps
JBIG / MMR / MR / MH
Yes
Yes (B, D)
Approx. 3 sec.
Remarks
Conforms to ITU-T
ITU-T Image No. 1
(A4, Std. Resolution)
Transmission
Std.
8 x 3.85
Fine
8 x 7.7
S-Fine
8 x 15.4
16 x 15.4
600dpi
600 x 600 dpi
Reception
Std.
8 x 3.85
Fine
8 x 7.7
S-Fine
8 x 15.4
16 x 15.4
600dpi
600 x 600 dpi
CCD (i-ADF / Platen)
Vertical
Horizontal
1.0 sec.
0.7 sec.
1.0 sec.
0.7 sec.
2.0 sec.
1.4 sec.
1.4 sec.
8 x 3.85
8 x 7.7
8 x 15.4
16 x 15.4
600dpi
600 x 600 dpi
ADF: Ledger / A3
LDR (11.5 in) / A3 (292 mm)
Yes
Yes
2.0 sec.
Std.
Fine
S-Fine
18
Conforms to ITU-T A3
A3 to B4 / A3 to A4 / B4 to A4
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Items
8 ADF Capacity
9 Collation Stack
Printer Mechanism
1 Recording Method
2 Recording Speed
3 Recording Resolution Fax
DP-3510/
3520/3530
Description
DP-4510/
4520/4530
70 sheets
Yes
DP-6010/
6020/6030
Remarks
Face-Up, feed from top page
Face Down
LP
35 ppm
45 ppm
60 ppm
(A4
(A4
(A4
Horizontal) Horizontal) Horizontal)
600 x 600 dpi
406 x 391 dpi
Ver. 5.2
19
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Items
Max. Station Name
Characters
Direct Dialing
8
(Monitor Dialing)
9 Automatic Redialing
10 Manual Redialing
11 Line Monitor Speaker
12 Chain Dialing (Hybrid Dial)
13 Pulse / Tone Dialing
14 Pulse to Tone Change
15 Flash Key
16 Handset
Transmission Features
1 Direct Transmission
2 Memory Transmission
Quick Memory
3
Transmission
Multi-Station Transmission
4
(Sequential Broadcasting)
Direct Deferred
5
Transmission
6 Deferred Transmission
Deferred Multi-Station
7
Transmission
Priority Direct
8
Transmission
Priority Memory
9
Transmission
10 Batch Transmission
90 Degree Rotation
11
Transmission
12 Cover Sheet
13 Confidential Mail Box
14 Multi-Copy Transmission
7
15 Memory Back-Up
16 Duplex Scanning
Reception Features
1 Substitute Reception
DP-3510/
3520/3530
Description
DP-4510/
4520/4530
Remarks
15
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Voice mode
Page Retransmission
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Max. 50 Timers
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
20 Mailboxes
FAX : Back-up with Flash
Memory.
Copy / Printer : No Back-up
with D-RAM
With Inverting ADF (i-ADF)
Yes
2 Fixed Reduction
Yes
3 Auto Reduction
Yes
Ver. 5.2
DP-6010/
6020/6030
20
LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100%
(in 1% Steps),
Top & Left Alignment
LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100%
(in 1% Steps),
Top & Left Alignment
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Items
4 Overlap Printing
5 Receive to Memory
Distinctive Ring Detector
6
(DRD)
90 Degree Rotation
7
Reception
8 Duplex Printing
Polling
1 Polling
2 Turnaround Polling
3 Multi-Station Polling
4 Deferred Polling
Deferred Multi-Station
5
Polling
6 Direct Polling Tx
7 Memory Polling Tx
8 Preset Polling Password
Temporary Polling
9
Password
10 Continuous Polling
Convenience
1 Panel Display
2 Voice Contact
3 Edit File Mode
4 Incomplete File Save
5 Automatic Cover Sheet
Certainty
1 Verification Stamp
2 Header / Total Page Print
3 Transaction Journal
4 Comm. Journal
5 Last Ind. XMT Journal
List Printouts
1 One-Touch List
2 ABBR. No. List
3 Program List
4 Address Book Search List
5 Fax Parameter List
6 File List
7 Ind. XMT Journal
8 Journal
Ver. 5.2
DP-3510/
3520/3530
Description
DP-4510/
4520/4530
Remarks
DP-6010/
6020/6030
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
1 File
Yes
Yes
Wide Touch Panel Display
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
21
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Items
Identifications
1 Logo
2 Multiple Logo
3 Character ID
4 Numeric ID
Special Communications
1 Password XMT / RCV
2 Selective Reception
3 Relay XMT Request
4 Relay XMT Center
5 Confidential XMT / Polling
6 Confidential Center
7 Mailbox XMT / Polling
8 Mailbox Center
9 File XMT
10 Fax Forward
11 Sub-address XMT
12 Sub-address RCV
13 OMR-XMT
Standards
1 PSTN
Others
1 Fax Access Code
2 PIN Code Access
3 Intelligent Redial (AI)
4 Department Code
5 Power Saver Mode
6 Self Diagnostic Function
Remote Diagnostic
7
Function
8 Check & Call Function
9 V.24 / Encryption Interface
Ver. 5.2
DP-3510/
3520/3530
Description
DP-4510/
4520/4530
DP-6010/
6020/6030
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Remarks
25 Characters
16 Characters
20 Digits
TSI Check
Yes
Yes
No
22
JAN 2006
1.2.2.
Printer Function
Items
Interface
1 Centronics Parallel I/F
2 LAN (Network)
3 USB Port
4 IEEE-1394
Printer Function
1 Printing Size
2
3
4
5
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Bypass
Stapling
Printing Resolution (dpi)
Interface
6 OS
7 GDI
8 PDL (PCL6)
9 PDL (PS3)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Duplex Printing
Collation Stack
Status Monitor (Local)
Network Printing
Network Status Monitor
Smoothing
Applicable PC
Multi-Task Operation
Printing while Fax-XMT
from Memory
Printing while Fax-RCV into
Memory
Fax-XMT from Memory
while Printing
Fax-RCV into Memory while
Printing
Output to separate tray for
18
Printing, Fax, Copy
Description
DP-3510/
DP-4510/
DP-6010/
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
Centronics Parallel Interface
Ethernet 10Base-T/
100Base-TX
No
No
IEEE-1284 Compliant
19 Font
Yes
20 Security Print
Yes
Ver. 5.2
Remarks
23
JAN 2006
1.2.3.
Items
Interface
1 Centronics Parallel I/F
2 LAN (Network)
3 USB Port
4 IEEE-1394
Network Scanning Function
1 Scanning Device
2 Halftone
3 Max. Document Size
4
Scanning Resolution
(dpi)
5 OS
6 2-Sided Scanning
7 File Format
8 Completion Notice
9 Protocol
Ver. 5.2
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
DP-3510/
3520/3530
Description
DP-4510/
4520/4530
No
Ethernet 10Base-T/
100Base-TX
No
No
CCD (i-ADF / Platen)
256 Halftone Shades
A3, Ledger
600 x 600
300 x 300
150 x 150
Win 98 / Me /
Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 / XP
Yes
Mult-page TIFF / PDF
Yes
Remarks
DP-6010/
6020/6030
IEEE-1284 Compliant
Firewire
With i-ADF.
PDF format is available for
DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/
6020/6030 only.
Auto Pop-up on the PC
Screen
(requires Network Status
Monitor - installed with PDMS
Software)
TCP/IP, Non-Std
24
JAN 2006
1.2.4.
Items
Main Specifications
Communication
1
Protocols
2 Max. Modem Speed
3 Coding Scheme
4 File Format
5 Line Interface
Scanner Mechanism
1 Max. Document Size
2 Effective Scanning Width
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Scanning Resolution
(pel/mm x lines/mm)
Printer Mechanism
1 Printing Resolution
Effective Recording
2
Width
Transmission Features
Description
DP-3510/ DP-4510/ DP-6010/
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
TCP / IP
TIFF / PDF
RJ-45 (Ethernet)
Ledger, A3
11.4 in (289 mm)
Std
203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
Fine 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7)
S-Fine 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4)
406 x 391 (16 x 15.4)
600dpi 600 x 600 dpi
2 Memory Transmission
Sequential Multi-Station
3
Transmission
Yes
Yes
5 Sender Selection
G3 / Email Mixed
6
Broadcasting
7 Deferred Transmission
Yes
8 Fax Forward
Yes
9 Sub-address RCV
Yes
Ver. 5.2
600 dpi
Yes
SMTP / MIME
NA
MH / MMR / JBIG
1 Multi-Task Operation
Remarks
Yes
Yes
Received File Transfer, only with
Internet FAX Option
Inbound Routing, only with Internet
FAX Option
25
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Items
10 Mail Header
Email Header Print
Selection
Subject Line
LAN Features
Internet Fax
1
Communication
2 Internet Mail Reception
Internet
Fax
Server
3
Features
Internet Fax Relay XMT
Email Relay MXT
Received Fax / Email
Forward
PC to FAX Transmission
Inbound Routing
4
5
6
7
Address Book
Registration from PC
I-Fax Parameters
Registration via Email
Internet Delivery
Confirmation
Network Scanning
Network Printing
LPR / LPD
GDI
PDL
8 DHCP Client
9 LDAP
10 TIFF Viewer
Certainty
Comm. Journal
1
(w / Image)
ID
1 Email Address
Ver. 5.2
Description
DP-3510/ DP-4510/ DP-6010/
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
Yes
Remarks
Random Entry
A3 Communication is available with
Parameter setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Via Email
Yes
Yes
With MDN
Yes
600 dpi
Yes
Yes
600 dpi
Requires Optional PCL6 or PS
Emulation Kit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
26
JAN 2006
1.3.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
System Combination
Document Sensor
and Motor
Scanner Unit
Panel
(PNL PC Board)
Main PC Board
(SC PC Board)
PCL6
Emulation Option
Fax Communication
Option
PS/PCL6
Emulation Option
Network
Scanner Option
KEY Counter
Harness Option
Dehumidifier
Heater Option
Expansion Flash
Memory Card
4 or 8MB
Automatic
Duplex Unit
MJR
Printer
Parallel Port
Interface
10/100 Ethernet
Interface
Image Memory
16, 64, 128MB
Either Option
SPC PC Board
DRV PC Board
1,550 Sheet
Paper Tray
2-Bin
Saddle-Stitch
Finisher
3000 Sheet
Paper
Tray
2-Bin Finisher
1-Bin
Saddle-Stitch
Finisher
or
Exit Tray (Outer)
550 Sheet x 1 Paper Tray
Standard Configuration
Option
Ver. 5.2
27
JAN 2006
1.4.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Q Options
Option Name
Printer Controller Module for PCL6
Multi Page Description Language
Controller Module for PS/PCL6
Printer Controller Module for PCL6-IPX/
SPX
Multi Page Description Language
Controller Module for PS/PCL6-IPX/SPX
Printer Controller Module for PCL6-IPX/
SPX
Multi Page Description Language
Controller Module for PS/PCL6-IPX/SPX
Printer Controller Module for GDI-IPX/SPX
Document Distribution System
Network Scanner Module
Internet Fax / E-Mail Module
Fax Communication Board
Hard Disk Drive Unit
Expansion Board
Image Memory (16 MB)
Image Memory (64 MB)
Image Memory (128 MB)
Expansion Flash Memory Card, 4 MB
Expansion Flash Memory Card, 8 MB
DD Server Software
Accounting Software
Stand
Stand (Short)
System Console 1 (Tray x 1)
System Console 2 (Tray x 2)
System Console 1 (Tray x 1)
System Console 2 (Tray x 2)
3000-Sheet Tray (LCT)
Letter-R / Legal Size Adapter
for LCT (DA-MA301)
Exit Tray (Outer)
2-Bin Finisher
2-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher
Punch Unit for DA-FS600/605
1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher
Punch Unit for DA-FS355A
2-Bin Finisher
Option Number
DA-PC600
DA-MC600
DA-PC601
DA-MC601
DA-PC602
For DP-3530 / 4530 / 6030
DA-MC602
DA-GC601
DA-WR10
DA-NS600
DA-NF600
DA-FG600
DA-HD60
DA-EM600
DA-SM16B
DA-SM64B
DA-SM28B
UE-410047
UE-410048
DA-WS20
DA-WA10
DA-D351
DA-D352
DA-DS601
DA-DS602
DA-DS603
DA-DS604
DA-MA301
DA-TK31
DA-XT600
DA-FS600
DA-FS605
DA-SP31
DA-FS355A
DA-SP41
DA-FS330
DA-PW600
DZTY000128
DZTQ000041
Ver. 5.2
Remark
28
For DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030
For Network Scanning
Internet Fax / Email Communication
G3 Fax Communication
F-ROM Board (8 MB)
For Electronic Sorting
Additional Page Memory for Fax
Communication Board (DA-FG600)
For DD Server Function
For Accounting Function
For USA and Canada only
For DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020
For DP-3530 / 4530 / 6030
3,000-Sheet Large Capacity Tray
For USA and Canada
For DP-4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
PCL6 is a Page Description Language of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
PS/PS3 is a Page Description Language of the Adobe Systems Company.
Q Supplies
Part Name
Toner
Part Number
DQ-TU24D
DQ-TU35D
DQ-TU241G
DQ-TU351G
FQ-SS32
DQ-SS35
Staple Cartridge
FQ-SS50
FQ-SS66
OPC Drum
Developer
Remarks
24K for DP-3510/4510
35K for DP-6010
24K for DP-3520/3530/4520/4530
35K for DP-6020/6030
Staple Cartridge Refills (3) for DA-FS330
Staple Cartridge Refills (3) for DA-FS355/
355A
Staple Cartridge Refills (3)
for DA-FS605 (Saddle Stitch)
Staple Cartridge Refills (3)
for DA-FS600 / 605
DQ-H240D
DQ-Z241D
Note:
The Part Number(s) may differ for other than USA and Canada destinations. Please ask your sales
company for details.
Ver. 5.2
29
JAN 2006
1.5.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
External View
1. Standard Configuration
Top View
12.7 in
(322 mm)
Left View
10.4 in
(265 mm)
Front View
Right View
Rear View
CAUTION
10.6 in
(269 mm)
Ver. 5.2
30
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3.9 in
(100 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm)
23.6"(600 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
12.7 in
(322 mm)
54.6 in
(1387 mm)
Copier + Finisher
3.9 in (100 mm)
11.8 in
(300 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm)
10.4 in (265 mm)
83.3 in
(2115 mm)
11.8 in
(300 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
19.9 in (505 mm)
95.3 in
(2420 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
19.9 in (505 mm)
101.2 in
(2570 mm)
Ver. 5.2
31
JAN 2006
1.5.1.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
10
11
Production Facility
Production Year
Starting with Year 2001, the last 2-digits of the year is
represented as: A ~ T
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
01 (2001)
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10 (2010)
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
11 (2011)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 (2020)
G
H
I
J
K
L
:
:
:
:
:
:
July
August
September
October
November
December
Production Month
A
B
C
D
E
F
Ver. 5.2
32
:
:
:
:
:
:
January
February
March
April
May
June
JAN 2006
1.6.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Control Panel
DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020
DP-3530/4530/6030
DP-6030
PRINT DATA
Ver. 5.2
STATUS
33
ACTIVE
JAN 2006
1.7.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Scanning Motor
Cooling Fan3
Cooling Fan2
Cooling Fan1
Hopper Motor
Main Motor
Inverting Motor
Drum Motor
Suction Fan
Cooling Fan
Lift Motor (Tray 1)
Lift Motor (Tray 2)
Drive Motor
Lift Motor
(Tray 3)
Lift Motor
(Tray 4)
Ver. 5.2
34
JAN 2006
1.8.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Sensors
ADF Original
Width Sensor1
ADF Original
Width Sensor2
Paper Remaining
Sensor (Tray 1)
NP Sensor
(Tray 3)
Paper Remaining
Sensor (Tray 2)
NP Sensor
(Tray 4)
Paper Path Sensor
(Tray 4)
Release Cover Open Sensor
Ver. 5.2
35
JAN 2006
1.9.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Interlock Switch
Power Switch
Front Door Switch
1.10. PC Boards
Inverter PCB
ADF PCB
CCD PCB
Inverter PCB
MJR PCB
PNL2 PCB
DCB PCB
PNL1 PCB
PNL2 PCB
Centronics I/F
SC PCB
FXB PCB
DRV PCB
LED PCB
(DP-45xx/60xx only)
LVPS
ACD PCB
NFL PCB
SPC PCB
LVPS for Finisher
RLB PCB
APF PCB
Ver. 5.2
36
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2 Disassembly Instructions
2.1.
General Disassembly
Pertinent Disassembly Instruction sections are shown below.
Scanner Unit
2.2.4.
i-ADF
2.2.3.
LSU
2.2.12.
Drive Unit
2.2.17.
Fuser Unit
2.2.11.
ADU
2.2.9.
Hopper Unit
2.2.6.
Developer Unit
2.2.7.
System Console
2.2.18.
Filters
2.2.1.
Ver. 5.2
37
PC Boards
2.2.16.
JAN 2006
2.2.
2.2.1.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Disassembly Instructions
Filters
Ver. 5.2
38
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
39
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
40
JAN 2006
2.2.2.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
41
JAN 2006
2.2.3.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
42
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
43
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
When reinstalling, make sure that the Snap Ring is
installed properly as illustrated.
Ver. 5.2
44
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
Release 3 Latch Hooks to remove the ADF Front
Cover.
Ver. 5.2
45
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
When reinstalling the ADF Cover Assembly, make
sure that the Vibration Guide Sheet 1 and 2 are
reinstalled properly as illustrated.
Ver. 5.2
46
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
47
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
When reinstalling the Registration Guide Sheet 1
and 2, make sure that the Sheets are placed on
the marks as illustrated.
Mark
Adhesive Double
Coated Tape
Ver. 5.2
Registration
Guide Sheet
48
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
49
JAN 2006
2.2.4.
2.2.4.1.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Scanner Unit
Scanner Lamp, CCD Assembly
Ver. 5.2
50
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
Ensure that the Scanning Lamp Harness is
reinstalled properly as illustrated.
Ver. 5.2
51
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Important:
Before proceeding, make a note of the position of
the alignment pointer. If the CCD is not reinstalled
at the same position, it will affect the copy quality.
Ver. 5.2
52
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
53
JAN 2006
2.2.4.2.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Scanning Motor
Ver. 5.2
54
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
55
JAN 2006
2.2.5.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
56
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
57
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
58
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
59
JAN 2006
2.2.6.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Hopper Unit
Ver. 5.2
60
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
61
JAN 2006
2.2.7.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Developer Unit
Note:
When attaching the new Sheet, make sure that it is
aligned on the left side edge as illustrated.
Ver. 5.2
62
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
63
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Caution:
Clean the Developer and Toner residue from the
encircled areas thoroughly as shown in the
illustrations.
If not properly cleaned, problems related to static
charge may occur.
If E3-13 occurs, clean contamination on the Bias
Terminal.
Ver. 5.2
64
JAN 2006
2.2.8.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Drum Unit
Note:
When handling the Drum Unit, hold by the Handle
as illustrated.
Caution:
Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the
OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare
hands.
Caution:
The OPC Drum is sensitive to light. To prevent
optical exposure problems, do not expose the
OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light (even if
it is a 1000-Lux fluorescent lamp).
Ver. 5.2
65
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Caution:
The OPC Drum is sensitive to light. To prevent
optical exposure problems, do not expose the
OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light (even if
it is a 1000-Lux fluorescent lamp).
(7) Cover the Drum with 2 sheets of white paper as
illustrated.
Ver. 5.2
66
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
67
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
68
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
When reinstalling the Cleaning Blade Assembly,
make sure that the Hooks are properly attached.
Ver. 5.2
69
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
70
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
71
JAN 2006
2.2.9.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
72
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
73
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
74
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
75
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
76
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
77
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
78
JAN 2006
2.2.11.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fuser Unit
Ver. 5.2
79
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
80
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
81
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
<For DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030>
Follow steps (27) ~ (32) below.
[For DP-3510/4510/6010, skip to steps (33) ~ (36)]
(27) Remove 2 Snap Rings (H6).
(28) Remove the Upper Paper Exit Guide (2223).
<For DP-3510/4510/6010>
Follow steps (33) ~ (36) below.
(33) Remove 2 Screws (25).
(34) Remove the Upper Paper Exit Guide (2223).
Ver. 5.2
82
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
83
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
84
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
85
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
86
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.12. LSU
Important:
Before proceeding, make a note of the position of
the alignment pointer. If the LSU is not reinstalled
at the same position, it will affect the scanning
quality.
Ver. 5.2
87
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
88
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
89
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
90
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
When reinstalling, make sure that the Latches and
the Notches are aligned as illustrated.
Note:
When reinstalling, make sure that the Gears are
aligned and that the Snap Ring is reinstalled
properly as illustrated.
Ver. 5.2
91
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
92
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
93
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
94
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
95
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.16. PC Boards
Ver. 5.2
96
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
97
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
98
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
99
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
100
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
101
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
102
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
103
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
104
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
105
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
106
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
107
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
108
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
109
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
110
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
111
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
112
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
113
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
114
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
115
JAN 2006
2.3.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ref. No.
16
19
20
21
23
24
25
35
36
51
6A
6L
1M
3F
3P
Ver. 5.2
Part No.
Figure
Remark
XYN3+J8FJ
Screw
XYN3+J8
XTB3+8JFJ
Screw
XTB3+8J
XTB3+8FFJ
Screw
XTB3+8F
XTB3+6FFJ
Screw
XTB3+6F
XYN3+F8FJ
Screw
XYN3+F8
XYN4+F8FJ
Screw
XYN4+F8
XTB4+8FFJ
Screw
XTB4+8F
XYN4+F6FJ
Screw
XYN4+F6
XYN3+F6FJ
Screw
XYN3+F6
XTB4+10FFJ
Screw
XTB4+10F
XTB3+12GFJ
Screw
XTB3+12G
XTW3+8SFJ
Screw
DZPB000014
XTB4+6FFJ
Screw
XTB4+6F
XYN3+F5FJ
Screw
XYN3+F5
XTW+6SFJ
Screw
DZPB000028
116
JAN 2006
Ref. No.
Figure
Remark
XYN3+F4FJ
Screw
XYN3+F4
XYC3+FF8FJ
Screw
DZPB000006
XTW3+8SFJ-TP
Screw
XTW3+8SFC
XYC3+FG10FJ
Screw
XTN3+10G
XTB3+8GFJ
Screw
XTB3+8G
FFPFJ0039B
Snap Ring
XYA3+EF6FJ
Screw
XYA3+EF6
XTB26+8JFJ
Screw
XTB26+8J
H5
XTB4+10GFN
Silver Screw
H6
FFPFJ0033B
Snap Ring
H7
FFPFJ0041B
Snap Ring
FFPFA01632
Shoulder Screw
FFPFA01631
XTT4+8HFN
Silver Screw
XTB4+10GFJ
Screw
XTB4+10G
XTB4+8HFJ
Screw
XTB4+8H
5M
B2
C8
F9
F10
G6
G7
H4
H9
J2
J3
J4
Ver. 5.2
Part No.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
117
JAN 2006
Ref. No.
Part No.
Figure
Remark
XTB3+10GFJ
Screw
XTB3+10G
J6
XUC3VM
E-Ring
J7
XUC4VM
E-Ring
J8
XUC7VM
E-Ring
XTB3+6GFJ
Screw
XTB3+6G
FFPFA01071
FFPFA0107B
XSN3+W8FJ-TP
Screw
XSN3+W8FC
XTW3+12QFJ
Screw
J5
J9
K1
K2
K3
XTW3+12Q
XYN4+F16FJ
Screw
XYN4+F16
K5
XUC5VM
E-Ring
K6
XUC6VM
E-Ring
FFPFA01761
Shoulder Screw
FFPFA0176
FFPFA01771
Shoulder Screw
FFPFA0177
FFPFJ0043B
Snap Ring
XYN4+F12FJ
Screw
XYN4+F12
K4
K7
K8
K9
L1
Ver. 5.2
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
118
JAN 2006
Ref. No.
Part No.
L2
XUC9VM
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
Remark
E-Ring
XYN26+F6FJ
Screw
XYN26+F6
XTN4+34GFJ
Screw
XTN4+34G
FFPFA01461
Screw
FFPFA0146
XYC3+FG8FJ
Screw
XYC3+FG8
E-Ring
XUC2VM
XTB3+4FFJ
Screw
XTB3+4F
NS010416
Screw
XYA3+FF6FJ
Screw
XYA3+FF6
XTW4+12LFJ
Screw
XTW4+12L
XTW3+8GFJ
Screw
XTW3+8G
M8
XTB26+6H
Screw
M9
XTB3+8GFN
Silver Screw
XSB2+6FJ
Screw
XSB2+6
XTB4+6HFJ
Screw
XTB4+6H
L9
M4
M5
M6
M7
N1
N2
Ver. 5.2
Figure
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
119
JAN 2006
Ref. No.
Figure
Remark
XTB4+10FFJ
Screw
XTB4+10F
XTN3+12FFJB
Blue Screw
XTN3+12FFUBC
XTN5+10FFJ
Screw
XTN5+10F
FFPFA01611
Shoulder Screw
FFPFA0161
FFPFA01591
Screw
FFPFA0159
FFPFA01471
Screw
FFPFA0147
FFPFA00861
Shoulder Screw
FFPFA0086B
XTB3+6FFJ-RP
Screw
B3X6TTS-RP
XTB3+12FFJ
Screw
XTB3+12F
XTW3+8LFJ
Screw
XTW3+8L
P4
PF2217P319A
Screw
P5
XTN3+8G
Screw
XSN2+5FJ
Screw
XSN2+5
FFPFA0152
Screw
XTW3+8PFJ
Screw
XTW3+8P
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
N9
P1
P2
P3
P6
P7
P8
Ver. 5.2
Part No.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
120
JAN 2006
Ref. No.
Figure
Remark
XTW4+10PFJ
Screw
XTW4+10P
XYA4+FF10
Screw
XSB3+12FJ
Screw
XSB3+12
XSB26+4FJ
Screw
XSB2.6+4
Q4
FFPFA0068B
Shoulder Screw
Q5
XTT4+8HFN
Screw
DZPA000098
Shoulder Screw
DZPA000076
XTW3+8F
Screw
XTB4+7FFJ-RP
Screw
B4X7TTS-RP
R8
XYN4+C6BN
Screw
S6
DZPA000086
Y18
XTB3+4GFN
P9
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q6
Q7
R1
Ver. 5.2
Part No.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Silver Screw
Screw
121
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Preventive Maintenance
Preventive maintenance is performed at specific intervals and consists of machine
cleaning and parts replacement.
It is essential to perform these service activities properly and at the specified intervals
for customer satisfaction.
The purpose of this service is to maintain machine performance and image quality.
- You should prepare the necessary PM kits, replacement parts, and tools for
cleaning beforehand.
- After completing the preventive maintenance service, you should discard the
used parts and packaging, in accordance with local regulations and clean
the surrounding area.
- Before servicing the equipment disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.
- Before using solvents such as IPA (Isopropyl alcohol), put on rubber gloves
and eye protection.
1
Timing
- Perform the preventive maintenance service in accordance with the chart of
preventive maintenance areas listed in the service manual.
Cleaning of Rollers
- Rollers should be cleaned with water and cloth.
- Use of IPA (Isopropyl alcohol) should be used sparingly.
sensor.
- When handling the drum, the precautions listed in section 3.3.
should be followed.
- Make sure to use the correct screw sizes.
- Use toothed lock washers for the installation of ground wires to ensure electrical
continuity.
- To re-assemble, reverse the sequence of disassembly, unless otherwise specified.
- Blown fuses should only be replaced with fuses of the same specified rating.
Ver. 5.2
122
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
123
JAN 2006
3.2.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Required Tools
No.
Tools
1 Soft Cloth
2 Isopropyl Alcohol
3 Phillips Screwdriver (#2)
4
Tweezer
3.2.1.
No.
Important
Action
Check
Memory Data
2
3
Auto Document
Feeder (ADF)
Scanner Unit
Transmitter Unit
Mirrors
Inspection Items
Ver. 5.2
No.
Tools
7 Pliers
8 Cotton Swab
9 Brush
KS-660 - Conductive Grease
10 (Available from Shin-Etsu Silicones of America, Inc.
URL: http://www.shinetsusilicones.com)
Molykote EM-50L Grease
11 (Available from Dow Corning,
URL: http://www.dowcorning.com)
Check &
Clean
Check &
Clean
Check &
Clean
Check &
Clean
Check
Comments
1. Print the RAM DATA for reference and as a pre-caution.
2. After completing the task(s), print and compare the RAM
DATA with the previously printed one.
1. Clean the Rollers and Separation Rubber with Isopropyl
Alcohol when required.
1. Clean the Scanning Glass or White Seal Guide with
Isopropyl Alcohol when required.
1. Remove any foreign obstacles.
2. Clean the Rollers with Isopropyl Alcohol when required.
1. Do not touch the surface of the Mirrors with your hands.
Clean any dirt or fingerprints with a soft cloth, saturated with
Isopropyl Alcohol.
1. Check the Harnesses.
2. Check the Connectors.
3. Check the Screws. If required, replace consumable parts.
1. Check and grease the required Gears and Shafts.
1. Check the belts for looseness or abrasion.
2. Adjust the Idle Pulley.
124
JAN 2006
3.3.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11 12
23
22
8
16
18
10
24
19
21 20
54
56
28 27 26
17
55
57
A
49
43
48
46 45
53
52
50
58
51
61
47
44
25
59
60
53
50
52
51
53
50
52
51
53
52 51
Ver. 5.2
125
50
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
33
34
37
31
38
32
36
29
35
30
39
40 41 42
DETAIL A
13
14
15
DETAIL B
Ver. 5.2
126
JAN 2006
3.4.
No.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Mechanical Parts
Ref. No.
Cleaning
Cycle
Method
(Sheet)
Replacement/Adjustment
Cycle
Procedure
(Sheet)
Main Unit
Ozone Filter 1
Ozone Filter 2
Ozone Filter 4
Dust Filter
i-ADF Unit
Pickup Roller
508
120K
Water 1
240K
Separation Roller
610
120K
Water 1
240K
Registration Roller 1
817
120K
Water 1
Registration Roller 2
818
120K
Water 1
10 Transport Roller
816
120K
Water 1
11 Inverting Roller
809
120K
Water 1
12 Exit Roller
814
120K
Water 1
Hopper Unit
13 Toner Bottle Holder
1402
480K
Water 1
1407
480K
Water 1
1411
480K
Water 1
Developer Unit
- Developer
16 Splash Prevention
Sheet
17 Duct Cover
1602
240K *4
1620
240K
Water 1
1811
1847
1849
1848
240K *4
240K
240K
240K
1
2
3
4
18
19
20
21
22
23
Drum Unit
OPC Drum
Cleaning Blade
Front Cleaning Felt
Rear Cleaning Felt
Corona Wire
(DP-3510/3520/
3530/4510/4520/
4530)
Corona Wire
(DP-6010/6020/
6030)
Corona Case
4204
107
4226
4218
240K
240K
240K
240K
511
120K
Water 1
240K
720K
1915
240K
240K
Water 1
480K
24 Corona Grid
1919
240K
480K
Toner Waste
Container
Density Sensor
26
(CDS PC Board)
4108
Water 1
-
1846
240K
Dry Cloth
Ver. 5.2
Refer to
Sect 2.2.1.
F7-02
Total Count
Refer to
Sect 2.2.3.
F7-02
ADF PM
Count
Refer to
Sect 2.2.6.
F7-02
Total Count
Refer to
Sect 2.2.7.
F7-02
Process
Unit Count
Refer to
Sect 2.2.8.
F7-02
OPC Drum
Count
120K
1906
25
Ref.
Counter
127
240K *4
-
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Mechanical Parts
No.
Ref. No.
Cleaning
Cycle
Method
(Sheet)
-
Replacement/Adjustment
Ref.
Cycle
Counter
Procedure
(Sheet)
480K
F7-02
Refer to
OPC Drum
Sect 2.2.8.
480K
Count
1825
28 Separator
1826
Fuser Unit
29 Upper Separator
2227
240K
Water 1
480K
30 Lower Separator
2228
240K
480K
Water 1
-
480K
240K
240K *5
1,200K
240K
720K
480K
240K
1,200K
Refer to
Sect 2.2.11.
F7-02
Fuser Web
Count
480K
Refer to
Sect 2.2.11.
F7-02
Fuser Web
Count
480K
480K
120K
Water 1
120K
Water 1
120K
Water
1
1
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Thermistor Assembly
2019
Fuser Lamp
2027, 2028
Cleaning Web
2003
Cleaning Web Roller
2007
Fuser Roller
2105
Fuser Roller Bearing
2107
Fuser Roller Gear
2108
Insulation Bushing
2106
Lower Front Guide
2113
Pressure Roller
Assembly
(DP-4510/4520/
2205
4530/6010/6020/
6030)
Pressure Roller
(DP-3510/3520/
2232
3530)
Pressure Roller
Bearing (DP-3510/
2233
3520/3530)
Automatic Duplex Unit
Intermediate Roller
2403
44 Exit Roller
45 Registration Roller
46 Registration Roller
Bearing
47 Transfer Frame
2520, 2521,
2522
2430
1,200K
2331, 2603
120K
Water
2310
240K
Water 1
480K
48 Corona Wire 1
2335
120K
Water 1
240K
49 Corona Wire 2
2334
120K
Water 1
240K
3204
120K
Water 1
240K
51 Reverse Roller
3219
120K
Water 1
240K
52 Pickup Roller
3211
120K
Water 1
240K
3005, 3010
120K
Water 1
1,200K
53 Intermediate Roller
Ver. 5.2
128
Refer to
Sect 2.2.9.
1,200K
F7-03
2-Sided
Count
Refer to
Sect 2.2.10.
Refer to
Sect 2.2.13.
F7-03
1st/2nd/
3rd/4th
Paper Tray
Count
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Mechanical Parts
No.
Sheet Bypass
54 Paper Feed Roller
Ref. No.
4608
Cleaning
Cycle
Method
(Sheet)
120K
Water 1
Replacement/Adjustment
Cycle
Procedure
(Sheet)
240K
4612
120K
Water 1
240K
4603, 4611
120K
Water 1
240K
120K
Water 1
58 Exit Roller 3
120K
Water 1
120K
Water 1
240K
60 Feed Roller
9129
120K
Water 1
240K
61 Pickup Roller
9107
120K
Water 1
240K
55 Feed Roller
56 Pickup Roller
8312
Ref.
Counter
Refer to
Sect 2.2.14.
F7-03
Sheet
Bypass
Count
Refer to
Sect 2.2.15.
F7-02
Total Count
Refer to
Sect 2.2.19.
F7-03
LCT Tray
Count
Note:
1. Clean all Rollers and Separation Rubber with a soft cloth saturated with water.
For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then
follow up with a soft cloth saturated with water.
2. The Maintenance Cycle is based on the Counter Information for each individual module.
To verify the counter information, print the Total Counter List using the Service Mode: F7 - Electronic
counter - 00 (List print).
3. Cleaning, Replacement and Adjustment Cycle (Sheet) are based on using Panasonic's recommended
standard paper and supplies. These cycles may vary with the kind of paper used and/or ambient
conditions.
4. The value is determined under the following test conditions. Four continuous prints per job using 6%
image coverage of LT/A4 size.
5. 240K or 1 year whichever occurs first.
3.5.
When the machine reaches the preset P/M Cycle, it will show Call for P/M or Replace The Toner Waste
Container on the LCD Display. The PM Counter can be reset by following the procedures below.
3.5.1.
1. Perform the P/M (Preventive Maintenance). Refer to Section 3.3 and 3.4.
2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
3. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-70 (PM cycle) and change to the desired value.
4. Press FUNCTION and C (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
3.5.2.
1. Perform the P/M (Preventive Maintenance). Refer to Section 3.3 and 3.4.
2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
3. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-73 (Fuser web) PM cycle and change to the desired value.
4. Press FUNCTION and C (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
3.5.3.
1. Perform the P/M (Preventive Maintenance). Refer to Section 3.3 and 3.4.
Ver. 5.2
129
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
3. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-87 (ADF) PM cycle and change to the desired value.
4. Press FUNCTION and C (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
3.5.4.
Ver. 5.2
130
JAN 2006
3.6.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Quickest and Most Reliable Way of Updating the Firmware is to use the Network Firmware
Program Tool (FUP) using Ethernet LAN Port and a Crossover Cable.
The network FUP Tool version must be 3.XX or higher, and it can be found on the CD included with PCL or
PS/PCL options.
Refer to the Firmware Update Operation Instructions and Service Notes for Option Instalation
(8.1, 8.2.) for the details.
3.6.1.
Firmware Configuration
A. Hardware Configuration
This machine is controlled by three (3) CPUs which are located on the System Control (SC) PC
Board, the Panel Control (PNL) PC Board and the Scanner Printer Control (SPC) PC Board.
Standard
Configuration
SC PC Board
On Board
PC
Ethernet Port
F-ROM
CPU
4 MB
(A)
(1)
Program
With PS Option
Configuration
(B)
(2)
Program
(D)
(5)
Program
4 MB
4 MB
4 MB
PC
Parallel Port
Slot 1
FRM8 PCB
8 MB
(C) 8MB
(3)
Program
(a)
4 MB
(E) 8MB
(6)
Program
(a)
4 MB
(4)
(7)
Program
Flash Memory
Card
4 MB or 8 MB
Font
4 MB
(b)
4 MB
(b)
Slot 2
FRM8 PCB
8 MB
PNL PC Board
F-ROM
CPU
4 MB
SPC PC Board
F-ROM
CPU
512 KB
B. SC PC Board Firmware
The standard onboard Program Memory (F-ROM) mounted on the SC PCB is 4 MB. Two (2) Optional
Expansion 8 MB Program Memory (FRM8 PCB) can be installed into SLOT 1 and SLOT 2.
The Firmware to be written into the 4 MB onboard, the 8 MB of SLOT 1 / SLOT 2 depend upon the
configuration of the Standard, PCL or PS Options.
(1) Standard
The Standard Program is only written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code (A).
(2) For PCL Option
The PCL Control Program must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code
Ver. 5.2
131
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(B). The PCL Control Program (3) and PCL Font data (4) are written into the 8 MB in the SLOT 1.
The Firmware (3) and (4) are assigned as ROM Code (C).
When using 8 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB Program (C) can be written at once.
Using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (C) must be divided by 2 Programs for Program
4 MB (3) and Font 4 MB (4).
(3) For PS Option
The PS Control Program must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code
(D). The PS Control Program (6) and (7) are written into the 8 MB in the SLOT 1.
Both Firmwares (6) and (7) are assigned as ROM Code (E).
When using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (E) must be divided onto 2 cards, one 4
MB card for the PS Control Program (6) and one 4 MB card for the PS Control Program (7).
C. Panel (PNL) PC Board Firmware
The 4 MB Program Memory (F-ROM) is mounted on the PNL PCB as a standard. The Programs for
Key Scan, Display Control, Energy Save Control, Bitmap Data and Font Data are saved in this Board.
The Firmware is transferred as Serial Data from SC PCB.
D. SPC PC Board Firmware
The 512 KB Program Memory (F-ROM) is mounted on the SPC PCB as a standard. The Programs for
Scanner Control and Printer Control are saved in the Board. The Firmware is transferred as Serial
Data from SC PCB.
E. Firmware Updating Ports
Three (3) types of Ports are available for updating the firmware.
(1) Ethernet LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Reliable Way)
The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via Local Area Network (LAN). Refer to the
Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Caution (8.1.) and Service Notes (8.2.) for the details.
(2) Parallel Port (Back up)
The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via Parallel Port. The Master Firmware Card
can also be created from a PC via Parallel Port. Refer to the Firmware Update Operation
Instructions, Caution (8.1.) and Service Notes (8.2.) for the details.
(3) Flash Memory Card
The machine's Firmware can be updated using the Master Firmware Card. The Master Firmware
Card can be created by copying the Firmware from an existing machine's SC PCB using a 4 MB or
8 MB Flash Memory Card.
It is required 5 Flash Memory Cards to update the SC, PNL and SPC PCBs.
Ver. 5.2
132
JAN 2006
3.6.2.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)
The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN.
The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover
cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.
1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC
The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Network
Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool.
The installation password is "workio".
Operating Instructions:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the Network Firmware Update Tool OI on the
CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe
2) Preparing the Firmware Code
Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the
CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted
automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.
Example:
From:
Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat
Firmware Code File:
DP-3510_4510_6010_xx_xxxxxx.exe
DP-3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx.exe or
DP-3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx.exe
To:
Firmware Data Folder:
C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade
Print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copier Service Mode F9-03-00).
Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.
Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).
Ver. 5.2
133
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
\ DP-3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx
\ DP-3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx
\ PNL \ M25R_PNLAxVxxxxxx_xx
\ SC_STD \ SFD_M25RAxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PCL \SFD_M25RBxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PS \SFD_M25RDxVxxxxx_xx
\ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAxV4xxxxx
Note:
1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing
the type of the firmware.
Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection
Tab" of the Operating Instructions.
2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to
normal upon completion of the firmware update.
3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will
not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating
through the Parallel Port" and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit.
4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination
location.
5) After the Firmeware Update is completed, enter the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed
in step (3) above.
Ver. 5.2
134
JAN 2006
3.6.3.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3.6.4.
Ver. 5.2
135
JAN 2006
3.6.5.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
136
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
10. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back and the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the
ON position.
11. Use this Master Firmware Card to update the firmware on other machines.
3.6.6.
1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the
OFF position. (See 3.6.7.)
2. Install the Master Firmware Card into the machine.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back and the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the
ON position.
4. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
5. Perform the Service Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).
6. After the Flash Memory Card is erased, machine prompts "Update Program Card?". Press "NO".
7. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to
standby.
8. Turn the Power Switch on the left side and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the
OFF position. (See 3.6.7.)
9. Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine.
10. Repeat from Step 2 above if you are erasing another Master Firmware Card.
3.6.7.
After the Hard Disc Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Disc Scan Function from being performed (similar
to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence below
when turing OFF the Power Switches on the machine.
1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position first.
2. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disc Drive
Unit.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the OFF position.
Ver. 5.2
137
JAN 2006
3.6.8.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The easiest method to recover the firmware in an Emergency Recovery routine is to either use the Local
Firmware Update Tool software by selecting the Independent File method, or using the Master Firmware
Flash Card method (3 Flash Cards required).
Whichever method you select, it is easier to restore the machine's firmware to the Standard (AAV) Type
first as it only requires 3 files to bring the machine to initial working condition. (Install the files in this
order: SC, SPC and PNL).
After recovering, if optional PCL or PS/PCL firmware is required, use the Network Firmware Update Tool
or the Local Firmware Update Tool to update the firmware to the required level.
If the unit does not boot up properly, follow the steps below:
1. Turn the power Off (use the power switch on the back of the unit, not the side of the unit).
- Before proceeding to the next step, you must prepare either the Local Firmware Update Tool or
create the Master Firmware Flash Cards (read the appropriate sections first).
- If using the Master Firmware Card, insert the Master Firmware Flash Cards in the unit.
2. Turn the power On while holding the [ENERGY SAVER] button.
3. When the green lamp on the front panel turns On, release the [ENERGY SAVER] button.
- If using the Master Firmware Card, the unit will start updating the Firmware code files
automatically.
The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from the Parallel Port or Master Firmware Card.
Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.
Ver. 5.2
138
JAN 2006
3.6.9.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Firmware Version
DP-3510/4510/6010
SC
PNL
Model Number
SPC
SFDM SPC
A A V2xxxx
Firmware Version (V2xxxx)
AA: Fixed
Firmware Type
A : Standard
B, C, D, E, F : Optional
Model Number
Ver. 5.2
139
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
DP-3520/4520/6020
SC
PNL
MMK2
SPC
SFDM SPC
A A V3xxxx
Firmware Version (V3xxxx)
AA: Fixed
Firmware Type
A : Standard
B, C, D, E, F : Optional
Model Number
Ver. 5.2
140
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
DP-3530/4530/6030
SC
PNL
M25R
SPC
SFDM SPC
A A V4xxxx
Firmware Version (V4xxxx)
AA: Fixed
Firmware Type
A : Standard
B, C, D, E, F : Optional
Model Number
Ver. 5.2
141
JAN 2006
Ver. 5.2
142
TDC Sensor
LSU
SC PC Board
13
14
15
Optics
Clean
2
2
2
1
1
3
1
1
3
2
Toner
Toner
Drum
Density
Density TDC Adj.
Unit
Sensor
F8-09
Sensor
Clean
Adj.
Clean
F8-14
1
2
F6-17
Grid
Yes
---
F6-18
Laser
Yes
--F6-19
Bias
Yes
---
F6-80
Laser
Yes
---
F6-82
Grid
Yes
---
Digital
QUANTUM ON/OFF
Digital QUANTUM: ON
Digital QUANTUM: OFF
Corona Unit
Drum Unit
Toner Density
Sensor
10
11
12
Exposure Lamp
Platen Glass
OPC Drum
Developer
OPC Drum &
Developer
Replace
5
6
7
8
9
Part Item
Installation Main
Cleaning
Optics
Drum Unit
Toner Density
Sensor
Work
1
2
3
4
No.
Adjustment
2
3
1
F6-95
Laser
--Yes
F6-96
Grid
--Yes
F6-97
Bias
--Yes
Manual Adjustment
(Digital QUANTUM OFF)
1
2
2
2
1
4
2
5
3
4
2
2
3
3
3
2
5
3
6
Image
Copy
PWM
LSU
Density
Quality
Adj.
Adj.
Adj. F6-49
F6-39/52 (Note 5) Check
/50/51
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
(Note 3, 4)
3
4
2
3
4
5
3
4
When the following items are replaced or cleaned, perform adjustments in the correct order.
Replace Developer
Remark
3.7.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
1. Copy Quality Check
1) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
2) Press the "6" and "START" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters).
3) Press "29 QUANTUM Black Density".
4) Press "INPUT" button and enter a number
(0 1 or 1 0).
5) Press "OK" button twice.
6) Wait approximately 30 seconds.
7) The Machine starts QUANTUM Control automatically.
2. PWM Adjustment
1) It is recommended to make continuous copies (50 ~ 300 copies, depending on the machine model)
to stabilize the Bias Voltage of the Developer.
DP-35xx : 250 ~ 300 copies
DP-45xx : 150 ~ 200 copies
DP-60xx : 50 ~ 100 copies
2) Ensure that Ledger / A3 Size Paper is loaded in one of the Trays, and pull out the remaining trays
(including the bypass tray) to disable them.
3) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
4) Press the "8" and "START" keys to enter the F8 Mode (Service Adjustment).
5) Press "17 LSU PWM Pattern 1" to print the Test Pattern.
6) Observe the position of the uppermost visible gray patch.
Sample:
4 gray patches are visible in the illustration, the value of the uppermost patch position is "+2" in
our example.
(-5)
(0)
+2
(+5)
Ver. 5.2
143
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
. . .
. . . . ..
.
.
. . . .. 1
. . . .
2
Not visible
Ver. 5.2
144
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. Contrast Adjusting
1) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
2) Press the "2" and the "START" keys to enter the F2 Mode.
3) Set the exposure to the center position.
Set the machine to TEXT / PHOTO Mode.
4) Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N FQ-SJ1011) and verify the density as shown
below. If it is within specification, skip to step (10).
a. Gray scale "1" should not be visible.
b. Gray scale "2" should be clearly visible.
A
. . .
. . . . ..
.
.
. . . .. 1
. . . .
2
Not visible
Ver. 5.2
145
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3.8.
When installing the System Console option or replacing the LSU, the following LSU Image Side to Side
adjustment must be performed.
The Printer registration is adjusted at the factory. If copy image is abnormal, adjust it by the following
procedure.
3.8.1.
Printer Registration
1. Insert Ledger or A3 size paper into the 2nd tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper
size. Empty or pull out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
3. Perform the Service Mode F1-03 (Print Test Pattern 1).
4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure below.
5. Perform the Service Mode F6-04 to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (-) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (+) value.
7. Press "STOP" key first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to
standby.
<Figure>
Two lines are printed on the top (Lead edge).
For Ledger or A3, place as Portrait.
For Letter or A4, place as Landscape.
5 mm
Top (Lead edge)
Two lines are printed
5 mm
(5 mm)
3.8.2.
1. Insert paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty or pull
out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
3. Perform the Service Mode F1-03 (Print Test Pattern 1).
4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.
5. Perform the Service Modes F6-10 to F6-15, to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.
7. Press "STOP" key first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to
standby.
3.8.3.
1. Insert paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty or pull
out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
3. Perform the Service Mode F1-06 (Print Test Pattern 4).
4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.
5. Perform the Service Mode F6-16, to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
Ver. 5.2
146
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.
7. Press "STOP" key first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to
standby.
3.9.
To stabilize the initial print quality, the contents of the F8-14 function was changed beginning from June '02
production. (Starting with Serial No. FBG2Kxxxxxx)
1. Description of the Change
F8-14 Contents
Current
Go to Image
Quality Adj.
Ready
F8-14 Contents
Toner Density Sensor
Output Gain Adj.
New
Self-Adjusting
(QUANTUM) 1min
Ready
Go to Image
Quality Adj.
Ready
Turn Power
Switch OFF/ON
Ready
Wait approx.
90 sec.
Self-Adjusting
(QUANTUM) 1 min
Ready
Go to Image
Quality Adj.
Ver. 5.2
147
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Trigger
At 200, 400, 600, 800 and 1000 prints after F8-09 was
performed
Every 1000 prints from 1001 prints after F8-09 was
performed
When the F6-28 value is changed
Wait approximately
After the Power Switch is turned
30 - 90 sec for the
On
QUANTUM to start *1
Upon reaching the specified
number of prints *2
After cancelling the Auto off mode
<Note>
*1) Start timing of QUANTUM:
- QUANTUM starts when the machine is ready (It will not work during copy/print/fax operation)
- The start of QUANTUM may change depending on machine status
*2) Any print value numbers shown above, refers to the Total Counter
Ver. 5.2
148
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF (O) position and leave the Power
Switch on the Left Side of the machine in the ON (I) position.
2. Ensure that the F-ROM Card with Firmware Update is not installed in the machine. If the Card is
installed in the machine, remove it.
3. Press and hold the ENERGY SAVER and FUNCTION keys down simultaneously, then turn the
Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the ON (I) position and continue holding the keys for
approximately 30 seconds until the Display becomes stable.
The LCD Display starts blinking and shows a + on the upper left edge of the display.
Note:
If you do not hold the "ENERGY SAVER" and "FUNCTION" keys down long enogh, the Display may
go OFF.
4. Press the + on the upper left edge of the display, press the + on the lower right edge and press the
+ on the center of the display. Then the display goes to stand-by.
Caution:
Prevent any damage to the LCD Display by not pressing with Sharp Edged Objects such as a Ball
Point Pen, etc.
5. Reboot the machine by cycling the power. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to
the OFF (O) then ON (I) position.
Ver. 5.2
149
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4 Troubleshooting
4.1.
No
Does the LCD display
function correctly?
Yes
No
Yes
Troubleshoot Improper
LCD Display
No
Yes
Troubleshoot communication
problems (transmission,
reception, dialing, polling,
information codes, or
diagnostic codes.)
Ver. 5.2
Troubleshoot printed
copy quality problems
150
JAN 2006
4.2.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Yes
Is LED/LCD displayed?
No
Does CN52, pin 3 on the SC
PCB measure +5 VDC?
Yes
No
Replace the LCD
Module.
Is the trouble
resolved?
Yes
No
No
Replace the
Touch Panel.
END
END
Ver. 5.2
151
JAN 2006
4.3.
Paper Travel
4.3.1.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
START
No
No
No
Is the PS normal?
Yes
No
1. Check all connectors and voltages
on the SPC PCB.
2. Replace the SPC PCB.
END
Ver. 5.2
152
JAN 2006
Blank Copy
Paper Travel
4.3.2.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
START
No
No
Yes
Is the PS normal?
No
Yes
No
1. Check all connectors and
voltages on the SPC PCB.
2. Replace the SPC PCB.
END
Ver. 5.2
153
JAN 2006
Paper Travel
4.3.3.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
START
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Clean or replace the rollers.
END
Ver. 5.2
154
JAN 2006
Ghost Images
A
AAA
A
Paper Travel
4.3.4.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
START
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
END
Ver. 5.2
155
JAN 2006
Paper Travel
4.3.5.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
START
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Clean or replace the rollers.
END
Ver. 5.2
156
JAN 2006
Paper Travel
4.3.6.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
START
No
No
Replace the OPC/Developer Unit.
Yes
1. Clean the Corona Wire
with a soft, dry cloth.
2. Replace the Corona Unit.
No
No
Yes
No
1. Check all connectors and
voltages on the HVPS.
2. Check the Spring Connector
and voltage on the HVPS.
3. Replace the HVPS.
Yes
No
Yes
END
Ver. 5.2
157
JAN 2006
Dark Background
Paper Travel
4.3.7.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
START
No
Yes
No
No
Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.
No
Yes
No
Is the PS normal?
Yes
No
Clean or replace the rollers.
END
Ver. 5.2
158
JAN 2006
Light Print
Paper Travel
4.3.8.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
START
Yes
Check the Scanner mechanism.
Yes
No
Yes
1. Remove the particles from the
laser beam path or clean the stains.
2. Replace the LSU.
No
No
Yes
END
Ver. 5.2
159
JAN 2006
Paper Travel
4.3.9.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
START
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Is the PS normal?
Yes
END
Ver. 5.2
160
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.3.10. Improper Fusing (Printed image does not bond to the paper)
P
START
Yes
No
No
Yes
END
Note:
Replace the entire Fuser Unit when the Thermostat and/or the Thermistor turn into an open-circuit.
Ver. 5.2
161
JAN 2006
4.3.11.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Paper Travel
P
START
Yes
No
No
No
END
Paper Travel
START
No
Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.
Yes
No
Clean or replace the rollers.
END
Ver. 5.2
162
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Paper Travel
START
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
1. Remove any foreign particles
and / or clean the stains.
2. Clean or replace the rollers.
3. Replace the Fuser Unit.
END
Ver. 5.2
163
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No
1. Replace the SPC PCB.
2. Replace the LSU.
3. Replace the HVPS.
4. Replace the Developer Unit.
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Telephone line quality is poor.
END
Ver. 5.2
164
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
de
Mo
Copy le
Samp
No
No
Yes
END
Ver. 5.2
165
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Remove the foreign particles or paper pieces
from the receiver unit.
No
1. Check all rollers, gears, drive clutches and
springs.
2. Adjust or replace any defective parts.
Yes
No
Adjust or replace any defective parts.
END
Ver. 5.2
166
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Yes
No
Yes
Remove the foreign particles or paper
pieces from the scanning area.
Yes
No
Yes
Is the Scanner Block abnormal?
No
END
Ver. 5.2
167
JAN 2006
4.4.
4.4.1.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No
Re-enter the Internet Parameters correctly.
Yes
Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet
Mask as the unit
From the DOS Prompt, enter the following
command-line utility: ipconfig /all
Does the displayed Network configuration,
match the following settings of the unit
Internet Parameters ?
Default Gateway IP Address:
DNS Server IP Address:
Subnet Mask:
No
Ask the Network Administrator to
verify the proper information.
Yes
From the DOS Prompt, enter the following
command-line utility: "route print"
Does the current routing table for the
Gateway match ?
No
Ask the Network Administrator to correct
the routing table on that Gateway.
No
Yes
Does the Default Gateway respond to the
"ping IP" command ?
Yes
No
Ask the Network Administrator to check the
Default Gateway and system status.
No
Yes
Does the unit respond to the
"ping host name" command ?
Yes
Does the unit respond to the
"telnet" command ?
Yes
Ask the Network Administrator to verify the
POP/SMTP account and system status.
Ver. 5.2
168
JAN 2006
4.4.2.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
It is beyond the scope of this Service Manual to cover Networking in detail, there are many excellent
manuals on this subject, but we hope the information in this section will aid with your troubleshooting efforts.
In most cases, the Network Administrator will be able to provide you with needed information or assistance.
When encountering Network problems during an onsite service call or during the installation stage, try to
isolate the steps that are not being completed so that you can quickly locate the components that don't
work. It is best to organize your troubleshooting efforts by understanding what should be happening, then
you can trace the path and see where the problem is occurring.
In our case, we use TCP/IP for transportation of data from one system to another, which involves a whole
series of events occurring throughout a number of different layers.
As with all networking, TCP/IP works better when its plugged in, therefore, start your troubleshooting by
checking the Physical Connectivity first, the cable(s).
In our examples, we'll use several simple tools readily available in the DOS command-line utility for
troubleshooting. There are many other utilities available for checking more detailed information, some are
Free of charge, others are available for a nominal fee.
1. System Diagram Model
Ask the customer to provide you with the Pre-Installation Information form, that was filled out by the
Network Administrator.
A description or system diagram for the unit, including its physical address, email server and DNS
server is required.
Network Configuration
Domain Name: labo.pcc.com
Network D
PC Client
[210.232.71.18]
js2.labo.pcc.com
WAN
SMTP/POP DNS
Server
Server
sv2.labo.pcc.com
[192.168.1.2]
Network A
[192.168.3.0]
sv1.labo.pcc.com
[192.168.1.1]
[192.168.3.254]
Router (R1)
[192.168.1.253]
Network B
[192.168.1.0]
"ping"
PC Client
[192.168.1.4]
ec5.labo.pcc.com
Hub
PC Client
[192.168.3.4]
ec4.labo.pcc.com
Network C
[192.168.4.0]
Panasonic Device
[192.168.3.5]
ef1.labo.pcc.com
Ver. 5.2
169
PC Client
[192.168.4.1]
fmrt7.labo.pcc.com
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Verify that the displayed Network configuration on the PC, matches the following Internet Parameter
settings of the unit:
Default Gateway IP Address:
DNS Server IP Address:
Subnet Mask: (whether it is valid)
For Windows 98 / Me / 2000 / NT / XP
The following example shows the output after you type "ipconfig /all" at a command prompt:
C:\>ipconfig /all
Windows NT IP Configuration
Host Name
DNS Servers
Node Type
NetBIOS Scope ID
IP Routing Enabled.
WINS Proxy Enabled
NetBIOS Resolution Uses DNS
: ec4.labo.pcc.com
: 192.168.1.1
: Hybrid
:
: No
: No
: No
:
: IBM 100/10 EtherJet PCI Adapter
Physical Address
DHCP Enabled
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Primary WINS Server
: 00-04-AC-EE-9C-E8
: No
: 192.168.3.4
: 255.255.255.0
: 192.168.3.254
: 192.168.3.18
From the above examples, you know the Network configuration for the specified Subnet Mask is as
follows: IP Address: 192.168.3.4; Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0; Default Gateway (Default Router IP
Address): 192.168.3.254; DNS Server: 192.168.1.1 and the Domain Name: labo.pcc.com
(obtained from the Host Name).
3. Using "PING" to Test Physical Connectivity
The Packet Internet Groper (PING) is a command-line tool included with every Microsoft TCP/IP client
(any DOS or Windows client with the TCP/IP protocol installed). PING is a simple utility that is used to
send a test packet to a specified IP Address or Hostname, then, if everything is working properly, the
packet is echoed back (returned).
Sample command-line PINGing and parameters are shown below. There are several available options
that can be specified with the PING command. However, for our examples, we will use two options (-n
and -w) which are commonly used when the response from the destination location is too long.
-n count
:
-w timeout :
Ver. 5.2
The number of echo requests that the command should send. The default is four.
Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not
responding.
170
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
If for some reason, the physical connection is missing, the echo reply will not be received from the
destination and the following output is displayed:
C:\WINDOWS>ping fmrt7.labo.pcc.com
Pinging fmrt7.labo.pcc.com [192.168.4.1] with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Ping statistics for 192.168.4.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms
Ver. 5.2
171
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
If the physical destination is far and it's connected by WAN (Wide Area Network), the PING option
command default value must be changed to compensate for the expected delayed response.
e.g.
-n 10
-w 2000
:
:
4 ms
4 ms
2 ms
5 ms
2 ms 192.168.3.254
5 ms sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]
Trace complete.
Ver. 5.2
172
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Netmask
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
Gateway
192.168.3.254
192.168.1.253
Interface
192.168.3.254
192.168.1.253
When the Unit at 192.168.3.5 attempts to communicate with the Unit at 192.168.1.x, IP performs the
ANDing process to find two things: The local network ID is 192.168.3.0, and the destination network ID
is not. This means, that the destination host is not on the local network.
IP, is responsible to find a route to the remote network, and therefore, it consults the routing table.
Here, the local host normally determines that the next step in the route is the Default Gateway, and
sends the packet to router R1.
The router R1, receives the packet. After determining that the packet is for another host and not the
router itself, it checks the routing table. It finds the route to 192.168.1.0 and sends the packet through
the interface to the Unit at 192.168.1.x, which receives the packet. This is a simple route that took only
a single hop.
When another network is added as the number of hosts grows, it gets complicated, and the systems on
the most distant networks cannot communicate. When the router receives a packet in this case, it
cannot find a route to the remote network. It then discards the packet and a message indicating
"destination host unreachable" is sent to the originator.
Here, is where the ROUTE command-line utility is useful when dealing with more than two networks,
and is used by Administrators to statically manage a route table by adding, deleting, changing and
clearing the route table. It has a number of options that are used to manipulate the routing tables, some
are shown below:
MASK
If this switch is present, the next parameter is interpreted as the netmask parameter.
Netmask
If included, specifies a sub-net mask value to be associated with this route entry. If not specified, it
defaults to 255.255.255.255.
Gateway
Specifies the gateway.
METRIC
Specifies the metric / cost for the destination.
All symbolic names used for the destination are looked up in the network database file NETWORKS.
The symbolic names for the gateway are looked up the host name database file HOSTS.
Ver. 5.2
173
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
When the packet does not reach the specified destination even when the physical connection is
properly made, check the registered persistent routes on the same subnet as the Unit by typing "route
print" in the DOS command-line. The output display is shown below:
C:\WINDOWS>route print
Active Routes:
Network Address
0.0.0.0
127.0.0.0
192.168.3.0
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.255
224.0.0.0
255.255.255.255
Netmask
0.0.0.0
255.0.0.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
224.0.0.0
255.255.255.255
Gateway Address
192.168.3.254
127.0.0.1
192.168.3.2
127.0.0.1
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.2
Interface
192.168.3.2
127.0.0.1
192.168.3.2
127.0.0.1
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.2
192.168.3.2
Metric
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10 sv2.labo.pcc.com
Ver. 5.2
174
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
For better understanding, type "telnet" in the DOS Command-line to bring up the Telnet screen. Then,
click on the Terminal menu and on Preferences, check the "Local Echo" and "Block Cursor" radio dials
and click on the OK button.
Click on the Connect menu, then click on Remote System.
Enter "25" in the "Port:" field and click on Connect button.
For example,
C:\WINDOWS>telnet
telnet to ef1.labo.pcc.com[192.168.3.5]
220 ef1.labo.pcc.com DP18xx V.xx
helo
250 Hello
mail from:test
250 Sender OK
rcpt to:fax@labo.pcc.com
250 Receipient OK
data
354 Email, end with "CRLF . CR LF"
[Press the Enter Key]
Panasonic Internet Fax
test
test
[Press the Enter Key]
[Press the Enter Key]
[Press the Enter Key]
250 OK, Mail accept
quit
221 Closing transaction channel
Ver. 5.2
175
JAN 2006
4.5.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The self-diagnostic functions detect troubles in the important components of the copier.
When any trouble occurs, the copier stops.
4.5.1.
Note:
Uxx and a message will appear on the Panel Display.
Code
U0
U1
U4
U6
U7
U9
U12
U13
Ver. 5.2
176
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Code
U14
U15
U16
U18
U20
U21
U30
U31
U32
U33
U34
U35
U90
Ver. 5.2
177
JAN 2006
4.5.2.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
DA-FS330
DA-FS355A
DA-FS600
DA-FS605
Misfeed Indication
on the Touch
Panel Display
F
H
D C
B
H
I
I
G
E
Section
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Jam Location
3rd/4th Paper Feed Unit
Paper Transport Area
ADU Area
Fuser
Paper Inverting Unit
ADU Area
LCT Area
Finisher
Saddle Finisher
i-ADF
Note:
If the machine is jammed, follow the procedure below.
1. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to
the OFF position. (If Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the
machine to the OFF position first. After wating approximately 10 seconds, turn the Main Power
Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position.)
2. Remove the Jammed paper.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.
4. Press the Function and 3 keys.
Ver. 5.2
178
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Exit Sensor
Inverting Exit
Sensor
Timing Sensor
Registration
Sensor
Inverting Paper
Sensor
Paper Path
Sensor
ADU Entrance
Sensor
ADU Intermediate
Sensor
ADU Exit
Sensor
Intermediate
Roller Sensor
Inverting Paper
Path Sensor
ADF Registration
Sensor 2
Ver. 5.2
ADF Registration
Sensor 3
ADF Selection
Sensor
ADF Exit
Sensor
179
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Code
J00
J01
J02
J03
J04
J06
J07
J08
J09
J11
J12
J13
J14
J16
J17
J18
J19
J21
J22
J23
J24
J26
J27
J28
J29
J30
J31
Ver. 5.2
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
181
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
182
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
DP-3520/ DP-3510/
3530/4520/ 4510/6010
4530/6020/
6030
J78
J71
J79
J92
J93
J94
4.5.3.
J70
J70
J70
J71
J71
Contents
Section
1. The ADF Registration Sensor 3 does not detect paper after the
Face Page is scanned, during 2-Sided Scanning.
2. The ADF Selection Sensor keeps detecting paper during 2-Sided
Scanning.
The ADF Registration Sensor 1 keeps detecting paper in the ADF.
The paper is not detected.
The paper remained in the ADF.
J
J
J
Code
Function
E1- 01 Abnormal Platen Glass
scanning
Ver. 5.2
Check Points
1. Home Position Sensor connector is disconnected.
2. Home Position Sensor is defective.
3. Scanner Motor connector is disconnected.
4. Scanner Motor is defective.
5. Scanning Mechanism is defective.
6. DRV PCB connector is disconnected.
7. DRV PCB is defective.
8. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
9. SPC PCB is defective.
10. LVPS is defective.
1. LSU connector is disconnected.
2. LSU is defective.
3. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
4. SPC PCB is defective.
1. LSU connector is disconnected.
2. LSU is defective.
3. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
4. SPC PCB is defective.
1. Polygon Motor connector is disconnected.
2. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
3. Polygon Motor is defective.
4. LVPS is defective.
5. DRV PCB is defective.
1. Scanning Lamp connector is disconnected.
2. Scanning Lamp is defective.
3. DRV PCB connector is disconnected.
4. DRV PCB is defective.
5. SC PCB is defective. (Check F4 Chip Fuse)
183
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Check Points
1. Level Sensor connector is disconnected.
2. Level Sensor is defective.
3. Lift Mechanism is defective.
4. Lift Motor connector is disconnected.
5. Lift Motor is defective.
6. LVPS connector is disconnected.
7. LVPS is defective.
8. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
9. SPC PCB is defective.
10. APF PCB connector is disconnected.
11. APF PCB is defective.
12. Paper Feed Module connector is disconnected.
1. LCT connector is disconnected.
2. Upper Limit Sensor connector is disconnected.
3. Upper Limit Sensor is defective.
4. Lift Mechanism is defective.
5. Lift Motor connector is disconnected.
6. Lift Motor is defective.
7. Lower Limit Sensor connector is disconnected.
8. Lower Limit Sensor is defective.
9. LCT PCB connector is disconnected.
10. LCT PCB is defective.
11. LVPS connector is disconnected.
12. LVPS is defective.
13. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
14. SPC PCB is defective.
1. System Console Cable is disconnected.
2. Drive Mechanism is defective.
3. Drive Motor connector is disconnected.
4. Drive Motor is defective.
5. APF PCB connector is disconnected.
6. APF PCB is defective.
7. LVPS connector is disconnected.
8. LVPS is defective.
9. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
10. SPC PCB is defective.
Ver. 5.2
184
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Code
E3- 03
E3- 10
E3- 11
E3- 12
E3- 13
E3- 20
E3- 21
E3- 23
E3- 24
Ver. 5.2
185
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Code
E3- 25
E3- 40
E3- 51
E3- 60
Ver. 5.2
186
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
START
Make a Copy.
Does E3-60 Error still occur?
Yes
No
No
END
(1) Remove the Drum Unit. (See Sect 2.2.8.)
(2) Turn the Toner Waste Screw Gear towards the
Arrow direction until you hear a click.
Ver. 5.2
Check Points
1. Fuser Thermistor is dirty.
2. Thermistor position is incorrect.
3. Fuser temperature is low. (Adjust F6-31)
4. Thermistor is defective.
5. Fuser Lamp connector is disconnected.
6. Fuser Thermostat is defective.
7. Fuser Lamp is defective.
8. HTC PCB connector is disconnected.
9. HTC PCB is defective.
1. Paper Jam in Fuser Unit.
2. Paper Exit Sensor 1 or 2 is disconnected.
3. Paper Exit Sensor 1 or 2 is defective.
4. DRV PCB connector is disconnected.
5. DRV PCB is defective.
6. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
7. SPC PCB is defective.
1. Exhaust Fan connector is disconnected.
2. Exhaust Fan is defective.
3. LVPS connector is disconnected.
4. LVPS is defective.
5. LPC PCB is defective.
187
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
Check Points
1. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
2. SPC PCB is defective.
1. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
2. SPC PCB is defective.
3. SC PCB connector is disconnected.
4. SC PCB is defective.
188
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Function
Check Points
Finisher Paper Transport Motor See Sect. 11 Finisher Options.
Finisher Paper Exit Motor
Finisher Damper Motor
Finisher Staple Motor
Finisher Staple Sift Motor
Finisher Paper Height Sensor
Finisher Backup RAM Data
Finisher Tray Lift Motor
Finisher Punch Motor
Finisher Punch Shift Motor
Finisher Saddle-Stitch
Communication
Finisher Saddle Positioning
Plate Motor
Finisher Saddle Folding Motor
Finisher Saddle Guide Motor
Finisher Saddle Alignment
Motor
Finisher Saddle Rear Staple
Motor
Finisher Saddle Front Staple
Motor
Finisher Saddle Push Motor
Finisher Swing Motor
Finisher Sensor Connector
Finisher Micro Switch
Finisher Delivery Motor
See Sect. 11 Finisher Options.
For DA-FS355/355A, DA-SP41 only.
Finisher Paddle Motor
Finisher Saddle Folding Sensor
Finisher Punch Communication
Finisher Punch Power Supply
Finisher Punch Registration
Sensor
Finisher Punch Sensor
(Horizontal Registration)
Finisher Punch Sensor
(Waste Full))
Hardware Key Abnormal
1. Incorrect Hardware Key is installed.
2. Hardware Key is defective.
Note:
These error codes will appear only when the optional accessories are installed. Refer to the appropriate
Optional Unit Service Manual.
Ver. 5.2
189
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
Check Points
1. Toner Bottle is not installed correctly.
2. Out of Toner.
3. Toner Sensor is disconnected.
4. Toner Sensor is defective.
5. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
6. SPC PCB is defective.
190
JAN 2006
4.6.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Code
012
Mode
RCV
030
XMT
031
XMT
COPY
061
200
RCV
212
331
XMT
RCV
XMT
RCV
XMT
400
XMT
401
XMT
402
XMT
403
RCV
(Polling)
404
XMT
301
Ver. 5.2
191
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Code
405
Mode
XMT
406
RCV
(Password
Comm.)
407
XMT
408
XMT
409
XMT
410
RCV
411
RCV
(Polling)
412
G3 RX
414
RCV
(Polling)
415
XMT
(Polling)
416
RCV
417
RCV
Ver. 5.2
192
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Code
418
Mode
RCV
420
RCV
421
RCV
422
XMT
427
G3
RCV
433
XMT
RCV
434 XMT or RCV
436
G3 RX
456
RCV
490
RCV
494
RCV
495
XMT
RCV
496
XMT
501
XMT/
RCV(V.34)
XMT/
RCV(V.34)
502
Ver. 5.2
Transmitter is defective.
Line quality is poor. (EOL is damaged
due to line noise)
FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective.
C
During reception, CD turned OFF Line is disconnected.
or continued ON for long time.
Transmitter is defective.
During communication, lost loop - FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective.
current.
C
CS of modem is not able to turn
FXB PCB is defective.
ON.
B
Incompatible Modem on the
Remote unit.
B, C, D During reception, CD turned OFF Line is disconnected.
or continued ON for long time.
Transmitter is defective.
During communication, lost loop - FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective.
current.
193
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Code
503
540
Mode
XMT/
RCV(V.34)
RCV/V.34
(Polling)
XMT/V.34
(Polling)
XMT ECM
541
XMT ECM
542
XMT ECM
543
XMT ECM
544
XMT ECM
550
RCV ECM
554
RCV ECM
555
RCV ECM
570
RCV
571
XMT
580
XMT
581
XMT
582
XMT
601
XMT
623
XMT
504
505
631
Ver. 5.2
XMT
194
Incompatible interface.
Line is faulty.
MJR PCB abnormal.
Remote unit is abnormal.
Remote unit is abnormal.
Line is faulty.
MJR PCB abnormal.
Defective remote station.
Faulty line.
Faulty line and Operator Call requested
by RX side.
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Code
634
Mode
XMT
638
XMT
700
711
XMT
RCV
RCV
712
XMT
714
XMT
RCV
715
XMT
716
XMT
717
XMT
718
XMT
719
RCV
720
POP
721
POP
722
RCV
725
XMT
POP
Ver. 5.2
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Code
726
Phase
LAN
727
Mode
XMT
POP
XMT
728
XMT
LAN
729
XMT
LAN
730
RCV
LAN
731
RCV
LAN
LAN
800
814
Relay
Comm.
Conf. XMT
Conf. Polling
Relay
Comm.
815 Conf. RCV
816 Conf. Polled
825
870
741
879
880
884
961
962
Ver. 5.2
PSTN
PSTN
196
SC PCB is defective.
SC PCB is defective.
SC PCB is defective.
JAN 2006
4.7.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The 13-digit Diagnostic Code is provided for the service engineer to analyze how the communication was
performed. The code is recorded on the Journal.
Journal Example
************* -JOURNAL- ************************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 09:39********
NO. COMM. PAGES
01
OK
001
00:00'42
XMT
IDENTIFICATION
123 456 789
DATE
MMM-dd
TIME
01:55
1st digit
DIAGNOSTIC
C8649003C0000
13th digit
- PANASONIC MACHINE
Ver. 5.2
Manufacturer
Code
Casio
Canon
Sanyo
Sharp
Tamura
Toshiba
NEC
Oki
Hitachi
Xerox
Fujitsu
Matsushita
Mitsubishi
Murata
Ricoh
197
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2nd Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
STOP Button
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
Pressed
3rd Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Ver. 5.2
Resolution (dpi)
S-Fine
400 x 400
300 x 300
S-Fine
400 x 400
300 x 300
600 x 600
600 x 600
600 x 600
S-Fine
400 x 400
300 x 300
198
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
Scanning Rate
20 ms/line
5 ms/line
10 ms/line
40 ms/line
0 ms/line
20 ms/line
5 ms/line
10 ms/line
40 ms/line
0 ms/line
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
5th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Ver. 5.2
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
6th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Polling
XMT/RCV
Selective Comm.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
RCV
RCV
XMT
XMT
RCV
RCV
XMT
XMT
RCV
RCV
XMT
XMT
RCV
RCV
XMT
XMT
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Password
Comm.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
7th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Ver. 5.2
Sub-Address
Comm.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
200
Turnaround
Polling
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Advanced
Comm.
Report XMT
Check & Call
Memory Transfer
Report XMT
Check & Call
Memory Transfer
-
9th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Ver. 5.2
Short Protocol
B
D
B
D
201
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
10th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Coding
MH
MR
MMR
JBIG
MH
MR
MMR
JBIG
-
11th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Fax Diagnostic Codes
Definition
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Ver. 5.2
Symbol Rate
(V.34)
2400 sr
2800 sr
3000 sr
3200 sr
3429 sr
-
V.34
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
202
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
12th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Modem Speed
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
TC 7200 bps
TC 9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
-
13th Digit
-: Not used/defined
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Ver. 5.2
203
JAN 2006
4.8.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.8.1.
This section explains how to solve problems including error messages or unexpected printing results.
If the Printing System is not printing or working as expected, and if you are not sure
what to do, start your troubleshooting by checking the basics below:
Ensure that the Ethernet LAN (10Base-T / 100Base-TX) Cable is connected properly
Ensure that the Internet Parameters are correct
Ensure that the Unit is turned On
Ensure that the Paper is set properly in the Unit
No error message is displayed on the Unit
Try printing a test page from the printer driver properties dialog box
4.8.2.
Possible Solution(s)
Check and specify the paper size and orientation settings in the printer
driver to coincide with the application.
Check if the specified paper is loaded in the Panasonic Device.
Increase the Page Margins in the application. The Panasonic Device
requires minimum margins of inches (5 mm) on all sides.
Select the Spool settings "Start printing after first page is spooled "
from the Details tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
Select 300 dpi resolution.
Ver. 5.2
204
JAN 2006
4.8.3.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Error Message
Network Print DLL Error.
Possible Solution(s)
Check if the Panasonic Device is turned "On", and the 10Base-T/
is 100Base-TX cable properly connected.
Printer Properties may be incorrectly configured. (i.e. Printer Port)
Verify and specify the paper size, or orientation to coincide with the
application and the printer driver settings.
4.8.4.
Cannot complete
Confirm print condition
Cannot print
System error
4.8.5.
Ver. 5.2
Possible Solution(s)
Insert the CD into the drive and click Retry.
205
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5 Service Modes
5.1.
These Service Modes are provided to assist the technician in checking for abnormalities in the copier and a
means of making adjustments to the Input/Output of major components.
Caution:
The factory default parameters are preset (country dependent) for optimum performance and in
compliance with the local telecommunication regulations/standards, and do not need to be changed.
Changing some of these parameters may cause the unit to be no longer compliant or become
inoperable.
5.1.1.
5.1.2.
Service
Mode
F1
Self Test
Item
Function
00 CCD Test
01 LCD/LED Test
F3
F4
F5
Function Parameters
F6
Adjust Parameters
F7
F8
Electronic Counters
Service Adjustment
F9
Unit Maintenance
Ver. 5.2
206
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F5-00
F5-01
F5-02
F5-03
F5-04
F5-05
F5-06
F5-07
F5-08
F5-09
Country version
Frequency desired
. . . . .
LSU startup speed
LSU off timer
. . . . .
. . . . .
Language default
. . . . .
Fuser lamp control
F5-10
F5-11
F5-12
F5-13
F5-14
F5-15
F5-16
F5-17
F5-18
F5-19
. . . . .
. . . . .
Printer fan extension
. . . . .
Paper size tray1(cop.)
Paper size tray2(cop.)
Paper size tray3(sys1)
Paper size tray4(sys2)
Paper size L(LCT)
. . . . .
F5-20 ADF
F5-21 Finisher
F5-22 System console
USA/CAN
60Hz
Full
5 Sec.
off
None
LETTER
Auto
INVOICE
None
LETTER
Auto
Auto
Auto
F5-50
F5-51
F5-52
F5-53
F5-54
F5-55
F5-56
F5-57
F5-58
F5-59
Yes
No
No
No
No
10mm
5mm
20mm
F5-60
F5-61
F5-62
F5-63
F5-64
F5-65
F5-66
F5-67
F5-68
F5-69
Yes
Off
F5-70 PM cycle
F5-71 . . . . .
F5-72 Disable at web PM
Stop
Any keys
Blank
Blank
F,Blank
No
Continue
Ver. 5.2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
-6
F6-50
F6-51
F6-52
F6-53
F6-54
F6-55
F6-56
F6-57
F6-58
F6-59
F6-10
F6-11
F6-12
F6-13
F6-14
F6-15
F6-16
F6-17
F6-18
F6-19
F6-60
F6-61
F6-62
F6-63
F6-64
F6-65
F6-66
F6-67
F6-68
F6-69
F6-20
F6-21
F6-22
F6-70
F6-71
F6-72
207
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
: DP-6030
: 080023006FA1
:
2.FIRMWARE VERSION
SC
SC BOOT
PNL
SPC
FINISHER
FAX MODEM
PDL FONT1
SC2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3.MEMORY CAPACITY
PAGE MEMORY
SORT MEMORY
FAX MEMRY
: 32 MB
: 32 MB
: 3 MB
4.OPTION
DOCUMENT FEEDER (iADF)
3rd PAPER FEED MODULE
4th PAPER FEED MODULE
LCT
FINISHER
PUNCH UNIT
FAX BOARD
NETWORK SCANNER
PCL PRINTER
PS PRINTER
IPX/SPX
EMAIL
DDS
HDD
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
5.ERROR LOG
TOTAL PRINT COUNT
: 2082
BAV001xxPU
M30
AAT00001PU
60cpm T40000
0702
CAV00001b
CAV00008aPU
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
FS605
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Remarks:
XX-00000140
Page Count
00 : Printer Error
02 : Scanner Error
Ver. 5.2
208
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
0000
:
:
:
:
295
295
61
26
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
295
295
50
295
295
295
0
0
0
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
147
90
0
0
0
0
28
284
73
19
0
:
:
:
:
26
26
61
18
Ver. 5.2
209
JAN 2006
5.1.3.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Set the machine to service mode and press "4" key on the Keypad.
Enter the number to activate the test then press "START" key.
When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
1. Input Check
F4 Mode (Input Check)
Message Display
No.
Function
Condition
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
000 Paper Path Sensor
Paper is detected.
0
Intermediate Roller Sensor Paper is detected.
0
Fuser Unit Paper Exit
Paper is detected.
0
Sensor
Inverting Exit Sensor
Paper is detected.
0
Timing Sensor
Paper is detected.
0
Registration Sensor
Paper is detected.
0
001 Size Sensor 3
Sensor is activated.
1
(Sheet Bypass)
Size Sensor 2
Sensor is activated.
1
(Sheet Bypass, Inside)
Size Sensor 1
Sensor is activated.
1
(Sheet Bypass, Outside)
NP Sensor
Paper is detected.
1
(Sheet Bypass)
ADU Exit Sensor
Paper is detected.
0
ADU Intermediate Sensor Paper is detected.
0
ADU Paper Feed Sensor Paper is detected.
0
Ver. 5.2
210
Remarks
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
Function
Ver. 5.2
Sensor is activated.
Sensor is activated.
Sensor is activated.
Sensor is activated.
Sensor is activated.
Sensor is activated.
Home position is
detected.
Paper is detected.
1
0
0
Sensor is activated.
Sensor is activated.
Sensor is activated.
Paper is detected.
Cover is open.
Remarks
0
1
Normal.
Normal.
Normal.
Normal.
211
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
Function
Ver. 5.2
Remarks
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Paper is detected.
Upper Limit is detected.
Paper is not detected.
Sensor is activated.
Sensor is activated.
Sensor is activated.
Drive Motor is stopped.
212
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
Function
Ver. 5.2
Sensor is activated.
Sensor is activated.
Sensor is activated.
System Console is
connected.
Upper Limit is detected.
1
1
LCT is detached.
Lower Limit is detected.
Door is closed.
1
1
0
LCT is detected.
Paper is detected.
1
0
Sensor is activated.
Sensor is activated.
Sensor is activated.
Paper is detected.
Paper is detected.
Home position is
detected.
Home position is
detected.
Paper is detected.
Paper is detected.
Cover is open.
Cover is open.
Cover is open.
Cover is open.
Cover is open.
Cover is open.
Stapler is empty.
Stapler is empty.
213
Remarks
1
1
2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Finisher (FS605)
Only.
1
1
1
0
0
1
2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Finisher (FS605)
Only.
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
Function
Ver. 5.2
Remarks
Paper is detected.
0
Paper is detected.
0
Paper is detected.
0
Paper is detected.
0
Paper is detected.
0
Paper is detected.
0
Stapler is detected.
1
0
Stapler Cartridge is
detected.
Stapler Unit is detected.
0
Cover is open.
1
Cover is open.
Home position is
detected.
Home position is
detected.
Punch Unit is detected.
Guide is open.
Shutter is open.
Home position is
detected.
Home position is
detected.
Home position is
detected.
Switch is ON.
Switch is ON.
Guide is closed.
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
Shutter is closed.
Front Door is open.
Tray Danger Area
Upper Limit
Saddle Unit is detected.
Front Door is open.
Finisher Unit is detected.
214
2-Bin Finisher
(FS600),
2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Finisher (FS605) and
1-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Finisher (FS355A).
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
020
021
022029
030 ADF B1 Sensor
ADF B2 Sensor
ADF B3 Sensor
ADF Inverting Sensor
ADF Paper Exit Detection
Sensor
ADF Cover Open
Detection Sensor
ADF Detection Sensor
031 ADF Original Sensor
ADF Original Width Sensor
1
ADF Original Width Sensor
2
ADF Original Length
Sensor 1
ADF Original Length
Sensor 2
032- Not Used
039
Ver. 5.2
Original is detected.
Original is detected.
Original is detected.
Original is detected.
Original is detected.
Remarks
B
Platen
Z
Y
X
Front Side
1
1
1
1
1
Cover is open.
1
1
1
Sensor is activated.
Sensor is activated.
Sensor is activated.
215
1
1
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Output Check
Press the "START" key to start and press the "STOP" key to reset.
No.
040- Not Used
049
050 Main Motor
Item
Remark
1 minute
100 ms
For DP-3530/4530/6030
only
Ver. 5.2
216
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
Item
070 Paper Feed Roller Clutch
(2nd Paper Tray)
071 Paper Feed Solenoid
(2nd Paper Tray)
072 Lift Motor
(2nd Paper Tray)
073- Not Used
074
075 Paper Feed Roller Clutch
(3rd Paper Tray)
076 Paper Feed Solenoid
(3rd Paper Tray)
077 Lift Motor
(3rd Paper Tray)
078 Clutch
(System Console)
079 Drive Motor
(System Console)
080 Paper Feed Roller Clutch
(4th Paper Tray)
081 Paper Feed Solenoid
(4th Paper Tray)
082 Lift Motor
(4th Paper Tray)
083- Not Used
084
085 Paper Feed Roller Clutch
(Sheet Bypass)
086 Paper Feed Solenoid
(Sheet Bypass)
087- Not Used
090
091 Paper Feed Solenoid
(LCT)
092 LCT Paper Tray Lift (Up)
Ver. 5.2
1 minute
2 seconds
1 minute
1 minute
2 seconds
217
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
Item
101 ADU Paper Feed Clutch
102 Inverting Motor Rotating In
Forward Direction
103 Inverting Motor Rotating In
Reverse Direction
104 Paper Guide Solenoid ON
120 Lamp
Ver. 5.2
218
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
Item
161 ADF Paper Feed Motor Rotating
(100% of rotating speed)
162 ADF Paper Feed Motor Rotating
(400% of rotating speed)
163 ADF Transport Motor Rotating
(67% of rotating speed)
164 ADF Transport Motor Rotating
(100% of rotating speed)
165 ADF Transport Motor Rotating
(400% of rotating speed)
166 ADF Paper Feed Roller Clutch
Ver. 5.2
219
Remark
JAN 2006
5.1.4.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Set the machine to Service Mode and press "5" key on the Keypad.
If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.
Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button.
When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s).
No.
Item
00 Country Version
01
Frequency Desired
02
03
Not Used
LSU Startup Speed
04
F5 Mode
Function
0 : Japan
1 : USA/CAN
2 : Europe
3 : Other
0 : Auto
1 : 50 Hz
2 : 60Hz
0 : Low
1 : Full
1 : 5 sec.
2 : 10 sec.
3 : 15 sec.
4 : 20 sec.
6 : 30 sec.
8 : 40 sec.
10 : 50 sec.
12 : 60 sec.
Default Setting
Country Dependent
Ver. 5.2
220
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
Item
07 Language Default
08
09
13
14
15
Ver. 5.2
F5 Mode
Function
0 : English (American)
1 : French
3 : German
4 : Swedish
5 : Italian
6 : Dutch
7 : Portugal
8 : Spanish
9 : Norway
10 : Danish
11 : Finnish
13 : English
17 : Polish
18 : Hungary
19 : Japanese
20 : Czech
21 : Greek
0 : Off
1 : On
0 : Off
1 : Auto
0 : None
2 : 2 min
5 : 5 min
0 : Off
1 : On
0 : None
3 : A4
5 : B5
13 : LETTER
0 : None
1 : A3
2 : B4
3 : A4
4 : A4R
5 : B5
6 : B5R
7 : A5
9 : 8 x 13
10 : 8.5 x 13
11 : LEDGER
12 : LEGAL
13 : LETTER
14 : LETTER R
16 : INVOICE
17 : Auto
221
Default Setting
0 (for USA / Canada)
13 (for Europe)
1
0 (for USA / Canada)
1 (for Europe)
5
1
13 (for USA / Canada)
3 (for Europe)
17
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
Item
16 Paper Size Tray 3 (Sys1)
17
18
19
20
Not Used
ADF
21
Finisher
22
System Console
23
LCT
24
25
Digital QUANTUM
26
2-Sided Unit
27
Ver. 5.2
Not Used
Multi Size Feed Default
F5 Mode
Function
0 : None
1 : A3
2 : B4
3 : A4
4 : A4R
5 : B5
6 : B5R
7 : A5
9 : 8 x 13
10 : 8.5 x 13
11 : LEDGER
12 : LEGAL
13 : LETTER
14 : LETTER R
15 : INVOICE
Same as F5-16
3 : A4
5 : B5
12 : LEGAL
13 : LETTER
14 : LETTER R
Default Setting
0
Same as F5-16
13 (for USA / Canada)
3 (for Europe)
0 : No
1 : Auto
0 : No
1 : Auto
0 : No
1 : Auto
0 : No
1 : Auto
0 : No
1 : Low
2 : Medium
3 : High
0 : Off
1 : On
0 : No
1 : Auto
0 : Upper
1 : Bottom
same as F5-27
same as F5-27
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : Off
1 : On
222
1
1
1
1 (From July)
1
1
0
1
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
Item
35 Not Used
36 Display DD key
37
38
39
40
Double Count
41
Count Up Timing
42
KEY/DEPT. Counter
43
44
45
46
47
48
TH Sensor (DEV)
49
50
51
52
Ver. 5.2
F5 Mode
Function
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : 1000
1 : 3000
2 : 10000
3:0
0 : No
1 : 1 to 2
2 : 2 to 2
3 : B to 2
0 : Landscape
1 : Portrait
2 : Center
0 : No
1 : LDR
2 : LDR/ LGL
(for USA / Canada)
0 : No
1 : A3
2 : A3, B4
(for Other Destinations)
0 : At feed
1 : At exit
0 : No
1 : Key Cnt.
2 : DEPT
3 : Card
Same as F5-41
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : Yes
1 : No
0 : 2 hole
1 : 3 hole
2 : 4 hole
0 : No
1 : Mid
2 : Large
0 : No
1 : Mid
2 : Large
0 : Tip dist
1 : Histgram
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : No
1 : Yes
223
Default Setting
0 (for USA / Canada)
1 (for Europe)
2
1
0
0
0
0
1 (for USA / Canada)
2 (for Europe)
1
0
1
1
0
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
Item
53 2-Sided Auto Shift
54
Margin Reduction
55
56
57
58
59
60
65
66
Interleaving Default
67
68
69
Reduce N in 1 Space
Ver. 5.2
F5 Mode
Function
Default Setting
0 : No
1 : Auto sft
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : 5 mm
1 : 10 mm
2 : 15 mm
3 : 20 mm
0 : 5 mm
1 : 10 mm
2 : 15 mm
3 : 20 mm
0 : 15 mm
1 : 20 mm
2 : 25 mm
3 : 30 mm
0 : Stop
1:3K
2:5K
3:8K
4 : 10 K
0 : Stop
1 : Continue
0 : No
1 : Yes
0 : Any keys
1 : Func + 1
0 : Yes
1 : No
0 : Yes
1 : No
0 : Blank
1 : Copy
0 : Blank
1 : Copy
0 : F, Blank
1 : F, Copy
2 : FB, Blank
3 : FB, Copy
0 : No
1 : Yes
224
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
Item
70 PM (Preventive Maintenance)
Cycle
71
72
Not Used
Disable At Web PM
73
PM (Fuser Web)
74
79
80
Not Used
Paper Size Priority
81
82
Ver. 5.2
F5 Mode
Function
0 : No
1 : 1.5 K
2 : 2.5 K
3: 5K
4 : 10 K
5 : 15 K
6 : 20 K
7 : 30 K
8 : 40 K
9 : 60 K
10 : 80 K
11 : 90 K
12 : 120 K
13 : 150 K (DP-60xx)
14 : 200 K (DP-60xx)
15 : 240 K (DP-60xx)
0 : Continue
1 : Stop
0 : 120 K
1 : 240 K
0 : 1/10
1 : 1/20
2 : 1/30
0 : Errordif
1 : Multilvl
0 : No
1 : Yes
1 : A3
2 : B4
3 : A4
4 : A4R
5 : B5
6 : B5R
8 : A5
9 : 8 x 13
10 : 8.5 x 13
11 : LEDGER
12 : LEGAL
13 : LETTER
14 : LETTER R
15 : INVOICE
0 : B4
1 : 8 x 13
2 : 8.5 x 13
0 : Off
1 : M1, On
2 : M2, On
3 : M1, M2, On
225
Default Setting
12 (DP-35xx/45xx)
15 (DP-60xx)
1
1
1
0
0
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
Item
83 Digital Skyshot Mode
84
85
86
87
Not Used
PM Cycle (ADF)
88
89
Not Used
LAN Speed/Duplex
90
91
92
9394
95
M1, Size
M2, Size
Not Used
96
Bypass Detection
(Factory use only)
97
98
Tray2 Detection
(Factory use only)
99
Ver. 5.2
F5 Mode
Function
Default Setting
0 : No
1 : Freeshp
2 : Parallel
0:L>S>C>B
1 : C >S > L > B
2:L>C>S>B
0 : None
1 : Yes
0 : No
3 : 120 K
4 : 240 K
0 : Auto
1 : 10 Half
2 : 10 Full
3 : 100 Half
4 : 100 Full
0 : Off
1 : Soft
2 : Loud
Set the default size for Manual Skyshot
Mode, M1 and M2.
0 : Japan
1 : USA/CAN
2 : Europe
3 : Other
0 : Japan
1 : USA/CAN
2 : Europe
3 : Other
0 : B4
1 : 8 x 13
2 : 8.5 x 13
3 : LEGAL
0 : Japan
1 : USA/CAN
2 : Europe
0 : B4
1 : 8 x 13
2 : 8.5 x 13
3 : LEGAL
226
70 x 160
95 x 220
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.1.5.
Set the machine to Service Mode and press "6" key on the Keypad.
If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.
Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button.
When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s).
Note:
The Factory Setting is different in each model.
F6 Mode
No.
Item
00
01
02
03
100% selection
Original registration
04
Printer registration
05
06
07
Registration void
08
09
10
11
12
13
Ver. 5.2
Remarks
Setting
Range
-9 - +9 0.1%
227
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F6 Mode
No.
Item
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Remarks
28
Bias Frequency
(Factory use only)
Quantum white density
29
30
31
Fuser temperature
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Ver. 5.2
228
Setting
Range
-8 - +7
0.5mm
-8 - +7
0.5mm
-8 - +7
0.5mm
-92 - +61
3.27V
-56 - +25
-77 - 76
3.92V
-7 - +7
-86 - +40
0.033V
-10 - +10
20V
-5 - +5 1%
-26 - +26
19.5mV
-2 - +2
1KHz
-99 - +99
-99 - +99
-56 - +25
-15 - +15
0.833C
-15 - +15
0.833C
Read only
Read only
Read only
-99 - +99
-255 - +255
-35 - +35
-99 - +99
-10 - +10
5.22uA
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F6 Mode
No.
Item
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
T mode contrast
T/P mode contrast
P mode contrast
Sep. DC Volt. 1-Sided
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
Bk density reference
Bk density output
67
68
69
Ver. 5.2
Remarks
Individual Fine Adjustment for Sheet Bypass
Individual Fine Adjustment for Tray 2
Adjustment for the length of the loop formed
before the copier timing roller.
Adjustment of LCT paper feed.
Adjustment of transfer corona current.
Adjustment of QUANTUM TDC
Image density adjustment for Text mode.
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
Image density adjustment for Text/ Photo
mode.
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
Image density adjustment for Photo mode.
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
Adjustment of PWM value of LSU.
Adjustment of CCD read position.
229
Setting
Range
-99 - +99
-99 - +99
-99 - +99
-99 - +99
-50 - +50
-99 - +99
-10 - +10
5.22uA
-3 - +3
-99 - +99
-99 - +99
-99 - +99
-99 - +99
-42 - +44
0.2mm
-127 - +127
-127 - +127
-127 - +127
-20 - +30
10V
-6 - +8
100V
-20 - +30
10V
-6 - +8
100V
0 - +8
-10 - +10
0.033V
0 - +9
0.5mm
0 - +9
0.5mm
-127 - +127
-127 - +127
-99 - +99
-99 - +99
-50 - +50
0.3mm
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F6 Mode
No.
Item
Remarks
-2 - +2
0 - +3
0 - +3
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
Exposure Voltage
96
Charge Voltage
97
Bias Volt.DC
98
99
Ver. 5.2
Setting
Range
230
-99 - +99
-2 - +2
-56 - +25
-77 - +76
3.92V
-92 - +61
3.27V
0 - 255
0 - 255
-99 - +99
0.3mm
-99 - +99
0.3mm
-99 - +99
0.3mm
-99 - +99
0.3mm
-99 - +99
0.05mm
-99 - +99
0.3mm
-127 - 127
0.3mm
-9 - +9
0.1%
-9 - +9
0.1%
-56 - +25
-95 - +61
3.27V
-77 - +76
3.92V
-99 - +99
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.1.6.
Set the machine to Service Mode and press "7" key on the Keypad.
If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.
Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button.
When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
F7 Mode
Service
Item
Mode
F7
Electronic 00 List Print
Counters 01 Key Operator ID Code
Remarks
Ver. 5.2
231
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F7 Mode
Service
Item
Remarks
Mode
F7
Electronic 03 Paper Feed 00 Sheet Bypass Count Total count of paper fed from the sheet
Counters
Count
bypass.
01 1st Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 1st
paper tray.
02 2nd Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 2nd
paper tray.
03 3rd Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 3rd
paper tray.
04 4th Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 4th
paper tray.
05 LCT Tray Count
Total count of paper fed from the LCT.
06 2-sided Count
Total count of 2-sided Print.
07 A4 / Letter Count
Total count of A4 / Letter Print.
08 A4-R / Letter-R Count Total count of A4-R / Letter-R Print.
09 A3 / Ledger Count
Total count of A3 / Ledger Print.
10 B4 / Legal Count
Total count of B4 / Legal Print.
04 Scanner
00 ADF Count
Total count of originals fed through the
Count
ADF.
01 ADF Read Count
Total count of originals scanned through
the ADF.
02 Scanner Count
Total count of scanning operations.
03 Scanner Read Count Total count of scanner readings.
05 Copy Count 00 Copy Print Count
Total count of copies printed.
01 Copy Scan Count
Total count of copies scanned.
06 PC Count
00 PC Print Count
Total count printed from PC.
01 PC Scan Count
Total count scanned to PC.
07 Fax Count
00 Fax Transmit Count
Total count of Fax transmitted.
01 Fax Receive Count
Total count of Fax received.
02 Fax Print Count
Total count of Fax printed.
08 Clear All Counts
All counters are cleared.
Ver. 5.2
232
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.1.7.
Set the machine to Service Mode and press "8" key on the Keypad.
If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.
Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button.
When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
F8 Mode
No.
00
Item
Exposure Lamp replacement
07
08
09
10
11-12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Ver. 5.2
Remarks
When replacing the exposure lamp.
Procedure:
a) Press the Start key to move the exposure lamp to
the position (approx. 250 mm from the optics
home position) where it can be replaced.
b) To return the optical system to the home position,
press the CLEAR key.*
a) Each time the arrow button is pressed, the
machine errors or paper jam codes stored in
memory are displayed, beginning with the oldest
code.
Note:
Only the 30 most recent codes are displayed.
a) Press the Reset key.
A Message "Error code can be cleared with the
Start key" is displayed on the LCD.*
b) Press the Start key.
Lock operation for Scanner Unit.
Adjustment operation of Toner Density.
Adjustment operation of Drum Charge.
Adjustment operation of Black Density sensor.
Adjustment operation of Black Density sensor gain.
Print out the QUANTUM Test Pattern.
Print out the Test Pattern 1.
Print out the Test Pattern 2.
233
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F8 Mode
No.
19
20
21
22
Item
Move mirror to lock
Ver. 5.2
Remarks
a) Press the Start key to move the mirror unit to the
locked position for transporting the copier.
b) When the mirror unit is locked, the machine will
not accept any numerical key input.
Note:
The locking operation is automatically reset when
the Power switch is turned ON again.
Adjustment of TDC sensor.
Print out the Test Pattern 3.
Print out the Test Pattern 4.
234
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.1.8.
Set the machine to Service Mode and press "9" key on the Keypad.
If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.
Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button.
When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
F9 Mode
Service
Item
Mode
F9
Unit
00 Fax Service Mode
Maintenance 01 Service Alert Tel #
02 Firmware
Version
Remarks
00 SC
01 SC boot
02 PNL
03 SPC
04 Finisher
05 FAX Modem
06 Not Used
07 SC2
00 F5/F6 Parameters
Ver. 5.2
235
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F9 Mode
Service
Item
Mode
F9
Unit
06 RAM
00 Parameter Initialize
Maintenance
Initialize
10 Program
Copy
11
12
13
14
Ver. 5.2
236
Remarks
Resets the Fax and Function
parameters to default values.
Note: Turn the Power Switch on the Left
Side of the machine to the OFF and
back to the ON position to
enable the parameter settings.
Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.
Clears All Jobs, All Preset Data,
Parameter Initialize & Resets the
Counters (Fax).
Clears the LBP fuser error.
Updates the firmware in the machine
with the Master Firmware Card.
Updates the firmware in the machine
with the Parallel Port.
Onboard F-ROM 4MB
Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 8MB
Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a)
Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b)
Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 8MB
Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a)
Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b)
Creates a Master Firmware Card using
the Firmware Update Kit. A 4MB or 8MB
Flash Memory Card will be required
depending upon the model.
Configuration for Program copy.
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.
Caution:
The factory default parameters are preset (country dependent) for optimum performance and in
compliance with the local telecommunication regulations/standards, and do not need to be changed.
Changing some of these parameters may cause the unit to be no longer compliant or become
inoperable.
5.2.1.
5.2.2.
The following service modes are provided to assist you in setting operational functions of the unit and
determining the condition of the unit.
No.
Service Mode
00 Not Used
01 Function Parameter Setting
02
03
04
Modem Tests
05
06
Not Used
RAM Initialize
07
08
Not Used
Check & Call
09
System Maintenance
Ver. 5.2
Description
Allows changes to the function parameters (the home
position, etc.).
Factory use only.
Prints the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer
Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace and Toner Order
Form.
Generates various binary, tonal and DTMF signals, by the
modem.
Initialize RAM and restore the default value of the function
parameters.
Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the ON
position to enable the parameter settings.
Allows input of information for Service Alert Report,
Maintenance Alert Report and Toner Order Form.
Used for Firmware Update, Firmware Backup, Parameter
Restore, Parameter Backup, Transferring Firmware from the
PC to the Flash Card and Sending a Received File during a
fatal printer error.
237
JAN 2006
5.2.3.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.
Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
No.
000
001
002
003
004
Ver. 5.2
238
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
Ver. 5.2
239
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
Parameter
012 DTMF LEVEL
013 G3 RX EQL
014 G3 TX EQL
018 RX START
022 SIGNAL
INTERVAL
1 = 2400 bps
2 = 4800 bps
3 = 7200 bps
4 = 9600 bps
5 = TC7200
6 = TC9600
7 = 12000 bps
8 = 14400 bps
1 = 2400 bps
2 = 4800 bps
3 = 7200 bps
4 = 9600 bps
5 = TC7200
6 = TC9600
7 = 12000 bps
8 = 14400 bps
1 = Off
2 = On
3 = Select
1 = Off (Invalid)
2 = On (Valid)
1 = Off (without EP Tone)
2 = On (with EP Tone)
1 = 100 ms
2 = 200 ms
3 = 500 ms
023 TCF CHECK
1 = Normal (Short)
2 = Long
024 CED
1 = 1080 Hz (non ITU-T)
FREQUENCY
2 = 2100 Hz
025 COMM. START- 1 = First
UP
2 = Second
Ver. 5.2
240
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
Ver. 5.2
241
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1 = Normal
2 = Rough
1 = 10 pps
2 = 20 pps
1 = Off
2 = On
1 = Off
2 = On
1 = Off
2 = On
Ver. 5.2
242
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
~
079
080 ORIGINAL
LEAD EDGE
ADF
081 ORIGINAL
TRAIL ADF
Ver. 5.2
-99
~
+99
-127
~
+127
1=1m
2=2m
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
Parameter
083 Not Used
084 LINE AS NO
PAPER
085 Not Used
086 REDUCTION
FINE
087 DARKER LEVEL
088 NORMAL
LEVEL
089 LIGHTER
LEVEL
090 Not Used
~
091
092 SMOOTHING
1 = Off
2 = On
0 = Lightest Contrast
~
15 = Darkest Contrast
1 = Off
2 = On
Ver. 5.2
Function
1 = Scroll
2 = Direct
244
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.
Parameter
116 OVERWRITE
WARNING
117 Not Used
~
121
122 LDAP
1 = Off
2 = On
0 = Address Book
1 = Mode Set
1:128
0-31
32-63
64-127
2:256
0-63
64-127
128-255
Setting
3:512
4:1024
0-127
0-255
128-255
256-511
256-511
512-1023
5:2048
0-511
512-1023
1024-2047
6:Off
Always
-
Note 3: Function Parameter No. 071 (Total Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN
Signal
MCF/PIP
RTP/PIP
RTN/PIN
1:5%
0-2
3-4
5-
Setting
2:10%
3:15%
0-4
0-7
5-9
8-14
1015-
4:20%
0-9
10-19
20-
Note 4: The default setting of parameters depends on the countrys specifications or regulations.
Print the Function Parameter List to confirm the default settings.
Ver. 5.2
245
JAN 2006
5.2.4.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
From this Service Mode you can print the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All
Document File, Protocol Trace and the Toner Order Form.
5.2.4.1.
Select the "01 Function Parameter List" on the Touch Panel display.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
Ver. 5.2
246
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
TX LEVEL:[-9dBm] -9dBm
RX LEVEL:[-43dBm] -43dBm
DTMF LEVEL:[-5dBm] -5dBm
G3 RX EQL:[0dB] 0dB
G3 TX EQL:[0dB] 0dB
----------------TX START:[14400bps ] 14400bps
RX START:[14400bps ] 14400bps
ITU-T V.34:[On] On
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
VERSION: AAV11502AU
TX/RX/PRT/CPY:000080/000168/000003/000000
PRINT COUNTER:[Off] Off
---------------------------------------------NYSE FAX FORWARD:[Off] Off
NYSE LOCAL PRINT:[Inc] Inc
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
ITU-T ECM:[On] On
EP TONE:[Off] Off
SIG. INTERVAL:[500ms] 500ms
TCF CHECK:[Normal] Normal
CED FREQ.:[2100Hz] 2100Hz
COMM. START-UP:[1'st] 1'st
NON-STANDARD:[On] On
SHORT PROTOCOL B:[On] On
SHORT PROTOCOL D:[On] On
REMOTE DIAG.:[On] On
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
------------------SMOOTHING:[On] On
----------------------------------------------------------------
Note:The power must be reset for the new parameter settings to take effect.
-PANASONIC DP-6030******************************** -PANASONIC DP-6030 - ****** -12345678901234567890- ***********
Note:
1. The contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the countrys regulations.
2. * mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default.
Ver. 5.2
247
JAN 2006
5.2.4.2.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
A test pattern prints out for checking the page memory (IC120 and IC121 on the SC PCB) and printer
mechanism using the following procedure.
Select the "03 Print Param. List/Report" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the "03 Page Memory Test" on the Touch Panel display.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
SC BOOT
PNL
SPC
FINISHER
FAX MODEM
PDL FONT1
SC2
Ver. 5.2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
M30
AAT00001PU
60cpm T40000
0702
TX/RX/PRT/CPY:000123/000456/000789/000333
MEMORY SIZE: (2MB)
MAC ADDRESS: 08002300AB5F
SHIPMENT SET
CAV00001b
CAV00008aPU
248
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.4.3.
Printer Report
All printer errors are logged on the Printer Report which can be printed by the following procedure.
Select the "03 Print Param. List/Report" on the Touch Panel display.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
CUSTOMER ID
: 1234567890123456
FIRMWARE VERSION
SC
SC BOOT
PNL
SPC
:
:
:
:
BAV00008PU
M30
AAT00001PU
60cpm T40000
TRANSMIT COUNTER
RECEIVE COUNTER
COPY COUNTER
PRINT COUNTER
:
:
:
:
000475
000398
000083
000016
00-00000016
-PANASONIC
***** DP-6030 *******************-PANAFAX
Ver. 5.2
-*******-12345678901234567890-**************
249
JAN 2006
5.2.4.4.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Select the "05 All Document Files" on the Touch Panel display.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
Ver. 5.2
250
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.4.5.
Protocol Trace
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
*************** PROTOCOL LOG. REPORT ****************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 16:56 *******
STATUS
MODE
SPEED
REMOTE CAPA.
LOCAL CAPA.
:
:
:
:
:
OK
ECM-TX (STANDARD)
9600bps 0MS/L
DIS 00 CE B9 C4 80 12
TSI 2B 20 20 20 38 37 2B 2B 2B 2B
39 38 36 36 35 34 37 38 38 30
DCS 00 C6 F8 44
COMMAND LOG.
REMOTE
: NSF
CSI
DIS
CFR
LOCAL
:
TSI
DCS
PIX
PPS-EOP
-----------------------------------------------------------------REMOTE
: MCF
LOCAL
:
DCN
-PANASONIC
****************************-PANASONIC DP-6010-*************-12345678901234567890-***************
Ver. 5.2
251
JAN 2006
5.2.4.6.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Toner Order Form can be printed out manually by the following procedure.
Select the "03 Print Param. List/Report" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the "07 Toner Order Form" on the Touch Panel display.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
Ver. 5.2
252
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
*************************************
>
TONER BOTTLE ORDER FORM
<
*************************************
**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1)
To order a replacement Bottle from your Authorized Dealer
Panasonic Corp. (2)
1 201 111 5555 (3)
1 201 111 4444 (4)
by Phone:
by Fax:
Bill to:
Attention:
Attention:
Phone No.:
Phone No.:
(6)
Serial No.:
Quantity Required:
/
Print your name and title
Explanation of Contents
(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed)
Up to 25 digits
Up to 36 digits
Up to 36 digits
(5) Customer ID
DQ-TU24D : DP-3510/4510
DQ-TU241G : DP-3520/3530/4520/4530
DQ-TU35D : DP-6010
DQ-TU351G : DP-6020/6030
The order number(s) may differ depending on the Model and the
Destination.
Ver. 5.2
253
JAN 2006
5.2.5.
5.2.5.1.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure.
Select the "04 MODEM Tests" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the desired parameter on the Touch Panel display and touch the "CLOSE" button.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
Binary Signal Table
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Ver. 5.2
Signals
V21 300bps
V27ter 2400bps
V27ter 4800bps
V29 7200bps
V29 9600bps
V17 TC7200bps
V17 TC9600bps
V33 12000bps
V33 14400bps
254
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.5.2.
Tonal Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the tonal signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure.
Select the "04 MODEM Tests" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the desired parameter on the Touch Panel display and touch the "CLOSE" button.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
Tonal Signal Table
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Ver. 5.2
Signals
462 Hz
1080 Hz
1100 Hz
1300 Hz
1650 Hz
1850 Hz
2100 Hz
255
JAN 2006
5.2.5.3.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
DTMF Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) signal output.
The DTMF signal can be generated using the following procedure.
Select the "04 MODEM Tests" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the "03 DTM Single Tone" or "DTMF Dual Tone" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the desired parameter on the Touch Panel display and touch the "CLOSE" button.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
DTMF Single Tone Table
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Ver. 5.2
256
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.5.4.
This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure. (V.34)
Select the "04 MODEM Tests" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the desired parameter on the Touch Panel display and touch the "CLOSE" button.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
Binary Signal Table
Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Ver. 5.2
Signals
V34 2400 sr 2400 bps
V34 2400 sr 4800 bps
V34 2400 sr 7200 bps
V34 2400 sr 9600 bps
V34 2400 sr 12000 bps
V34 2400 sr 14400 bps
V34 2400 sr 16800 bps
V34 2400 sr 19200 bps
V34 2400 sr 21600 bps
V34 2800 sr 4800 bps
V34 2800 sr 7200 bps
V34 2800 sr 9600 bps
V34 2800 sr 12000 bps
V34 2800 sr 14400 bps
V34 2800 sr 16800 bps
V34 2800 sr 19200 bps
V34 2800 sr 21600 bps
V34 2800 sr 24000 bps
V34 2800 sr 26400 bps
V34 3000 sr 4800 bps
V34 3000 sr 7200 bps
Number
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Signals
V34 3000 sr 9600 bps
V34 3000 sr 12000 bps
V34 3000 sr 14400 bps
V34 3000 sr 16800 bps
V34 3000 sr 19200 bps
V34 3000 sr 21600 bps
V34 3000 sr 24000 bps
V34 3000 sr 26400 bps
V34 3000 sr 28800 bps
V34 3200 sr 4800 bps
V34 3200 sr 7200 bps
V34 3200 sr 9600 bps
V34 3200 sr 12000 bps
V34 3200 sr 14400 bps
V34 3200 sr 16800 bps
V34 3200 sr 19200 bps
V34 3200 sr 21600 bps
V34 3200 sr 24000 bps
V34 3200 sr 26400 bps
V34 3200 sr 28800 bps
V34 3200 sr 31200 bps
257
Number
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
Signals
V34 3429 sr 4800 bps
V34 3429 sr 7200 bps
V34 3429 sr 9600 bps
V34 3429 sr 12000 bps
V34 3000 sr 19200 bps
V34 3429 sr 16800 bps
V34 3429 sr 19200 bps
V34 3429 sr 21600 bps
V34 3429 sr 24000 bps
V34 3429 sr 26400 bps
V34 3429 sr 28800 bps
V34 3429 sr 31200 bps
V34 3429 sr 33600 bps
ANSam
CM
JM
INFO0c & TONEB
INFO0c & TONEA
PPh & AC & ALT
JAN 2006
5.2.6.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Initializes RAM and restores the Function Parameters to their default values.
Note:
This operation should be performed when the unit is first installed.
Select the "06 RAM initialize" on the Touch Panel display.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
RAM Initialization Table
Ver. 5.2
No.
01
Initialize Mode
Parameter Initialize
02
03
04
05
06
07
Journal Clear
Auto Dial Clear
Program Dial Clear
08
09
LOGO/ID/PSWD Clear
LBP Error Log Clear
Shipment Set
Description
Restores the Fax and Function Parameters to default
values.
Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the
ON position to enable the parameter settings.
Clears the Journal contents.
Clears the One-touch, ABBR Numbers and Phone Books.
Clears the Program keys.
Clears the Logo, ID, Polling Password.
Clears the Printer Error Log.
Deletes all setting information, except parameter number
80 and 81, then set default values.
Deletes all information in the Flash Memory.
Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.
258
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.7.
5.2.7.1.
This feature enables the Authorized Servicing Dealers to manage and improve the machine maintenance to
their customers by alerting them of equipment problems. It also can be used as a Supply Sales Tool by
alerting the Dealer that the unit is running Low on Toner. The function overview is as follows:
1. The machines printer error information is stored in the Printer Report.
2. The printer report can be manually printed when required.
3. When printer errors occurs, the unit can automatically transmit the Service Alert Report to the
pre-registered telephone number or email address.
4. When the unit detects Low Toner or PM counter reached the maintenance timing, it can automatically
transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address.
Select the "08 Check & Call" on the Touch Panel display.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
5.2.7.2.
Printer Reports
Ver. 5.2
259
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Error
Code
Ex-xx
E13
Jxx
Uxx
U13
Log
O
O
O
O
Tx
Remarks
Report
S
Refer to the Mechanical Error Code (E Code) Table. (Sect. 4.5.3.)
Out of Toner.
Refer to the Jam Error Code (J Code) Table. (Sect. 4.5.2.)
Refer to the User Error Code (U Code) Table. (Sect. 4.5.1.)
M
Low Toner.
Note:
TX (Transmission) Report: S = Service Alert Report, M = Maintenance Alert Report
Ver. 5.2
260
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.7.3.
: 01234567890
(1) CUSTOMER ID
(2) FIRMWARE VERSION
SC
PNL
SPC
: ABC COMPANY
00-00000013
: BAV00008PU
: AAT00001PU
: 6-cpm T40000
CURRENT
:
13
:
13
:
9
:
1
:
13
:
13
:
1
: 240986
:
13
:
13
:
1.00
:
0.03
:
0.01
:
:
:
:
:
:
PM CYCLE
240000
(------)
(------)
----------(------)
0
3
10
0
0
0
:
:
:
:
:
CURRENT
0
3
10
0
0
:
:
:
:
1
1
9
9
:
:
3
4
:
:
0
6
:
:
:
0
0
0
2-Sided Count
A4/LETTER Count
A4-R/LETTER-R Count
A3/LEDGER Count
B4/LEGAL Count
- ***** -31415926535897932384-*********
Explanation of Contents
(1) Customer ID
(2) Firmware Version
(3) Counter Information
(4) Print Error
DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030 Only
Ver. 5.2
261
JAN 2006
5.2.7.4.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
: 01234567890
: ABC COMPANY (2)
(3)
FIRMWARE VERSION
SC
: BAV00008PU
PNL
: AAT00001PU
SPC
: 6-cpm T40000
TRANSMIT COUNTER
RECEIVE COUNTER
COPY COUNTER
PRINT COUNTER
:
:
:
:
000244
000082
000000
000000
(4)
-LOGO PANASONIC
************************************ -CHARACTER ID
- ***** -31415926535897932384-***********
Explanation of Contents
(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed)
(2) Customer ID
Ver. 5.2
DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030 Only
262
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.7.5.
**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1)
To order a replacement Bottle from your Authorized Dealer
Panasonic Corp. (2)
by Phone:
by Fax:
Bill to:
Attention:
Attention:
Phone No.:
Phone No.:
(6)
Serial No.:
Quantity Required:
/
Print your name and title
Explanation of Contents
(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed)
Up to 25 digits
Up to 36 digits
Up to 36 digits
(5) Customer ID
DQ-TU24D : DP-3510/4510
DQ-TU241G : DP-3520/3530/4520/4530
DQ-TU35D : DP-6010
DQ-TU351G : DP-6020/6030
The order number(s) may differ depending on the Model and the
Destination.
Ver. 5.2
263
JAN 2006
5.2.7.6.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
: 01234567890
(1) CUSTOMER ID
(2) FIRMWARE VERSION
SC
PNL
SPC
: ABC COMPANY
: BAV00008PU
: AAT00001PU
: 60cpm T400000
CURRENT
:
13
:
13
:
9
:
1
:
13
:
13
:
1
: 240986
:
13
:
13
:
1.00
:
0.03
:
0.01
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
3
10
0
0
0
14000
PM CYCLE
240000
(------)
(------)
----------(------)
:
:
:
:
:
CURRENT
0
3
10
0
0
:
:
:
:
1
1
9
9
:
:
3
4
:
:
0
6
:
:
:
0
0
0
2-Sided Count
A4/LETTER Count
A4-R/LETTER-R Count
A3/LEDGER Count
B4/LEGAL Count
PRINT ERROR:
NO. DATE & TIME
ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME
ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01
00-00000013 |
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01
00-00000013 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------LOGO PANASONIC
***** DP-6030 *********************** -CHARACTER ID
- ***** -31415926535897932384-*********
Explanation of Contents
(1) Customer ID
(2) Firmware Version
(3) Counter Information
(4) Call Counter Pre-Set Value
(5) Serial Number
Ver. 5.2
DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030 Only
264
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.8.
5.2.8.1.
Overview
This Service Mode is used to maintain the machine. Use the following procedure for System Maintenance.
Select the "09 System maintenance" on the Touch Panel display.
Select the "01 Send RCVD File". The display changes to the Fax Mode.
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
System Maintenance Table
No.
Maintenance Mode
01 SEND RCV'D FILE
Ver. 5.2
Description
Transfers documents from memory to another fax machine
during a fatal printer error.
265
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
6 System Description
6.1.
Copy Process
(-DC)
Charger
Discharge Lamp
Laser Exposure
Cleaning
Developer
Photo Electric
Conversion
Original
Toner
Exit
Paper Feed
ADU
Primary Charge:
Image Exposure:
Developing:
Illumination
Latent Charge
Image
Charge Corona
Toner
Drum
Aluminum
Layer
Drum Surface
Approximately-750V DC
Transfer/Separation
Doctor Blade
Gap = 0.6~
0.7 mm
Latent
Charge
Image
Magnetic
Image
Roller
Bias: -550 V
Fusing:
Cleaning:
Latent Image
Heat Roller
Fuser Lamp
Cleaning
Blade
Drum
Paper
Paper
Separation
Charge (AC)
Transfer
Charge
(+DC)
Pressure
Roller
Discharge Lamp:
Discharge
Lamp
Ver. 5.2
266
JAN 2006
6.2.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Photoreceptor Drum
Do not touch the surface (with your hands or anything else).
Stand the drum with the drum gear facing upward during storage.
- Be careful not to smear the surface with saliva, water, oil, etc.
- Do not store in places where the temperature is high.
- Do not store it in strong light (such as direct sunlight or on the window).
- Do not expose it to chemical gas or vapor.
- Do not store the drum unit with the photoreceptor drum installed without covering
it with clean paper.
(2)
Toner Developer
Ver. 5.2
267
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
268
JAN 2006
6.3.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
To improve the copy quality, a new Toner Density Controller (New Digital QUANTUM System) was
developed.
The most important aim was to stabilize the Toner Density under various office environments.
As a result, the current QUANTUM System was improved with additional Sensors, Parameters and
Software.
The following diagram illustrates this New System.
Laser Power
New
Digital
QUANTUM
Laser Unit
Grid Voltage (1)
(Feedback of QUANTUM)
Grid Voltage
Drum
Toner
Density
Control
Timer/
Counter
(2)(3)(4)
White
Black
Image Density
Sensors
Toner Density
Output
Bias Voltage
Separation Voltage
Transfer Current
Electronic Pattern
Halftone
Transfer
Image
Control
Black
Humidity (5)
Humidity Sensor
Temperature (5)
Temperature Sensor
Control Point
High Density
Image Density (ID)
1.3
Ideal Curve
Middle Density
0.35
Ver. 5.2
269
255
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
270
JAN 2006
6.4.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The i-ADF (Inverting Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds documents into the unit, one
original at a time. When duplex mode is selected, this feature enables two-sided faxing or copying of
the original(s).
Its main features are:
1. Place originals Face-Up
2. Correct Order Stacking (Collation Mode)
3. Paper Feed Mechanism with Pre-Feed Roller
The following is the ADF / i-ADF Mechanical operation description.
6.4.1.
1. Initialization
The ADF begins its operation by turning on the Feed Motor for a specified time, lowering the Pickup
Roller to re-set the Original Stopper to its standby position.
2. Original Setting and Size Sensors
Place the original(s) face up on the ADF until the leading edge stops against the Original Stopper
(513).
Adjust the Original Guides (403, 406) to center the original on the ADF. The Original Stopper (513)
prevents originals from skewing and multiple feeding. The Original Detection Sensor (401) detects the
presence of documents on the ADF when the original(s) actuate Original Sensor Actuator (521) on the
ADF Cover. The two Sensors mounted on the SNS PC Board which is installed in the Original Tray are
actuated by the Original Guides (403, 406), their position determines the original's width and the
Original Length Sensor 1 (401) and Length Sensor 2 (401) detect the length of the original.
3. Feeding and Separation
When the Start button is pressed, the ADF Motor 1 (925) starts to rotate and drive the Pickup Roller
(511). The 1st original is fed into the Paper Feed Roller (508) and the Separation Roller (610) with the
Torque Limiter Assembly preventing multiple feeding.
4. Transmission and Ejection
The original is fed into the Registration Roller 1 (817) and when the original actuates the Registration
Sensor 2 (401), the Paper Feed Roller (508) stops rotating. The Registration Sensor 2 (401) detects
the scanning position and the Registration Roller 2 (818) and Transport Roller (816) transport the
original while scanning. The Stamp Head (724) stamps an [X] mark on the front of the original after the
document is successfully transmitted or stored. It consists of the Stamp Head (724) and Stamp
Solenoid (726). The Exit Roller (814) feeds and ejects the original out of the ADF. If there are additional
originals on the ADF, the next one is fed into the feeder.
5. Final Operation
After ejecting the last original from the ADF, the Clutch reverses the direction of rotation raising the
Original Stopper (513) to its standby position.
6.4.2.
i-ADF Operation
The i-ADF automatically inverts 2-sided original(s) for faxing or copying of the second side. This
feature enables your machine to perform duplex faxing or copying.
An i-ADF (Inverting Automatic Document Feeder) functions like the ADF with the main exception being
the original eject path after scanning. The following is the description of the main differences.
1. Switching from the ADF Mode to the i-ADF Mode
After passing through the Read Point, the path of the original is switched over by the Selection Guide 1
(815), to the Exit Roller (814) or to the Inverting Roller (809). For single-sided scanning, the Selection
Ver. 5.2
271
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Guide 1 (815) is rotated clockwise by the Selection Solenoid (621) guiding the original to the Exit Roller
(814). For double-side scanning, the Selection Guide 1 (815) is rotated counter-clockwise by the
Selection Solenoid (621) guiding the original to the Inverting Roller (809). The Selection Guide 1 (815)
moves only once, in the direction according to whether a single or double-side scanning is selected
(Copier or Fax) before the Start button is pressed.
It will remain in this position until a different operation is performed (i.e. if the last operation was 2-sided
scanning, a single-side scanning is performed).
2. Scanning the Front and the Back Side of an Original
The scanning of the Front and Back side of a 2-sided original is accomplished by means of the
Selection Guide 1 (815) and Selection Guide 2 (713).
After the Front side of the original is scanned, the original is transported through the Selection Guide 1
(815), through the Selection Guide 2 (713) that was rotated counter-clockwise by the Selection
Solenoid (621) and is carried beyond the Inverting Roller (809) and upper Pinch Rollers (626) into the
Sub Tray. The original is carried for a specified period of time after the trailing edge of the original
triggers the Selection Sensor (401) and stops within 10 to 20 mm from exiting the rollers. Then, the
Selection Guide 2 (713) is rotated clockwise by the Pinch Roller Solenoid Assembly (615) and the
reverse rotation of the ADF Motor 1 (925) pulls the original back around the Registration Roller 1 (817)
and proceeds to scan the Back side of the original.
3. Eject by Reverse Rotation
After the Back is scanned, the original is transported through the Selection Guide 1 (815), through the
Selection Guide 2 (713) and is carried beyond the Inverting Roller (809) and lower Pinch Rollers (626),
into the Sub Tray (416), again stopping 10 to 20 mm from exiting the rollers.
The Selection Guide 2 (713) is rotated clockwise by the Pinch Roller Solenoid Assembly (621) and the
reverse rotation of the ADF Motor 1 (925) pulls the original back around the Registration Roller 1 (817),
however, this time the original is routed to the Exit Roller (814) and exits into the ADF Base.
(A3)
420 mm
r)
m (Ledge
431.8 m
(B4)
364 mm
m (FLS1.
(A4-R)
330.2 m
Original Guide
297 mm
Registration Sensor 1
Registration Sensor 3
(B5-R)
Original Tray
Separation
Roller
257 mm
(A5)
210 mm (INVOICE)
m
215.9 m
2)
4. Sub Tray
The Inverting ADF system includes a Sub Tray (416), which supports the originals during the ejection
mode of the double-side scanning operation.
Registration Roller 1
Inverting Guide Sheet
Inverting Roller
Sub Tray
Exit Roller
Exit Sensor
Read Point
Registration Roller 2
Registration Sensor 2
Selection Guide 2
Selection Guide 1
Ver. 5.2
272
JAN 2006
6.5.
Ver. 5.2
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Function
+12 VDC Power Supply
+24 VDC Power Supply
+24 VDC Power Supply
+24 VDC Power Supply
+24 VDC Power Supply
+24 VDC Power Supply
+24 VDC Power Supply
+3.3 VDC Power Supply
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5 VDC Power Supply
+5 VDC Power Supply
AC Power Supply
AC Power Supply (Though Front Door SW)
AC Power Supply
AC Power Supply
AC Power Supply (Though Front Door SW)
AC Power Supply
Fuser Relay
FIFO Clock
Registration Sensor 1 Signal
ADU Intermediate Sensor Signal
ADU Sensor Signal
ADU Registration Sensor Signal
Inverting Path Sensor Detection Signal
FIFO Data Out
FIFO Data In
FIFO Enable
FIFO Load
FIFO Latch
ADF Main Motor Clock
ADF Paper Feed Motor Clock
Registration Roller Clutch Control Signal
Registration Sensor 2 Signal
System Reset Signal
Inverting Clutch 1 Control Signal
Inverting Clutch 2 Control Signal
HDD Address Bus
HDD Address Bus
HDD Address Bus
HDD Interrupt Signal
Primary HDD Select Signal
Secondary HDD Select Signal
HDD Data Bus
273
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Signal Name
ATD1
ATD10
ATD11
ATD12
ATD13
ATD14
ATD15
ATD2
ATD3
ATD4
ATD5
ATD6
ATD7
ATD8
ATD9
ATDASP
ATDMAACK
ATDMAREQ
ATIO16
ATIORD
ATIORDY
ATIOWR
ATRST
BLKCLP
BMA
BMAB
BMB
BMBB
BPSN
CDSN1
CDSN2
CHPSN1
CHPSN2
CLIPIN
CLMM1
CLMM2
CPPSN1
CPPSN2
CRRSN1
CSEL
CT
DDFL
DDFM
DFCLK
DFDIN
DFENB
DFLD
Ver. 5.2
Function
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
HDD Data Bus
Device Active Signal
DMA ACK Signal
DMA Request Signal
HDD 16 bits Transfer Control Signal
HDD Data Read Signal
HDD Data Ready Signal
HDD Data Write Signal
Reset Signal
AFE Black Level Clamp Switch Signal
Toner Bottle Motor A Clock
Toner Bottle Motor AB Clock
Toner Bottle Motor B Clock
Toner Bottle Motor BB Clock
Toner Bottle Position Sensor Signal
Density Sensor 1 Signal
Density Sensor 2 Signal
Cleaner Home Position Sensor 1 Signal
Cleaner Home Position Sensor 2 Signal
AFE Sample Hold Clamp Signal
Corona Wire Cleaner Motor Control Signal
Corona Wire Cleaner Motor Control Signal
Paper Path Sensor 1 Signal
Paper Path Sensor 2 Signal
Paper Path Sensor Signal
Cable Select Signal
Total Counter
Dust Fan Lock Detection Signal
Dust Fan Control Signal
Driver FIFO Load
Driver FIFO Data In
Driver FIFO Enable
Driver FIFO Clock
274
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Signal Name
DFLTH
DFOUT
DFRST
DMBRAKE
DMCLK
DMCLK
DMLD
DMPS
DOSN
DXCL1
DXSLCNT1
DXSLCNT2
DXSN
ELPCNT
EXDOSN2
EXFL1
EXFL2
EXFL3
EXFM1
EXFM2
EXFM3
EXSN
FULP1
FULP2
FULP3
GND
GOPSW1
GREFCNT
HEATL
HFCL
HFSOL
HPESN
HPSN
HSSN1
HSSN2
HSSN3
HSYNC
HUMSN
HVBACCLK
HVBACCNT
HVBDCCNT
HVCNT
HVDACCNT
HVDDCCNT
HVLKB
HVLKC
HVLKD
Ver. 5.2
Function
Driver FIFO Latch
Driver FIFO Data Out
Driver FIFO Data Reset
OPC Drum Motor Brake
Drum Motor Clock
OPC Drum Motor Clock
OPC Drum Motor Lock Detection Signal
OPC Drum Motor Start/Stop
Door Open Sensor Detection Signal
ADU Clutch 1 Control Signal
Inverting Solenoid Control 1 Signal
Inverting Solenoid Control 2 Signal
Inverting Path Sensor Detection Signal
Discharge Lamp
Paper Exit Door Sensor Detection Signal
Exit Fan 1 Lock Detection Signal
Exit Fan 2 Lock Detection Signal
Exit Fan 3 Lock Detection Signal
Exit Fan 1 Control Signal
Exit Fan 2 Control Signal
Exit Fan 3 Control Signal
Paper Exit Sensor Detection Signal
AC Power Supply
AC Power Supply
AC Power Supply
Ground
Developer Missing Detection
Grid Reference PWM
AC Power Supply
Sheet Bypass Clutch Control Signal
Sheet Bypass Solenoid Control Signal
Sheet Bypass Sensor Detection Signal
Scanner Home Position Sensor Signal
Sheet Bypass Sensor 1 Signal
Sheet Bypass Sensor 2 Signal
Sheet Bypass Sensor 3 Signal
Horizontal Synchronous Signal
Temp Humidity Sensor Signal
Bias AC Clock
Bias AC ON/OFF%% PWM
Bias DC ON/OFF%% PWM
Charge Corona ON/OFF%% PWM
Separation AC ON/OFF%% PWM
Separation DC ON/OFF%% PWM
Bias Leak Detection
High Voltage Leak Detection
Separation Leak Detection
275
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Signal Name
HVLKT
HVTCNT
IICSCL
IICSDA
IPRXD
IPTXD
KCS
KCT
KCTCNT
KYE
L1 (R)
L2 (T)
LAZENB
LAZERA
LAZERB
LAZREF
LBSN1
LBSN1
LBSN2
LCCFDIN
LCDOSN
LCLUM1
LCLUM2
LCMA
LCMAB
LCMB
LCMBB
LCRRSN
LCSDSN
LCSOL
LLBSN
LLUM
LMA
LMAB
LMB
LMBB
LMCLK
LOPSN
LPCNT
LPCNT
LPESN
LPESN
LPEWSN1
LPEWSN2
LPEWSN3
LPFCL
LPFCL
Ver. 5.2
Function
Bias Transfer Leak Detection
Bias Transfer ON/OFF%% PWM
IIC Transmission Clock
IIC Transmission Signal
Finisher IPC Reception
Finisher IPC Transmission
Counter Detect Signal
Key Counter
Card Counter
Connector Key
Line Signal
Line Signal
Laser Enable
Laser Compulsion Lighting A
Laser Compulsion Lighting B
Laser Reference
Upper Limit Sensor Signal
Upper Limit Sensor-1
Upper Limit Sensor-2
LCC FIFO Data In
Door Open Sensor Detection Signal
Lift Motor Control Signal 1
Lift Motor Control Signal 2
Motor A Signal
Motor AB Signal
Motor B Signal
Motor BB Signal
Paper Path Sensor Signal
Set Sensor Signal
Paper Feed Solenoid-1 Control Signal
Upper Limit Sensor Signal
1st Tray Lift Up Motor Control Signal
Scan Motor A Signal
Scan Motor AB Signal
Scan Motor B Signal
Scan Motor BB Signal
Scanner Motor Clock
Connection Detect Sensor Signal
Scanner Lamp Control Clock
Scanner Lamp Control Signal
Paper Sensor Detection Signal
Paper Sensor-1
Paper Remaining Sensor 1 Signal
Paper Remaining Sensor 2 Signal
Paper Remaining Sensor 3 Signal
Paper Feed Clutch Control Signal
ADU Clutch 2 Control Signal
276
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Signal Name
LPPSN
LPUSOL
LUM1
LUM1-1
LUM1-2
LUM2-1
LUM2-2
MAGCL
MMA
MMAB
MMB
MMBB
MMCLK
MMFR
MMLD
MMPS
N.C.
nACK
nADFSES
nATT
nAUTFD
nCTON
nDUACK
nDUPRNT
nERROR
nFAXRST
nGARST
nHKOF
nLD1
nLD2
nLPOW1
nLPOW2
nPACK
nPCIRING
nPNLRST
nPRDY
nPRGDWN
nPRST
nPVSYNC
nSACK
nSELIN
nSENTIM
nSLPKY
nSREQ
nSTROB
nSTRX
nSTTX
Ver. 5.2
Function
Paper Path Sensor Signal
Paper Feed Solenoid Control Signal
2nd Tray Lift Up Motor Control Signal
+24 VDC Power Supply
LUM1 Control Signal
+24 VDC Power Supply
LUM2 Control Signal
Magnetic Roller Clutch Control Signal
ADF Main Motor A Signal
ADF Main Motor AB Signal
ADF Main Motor B Signal
ADF Main Motor BB Signal
Main Motor Clock
Main Motor CW/CCW
Main Motor Lock Detection Signal
Main Motor Start/Stop
Not Used
ACK Signal
ADF Document Detect
Attention Signal
Auto Feed Signal
Ring Detection Signal
ADU Printer ACK Signal
ADU Print Request Signal
Error Signal
FAX Board Reset Signal
CCD PCB Reset Signal
External Phone Off-Hook Detection Signal
Laser 1 Control Signal (-)
Laser 2 Control Signal (-)
Not Used
Not Used
Printer ACK Signal
FAX Wake Up Signal
Panel Reset Signal
Printer Ready Signal
F-ROM Rewrite
SPC Reset Signal</p>0: Reset
Print Registration
Scan ACK Signal
Select Input Signal
Scanner LSYNC Signal
Sleep Key
Scanner Request Signal
Strobe Signal
Sorter Reception (-)
Sorter Transmission Signal (-)
277
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Signal Name
nSYNC
nVRDY
nVREQ
OE
OPSN
OQFCLK
OQFDIN
OQFDOUT
OQFENB
OQFLD
OQFLTH
OQMCLK
OQMCLK
OQMCT
OQMLK
OQRRCL
ORGSN
ORGSN
ORSIZ1
ORSIZ2
ORSIZ3
ORSIZ4
ORSIZ5
OZFL2
OZFM2
P12CNT
PASN
pBDA
pBDB
pBUSY
PCCL
pCMLD
PCRSN
PCSN
PCSSOL1
PCSSOL2
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
PD8
PDIAG
pERROR
PESN1
Ver. 5.2
Function
Horizontal Synchronous Signal
VSYNC Reset Signal
Print ACK Request Signal
AFE Digital Data Bus Enable
ADF Cover Open Detection Signal
OQ FIFO Clock
OQ FIFO Data In
OQ FIFO Data Out
OQ FIFO Enable
OQ FIFO Load
OQ FIFO Latch
OQ Motor FIFO Clock
Drive Motor Clock
Drive Motor Control
Drive Motor Lock Signal
Registration Clutch Control Signal
Original Sensor Signal
Original Sensor Detection Signal
Original Size Sensor Signal 0
Original Size Sensor Signal 1
Original Size Sensor Signal 2
Original Size Sensor Signal 3
Original Size Sensor Signal 4
Ozone Fan Lock Detection Signal
Ozone Fan Control Signal
Exit Fan Control Signal
Platen Cover Open Sensor Signal
Print BDA Signal
Print BDB Signal
Busy Signal
Intermediate Clutch Control Signal
Line Switching Relay Drive Signal
Intermediate Sensor Detection Signal
Platen Cover Angle Sensor Signal
Paper Tray Solenoid Control Signal
Paper Tray Solenoid Control Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Data Signal
Diagnostic Bus Signal
No Paper Signal
Paper Sensor Detection Signal
278
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Signal Name
PESN1
PESN2
PEWSSN1
PEWSSN2
PEWSSN3
PFCL1
PFCL1
PFCL2
PFCLCNT
PFOSN1
PFOSN2
PFSIZSN1
PFSIZSN2
PFSIZSN3
PGND
pINIT
pLD1
pLD2
PMA
PMAB
PMB
PMBB
PMCLK
PMCNT
PMLOCK
PNLDO1
PNLSCLK1
POWSW
pPRXD
PPSOLCNT
pPTXD
PR1SN
pSELECT
pSPKOT
pSTRX
pSTTX
PTG
PTL
PUSOL1
PUSOL1
PUSOL2
PVCNT
PWFL
PWFM
QDOSN
RR1CLCNT
RR2CLCNT
Ver. 5.2
Function
Paper Sensor-1
Paper Sensor-2
Paper Remaining Sensor 1 Signal
Paper Remaining Sensor 2 Signal
Paper Remaining Sensor 3 Signal
Paper Feed Clutch Control Signal
Paper Feed Clutch-1 Control Signal
Paper Feed Clutch-2 Control Signal
Paper Feed Clutch Control Signal
Paper Exit Sensor 1 Detection Signal
Paper Exit Sensor 2 Detection Signal
Paper Size Sensor 1 Signal
Paper Size Sensor 2 Signal
Paper Size Sensor 3 Signal
Ground
Initiation
Laser 1 Control Signal (+)
Laser 2 Control Signal (+)
Paper Feed Motor A Signal
Paper Feed Motor AB Signal
Paper Feed Motor B Signal
Paper Feed Motor BB Signal
Polygon Motor Clock
Polygon Motor Control Signal
Polygon Motor Lock Signal
Panel F-ROM Rewrite Serial Data
Panel F-ROM Rewrite Serial Clock
POW SW
Reception Data Signal
Pinch Solenoid Control Signal
Transmission Data Signal
Registration Sensor 1 Signal
Paper Select Signal
Line Signal%% Dial Tone
Sorter Reception Signal (+)
Sorter Transmission Signal (+)
CCD Shift GATE Signal
Pre Transfer Lamp
Paper Feed Solenoid Control Signal
Paper Feed Solenoid-1 Control Signal
Paper Feed Solenoid-2 Control Signal
Printer 24V Control
PS Fan Lock Detection Signal
PS Fan Control Signal
Door Open Sensor Detection Signal
Registration Roller 1 Clutch Control Signal
Registration Roller 2 Clutch Control Signal
279
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Signal Name
RR2SN
RR3SN
RRCL
RRSN
RVCLK
RVEXSN
RVJAMSN
RVMA
RVMAB
RVMB
RVMBB
RVSN
RVSSOL1
RVSSOL2
SB1CLCNT
SB2CLCNT
SCFL
SCFM
SDCLCNT
SEPSOL
SH A
SH B
SIZE1SN
SIZE2SN
SIZE3SN
SIZE4SN
SPCRXD
SPCTXD
SPPSN
SSA1
SSA2
SSA3
STRVP
STSLCNT
SVCNT
TDREF
TDSNIN
TED
TENPSN
TFBOXSN
TFSN
THI1
THI2
TMGSN
TRBLSW1
VCDS
Vcnt
Ver. 5.2
Function
Registration Sensor 2 Signal
Registration Sensor 3 Signal
Registration Clutch Control Signal
Registration Sensor Signal
Inverting Motor Clock
Inverting Exit Sensor Detection Signal
Inverting JAM Sensor Detection Signal
Inverting Motor A Signal
Inverting Motor AB Signal
Inverting Motor B Signal
Inverting Motor BB Signal
Inverting Sensor Detection Signal
Inverting Solenoid Control Signal
Inverting Solenoid Control Signal
Inverting Clutch 1 Control Signal
Inverting Clutch 2 Control Signal
Suction Fan Lock Detection Signal
Suction Fan Control Signal
Slow Down Clutch Control Signal
Separation Solenoid Control Signal
Sample Hold Signal A
Sample Hold Signal B
Original Size Sensor 1 Detection Signal
Original Size Sensor 2 Detection Signal
Original Size Sensor 3 Detection Signal
Original Size Sensor 4 Detection Signal
SPC Reception Data Signal
SPC Transmission Data Signal
System Paper Path Sensor Signal
Fuser Lamp 1 Control Signal
Fuser Lamp 2 Control Signal
Fuser Lamp 3 Control Signal
Control Signal
Stamp Solenoid Control Signal
Scanner 24V Control
Toner Density Sensor Reference
Toner Density Sensor Signal
Toner Detect Sensor Signal
Temp Humidity Sensor Signal
Toner Waste Container Sensor Detection Signal
Toner Waste Sensor Signal
Fuser Thermistor 1
Fuser Thermistor 2
Timing Sensor Detection Signal
Toner Waste Collect Signal
Density Sensor ON
Inverter Control Signal
280
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Signal Name
VTED
WEBSOL
ZCIN
ZNSN1a
ZNSN1b
ZNSN1c
ZNSN2a
ZNSN2b
ZNSN2c
ZNSNa
ZNSNb
ZNSNc
Ver. 5.2
Function
Toner Detect Sensor ON
Web Solenoid Control Signal
Zero Cross
Paper Remaining Sensor a Signal (Upper)
Paper Remaining Sensor b Signal (Upper)
Paper Remaining Sensor c Signal (Upper)
Paper Remaining Sensor a Signal (Lower)
Paper Remaining Sensor b Signal (Lower)
Paper Remaining Sensor c Signal (Lower)
Paper Remaining Sensor a
Paper Remaining Sensor b
Paper Remaining Sensor c
281
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
7 Installation
7.1.
Before you begin the installation, read these entire instructions. You must locate an appropriate site (firm
and leveled surface) for the installation. Reading this section assists you with the decision making process.
Machine performance and the copy quality is subject to and dependant on environmental conditions.
To maintain good performance, quality, and safe operation, observe the following precautions:
1. For safe operation and to avoid trouble, do not install the system under the following conditions:
High temperature, high humidity, low temperature or low humidity
Sudden changes in temperature or humidity
Exposed to direct sunlight
Dusty environment
Poorly ventilated location
Exposed to chemical gases (such as ammonia gas)
Exposed to strong vibration
Exposed to direct air current (ex. Air conditioner vent)
2. The weight of the machine (options not included) is as follows:
DP-3510/3520/3530
: 283 lb (128.5 kg) with the i-ADF pre-installed
DP-4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030 : 290 lb (131.5 kg) with the i-ADF pre-installed
3. The maximum power consumption is 1.5 kW. Depending on the product destination, the wall outlet
must be rated for 120 VAC or 220-240 VAC accordingly. It must also be protected for at least 15 amps
for 120 VAC, or 10 amps for 220-240 VAC. If you are in doubt about a power source, ensure that a
qualified electrician checks the outlet. Do not connect any other devices to the wall outlet designated
for this machine. (Do not use an extension cord)
4. Make sure the outlet is properly grounded. (Do not ground to gas or water pipe)
5. This machine has ventilation openings on the side and rear, which must remain unobstructed for safe
operation. The machine should be located at least 3.9 inches (100 mm) from the wall. Obstructing the
ventilation openings could present a fire hazard.
Using the space requirements shown on page 2, ensures that the machine has the ventilation it
requires and that you have the space needed for replacing the supplies.
Ver. 5.2
282
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3.9 in
(100 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm)
23.6"(600 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
12.7 in
(322 mm)
54.6 in
(1387 mm)
Copier + Finisher
3.9 in (100 mm)
11.8 in
(300 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm)
10.4 in (265 mm)
83.3 in
(2115 mm)
11.8 in
(300 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
19.9 in (505 mm)
95.3 in
(2420 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
19.9 in (505 mm)
101.2 in
(2570 mm)
Ver. 5.2
283
JAN 2006
7.2.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Unpacking
Visually check the condition and contents of the the packing for completeness or any shipping damage
before installation.
Remove all tapes used to secure the Scanner, Fuser and Process Units during shipment.
Caution:
Depending on your machine's model, it may weight approximately up to 290 lb (131.5 kg) with the i-ADF
pre-installed. To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to
lift or move the machine.
Contents List
No.
1
2
Qty.
1
1
3
4
5
Description
Main Unit
Operating Instructions
Part No.
----See Note
Panasonic-DMS CD
See Note
---
AC Power Cord
See Note
DZSM000566
DZSM000750
PJQRC0043Z
Installation Instructions
Remarks
Includes Operating
Instructions
For DP-3510/4510/6010
For DP-3520/4520/6020
For DP-3530/4530/6030
Note:
1.The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
1
2
Ver. 5.2
284
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
7.3.
Installation Procedure
Note:
1. Refer to each individual Installation Instructions when installing Stands or other Optional Kits.
2. The following machine illustrations, depicts a DP-6030 with a standard configuration.
3. The scanner is held in place by a Shipping Blue Screw to prevent damage during transit.
Do Not turn the Power Switches ON before unlocking the scanner.
4. The machine is shipped from the factory with the Pressure Roller / OPC Drum locked in the opened
position to avoid the possibility of damaging the Pressure Rollers / OPC Drum.
Do Not turn the Power Switches ON before unlocking the Pressure Roller / OPC Drum.
7.3.1.
Installation Procedure
Release
Latch
(4)
Ver. 5.2
285
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
286
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(10)
(11)
(16)
(12)
Ver. 5.2
287
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Toner Bottle
Hopper
Ready To Copy
Set Originals
<For Other Destinations (not USA and Canada),
follow the steps (28) ~ (34) below>
(28) Install the Exit Tray Assembly to the Upper Exit
Cover.
(29)
(31)
(32)
(33)
Ver. 5.2
288
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
7.3.2.
1. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to
enter the Service Mode.
2. Press the "8" key to enter the F8 Mode.
3. Press the "START" key.
4. Press the "0, "9" and "START" keys sequentially to enter the F8 Mode code "09".
5. Press the "START" key to begin the Automatic TDC sensor gain adjustment.
Note:
Do not touch any keys or turn the Power Switch Off until the adjustment cycle stops
(approximately 7 minutes).
Then, wait for approximately 30 sec. again for QUANTUM to start automatically.
Do not touch any keys or turn the Power Switch Off until the QUANTUM adjustment cycle stops
(approximately 1-2 minutes). Refer to the Sequence Chart below.
7.3.3.
1. Press the "1", "4" and "START" keys sequentially to enter the F8 Mode code "14".
2. Press the "START" key for Automatic Black density sensor output gain adjustment.
Note:
Do not touch any keys or turn the Power Switch Off until the adjustment cycle stops.
Refer to the Sequence Chart below.
3. Press the "STOP" key.
4. Press the "6" key to enter the F6 Mode.
5. Write the contents of F6-21, 26 and 65 on the memory sheet (included inside the 2nd Paper Tray).
6. Press the "STOP" key.
7. Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
F8-14 (Installation & OPC Replace)
Wait
QUANTUM
Gain Adjust
Wait
QUANTUM
7 min
30 sec
1-2 min
30 sec-1 min
30 sec
1-2 min
Automatically
7.3.4.
Automatically
Ver. 5.2
289
JAN 2006
7.4.
7.4.1.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Adjustment
Exposure (Standard Adjustment)
Before making any adjustments, confirm that the following contents (F6-17, 18 and 19) are set to "0".
DO NOT adjust these codes in the field.
F6-17 : Standard Grid Voltage
F6-18 : Standard Laser Power
F6-19 : Std Bias DC Voltage
1. Press the "FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and 3 keys simultaneously in that order to
enter the Service Mode.
2. Press the "2" and the "START" keys to enter the F2 Mode.
3. Set the exposure to the center position.
Set the machine to TEXT / PHOTO Mode.
4. Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N FQ-SJ1011) and verify the density as shown
below. If it is within specification, skip to step (10).
a. Gray scale "A" should not be visible.
b. Gray scale "2" should be clearly visible.
A
. . .
. . .
. . . . .. . . . . . 1 .
.
.
2
Not visible
(Not visible or hardly visible)
Clearly visible
Ver. 5.2
290
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
SC
Standard Firmware
(SC = Type A)
SFD_M25RAxVxxxxx-xx
PCL Firmware
(SC = Type B)
SFD_M25RBxVxxxxx-xx
PostScript Firmware
(SC = Type D)
SFD_M25RDxVxxxxx-xx
PNL
SPC
Slot 1 FROM PCB
M25R_PNLAxVxxxxx-xx
SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxx
Not Required
Required
Required
291
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)
The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN.
The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover
cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.
1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC
The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Network
Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool.
The installation password is "workio".
Operating Instructions:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe
2) Preparing the Firmware Code
Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the
CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted
automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.
Example:
From:
Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat
Firmware Code File:
DP-3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx.exe
To:
Firmware Data Folder:
C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade
Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.
Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).
4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code
Start the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the
C:\Program Files\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to
upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
Parent Firmware File Folder
\ DP-3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx
Ver. 5.2
292
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing
the type of the firmware.
Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection
Tab" of the Operating Instructions.
2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to
normal upon completion of the firmware update.
3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will
not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating
through the Parallel Port" and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit.
4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination
location.
2. Updating through the Parallel Port (Alternate Method)
If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the Parallel Port.
1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC
The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Local
Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool.
Operating Instructions:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe
2) Preparing the Firmware Code
Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the
CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted
automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.
Example:
From:
Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat
Firmware Code File:
DP-3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx.exe
To:
Firmware Data Folder:
C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade
Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the Parallel
Port.
If the unit does not boot up, follow the procedure below:
a. Turn the power Off (use the power switch on the back of the unit, not the side of the unit.).
b. Turn the power On while holding the [ENERGY SAVER] button.
c. When the unit's front panel green lamp turns On, release the [ENERGY SAVER] button, it is now
ready to accept the firmware code from the Parallel Port.
Connect the Parallel Cable between the Unit and PC.
Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.
Ver. 5.2
293
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
1. Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete, rewrite of
the firmware code and then boot. Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service Mode
after boot up, to continue the firmware update.
2.While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to
normal upon completion of the firmware update.
3. Please refer to the service manual for additional details.
4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination
location.
Ver. 5.2
294
JAN 2006
8.2.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
SC
Standard Firmware
(SC = Type A)
SFDM_MK2AxVxxxxx-xx
PCL Firmware
(SC = Type B)
SFDM_MK2BxVxxxxx-xx
PostScript Firmware
(SC = Type D)
SFDM_MK2DxVxxxxx-xx
PNL
SPC
Slot 1 FROM PCB
MMK2_PNLAxVxxxxx-xx
SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxx
Not Required
Required
Required
295
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)
The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN.
The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover
cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.
1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC
The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Network
Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool.
The installation password is "workio".
Operating Instructions:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe
2) Preparing the Firmware Code
Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the
CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted
automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.
Example:
From:
Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat
Firmware Code File:
DP-3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx.exe
To:
Firmware Data Folder:
C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade
Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.
Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).
4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code
Start the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the
C:\Program Files\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to
upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
Parent Firmware File Folder
\ DP-3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx
Transferring Order
1
2
2
2
3
Ver. 5.2
296
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing
the type of the firmware.
Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection
Tab" of the Operating Instructions.
2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to
normal upon completion of the firmware update.
3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will
not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating
through the Parallel Port" and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit.
4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination
location.
2. Updating through the Parallel Port (Alternate Method)
If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the Parallel Port.
1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC
The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Local
Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool.
Operating Instructions:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe
2) Preparing the Firmware Code
Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the
CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted
automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.
Example:
From:
Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat
Firmware Code File:
DP-3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx.exe
To:
Firmware Data Folder:
C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade
Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the Parallel
Port.
If the unit does not boot up, follow the procedure below:
a. Turn the power Off (use the power switch on the back of the unit, not the side of the unit.).
b. Turn the power On while holding the [ENERGY SAVER] button.
c. When the unit's front panel green lamp turns On, release the [ENERGY SAVER] button, it is now
ready to accept the firmware code from the Parallel Port.
Connect the Parallel Cable between the Unit and PC.
Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.
Ver. 5.2
297
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Firmware File
SFDM_MK2AxVxxxxx-xx.bin
SFDM_MK2BxVxxxxx_xx.bin
SFDM_MK2CxVxxxxxa_xx.bin
SFDM_MK2CxVxxxxxb.bin
\ SC_PS \ SFDM_MK2DxVxxxxx-xx SFDM_MK2DxVxxxxx_xx.bin
SFDM_MK2ExVxxxxxa_xx.bin
SFDM_MK2ExVxxxxxb.bin
\ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxxx
SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin
\ PNL \ MMK2_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx
MMk2_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx.bin
Transferring
Order
1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-1
1-2
1-3
2
3
When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type
window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by
selecting the Firmware Type.
The transferring order is set up automatically.
Note:
1. Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete, rewrite of
the firmware code and then boot. Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service Mode
after boot up, to continue the firmware update.
2.While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to
normal upon completion of the firmware update.
3. Please refer to the service manual for additional details.
4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination
location.
Ver. 5.2
298
JAN 2006
8.3.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
SC
Standard Firmware
(SC = Type A)
SFDM_PNLAxVxxxxx-xx
DP-SFDMAxVxxxxx-xx
PCL Firmware
(SC = Type B)
DP-SFDMBxVxxxxx-xx
PostScript Firmware
(SC = Type D)
DP-SFDMDxVxxxxx-xx
SPC
Slot 1 FROM PCB
SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxx
Not Required
Required
Required
PNL
Ver. 5.2
299
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)
The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN.
The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover
cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.
1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC
The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Network
Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool.
The installation password is "workio".
Operating Instructions:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe
2) Preparing the Firmware Code
Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the
CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted
automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.
Example:
From:
Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat
Firmware Code File:
DP-3510_4510_6010_xx_xxxxxx.exe
To:
Firmware Data Folder:
C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade
Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.
Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).
4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code
Start the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the
C:\Program Files\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to
upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
Parent Firmware File Folder
\ DP-3510_4510_6010_xx_xxxxxx
Transferring Order
1
2
2
2
3
Ver. 5.2
300
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing
the type of the firmware.
Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection
Tab" of the Operating Instructions.
2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to
normal upon completion of the firmware update.
3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will
not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating
through the Parallel Port" and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit.
4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination
location.
2. Updating through the Parallel Port (Alternate Method)
If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the Parallel Port.
1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC
The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Local
Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool.
Operating Instructions:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe
2) Preparing the Firmware Code
Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the
CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted
automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.
Example:
From:
Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat
Firmware Code File:
DP-3510_4510_6010_xx_xxxxxx.exe
To:
Firmware Data Folder:
C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade
Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the Parallel
Port.
If the unit does not boot up, follow the procedure below:
a. Turn the power Off (use the power switch on the back of the unit, not the side of the unit.).
b. Turn the power On while holding the [ENERGY SAVER] button.
c. When the unit's front panel green lamp turns On, release the [ENERGY SAVER] button, it is now
ready to accept the firmware code from the Parallel Port.
Connect the Parallel Cable between the Unit and PC.
Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.
Ver. 5.2
301
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
\ SC_PS \ DP-SFDMDxVxxxxx-xx
\ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxxx
Firmware File
SFDM_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx.bin
DP-SFDMAxVxxxxx-xx.bin
DP-SFDMBxVxxxxx_xx.bin
DP-SFDMCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin
DP-SFDMCxVxxxxxb.bin
DP-SFDMDxVxxxxx_xx.bin
DP-SFDMExVxxxxxa_xx.bin
DP-SFDMExVxxxxxb.bin
SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin
Transferring
Order
1
2
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-1
2-2
2-3
3
When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type
window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by
selecting the Firmware Type.
The transferring order is set up automatically.
Note:
1. Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete, rewrite of
the firmware code and then boot. Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service Mode
after boot up, to continue the firmware update.
2.While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to
normal upon completion of the firmware update.
3. Please refer to the service manual for additional details.
4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination
location.
Ver. 5.2
302
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.4.
8.4.1.
Qty.
1
1
Contents
Description
Hardware Key
Installation Instructions
Part No.
----DZSM000751
Remarks
GDI KEY
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.4.2.
Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Loosen 5 Screws.
(2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)
(1) Main
Power
SW
(2)
KEY
(3)
Ver. 5.2
303
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.5.
8.5.1.
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
Contents
Description
Hardware Key
Software CD
Part No.
----See Note
--------PJQRC0036Z
License Agreement
Installation Instructions
Remarks
PCL KEY
Includes Operating Instructions
For USA and Canada only
For Other Destinations
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.5.2.
Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed
into Slot 1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Program
Expansion Board (DA-EM600).
2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Loosen 5 Screws.
(2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)
(2)
Ver. 5.2
(1) Main
Power
SW
304
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
KEY
(3)
Note:
1. For USA and Canada only, this option can also be used for DP-3510/4510/6010 without IPX/SPX.
2. The Firmware included on the CD-ROM with this option is intended for DP-3530/4530/6030, it cannot
be used for DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020. Please use the DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/
6020 firmware provided separately by the local Sales Company or Download it from the Web.
Ver. 5.2
305
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.6.
8.6.1.
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
Contents
Description
Hardware Key
Part No.
----DZRQ000288 or
DZRQ000289
DZSH000112
DZSH000113
DZSM000752
Software CD
License Agreement
Installation Instructions
Remarks
PCL KEY
Includes Operating Instructions
For USA and Canada only
For Other Destinations
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.6.2.
Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed
into Slot 1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Program
Expansion Board (DA-EM600).
2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Loosen 5 Screws.
(2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)
(2)
Ver. 5.2
(1) Main
Power
SW
306
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
KEY
(3)
Note:
1. For USA and Canada only, this option can also be used for DP-3510/4510/6010 without IPX/SPX.
2. The Firmware included on the CD-ROM with this option is intended for DP-3520/4520/6020, it cannot
be used for DP-3510/4510/6010. Please use the DP-3510/4510/6010 firmware provided separately by
the local Sales Company or Download it from the Web.
Ver. 5.2
307
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.7.
8.7.1.
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
Contents
Description
Hardware Key
Part No.
----DZRQ000059 or
DZRQ000062
DZSH000112
DZSH000113
DZSM000508
Software CD
License Agreement
Installation Instructions
Remarks
PCL KEY
Includes Operating Instructions
For USA and Canada only
For Other Destinations
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.7.2.
Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed
into Slot 1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Program
Expansion Board (DA-EM600).
2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Loosen 5 Screws.
(2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)
(2)
Ver. 5.2
(1) Main
Power
SW
308
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
KEY
(3)
Ver. 5.2
309
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.8.
8.8.1.
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Contents
Description
Hardware Key
Software CD
Adobe Postscript 3 Label
License Agreement
License Agreement
(For Adobe PostScript Driver)
Installation Instructions
Part No.
----See Note
--------------------PJQRC0037Z
Remarks
PS KEY
Includes Operating Instructions
For USA and Canada only
For Other Destinations
For USA and Canada only
For Other Destinations
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.8.2.
Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed
into Slot 1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Program
Expansion Board (DA-EM600).
2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Loosen 5 Screws.
(2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)
(2)
Ver. 5.2
(1) Main
Power
SW
310
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
KEY
(3)
Note:
1. For USA and Canada only, this option can also be used for DP-3510/4510/6010 without IPX/SPX.
2. The Firmware included on the CD-ROM with this option is intended for DP-3530/4530/6030, it cannot
be used for DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020. Please use the DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/
6020 firmware provided separately by the local Sales Company or Download it from the Web.
Ver. 5.2
311
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.9.
8.9.1.
Qty.
1
Contents
Description
Hardware Key
Software CD
1
1
1
1
1
1
Part No.
----DZRQ000292 or
DZRQ000293
DZNK004647
DZSH000112
DZSH000113
--------DZSM000753
Remarks
PS KEY
Includes Operating Instructions
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.9.2.
Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed
into Slot 1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Program
Expansion Board (DA-EM600).
2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Loosen 5 Screws.
(2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)
(2)
Ver. 5.2
(1) Main
Power
SW
312
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
KEY
(3)
Note:
1. For USA and Canada only, this option can also be used for DP-3510/4510/6010 without IPX/SPX.
2. The Firmware included on the CD-ROM with this option is intended for DP-3520/4520/6020, it cannot
be used for DP-3510/4510/6010. Please use the DP-3510/4510/6010 firmware provided separately by
the local Sales Company or Download it from the Web.
Ver. 5.2
313
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
Hardware Key
Software CD
1
1
1
1
1
1
Part No.
----DZRQ000123 or
DZRQ000124
DZNK004647
DZSH000112
DZSH000113
--------DZSM000564
Remarks
PS KEY
Includes Operating Instructions
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.10.2. Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed
into Slot 1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Program
Expansion Board (DA-EM600).
2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Loosen 5 Screws.
(2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)
(2)
Ver. 5.2
(1) Main
Power
SW
314
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
KEY
(3)
Ver. 5.2
315
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Contents
Qty.
1
1
Description
Hardware Key
Installation Instructions
Part No.
----DZSM000754
Remarks
NWS KEY
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.11.2.
Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Loosen 5 Screws.
(2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)
(2)
Main
Power
SW
(1)
KEY
(3)
Ver. 5.2
316
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
Hardware Key
Installation Instructions
Part No.
----DZSM000782
Remarks
DDS KEY
This document
Note:
1. This option is intended to be used with the Document Distribution System (DA-WR10)
for DP-3520/4520/6020.
2. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
3. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.12.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Loosen 5 Screws.
(2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)
(2)
Main
Power
SW
(1)
KEY
(3)
Ver. 5.2
317
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
1. The Network Scanner (DA-NS600) cannot be installed together with this option. If the Network
Scanner (DA-NS600) is already installed, remove it first.
2. If the Firmware version installed on the machine is SC:SFDM_MK2AxV30700,
PNL:MMK2_PNLAxV30000, SPC:SFDM_SPCAxV30100 or older, it must be updated for this option
by referring to the Service Notes.
Please use the DP-3520/4520/6020 firmware provided separately by the local Sales Company or
Download it from the technical support Web site.
Ver. 5.2
318
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
Hardware Key
Operating Instructions
(For Facsimile and Internet Fax)
Installation Instructions
1
1
Part No.
-----
Remarks
IFX KEY
See Note
DZSM000755
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.13.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Loosen 5 Screws.
(2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)
(2)
Ver. 5.2
(1)
Main
Power
SW
319
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
KEY
(3)
Ver. 5.2
320
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Perform the following steps if the Optional Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD60) is also installed.
Ver. 5.2
321
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Using the Network Address Book Editor to Copy and Paste the Address Book Data
1. An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of Fax
Address Book is activated on the DP-35xx/45xx/60xx. Retrieve the 200 station, Fax Address Book data
from the unit as follows:
a) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management System\Network MFP
Utilities.
b) Click on Network Device Locator.
c) In the Network Device Locator screen, select your desired device.
d) In the menu bar, click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.
e) The Network Address Book Editor "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx" screen appears, under the Address Book
Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book.
f) When the 200 station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on File\Save
As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station).
g) Then click the OK button.
2. Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 stations, using the Service Mode described
above.
3. Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as
above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx (Fax1000)".
Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station).
4. Open the 200 Fax data file of step 1 and the 1,000 Fax data file of step 3. Copy the 200 Fax data and
paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again. (Refer
to Help.)
5. Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer and Write in the menu bar.
Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully completed.
Ver. 5.2
322
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
FXB PC Board
MJR PC Board Assembly
MJR Harness
Speaker Assembly
Speaker Harness 2 (Extension)
SDRM Bracket
Stamp Assembly
Stamp Solenoid
Telephone Line Cable
Type Approval Label
Line Label
Part No.
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
10
Screw (Short)
See Note
Screw (Long)
See Note
1
1
Remarks
This document
Note:
1. If also installing the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600), it must be installed first.
2. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
3. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.14.2. Installation
Install the Hardware by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Loosen 5 Screws.
(2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)
(2)
Ver. 5.2
(1)
Main
Power
SW
323
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(8)
(9)
(7)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
Ver. 5.2
324
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(16)
(17)
(19)
(18)
(20)
(21)
Ver. 5.2
325
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(23)
(24)
(26)
(25)
(28) Open the ADF Cover.
(29) Lift the Lower Opening and Shutting guide 2
Assembly.
(30) Lift the Original Tray Assembly.
(31) Lower the Inverting Guide 4 Assembly.
(31)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(32)
Ver. 5.2
(33)
326
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(39)
(38)
TA Label
Ver. 5.2
327
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
LINE
Ver. 5.2
328
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
329
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Perform the following steps if the Optional Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD60) is also installed.
Ver. 5.2
330
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Using the Network Address Book Editor to Copy and Paste the Address Book Data
1. An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of Fax
Address Book is activated on the DP-35xx/45xx/60xx. Retrieve the 200 station, Fax Address Book data
from the unit as follows:
a) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management System\Network MFP
Utilities.
b) Click on Network Device Locator.
c) In the Network Device Locator screen, select your desired device.
d) In the menu bar, click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.
e) The Network Address Book Editor "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx" screen appears, under the Address Book
Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book.
f) When the 200 station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on File\Save
As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station).
g) Then click the OK button.
2. Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 stations, using the Service Mode described
above.
3. Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as
above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx (Fax1000)".
Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station).
4. Open the 200 Fax data file of step 1 and the 1,000 Fax data file of step 3. Copy the 200 Fax data and
paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again. (Refer
to Help.)
5. Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer and Write in the menu bar.
Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully completed.
Ver. 5.2
331
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
DC PCB Assembly
HDD Bracket
HDD2 Harness
HD Harness
DC12 Harness
Clamp
Part No.
See Note
DZHP007347
DZJE001046
DZFP001109
DZFP001293
DZFP001184
DZJK000077
See Note
Screw (Long)
See Note
Installation Instructions
DZSM000552
Remarks
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.15.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Loosen 5 Screws.
(2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)
(2)
(1)
Main
Power
SW
(3)
(4)
Ver. 5.2
332
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(5)
(6)
(10)
Note:
Connect the HD Harness to the HDD as illustrated.
HDD
Key
UL Tape
(Black)
To
SC
PCB
Shield
Ver. 5.2
333
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(12)
(13)
(11)
Key
(12)
(11)
(14)
(15)
UL Tape (Black)
(16)
(17)
(20)
(18)
(19)
Note:
Ensure that the clamp is around the shielded
portion of the Harness, and not around the UL
Tape (Black).
(18) Install the DC PCB Assembly.
Note:
If the Fax Communication Board (DA-FG600) is
installed, disconnect the CN392 Harness on the
FX PCB. Route the Harness over the DC PCB
Bracket and secure it with the Clamp. Reconnect
the Harness to CN392 on the FX PCB.
(19) Secure the DC PCB Assembly with 3 Screws
(Long).
(20) Connect the HDD2 Harness (Power Supply
Cable) to CN143 on the DCB PC Board.
Ver. 5.2
334
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(21)
(22)
(22)
(23)
CAUTION!
After the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Disk Scan Function from being performed
(similar to Windows OS when the power is abruptly interrupted), it is important to follow the step
sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switches on the machine.
1. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position first.
2. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard
Disk Drive Unit.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position.
(This interrupts all the power to the machine)
4. Unplug the AC Power Cord.
Ver. 5.2
335
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Perform the following steps if the Optional Fax Communication Board (DA-FG600) or the Internet
Fax/E-Mail Module (DA-NF600) is also installed
Ver. 5.2
336
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Using the Network Address Book Editor to Copy and Paste the Address Book Data
1. An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of Fax
Address Book is activated on the DP-35xx/45xx/60xx. Retrieve the 200 station, Fax Address Book data
from the unit as follows:
a) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management System\Network MFP
Utilities.
b) Click on Network Device Locator.
c) In the Network Device Locator screen, select your desired device.
d) In the menu bar, click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.
e) The Network Address Book Editor "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx" screen appears, under the Address Book
Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book.
f) When the 200 station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on File\Save
As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station).
g) Then click the OK button.
2. Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 stations, using the Service Mode described
above.
3. Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as
above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx (Fax1000)".
Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station).
4. Open the 200 Fax data file of step 1 and the 1,000 Fax data file of step 3. Copy the 200 Fax data and
paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again. (Refer
to Help.)
5. Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer and Write in the menu bar.
Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully completed.
Ver. 5.2
337
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
Accounting Software CD
Installation Instructions
Part No.
See Note
DZSM000741
Remarks
Includes Operating Instructions
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.16.2. Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD60) is installed into
the machine first. Refer to the Installation Instructions for the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD60).
2. Install the Accounting Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the
prompts of the Installation Wizard.
3. Set the Key/Dept. Counter function by following the steps below.
1) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in
that order to enter the Service Mode.
2) Press the "5" key to enter the F5 Service Mode (Function Parameters).
3) Press the "START" key.
4) Press the "4", "2", and then "START" keys sequentially to enter the F5-42 "KEY/DEPT
Counter".
5) Select the "DEPT.", and then "OK" buttons to activate the Key/Dept. Counter function.
6) Press the "STOP" key.
Note:
The factory default setting for the Key Operator ID Code is "0000", to ensure security it is
recommended to change this code
Follow the steps below to change the Key Operator ID Code:
While in the Service Mode, press "7" to enter the F7 Service Mode.
Press the "START" key.
Select "01 Key Operator ID Code".
Select "CHANGE" button, and then input a new 4-digit ID Code.
Select "OK" button to set it and "OK" again to exit F7 Service Mode.
7) Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
4. Set the Key/Dept. Code by following the steps below.
1) Press the "FUNCTION" key, "General Settings", "04 Key Operator Mode" and input the 4
Digit Code to enter the Key Operator Mode.
2) Select "14 Dept. Counter Mode" and set the Dept. Counter Codes (up to 300).
3) Press the "STOP" key to return to the stand-by mode.
Ver. 5.2
338
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
DD Server Software CD
Part No.
See Note
DZSH000112
DZSH000113
DZSD001791
DZSM000574
License Agreement
DD Server Operating Instructions
Installation Instructions
Remarks
Includes Operating Instructions
For USA and Canada only
For Other Destinations
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.17.2. Installation
Install the DD Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the
Installation Wizard.
Ver. 5.2
339
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
Expansion F-ROM Board
PC Board Support
Installation Instructions
Part No.
DZEC102137
NH-7
DZSM000756
Remarks
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.18.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Loosen 5 Screws.
(2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)
Main
Power
SW
(1)
(2)
(3)
(3)
Ver. 5.2
(4)
340
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
Image Memory
Installation Instructions
Part No.
DZEC102306
DZEC101919
DZEC102307
DZSM000757
Remarks
16 MB
64 MB
128 MB
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.19.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Loosen 5 Screws.
(2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)
(1)
(2)
Main
Power
SW
(3)
Ver. 5.2
341
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
Part No.
UE-410047
UE-410048
Image Memory
Remarks
4 MB
8 MB
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.20.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Remove 1 Silver Screw.
(2) Remove the Flash Memory Cover.
Ver. 5.2
342
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
System Console
Part No.
See Note
Screw (M3 x 6)
See Note
Installation Instructions
PJQRC0045Z
Remarks
Included inside the
Paper Tray.
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.21.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
Release
Latch
(3)
Ver. 5.2
343
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4)
(5)
(3)
(Plastic Washers)
Ver. 5.2
344
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
The Gear Combination Shown on the Left is for
DP-3530 / 4530 as default setting.
(Plastic Washers)
Note:
After the machine is installed, be sure to lock the 2
Casters in front. If necessary, adjust the Leveler
behind the right front caster for more stability.
(8)
Ver. 5.2
345
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
System Console
Part No.
See Note
Screw (M3 x 6)
XTB3+6F
Installation Instructions
DZSM000509
Remarks
Included inside the
Paper Tray.
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.22.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
Release
Latch
(3)
Ver. 5.2
346
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4)
(5)
(2)
(1)
(3)
(Plastic Washers)
Ver. 5.2
347
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
The Gear Combination Shown on the Left is for
DP-3510 / 3520 / 4510 / 4520 as default setting.
(Plastic Washers)
Note:
After the machine is installed, be sure to lock the 2
Casters in front. If necessary, adjust the Leveler
behind the right front caster for more stability.
(8)
Ver. 5.2
348
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
3000-Sheet Tray (LCT)
Paper Guide
Rail Assy
Harnes Clamp
Part No.
See Note
DZJF000543
DZJA001049
PLWS4
See Note
See Note
Screw (M4 x 8)
See Note
Installation Instructions
DZSM000488
Remarks
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.23.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Remove the Protective Cover by releasing
3 Latch Hooks.
(1)
Ver. 5.2
349
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(3)
(4)
(6)
(5)
(8)
(9)
(9)
A
B
(9)
Ver. 5.2
350
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(11)
(13) (14)
(12)
(16)
(16)
Ver. 5.2
351
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.24. Installing the Letter / Legal Size Adapter for 3000-Sheet Tray (DA-TK31)
8.24.1. Contents
Qty.
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
17
1
Description
Part No.
DZJA001020
DZJA001116
DZJA001117
DZJA001118
DZJA001119
DZJA001120
DZJE000988
DZNK004085
DZNK004084
See Note
DZSM000489
Paper Guide
Rear Guide Plate B
Front Guide Plate B
Upper Support Plate
Lower Support Plate
Paper Table
Door (Large)
Paper Size Label, Legal
Paper Size Label, Letter-R
Screw (M3 x 6)
Installation Instructions
Remarks
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.24.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
Note:
Make sure that the Paper Table is at the bottom Position.
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(3)
(5)
Ver. 5.2
(6)
352
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(7)
Door Lock
Lever
Latch
(9)
(10)
(12)
(11)
(14)
(13)
Paper Guide
Ver. 5.2
353
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
A4
B4
Legal
Letter
(16)
(16)
(15)
(15)
Legal
B4
Letter
A4
<3>
<1>
<2>
(17)
(19)
(20)
(19)
(20)
Ver. 5.2
354
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(22)
(22)
(21)
(22)
(24)
(23)
(29)
(28)
Ver. 5.2
355
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(30)
(31)
(34)
Legal
(33)
Letter-R
Letter
(35)
(36)
(38)
(37)
Ver. 5.2
356
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.25.1. Contents
Qty.
1
1
Description
Exit Tray Assembly
Exit Roller E Assembly
Part No.
DZHP006490
DZHP007040
DZLF000639
1
1
2
Stop Plate
Stop Plate 2
Screw
DZJL000333
DZJL000334
See Note
E-Ring
See Note
Installation Instructions
DZSM000558
Remarks
For USA and Canada only
For USA and Canada only
(DP-35xx)
8.25.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
Note:
For USA and Canada, follow the steps below.
For Other Destinations, skip to the step (14).
(3)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(5)
(6)
Ver. 5.2
357
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(8)
(9)
Note:
For DP-35xx, follow the Steps below.
For DP-45xx/60xx, skip to step (11).
(9) Remove the E-Ring and Exit Roller Gear 1
(White).
(10) Install the Exit Roller Gear 1 (Black) and E-Ring
included with this kit.
(10)
(11)
(11)
(14)
Ver. 5.2
358
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(16)
(18)
(17)
Ver. 5.2
359
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
2 Bin Finisher
Tray
Inlet Guide
Latch Plate
Harness Cover (Longer)
Harness Cover (Shorter)
Base Plate
Face Plate Button
Guide Rail
Connecting Plate
Part No.
See Note
4G1-0772-000
4F1-2122-000
4G1-5204-000
4A1-8442-000
4A1-3703-000
4B1-0933-000
4A1-8441-000
4G1-5202-000
4B1-0934-000
DZHP007141
Screw (M4 x 8)
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
1
1
1
IPC PC Board
Label
Installation Instructions
4G1-5215-000
DZNK004315
DZSM000568
Remarks
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
3. Before you begin the installation of your 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS600), read these entire
instructions.
Ver. 5.2
360
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.26.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
3.9"
(100mm)
3.9"
(100mm)
3.9"
(100mm)
57.6 "
(1463 mm)
3.9"
(100mm)
83.3 "
(2115 mm)
Note:
The Machine is protected during shipment with
Tapes and Spacers against vibration and shock.
When the site has been selected, move the
Machine to the appropriate site, and remove all
Packaging Materials as illustrated below. Although
the Finisher is equipped with Casters, it moves
only in a straight line.
(1) Take the Accessory Box out of the Package.
Caution:
Do not remove the 4 Styrofoam Pads attached to
the Finisher. The absence of these Pads can
cause deformation of the Rail Mount.
(2) Without removing the Pads, lift the Finisher, and
stand it on the floor.
(Be sure to work in a group of two.)
Ver. 5.2
361
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Tag
Tray
Ver. 5.2
362
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(3)
Sensor Cable
Harness Cover
Ver. 5.2
363
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(1)
(3)
Note:
The following steps (5)~(15) are not applicable for
USA and Canada.
(7)
(6)
(8)
(9)
(9)
(10)
Ver. 5.2
364
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(11)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(13)
(18)
(18)
(17)
(16)
(16)
(19)
(20)
(20)
Ver. 5.2
365
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(22)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(26)
(25)
Ver. 5.2
366
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(5)
(4)
(5)
(3)
(6)
Ver. 5.2
367
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4)
B
(4)
B
Wrench
Ver. 5.2
Screw
368
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(7)
(7)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
Adjusting Bolt
Fixing Screws
(Black)
Ver. 5.2
369
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Adjusting Bolt
Fixing Screws
(Black)
Adjusting Bolt
90
Ver. 5.2
370
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher
Tray
Inlet Guide
Latch Plate
Harness Cover (Longer)
Harness Cover (Shorter)
Base Plate
Face Plate Button
Guide Rail
Connecting Plate
Part No.
See Note
4G1-0772-000
4F1-2122-000
4G1-5204-000
4A1-8442-000
4A1-3703-000
4B1-0933-000
4A1-8441-000
4G1-5202-000
4B1-0934-000
DZHP007141
Screw (M4 x 8)
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
1
1
1
IPC PC Board
Label
Installation Instructions
4G1-5215-000
DZNK004315
DZSM000569
Remarks
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
3. Before you begin the installation of your 2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS605), read these
entire instructions.
Ver. 5.2
371
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.27.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
3.9"
(100mm)
3.9"
(100mm)
3.9"
(100mm)
57.6 "
(1463 mm)
3.9"
(100mm)
83.3 "
(2115 mm)
Note:
The Machine is protected during shipment with
Tapes and Spacers against vibration and shock.
When the site has been selected, move the
Machine to the appropriate site, and remove all
Packaging Materials as illustrated below. Although
the Finisher is equipped with Casters, it moves
only in a straight line.
(1) Take the Accessory Box out of the Package.
Caution:
Do not remove the 4 Styrofoam Pads attached to
the Finisher. The absence of these Pads can
cause deformation of the Rail Mount.
(2) Without removing the Pads, lift the Finisher, and
stand it on the floor.
(Be sure to work in a group of two.)
Ver. 5.2
372
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Tag
(1)
Right Lower
Cover
(1)
Screw
Ver. 5.2
373
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Caution:
It is a good idea to store the removed Releasing
Plate and the shipping screws for future use.
(4) Reinstall the Right Lower Cover.
Fixing Member
Screw
Ver. 5.2
374
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Tray
(3)
Ver. 5.2
375
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Sensor Cable
Harness Cover
(1)
(3)
Ver. 5.2
376
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
The following steps (5)~(15) are not applicable for
USA and Canada.
(7)
(6)
(8)
(9)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(11)
(12)
(13)
Ver. 5.2
(13)
377
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(18)
(18)
(17)
(16)
(16)
(19)
(20)
(20)
(22)
(21)
(22)
(23)
Ver. 5.2
378
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(26)
(25)
Ver. 5.2
379
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(5)
(4)
(5)
(3)
(6)
Ver. 5.2
380
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4)
B
(4)
B
Wrench
Ver. 5.2
Screw
381
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(6)
(6)
(7)
(7)
(8)
Adjusting Bolt
Fixing Screws
(Black)
Ver. 5.2
382
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Adjusting Bolt
Fixing Screws
(Black)
Adjusting Bolt
90
Ver. 5.2
383
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.28.1. Contents
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Punch Unit
Punch Lower Cover
Punch Relay Harness
Upper Cover Guide
Guide Plate (Long)
Jam Removal Instructions Label
Part No.
See Note
4A1-8409-000
FF3-4067-000
4A1-8408-000
4B1-0949-000
FB5-5924-000
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
Installation Instructions
DZSM000567
Remarks
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.28.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
Preparing the Host Machine for Installation
(1)
Ver. 5.2
384
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(2)
Punch
Fixing Plate
(1)
Finisher Side
Connector Cover 2
Connector Cover 1
(3)
Ver. 5.2
(3)
385
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
J3
J4
Shoulder Screws
Punch Lower
Cover
(7) Silver M4 x 12
(7) Black M4 x 6
Ver. 5.2
386
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
J21
J23
Punch Relay
Harness
Finisher Controller
PCB
Connector
Cover 1
(9)
Upper Cover
Jam
Removal
Instructions
Label
Upper Cover
Upper Cover
Guide
(11)
(12) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.
Note:
See the Finisher's Installation Instructions for adjusting the height. If the 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS600) or
the 2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS605) is being installed at the same time as the Punch Unit and
you were asked to follow these instructions first before continuing with the Finisher installation. Return to
the step of the Finisher installation where you stopped and proceed installing the Finisher.
Ver. 5.2
387
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
2 Bin Finisher
Upper Tray
Guide Bar
Lower Tray
Stand
Front Cover
Rear Cover
Front Magnet Catch Plate
Rear Magnet Catch Plate
Switch Bracket
Locking Clamp
Part No.
See Note
GP01-3415
GH03-3103
GP01-3403
DZJA001230
DZJE001064
DZJE001065
DZJA001226
DZJA001227
DZJA001225
GS01-6503
DZHP007718
2
2
2
6
1
Screw (M4 x 8)
Screw (M4 x 10)
Screw (M4 x 30)
Screw (M3 x 10)
Installation Instructions
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
DZSM000570
Remarks
Assembled
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
3. Before you begin the installation of your 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS330), read these entire
instructions.
8.29.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
3.9 in
(100 mm)
3.9 in
(100 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm)
63.0 in
(1600 mm)
Ver. 5.2
3.9 in
(100 mm)
3.9 in
(100 mm)
388
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Unpacking
Note:
This finisher is protected with packing materials
such as tapes and spacers against vibration and
shocks caused during transportation. Be sure to
remove them before using the finisher.
Caution:
The finisher weights approximately 35 lb (16 kg).
To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of
personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move
the finisher.
Move the finisher next to the left side of the
machine and remove the packing materials using
the following procedure.
(1) Take the Stapler, Finisher, and accessories out of
the package.
(2) Remove the tapes securing the Stapler, Finisher,
Accessory Cover, etc. along with the packing
materials.
Note:
The removed tapes and packing materials will be
needed when transporting the finisher for
relocation or repair; it is a good idea to store them
away for future use.
3. Preparing the Host Machine for Installation
(3)
Note:
For USA and Canada, skip to step (15).
(1) Open the Front Door.
(2) Open the Upper Exit Cover.
(3) Remove 3 Screws.
(4) Remove the Exit Guide 3 Assembly.
(2)
(4)
(5)
(5)
(7)
Ver. 5.2
(7)
389
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(8)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(12)
(18)
(20)
(15)
(19)
(17)
(16)
Ver. 5.2
390
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(21)
(23)
(22)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2)
Caution:
Be sure install both the Finisher and Host Machine
on a level floor. A stepped or slanted floor can
result in improper paper feed.
(1) Fit the hooks of the Stand into the mounting
holes on the side panel of the Host Machine.
(2) Secure the Stand with 2 Screws (M4 x 30).
(3) Slide the Rails of the Stand to the left as
illustrated.
(4) Place the Finisher on the Rails.
Finisher
Rail
Ver. 5.2
391
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(7)
(6)
Upper Tray
Finisher
Lower Tray
(11)
(10)
(9)
Ver. 5.2
392
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
A
B
(1)
(2)
Ver. 5.2
(3)
393
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher
Stapler
Delivery Tray
Stand
Part No.
See Note
PF4117K226A
PF4117K225A
PF4117K604A
DZHP007718
FFPMF1069
E-Ring
See Note
1
6
4
2
1
2
1
1
Latch Plate
Screw (M4 x 7)
Silver Screw (M3 x 10)
Silver Screw (M4 x 30)
IPC PC Board
Spacer
Label
Installation Instructions
PF4117K101A
See Note
See Note
See Note
PF4117P003
PF4117K254
DZNK004315
DZSM000759
Remarks
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
3. Before you begin the installation of your 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS355A), read
these entire instructions.
8.30.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
3.9 in
(100 mm)
3.9 in
(100 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm)
74.2 in
(1885 mm)
Ver. 5.2
3.9 in
(100 mm)
3.9 in
(100 mm)
394
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Unpacking
Note:
This finisher is protected with packing materials
such as tapes and spacers against vibration and
shocks caused during transportation. Be sure to
remove them before using the finisher.
Caution:
The finisher weights approximately 60 lb (27 kg).
To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of
personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move
the finisher.
Move the finisher next to the left side of the
machine and remove the packing materials using
the following procedure.
(1) Take the Stapler, Finisher, and accessories out of
the package.
(2) Remove the tapes securing the Stapler, Finisher,
Accessory Cover, etc. along with the packing
materials.
Note:
The removed tapes and packing materials will be
needed when transporting the finisher for
relocation or repair; it is a good idea to store them
away for future use.
3. Preparing the Host Machine for Finisher
Installation
(1) Loosen the 2 Screws and remove the SPC
Cover.
(2) Remove the Toner Waste Container.
(Refer to Section 2.2.2. in the Service Manual)
(1)
(3)
Ver. 5.2
395
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(5)
(6)
Note:
For DP-35xx, skip to step (21).
For DP-45xx, follow the Steps below.
(5) Open the Front Cover.
(6) Swing the Hopper Unit to the right side.
(8)
(7)
(9)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(13)
(11)
(12)
Ver. 5.2
396
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fuser Unit
(Front View)
(14)
(16)
(15)
Fuser Unit
(Rear View)
(17)
(19)
(18)
Note:
For USA and Canada, skip to step (36).
(23)
(24)
(25)
(25)
(27)
Ver. 5.2
(27)
397
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(28)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(30)
(31)
(30)
Note:
For DP-35xx, skip to step (34).
For DP-45xx, follow the Steps below.
(32) Remove the E-Ring and Exit Roller Gear 1
(Black).
(33) Install the Exit Roller Gear 1 (White) and E-Ring
included with this kit.
(29)
(34)
Ver. 5.2
(34)
398
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(39)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(37)
(*)
(41)
(40)
(1)
Bracket
Slider
Screw
Ver. 5.2
399
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Finisher
Slider
Screws
Finisher
No Gap
Caution:
When mounting the Finisher in place, be sure to
insert the lower tabs of the Finisher into the holes
on top of the Slider. Ensure that there is no gap
between the Finisher and the Stand. The gap
would indicate the Finisher is overlapping.
Remove and mount the Finisher correctly.
Stand
Finisher
Screws
Positioning
Line
Ver. 5.2
400
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Finisher
(6)
Bracket
Screw
Finisher
Screws
Delivery Tray
Screws
Front Cover
Stapler
(10)
Ver. 5.2
Caution:
Before connecting the Interface Cable, make sure
to turn OFF the Host Machine and unplug the AC
Power Cord from the wall outlet to avoid shock
hazards.
401
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Adjuster
Adjuster
A
B
Ver. 5.2
402
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.31.1. Contents
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Part No.
See Note
YA1020K374B
YA1020K375A
YA1020P828A
YA1020P208A
See Note
DZSM000572
Punch Unit
Punch Relay Harness (Orange)
Punch Relay Harness (Violet)
Jam Removal Label
Punch Dust Label
Screw (M4 x 6)
Installation Instructions
Remarks
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.31.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
1. Removing the Packing Material
Note:
This machine is protected with packing material
such as tape and spacers against vibration and
shocks caused during transportation. Be sure to
remove them before using the machine.
(1) Take the Punch Unit and accessories out of the
package.
(2) Remove the tape securing the Covers and Front
Door.
Front Door
Screw
Jam
Release
Dial
Tab
Screw
Ver. 5.2
403
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Latch Release
Lever
Front Cover
Screws
Jam
Access
Cover
Screw
Rear Cover
Screws
Rear Cover
Screw
Ver. 5.2
404
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Screws
Screws
Upper-Right Cover
Lug
Ver. 5.2
405
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Latch
Positioning Pin
Screw
Ver. 5.2
406
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Open the Upper Cover, fit the lugs of the UpperRight Cover in the square holes in the Punch
Unit to attach the Upper-Right Cover to the
Punch Unit.
(5) Close the Upper Cover.
Upper-Right Cover
Upper Cover
Punch Unit
Screws
Upper-Right
Cover
Upper-Right Cover
Jam
Access
Label
Punch
Dust
Label
Ver. 5.2
407
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Punch
Controller
Circuit Board
J1003
J1004
Punch Relay
Harness
(Orange)
Punch Relay
Harness (Violet)
Punch Relay
Harness
(Orange)
CN12
Punch Relay
Harness (Violet)
Finisher
Controller
Circuit Board
Ver. 5.2
408
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Punch Relay
Harness
(Violet)
Punch Relay
Harness
(Orange)
Harness
Clamp
Finisher
Controller
Circuit
Board
Harness
Guide
Side
Guide
Front Cover
Note:
When attaching the Front Cover, attach it as the
Side Guide is set inside the Front Cover. See the
figure left.
If the Front Cover is attached with the Side Guide
being set outside, up and down operation of
Ejection Tray may malfunction.
Screws
Ver. 5.2
409
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Finisher
Host Machine
Latch Plate
Align
Punch Base
Cover
Ver. 5.2
410
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
Power Supply for Finisher
LVSC Harness
Screw
Installation Instructions
Part No.
See Note
DZFP001286
XTB3+6F
DZSM000561
Remarks
This document
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.32.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Open the Front Cover.
(2) Swing the Hopper Unit to the right side.
(5)
(4)
(3)
Ver. 5.2
411
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(9)
(7)
(8)
(11)
(10)
(13)
(12)
Ver. 5.2
412
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
Harness, KCTU
Cover, Connector
Part No.
DZFP001387
DZMC000783
See Note
Installation Instructions
DZSM000609
Remarks
This document
8.33.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Remove 9 Silver Screws.
(2) Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
(4)
(6)
(7)
Ver. 5.2
413
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(9)
(10)
Note:
As a safety measure, if the Key Counter is not being
installed, cover up the aperture with the Connector
Cover and secure it with 2 Screws.
Note:
After the Key Counter installation, ensure that the harness and the connector are not exposed.
Ver. 5.2
414
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.34.1. Contents
Qty.
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
10
1
Description
Part No.
FFPXK43H00
DZHP008182
DZHP008195
DZJE001048
DZEC102536
DZFP001118
DZFP001188
DZFP001393
DZNK004269
XTB3+6F
DZSM000563
Heater
Heater Assembly
Heater Switch Assembly
Connector Holder Bracket
RLB PC Board
RLB Harness
DHT Harness
DF2 Harness
Heater SW Label
Screw
Installation Instructions
Remarks
4 Connectors
3 Connectors (Long)
3 Connectors (Short)
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.34.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(4)
(3)
(2)
(5)
(2)
(5)
(7)
(6)
(5)
(7)
(10)
(12)
Ver. 5.2
(13)
415
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(17)
(18)
(16)
(14)
(15)
(20)
(19)
(21)
(22)
(22)
(25)
(25)
(26)
Ver. 5.2
416
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(27) Insert the right side of the DF2 Harness into the
Connector Holder Bracket.
(28) Secure the Connector Holder Bracket with
1 Screw.
(28)
(27)
(Right Side)
(29)
(31)
(33)
(32) Insert the left side of the DF2 Harness into the
Connector Holder Bracket.
Note:
Observe the direction of the bracket in the
illustration, before inserting the connector.
(32)
(34)
(36)
(35)
Ver. 5.2
417
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
Ver. 5.2
418
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(46)
(45)
(48)
(47)
(50)
Inverting
Paper
Sensor
(49)
(51)
(53)
(53)
(56)
(55)
Ver. 5.2
419
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(59)
(60)
(57)
(58)
(60)
(58)
(61)
(62)
(64)
(63)
(66)
(65)
(68)
Ver. 5.2
(67)
420
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(70)
(69)
(69)
(71)
(72)
(72) With the 1st Paper Tray pulled out, install the
Heater Assembly as illustrated.
(73) Secure the Heater Assembly with 1 Screw.
(74) Connect the Heater Assembly to DHT Harness.
(73)
(74)
(75)
Ver. 5.2
421
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(78)
(78)
(76)
(77)
(79)
(81)
(80)
Ver. 5.2
422
JAN 2006
Ver. 5.2
423
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
424
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
425
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
When handling the Drum Unit, hold the Handle.
Ver. 5.2
426
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
427
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
428
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Network Protocol
OSI Reference Mode
Having a model in mind helps you understand how the pieces of the network puzzle fit together. The most
commonly used model is the Open System Interconnection (OSI) reference model. The OSI model, first
released in 1984 by the International Standards Organization (ISO), provides a useful structure for defining
and describing the various processes underlying networking communications.
The OSI model organizes communication protocols into seven layers. Layer 1, the Physical (Hardware)
layer, consists of protocols that deal with how data is transferred across the transmission media. At the
opposite end, Layer 7, the Application layer, interfaces the network services with the applications (software)
in use on the computer. The five layers in between, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session and
Presentation - perform intermediate communication tasks. In essence the OSI model is a framework that
describes how a function from one computer is transmitted to another computer on the network.
Layer
Name
Function
Application
Presentation
Session
Protocol
SMB
SMTP
FTP
DNS
HTTP
Telnet
etc...
Transport
Network
TCP, UDP
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
Net BEUI
Apple Talk
IP Address etc...
etc...
Datalink
Physical
Router
PPP...
NIC
SW Hub
Repeater
Hub
Ethernet
Token Ring
FDDI
ATM
etc...
RS-232C, X21...
MAC Address
Ver. 5.2
429
JAN 2006
9.1.2.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Protocol
One reason for the popularity of TCP/IP is that no one vendor owns it, unlike the IPX/SPX, DNA, SNA or
Apple Talk protocol suites, all of which are controlled by specific companies. TCP/IP evolved in response to
input from a wide variety of industry sources. Consequently, it is the most open of the protocol suites and is
supported by the widest variety of vendors. One huge advantage of using TCP/IP is that, it is required for
communication over the Internet, thus the Internet can be used as a communication backbone.
TCP/IP was originally designed by ARPANET (Advanced Research Project Agency) in 1969 for the UNIX
operating system. In early 1980, UNIX 4.2 BSD version was released. For more detailed information, an
RFC (Request for Comment) document is available from the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) on the
Internet at http://www.ietf.org/.
The Internet protocols do no map cleanly to the OSI reference model. The model for the Internet protocol
suite has four layers. From the illustration below, you can see the approximate relationship of the layers.
Layer
7
6
5
9.1.3.
Cable
For the network transmission media at the Physical layer on the OSI reference model, there are several
cable categories available. Category 5, 8 wire Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable is commonly used.
Shielded Twisted Pair cables are also available. The Impedance for the STP / UTP Ethernet cable is 100 .
Category 3 is also used for the 10Base-T Ethernet.
Category
1
2
3
4
5
Ver. 5.2
Purpose
Voice grade telephone line
ISDN
10Base-T Token Ring (4M)
Token Ring (16M)
100Base-TX, ATM (155M)
430
JAN 2006
9.2.
9.2.1.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The MAC address is burnt into each network card for establishing addresses for nodes on the network.
These addresses are hexadecimal in nature and are unique for each card. The First three bytes from the
left end identify the manufacturers code that must be approved by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers). The Remaining three bytes on the right half should be kept in a unique manner. For
Ethernet connections, multiple stations share the topology, therefore, the identification packet from each
station should be unique.
XXXXXX XXXXXX
Unique value
Manufacturer ID
PCC : 080023
9.2.2.
Network Control
CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) If a node is trying to make a link to the
network, transmission from another station is prohibited and halted until the data transfer is completed and
the link is off. CSMA/CD and Token Passing are typical techniques used to control the connection. The
General sequence is as follows:
Wait for the next available timing to send,
Send out a frame,
Perform collision sensing simultaneously,
Retry to send the same frame up to 16 times if necessary.
(Sequence goes by a binary exponential back-off algorithm to avoid periodical incident)
802.3 (Ethernet) Frame Format
Ver. 5.2
431
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
A computer in the ring captures the token, if it has data to transmit, it holds the token and transmits a data
frame. This data frame is passed to each computer in the ring, which checks whether it is the intended
recipient of the frame.
When the frame reaches the destination address, the destination PC copies the frame to a receive buffer,
updates the frame status field of the data frame and puts the frame back on the ring.When the computer
that originally sent the frame receives it back from the ring, it acknowledges a successful transmission,
takes the frame off the ring, and places the token back on the ring.
Token Frame indicates that the network is available for transmission.
Data Frame indicates that the network is busy processing a transmission.
Token Frame Format
Data
Destination Source
MAC
MAC
6 or 2 byte 6 or 2 byte
Ver. 5.2
432
JAN 2006
9.2.3.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ethernet
Ethernet is a very popular local area network architecture based on the CSMA/CD access method. The
original ethernet specification was the basis for the IEEE 802.3 specifications. Typically, ethernet networks
can use a bus physical topology, although, many varieties of ethernet such as 10Base-T uses a star
physical topology and a bus logical topology. (Microsoft uses the term "star bus topology" to describe
10Base-T)
10Base-5
10Base-T
10M
100Base-TX 100M
Star
Star
Max Length
500 m (1640 ft)
10
BASE
Logical speed
(Mbps)
5
BASE : baseband (digital)
BROAD: broadband (analog)
10
BASE
T
TP Twisted Pair
Ver. 5.2
433
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1
2
3
6
TX (+)
TX (-)
RX (+)
RX (-)
TX (+)
TX (-)
RX (+)
RX (-)
Straight Cable
Crossed Cable
"1"
"0"
0V
-2.05 V
Out of balance in electrical levels indicates that a collision is occurring in a certain area. To avoid from
further malfunctions, terminating the physical end is required for coaxial cables.
If a collision is detected, transmission is stopped and a maximum of 4.8 usec. of JAM packet is sent. The
node that receives the JAM packet, discards the applicable received data. The maximum timing for collision
detection is called slot time, normally set to 49.9 usec. The interval of 9.6 usec to 10 usec after the end of
transmission frame is reserved for non-transmission period.
There are several merits to Ethernet wiring, the physical connection is easy and flexible for future expansion
due to the star topology.
9.2.4.
Repeater
The main purpose of a repeater is to extend the maximum range for the network cabling. They operate at
the OSI Physical layer, and do not filter or interpret the signal - they merely repeat (regenerate) the signal,
passing all network traffic in all directions.
They perform signal amplitude, delete errors and reschedule the timing. Repeaters also follow the 5-4-3
rule, where no more than 5 network segments connected by 4 repeaters, with no more than 3 of the
segments being populated.
Active Hubs function in part as repeaters (amplify and regenerate network signals), they occasionally are
called multiport repeaters.
9.2.5.
NIC is an acronym for Network Interface Card, which plugs into a computer and adapts the network
interface to the appropriate standard. ISA, PCI, and PCMCIA cards are all examples of NICs.
Ver. 5.2
434
JAN 2006
9.3.
9.3.1.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Network Layer
IP Address
An IP address is a set of four numbers, or octets, that can range in value between 0 and 255. Each octet is
separated by a period (i.e. 192.168.31.1). All devices on a network that runs the TCP/IP protocol suite need
a unique IP address. Most machines use a Domain Name, which are easier for people to remember.
The IP addresses are actually broken down into three distinct classes, knows as class A, class B and class
C addresses.
Class A IP addresses contain a number between 1 and 127 before the first dot. In class A address, this first
octet represents the network address, and the last three octets represent the node or host number.
Class B IP addresses can range in value from 128 to 191 for the first octet, but it is the first two octets that
make up the network address, and the last two octets that make up the host ID.
Class C IP addresses can range in value from 192 to 223 for the first octet, and the first three octets make
up the host ID.
There are class D and E addresses as well. For these addresses, the first octet is a number greater than
223. These addresses are not currently available to be used and are reserved for other purposes.
Class A : First octet reserved for the network address
Class B : First two octets reserved for the network address
Class C : First three octets reserved for the network address
Class A 0
Class B 1 0
Class C 1 1 0
Ver. 5.2
435
JAN 2006
9.3.2.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Subnet Mask
IP
192.168.32.1
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
Network
Address
192.168.32.0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
192
168
32
1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
255
255
255
0
IP
Subnet Mask
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Network Address Configuration
Global IP
Address
190.0.0.0
255.255.0.0
190.0.3.1
255.255.255.0
190.0.3.2
255.255.255.0
190.0.3.3
255.255.255.0
Router
190.0.2.1
255.255.255.0
Note
Upper: IP address
Lower: Subnet mask
190.0.1.1
255.255.255.0
190.0.2.2
255.255.255.0
190.0.1.2
255.255.255.0
190.0.2.3
255.255.255.0
190.0.1.3
255.255.255.0
Third
Floor
Second
Floor
Ground
Floor
Ver. 5.2
436
JAN 2006
9.3.3.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Internet Protocol
The IP (Internet Protocol) operating at the OSI Network layer, is a connectionless protocol that provides
datagram service, and IP packets are most commonly referred to as IP data grams.
It performs the following typical functions:
1. Identifies the IP address
2. Packet disassembly and reassembly of the IP datagram
3. Routing of the IP address
4 byte
Version
Internet
Header Length
Type Of Service
Total Length
ID
Time To Live
Flags
Fragment Offset
Header Checksum
Protocol
Source Address
Destination Address
Option + Padding (size varies)
Data
IP Datagram
Terms
Version
Internet Header
Length
Type Of Service
ID
Flags
Fragment Offset
Time To Live
Protocol
Header Checksum
Source Address
Destination Address
Option
Padding
Ver. 5.2
Detail
Currently version 4
IP Header field length
Service priority requested by IP Datagram (3 bits are reserved for
precedence)
Identification frame number for upper layer communication
Packet disassembly information
Offset from most significant bit
Decrement the counter until 0 every time packet pass over the router
Upper layer protocol identification number. ie TCP (06h), UDP (11h)
Checksum is used for error checking on the header data
Senders IP Address
Destinations IP Address
When implemented
Fill bit field to add up to 32 bit
437
JAN 2006
9.3.4.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Router
Routers, operating at the OSI Network layer, organize the large network in terms of logical network
segments. Each network segment is assigned an address so that every packet has both a destination
network address and a destination device address.
Routers are more intelligent than bridges. Not only do routers build tables of network locations, but they
also use algorithms to determine the most efficient path for sending a packet to any given network by
identifying its header information.
These are the typical functions:
1. Routing
This controls the traffic according to a specified routing table.
2. Packet Filtering
This performs the access and security control for specified routing.
PC-A
192.168.32.1/24
192.168.33/24
Router B
PC-C
192.168.33.1/24
PC-B
192.168.32.2/24
OK
PC-D
192.168.33.2/24
OK
permission denied
permission denied
Packet Filtering Sample
3. Address Conversion
NAT (Network Address Translator), This performs conversion of a single global IP Address from/to
single private IP Address.
4. IP Masquerade:
This performs a conversion of single global IP Address from/to multiple private IP Address.
At the same time the port number is automatically assigned.
Occasionally, the conversion creates a bottleneck in the network overhead. For a typical solution, PIX
(Private address Internet address exchange) is available from Cisco, which is a well-known
manufacturer.
5. Designated Reply
These are reply that keep a connection alive by responding with a signal periodically.
Watch Dog in IPX/SPX, TCP/IP in TCP, and Net BT (NetBIOS on TCP/IP) in Windows NT are all well
known techniques to keep a live connection.
Ver. 5.2
438
JAN 2006
9.4.
9.4.1.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Transport Layer
TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
The TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is an internetwork connection-oriented protocol that corresponds
to the OSI Transport layer. TCP provides full-duplex, end-to-end connections. When the end-to-end
communication acknowledgement is not required, the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) can be substituted for
the TCP at the Transport (host-to-host) level. TCP and UDP operate at the same layer.
The UDP is a connectionless oriented protocol.
IP Datagram
TCP segment
TCP Header
(20 byte)
IP Header
(20 byte)
Application Data
(vary)
Reserved
(6 bit)
Control Flag
(6 bit)
Checksum (2 byte)
Option
Window (6 byte)
Urgent Pointer (2 byte)
PAD
Data (Segment)
Ver. 5.2
439
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Client
SYN, Se
quential
No.=453
8970
8971
No.=453
K
C
000
A
,
K
AC
1919424
.=
o
N
l
a
quenti
SYN, Se
ACK, AC
K
No.=191
9724001
Server
Panasonic
Device
TCP 3 Handshake General Flowchart
The client generates random sequential numbers initially and sends them to the server. The initial
sequential numbers are synchronized with the clock and increments the counter every 4 msec.
The Server responds with an acknowledgement that increments the initial sequential number by one. The
ACK bit number is also changed to a "1" value. The "SYN" can have and identical "ACK" response for each
packet, thus, the server and the client can establish a connection.
Ver. 5.2
440
JAN 2006
9.5.
9.5.1.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Upper Layer
DNS (Domain Name System)
The DNS (Domain Name System) protocol provides host name and IP address resolution as a service to
client applications. DNS servers enable humans to use logical node names, utilizing a fully qualified domain
name structure, to access network resources.
Domain Names are comprised of 2 or more parts, separated by dots. The part on the left is the most
specific, and the part on the right is the most general. A given device may have more than one Domain
Name but a given Domain Name points to only one device. For example, the Domain Names below:
Panasonic.com
Mail.panasonic.com
ifax.panasonic.com
can all refer to the same device, but each domain name can refer to no more than one device.
Usually, all of the devices on a given network will have the same right-hand portion of their Domain Names
(i.e. panasonic.com in the examples above). It is also possible for a Domain Name to exist but not be
connected to an actual device.
This is often done so that a group or business can have an Internet email address without having to
establish a real Internet site. In these cases, some real Internet machine must handle the email on behalf of
the listed Domain Name.
Specification for this name system follows this basic guideline.
The name must be separated by dots and must start with ASCII code.
Only Alpha numeric and hyphen are available.
Up to 63 characters maximum, separated by dots.
Up to 255 characters maximum, including all dots.
Capital letters and small letters are not identical. (Case Sensitive.)
3
2
1
Panasonic
Device
5
4
6
10
8
DNS Server
(panasonic.com)
Ver. 5.2
441
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Name resolution flow is shown in the illustration above and follows the sequence below:
1. Query the local DNS Server.
2. Query the root DNS Server because the domain belongs to a destination outside of the company.
3. The Com root DNS Server sends the query to the jp root DNS Server.
4. The procedure repeats until a final name resolution is available.
5. The panafax.co.jp server responds with an IP address for the query name.
6. Finally, the name resolution is completed and the destination IP address is determined.
All DNS servers makes an effort to resolve the query name with an IP address, however, a response is not
always sent out every time. Once a name resolution is completed, the information from the DNS Server IP
address table is kept in cache memory at each DNS server in accordance with a minimum TTL (Time To
Live) of SOA (Start Of Authority) record. There are two types of Name Servers, Primary and Secondary
Name Server.
9.5.2.
A primary server has the original copy of a zone file. Any changes made to the zone file are made to the
copy on the primary server. When a primary server receives a query about a host name in its own zone, it
retrieves the host resolution locally from its own zone files.
9.5.3.
A secondary server gets a copy of zone files from another server. This zone file is a read-only copy of the
original file from the primary server. Any changes made to the zone file are made at the primary server, then
the changes are copied down to the secondary server through a zone transfer. Multiple secondary servers
in a domain improves performance.
Ver. 5.2
442
JAN 2006
9.5.4.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Each database file starts with a Start of Authority (SOA) record for the file. This record specifies the zone's
primary server, the server that maintains the read/write copy of the file. The syntax of this record is as
follows:
IN SOA <source host><contact email><serial No.><refresh time><retry time><expiration time><TTL>
An example of the syntax is shown below:
;
; File:
db.127.0.0 file
; Purpose: This file establishes the identity of this DNS.
;
SOA stands for 'start of authority' and sets the
;
default parameters for information this DNS is
;
authorized for:
;
@
IN SOA
nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. hostmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. (
951213
; serial number
43200
; refresh every 12 hours
; retry after 2 hours
7200
1209600 ; expire after 2 weeks
172800) ; default ttl is 2 days
;
IN NS
nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
1
IN PTR
localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
;
Ver. 5.2
443
JAN 2006
9.5.5.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
A (Address) Record
The A (Address) Record, lists the addresses for a given machine. The name field is the machines name
and the address is the network address. There should be one A record for each address on the machine.
9.5.6.
Pointer records are the reverse-lookup file entries that enable IP addresses to be resolved to host names.
DNS is used to resolve host names to IP addresses, so the opposite process is called reverse lookup.
They specify the IP address in reverse order (like a DNS name, with the most specific information first) and
then corresponding host name. The files are named according to the class of network, but with the octets in
reverse order. The syntax for a PTR record is shown below:
<ip reverse domain name> IN PTR <host name>
1
;
IN NS
IN PTR
nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
The CNAME (or canonical name) record is an alias (nickname), enabling you to specify more than one
name for each IP address. The syntax of a CNAME is shown below:
<alias name> CNAME <host name>
Using CNAME records, you can combine an FTP and a Web server on the same host. Nicknames are
useful when a well-known host changes its name. In this case, its usually a good idea to have a CNAME
record so people still using the old name, will get to the right place.
Ver. 5.2
444
JAN 2006
9.5.8.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Name Server record specifies the other name servers for a domain. The syntax for a name server
record is shown below:
<domain> IN NS <nameserver host>
An example of a name server record follows below:
@ IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp
The "@" symbol indicates the local domain. The server "nwmgr" in the domain "pcc.co.jp" is the name
server.
9.5.9.
The Mail Exchange (MX) record specifies the name of the host that processes mail for this domain. If you
list multiple mail servers, you can set a preference number (value) that specifies the order in which the mail
server should be used. Note that lower values indicate higher precedence, and that mailers are supposed
to randomize same-value MX hosts so as to distribute the load evenly if values are equal. If the first
preferred mail server does not respond, the second one is contacted, and so on.
If you want a host to receive its own mail, you should create an MX record for your host's name, pointing at
your host's name. The syntax of this record is shown below:
<domain> IN MX <preference> <mailserver host>
For a more detail, please refer to RFC974 document at URL http://www.ietf.org/.
9.5.11.
Forwarding
A Slave Server is a server that always forwards queries it cannot satisfy from its cache, to a fixed list of
forwarding servers instead of interacting with the name servers for the root and other domains. The queries
to the forwarding servers are recursive queries. There may be one or more forwarding servers, and they are
tried in turn until the list is exhausted. A Slave and forwarder configuration is typically used when you do not
wish all the servers at a given site to interact with the rest of the Internet servers. A typical scenario would
involve a number of workstations and a departmental timesharing machine with Internet access. The
workstations might be administratively prohibited from having Internet access. To give the workstations the
appearance of access to the Internet domain system, the workstations could be Slave servers to the
timesharing machine, which would forward the queries and interact with other name servers to resolve the
query before returning the answer. An added benefit of using the forwarding feature is that the central
machine develops a much more complete cache of information that all the workstations can take advantage
of. The use of Slave mode and forwarding is discussed further under the description of the named bootfile
commands.
There is no prohibition against declaring a server to be a slave even though it has primary and/or secondary
zones as well; the effect will still be that anything in the local server's cache or zones will be answered, and
anything else will be forwarded using the forwarders list.
For more detail, please refer to published book (i.e. DNS and BIND etc) provided from O' Reilly &
Associates, Inc.
Ver. 5.2
445
JAN 2006
9.6.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The objective of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently.
SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data
stream channel.
The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request,
the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP
may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the senderSMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP
in response to the commands. Once the transmission channel is established, the SMTP-sender sends a
MAIL command indicating the sender of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail it responds with an
OK reply.
The SMTP-sender then sends a RCPT command identifying a recipient of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver
can accept mail for that recipient it responds with an OK reply, if not, it responds with a reply rejecting that
recipient (but not the whole mail transaction). The SMTP-sender and SMTP-receiver may negotiate several
recipients. When the recipients have been negotiated the SMTP-sender sends the mail data, terminating
with a special sequence. If the SMTP-receiver successfully processes the mail data it responds with an OK
reply. The dialog is purposely lock-step, one-at-a-time. For more detail, please refer to the URL http://
www.imc. org/rfc821
Internet
SMTP Server
PC
DNS Server
SMTP
PC
POP Server
POP 3
9.6.1.
Ver. 5.2
446
Delivery route
Message ID
Content-Type
JAN 2006
9.7.
9.7.1.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Unit conforms to the ITU T.37 standards and RFC2305. This Internet store and forward facsimile uses
approved IETF protocols for posting, relaying and delivery of documents. It requires no changes to Internet
standards or to ITU Facsimile Recommendations.
Store and forward facsimiles may operate in one of two modes.
Communicating in the Simple Mode as defined below provides inter operability. All terminals conforming to
this recommendation and capable of reception must be able to receive in Simple Mode. It is recommended
that terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of transmitting should, as a minimum, be
capable of transmitting in Simple Mode.
Simple Mode supports the transfer of image data. Capability exchange and confirmation of receipt are not
required for Simple Mode but may be provided using optional email functions outside the scope of this
recommendation.
9.7.2.
Required
Strongly
Recommended
Optional
Required
Optional
Ver. 5.2
447
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Required
Strongly
Recommended
Optional
9.7.3.
Be SMTP compliant
Provide delivery failure notification
Be able to process PSTN/FAX email address
Comply with the relevant ITU Recommendations relating to facsimile
transmission
Attempt to relay authorized email to the corresponding G3 facsimile
terminals
Ensure DSN for delivery failure notification
Use DSN for delivery failure notification
Use an approved mailbox access protocol when serving multiple
users
Translate image data into a format acceptable by the receiving G3
facsimile terminal
Use a mailbox access protocol when serving a single mail recipient
Ver. 5.2
448
RFC2301
RFC2302
RFC2303
RFC2304
RFC2305
RFC2306
JAN 2006
9.7.4.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Sending Internet Fax devices must be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for
creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile) [RFC2301], which is also
compatible with the specification for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in [RFC2306]. Receiving Internet Fax
devices MUST be able to read minimum set TIFF files.
The Following tree diagram shows the relationship among profiles and between profiles and coding
methods.
S (MH)
Color
B/W
C (JPEG)
J
(JBIG)
F
(MMR, MR)
L (JPEG)
M (MRC)
Ver. 5.2
S
F
J
C
L
Color
B/W
B/W
B/W
Color
Color
Color
Coding Method
MH
MMR, MR
JBIG
JPEG (lossy)
JPEG (lossless,
grayscale)
Mixed Raster
Content
Remarks
Internet Fax minimal set
Internet Fax full mode
Internet Fax mixed mode
Color minimal set
One bit per color, palletized color image, continuous
tone color and grayscale images
Multiple coders and resolution within a page
449
JAN 2006
9.7.5.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Minimal Set
The minimum interchange set of TIFF fields that must be supported by all implementations in order to
assure that some form of an image, albeit black-and-white, can be interchanged.
The table below summarizes the TIFF fields that comprise the minimal interchange set for black-and-white
facsimile. The Baseline and Extenuation fields and fields values must be supported by all implementations.
Baseline Fields
Bits Per Sample
Compression
Fill Order
Image Width
Image Length
New Sub File Type
Page Number
Photometric Interpretation
Resolution Unit
Rows Per Strip
Samples Per Pixel
Strip Byte Counts
Strip Offsets
X Resolution
Y Resolution
Extensions Fields
T4 Options
9.7.6.
Values
1
3:1 dimension MH coding set T4 Options = 0 or 4
Least significant bit first
1728 (A-4)
N: total number of scan lines in image
2: Bit 1 identifies single page of a multi-page document
N, m: page number n followed by total page count m
0: pixel value 1 means black
2: inch
Number of scan lines per strip = Image length, with one strip
1
Number of byte in TIFF strip
Offsets from beginnings of file to single TIFF strip
204, 200 (pixels/inch)
98, 196, 100, 200 (pixels/inch)
0: MH coding, EOLs not byte aligned; 4: MH coding, EOLs
byte aligned
Addressing
A simple method of encoding PSTN addresses in the local-part of Internet email addresses, along with an
extension mechanism to allow encoding of additional standard attributes needed for email gateway to
PSTN-based services.
(1) Offramp
(3) Others
Ver. 5.2
Domain
450
Domain
Domain
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
For RFC2305, a PSTN address in an email address should follow the above style. The key words
MUST, MUST NOT, REQUIRED, SHALL, SHALL NOT, SHOULD, SHOULD NOT,
RECOMMENDED, MAY, and OPTIONAL in this document are to be interpreted as described in
RFC 2119. URL http://www.imc.org/rfc2119
1. MUST
This word, or the terms REQUIRED or SHALL, means that the definition is an absolute requirement
of the specification.
2. MUST NOT
This phrase, or the phrase SHALL NOT, means that the definition is an absolute prohibition of the
specification.
3. SHOULD
These words, or the adjective RECOMMENDED, means that there may exist valid reasons in
particular circumstances to ignore a particular item, but the full implications must be understood and
carefully weighed before choosing a different course.
4. SHOULD NOT
This phrase, or the phrase NOT RECOMMENDED means that there may exist valid reasons in
particular circumstances when the particular behavior is acceptable or even useful, but the full
implications should be understood and the case carefully weighed before implementing any behavior
described with this label.
9.7.7.
IFD (Page 0)
Long Values
Image Data
(Page 0)
Value Offset
IFD (Page 1)
Long Values
Image Data
(Page 1)
IFD (Page 2)
File Structure
Ver. 5.2
451
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.7.8.
Delivery Failure
In the event of relay failure, the sending relay must generate a failure message, which should be in the
format of a DSN.
9.7.9.
The Sending Internet Fax devices MUST be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for
creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile), which is also compatible with
the specifications for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in F Profile for Facsimile, RFC 2306.
The Receiving Internet Fax devices must be able to read minimum set TIFF files.
Ver. 5.2
452
JAN 2006
9.8.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Communication Protocols
The set of conventions necessary to achieve facsimile-compatible service covers basic data transport,
document data formats, message (document) addressing, delivery confirmation, and message security.
Protocol supported by the your Panasonic Device is as follows:
SMTP Command
HELO sv2.labo.pcc.com
250 ef1.labo.pcc.com
MAIL FROM: <xxx@sv2.labo.pcc.com>
[5 minutes]
250 OK
RCPT TO: <yyy@sv2.labo.pcc.com>
[5 minutes]
250 OK
DATA
[2 minutes]
DATA BLOCK
DATA BLOCK 1
[3 minutes]
[3 minutes]
DATA BLOCK n
CR/LF . CR/LF
[10 minutes]
Closing
DATA BLOCK 2
250 OK
QUIT
221 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service closing
transmission channel
Closing TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)
According to RFC1123, there are two approaches for time-outs in the sender-SMTP:
1. limit the time for each SMTP command separately, or
2. limit the time for the entire SMTP dialogue for a single mail message.
A sender-SMTP SHOULD use option (a), per-command timeouts.Timeouts SHOULD be easily
reconfigurable, preferably without recompiling the SMTP code.
The value of timer [ ] shown above are recommended by RFC1123.
Ver. 5.2
453
JAN 2006
9.8.1.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
At the time the transmission channel is opened there is an exchange of commands to ensure that the hosts
are communicating with the hosts they think they are. The following two commands are used in the
transmission channel for opening and closing:
HELO:<SP> <domain> <CRLF>
QUIT:<CRLF>
In the HELO command, the host sending the command identifies itself; the command may be interpreted as
saying, Hello, I am <domain>.
9.8.2.
Mail (MAIL)
This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more
mailboxes.
9.8.3.
RECIPIENT (RCPT)
This command is used to identify an individual recipient of the mail data; multiple recipients are specified by
multiple uses of this command.
9.8.4.
Data (DATA)
The receiver treats the lines following the command as mail data from the sender. This command causes
the mail data from this command to be appended to the mail data buffer. The mail data may contain any of
the 128 ASCII character codes. The mail data is terminated by a line containing only a period, that is the
character sequence <CRLF>.<CRLF>. This is the end of mail data indication.
9.8.5.
Send
This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more
terminals. This command is successful if the message is delivered to a terminal.
9.8.6.
Reset (RSET)
This command specifies that the current mail transaction is to be aborted. Any stored sender, recipients,
and mail data must be discarded, and all buffers and state tables cleared. The receiver must send an OK
reply.
9.8.7.
Verify (VRFY)
This command asks the receiver to confirm that the argument identifies a user. If it is a user name, the full
name of the user (if known) and the fully specified mailbox are returned.
9.8.8.
Quit (QUIT)
This command specifies that the receiver must send an OK reply, and then close the transmission channel.
9.8.9.
SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data
stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a
user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The
receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated
by the sender-SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the
sender-SMTP in response to the commands.
Ver. 5.2
454
JAN 2006
9.8.10.
211
220
221
250
251
354
421
450
451
452
500
501
502
503
504
550
551
552
553
554
Ver. 5.2
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
455
JAN 2006
9.9.
9.9.1.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Introduction
On certain types of smaller nodes in the Internet it is often impractical to maintain a message transport
system (MTS). For example, a workstation may not have sufficient resources (cycles, disk space) in order
to permit a SMTP server and associated local mail delivery system to be kept resident and continuously
running. Similarly, it may be expensive (or impossible) to keep a personal computer interconnected to an
IP-style network for long amounts of time.
The Post Office Protocol - Version 3 (POP3) is intended to permit a workstation to dynamically access a
mail drop on a server host in a useful fashion. Usually, this means that the POP3 protocol is used to allow a
workstation to retrieve mail that the server is holding for it.
For more detail, please refer to URL of http:// www.imc.org/rfc1939
9.9.2.
Basic Operation
Initially, the server host starts the POP3 service by listening on TCP Port No. 110. When a client host
wishes to make use of the service, it establishes a TCP connection with the server host. When the
connection is established, the POP3 server sends a greeting. The client and POP3 server then exchange
commands and responses (respectively) until the connection is closed or aborted.
Commands in the POP3 consist of a case-insensitive keyword, possibly followed by one or more
arguments. All commands are terminated by a CRLF pair. Keywords and arguments consist of printable
ASCII characters. Keywords and arguments are each separated by a single SPACE character. Keywords
are three or four characters long. Each argument may be up to 40 characters long.
Responses in the POP3 consist of a status indicator and a keyword possibly followed by additional
information. All responses are terminated by a CRLF pair. Responses may be up to 512 characters long,
including the terminating CRLF. There are currently two status indicators: positive ("+OK") and negative ("ERR"). Servers MUST send the "+OK" and "-ERR" in upper case.
Responses to certain commands are multi-line. In these cases, which are clearly indicated below, after
sending the first line of the response and a CRLF, any additional lines are sent, each terminated by a CRLF
pair. When all lines of the response have been sent, a final line is sent, consisting of a termination octet
(decimal code 046, ".") and a CRLF pair. If any line of the multi-line response begins with the termination
octet, the line is "byte-stuffed" by pre-pending the termination octet to that line of the response.
Hence a multi-line response is terminated with the five octets "CRLF.CRLF". When examining a multi-line
response, the client checks to see if the line begins with the termination octet. If so and if octets other than
CRLF follow, the first octet of the line (the termination octet) is stripped away. If so and if CRLF immediately
follows the termination character, then the response from the POP server is ended and the line containing
".CRLF" is not considered part of the multi-line response.
A POP3 session progresses through a number of states during its lifetime. Once the TCP connection has
been opened and the POP3 @server has sent the greeting, the session enters the AUTHORIZATION state.
In this state, the client must identify itself to the POP3 server. Once the client has successfully done this, the
server @acquires resources associated with the clients mail drop, and the session enters the
TRANSACTION state. In this state, the client requests actions on the part of the POP3 server. When the
client has issued the QUIT command, the session enters the UPDATE state. In this state, the POP3 server
releases any resources acquired during @the TRANSACTION state and says goodbye. The TCP
connection is then closed.
A server MUST @respond to an unrecognized, unimplemented, or @syntactically invalid command by
responding with a negative status @indicator. A server MUST respond to a command issued when the
session is in an incorrect state by responding with a negative status indicator. There is no general method
for a client to distinguish between a server which does not implement an optional command and a server
which is unwilling or unable to process the command.
Ver. 5.2
456
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
A POP3 server MAY have an inactivity auto logout timer. Such a timer MUST be of at least 10 minutes
duration. The receipt of any command from the client during that interval should suffice to reset the auto
logout timer. When the timer expires, the session does NOT enter the UPDATE state--the server should
close the TCP connection without removing any messages or sending any response to the client.
9.9.3.
STAT
LIST [msg]
RETR [msg]
DELE [msg]
NOOP
RSET
QUIT
TOP [msg]
UIDL [msg]
POP3 Replies:
+OK
-ERR
Note:
With the exception of the STAT, LIST, and UIDL commands, the reply given by the POP3 server to any
command is significant only to "+OK" and "-ERR". The client may ignore any text occurring after this
reply.
From:
To:
Ver. 5.2
457
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
AUTHORIZATION
TRANSACTION
UPDATE
TCP 3 way
handshake &
Opening Session
POP 3 Server
(sv2.labo.pcc.com)
AUTHORIZATION
PASS !xxxx
+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).
TOP 1 1
+OK 69762 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
PETR 1
+OK 69752 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
Text DATA :end with .(period)
TRANSACTION
DELE 1
+OK Message 1 has been deleted.
TOP 2 1
+OK 1 56288 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
PETR 2
+OK 1 56288 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
Text DATA :end with .(period)
DELE 2
+OK Message 2 has been deleted.
QUIT
+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.
UPDATE
Ver. 5.2
458
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Troubleshooting is an art of seeking out the cause of a problem and eliminating the problem by managing of
eliminating the cause. No matter what the problem is on your network, the OSI Reference Model serves as
an excellent reference tool to help you locate the area of trouble.
One of the simplest tools available, is the DOS command-line prompt from your Windows PC.
Listed below are the most often used command-line prompts that you can use at the customer's network
PC. Some commands are available as an option for checking with more detail.
Command
Sample
Ping
Ping 192.168.1.30
Ipconfig /all
Tracert
Netstat
Net view
Nslookup
Purpose
Checking for physical connection between your PC and the target
destination
(192.168.1.30)
Ipconfig /all
Checking for current network configuration (Host Name, DNS
server, IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, MAC address,
WINS etc)
For Windows 95/98/Me, please type winipcfg instead of
Ipconfig/all
Tracert 192.168.2.245 Checking for the datagram route between your PC and the target
destination
(192.168.2.245)
Netstat Netstat -nr
Active connection list
Active route for your subnet.
All special assigned IP addresses are also shown
Net view
Checking for the current file sharing Host Name
Nslookup
Checking for the DNS server IP address.
This command is available for Windows NT only.
Note:
Before taking corrective action, you must check the physical connections or wiring first.
Ver. 5.2
459
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP)
START
Yes
No
No
DHCP Client?
Is this a Dialup
connection ?
No
Is static IP address
available ?
Yes
Not supported
Yes
Is G3 Gateway
function being used ?
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Not supported
Is POP account
available ?
Is POP account
available ?
No
No
No
Yes
Not supported
Yes
Set network parameters
for POP receiving
If not ready
Ask the Network
Administrator to setup
a new POP account.
Important Notice:
Customers wishing to operate a G3 Gateway function for the Panasonic models,
the total Network Security such as Anti Spam Mail protection must be aware of
how the system performs sufficient security levels as designed. So you may ask
the Security Policy Manager to allow relay of messages by changing
the configuration of the Massage Transfer Agent like the Sendmail.
Otherwise the system will deny any relay operation.
Ver. 5.2
460
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of
reusable network addresses and additional configuration options.
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides configuration parameters to Internet hosts.
The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is a UDP/IP-based protocol which allows a booting host to configure itself
dynamically and without user supervision. BOOTP provides a means to notify a host of its assigned IP
address, the IP address of a boot server host, and the name of a file to be loaded into memory and
executed. Other configuration information such as the local subnet mask, the local time offset, the
addresses of default routers, and the addresses of various Internet servers can also be communicated to a
host using BOOTP.
DHCP consists of two components: a protocol for delivering host-specific configuration parameters
from a DHCP server to a host and a mechanism for allocation of network addresses to hosts.
DHCP supports three mechanisms for IP address allocation.
In "automatic allocation", DHCP assigns a permanent IP address to a client.
In "dynamic allocation", DHCP assigns an IP address to a client for a limited period of time (or until the
client explicitly relinquishes the address).
In "manual allocation", a client's IP address is assigned by the network administrator, and DHCP is used
simply to convey the assigned address to the client. A particular network will use one or more of these
mechanisms, depending on the policies of the network administrator.
"DHCP client"
A DHCP client is an Internet host using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters such as a network
address.
"DHCP server"
A DHCP server is an Internet host that returns configuration parameters to DHCP clients.
Table 1 describes a DHCP message and its purpose of use.
Message
Use
DHCPDISCOVER Client broadcast to locate available servers.
DHCPOFFER
Server to client in response to DHCPDISCOVER with offer of configuration
parameters.
DHCPREQUEST Client message to servers either (a) requesting offered parameters from one server
and implicitly declining offers from all others, (b) confirming correctness of
previously allocated address after, e.g., system reboot, or (c) extending the lease
on a particular network address.
DHCPACK
Server to client with configuration parameters, including committed network
address.
DHCPNAK
Server to client indicating client's notion of network address is incorrect (e.g., client
has moved to new subnet) or client's lease as expired
DHCPDECLINE
Client to server indicating network address and in use.
DHCPRELEASE
Client to server indicating network address and canceling remaining lease.
DHCPINFORM
Client to server, asking only for local configuration parameters; client already has
externally configured network address.
Table 1: DHCP messages and purpose of use
Ver. 5.2
461
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers
when allocating a new network address.
Client
Server
(not selected)
Server
(selected)
Begins initialization
Determines
configuration
DHCPDISCOVER
DHCPDISCOVER
Determines
configuration
DHCPOFFER
DHCPOFFER
Collects replies
Selects configuration
DHCPREQUEST
DHCPREQUEST
Commits configuration
DHCPACK
Initialization complete
Graceful shutdown
Discards lease
DHCPRELEASE
Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers
when reusing a previously allocated network address.
Server
Client
Server
Begins initialization
Locates
configuration
DHCPREQUEST
DHCPREQUEST
DHCPACK
DHCPACK
Locates
configuration
Initialization complete
Subsequent
DHCPACKS ignored
Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when
reusing a previously allocated network address
Ver. 5.2
462
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Several options have been defined so far. One particular option - the "DHCP message type" option - must
be included in every DHCP message. This option defines the "type" of the DHCP message.
Additional options may be allowed, required, or not allowed, depending on the DHCP message type.
INITIALIZATION
INITIALIZE/
REBOOT
DHCPNAK/
Restart
-/Send DHCPREQUES
DHCPACK
(not accepted)/
Send DHCPDECLINE
-/Send DHCPDISCOVER
DHCPNAK, Lease expired/
Halt network
DHCPNAK/
Discard offer
SELECTING
DHCPOFFER/
Collect replies
REBOOTING
Select offer/
send DHCPREQUEST
REQUESTING
REBINDING
DHCPOFFER/
Discard
DHCPACK/
Record lease, set
timers T1, T2
DHCPNAK/
Halt network
DHCPACK/
Record lease, set
/timers T1,T2
DHCPACK/
Record lease, set
/timers T1,T2
T2 expires/
Broadcast
DHCPREQUEST
BOUND
DHCPACK/
Record lease, set
timers T1, T2
T1 expires/
Send DHCPREQUEST
to leasing server
T1 expires/
Send
DHCPREQUEST
to leasing server
RENEWING
The client maintains two times, T1 and T2, that specify the times at which the client tries to extend its lease on its
network address. T1 is the time at which the client enters the RENEWING state and attempts to contact the server
that originally issued the clients network address. T2 is the time at which the client enters the REBINDING state and
attempts to contact any server. T1 MUST be earlier than T2, which, in turn, MUST be earlier than the time at which
the clients lease will expire.
To avoid the need for synchronized clocks, T1 and T2 are expressed in options as relative times.
More detailed information, please refer to RFC2131 document available from following URL.
http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html.
Ver. 5.2
463
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The confirmation of delivery and processing are extensions to "Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet
Mail" [RFC2305]. These are designed to be interoperable with the existing base of mail transfer agents
(MTAs) and mail user agents (MUAs), and take advantage of existing standards for advanced functionality
such as positive delivery confirmation and disposition notification. The following two features are combined.
(1) Delivery confirmation (required)
(2) Additional document features (optional)
In Internet Mail, the operations of Delivery (to the mailbox) and Disposition (to paper or a screen) may be
separated in time (due to store and forwarding of messages) and location (due to separation of delivery
agent (MTA) and user agent (MUA)). The confirmations of these two operations are supplied by two
different standards-track mechanisms: Delivery Status Notifications (DSN) [RFC1891, RFC1894] and
Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) [RFC2298], respectively.
Your Panasonic device supports MDN.
Delivery Status Notification (DSN)
A DSN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions: failed delivery, delayed
delivery, successful delivery, or the gatewaying of a message into an environment that may not support
DSNs. Panasonic Iternet FAX does not request DSN while sending.
fail
SMTP Server
SMTP Server
DSN
N returned to sender by Reporting MTAs (Message Transfer Agent) if fail of delivery is occurre
SMTP Server
SMTP Server
MDN
The MDNs are expected to serve several purposes such as allow mail user agents (Outlook Express) to
keep track of the disposition of messages sent, by associating returned MDNs with earlier message
transmissions.
Ver. 5.2
464
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
For example, you may configure the MDN parameter from Options menu of Outlook Express.
MDN request
MDN notify
Internet FAX
(3)
SMTP Server
SMTP Server
(2)
Internet FAX
(1) Request
If the sender (Internet FAX) desires processing confirmation, the sender must request Message
Disposition Notification when sending the message itself.
Sender provides the Disposition-Notification-To field on address using the following formula.
Ver. 5.2
465
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
MESSAGE
HEADER
BODY
TEXT
Mime-Version: 1.0
X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic
Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:42:00 -0500
Message-Id: <20020206154203470001.BE948.fax@huge.com>
From: <fax@huge.com>
Subject: Read Receipt:IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: fax@core.mega.edu
In-Reply-To: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com>
References: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com>
Content-Type: multipart/report; report-type=disposition-notification; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"
**********
Read Receipt
**********
ATTACHED
FILE
Ver. 5.2
Final-Recipient: rfc822;fax@huge.com
Original-Message-ID: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com>
Disposition: automatic-action/MDN-sent-automatically; dispatched
Media-Accept-Features:
(& (type="image/tiff")
(color=Binary)
(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)
(MRC-mode=0)
(ua-media=stationery)
(paper-size=[A4,B4,letter,legal])
(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])
(| (& (dpi=200) (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )
(& (dpi=204) (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196,204/391]) )
(& (dpi=408) (dpi-xyratio=408/391) ) ) )
466
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
467
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The protocol is designed to provide access to directories supporting the X.500 models, while not incurring
the resource requirements of the X.500 Directory Access Protocol (DAP).
This protocol is specifically targeted at management applications and browser applications that provide
read/write interactive access to directories. When used with a directory supporting the X.500 protocols, it is
intended to be a complement to the X.500 DAP.
X.500 is an overall model for Directory Services in the OSI world. The model encompasses the overall
namespace and the protocol for querying and updating it. A major part of X.500 is that it defines a global
directory structure.
It is essentially a directory web in much the same way that http & html are used to define & implement
the global hypertext web. Anyone with an X.500 or LDAP client may peruse the global directory just as they
can use a web browser to peruse the global Web.
From the "Start" menu of Windows client PC, you can search for people on the Internet, using of server at
directory services.
Ver. 5.2
468
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Client
Server
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 110)
Challenge Response
<1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp>
Digest parameter, Challenge + PASSWD
<1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp>PASSWD
Possible Responses:
+OK
-ERR permission denied
STAT
+OK 1
Continue to follow the POP3 procedure
APOP overview
The POP3 client makes note of this timestamp, and then issues the APOP command. The "name''
parameter has identical semantics to the "name" parameter of the USER command. The "digest" parameter
is calculated by applying the MD5 algorithm to a string consisting of the timestamp (including anglebrackets) followed by a shared secret. This shared secret is a string known only to the POP3 client and
server. Great care should be taken to prevent unauthorized disclosure of the secret, as knowledge of the
secret will allow any entity to successfully masquerade as the named user. The "digest" parameter
itself is a 16-octet value which is sent in hexadecimal format, using lower-case ASCII characters.
When the POP3 server receives the APOP command, it verifies the digest provided. If the digest is correct,
the POP3 server issues a positive response, and the POP3 session enters the TRANSACTION state.
Otherwise, a negative response is issued and the POP3 session remains in the AUTHORIZATION state.
Note that as the length of the shared secret increases, so does the difficulty of deriving it.
Ver. 5.2
469
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
SMTP is widely deployed and high-quality implementations have proven to be very robust. However, the
Internet community now considers some services to be important that SMTP AUTH is an SMTP service
extension (ESMTP) whereby an SMTP client may indicate an authentication mechanism to the server,
perform an authentication protocol exchange, and optionally negotiate a security layer for subsequent
protocol interactions. This extension is a profile of the Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL). To
use SASL, a protocol includes a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server and for
optionally negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions.
Client
Server
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 25)
220 smtp.example.com ESMTP server ready
EHLO jgm.example.com
250-smtp.example.com
250 AUTH LOGIN DIGEST-MD5 CRAM-MD5
AUTH CRAM-MD5
334
PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndA
ZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=
ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==
235 Authentication successful
Continue to follow the SMTP procedure
The AUTH command indicates an authentication mechanism to the server. If the server supports the
requested authentication mechanism, it performs an authentication protocol exchange to authenticate and
identify the user. Optionally, it also negotiates a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. If the
requested authentication mechanism is not supported, the server rejects the AUTH command with a 504
reply.
Challenge Response
334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndAZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=
BASE64 decoded string
Produces a Challenge
<CByLEDBhSCgnhMZ+N23F6w@elwood.innosoft>
Genrates Digest parameter
Challenge + PASSWD with HMAC (keyed-Hashing for Message
USER
Authentication Code) roduces a 16 octet digest value of:
9e95aee09c40af2b84a0c2b3bbae786e
Fred
BASE64 encoded string
ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==
The authentication protocol exchange consists of a series of server challenges and client answers that are
specific to the authentication mechanism. A server challenge, otherwise known as a ready response, is a
334 reply with the text part containing a BASE64 encoded string. The client answer consists of a line
Ver. 5.2
470
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
containing a BASE64 encoded string. If the client wishes to cancel an authentication exchange, it issues a
line with a single "*". If the server receives such an answer, it must reject the AUTH command by sending a
501 reply.
If the server cannot BASE64 decode the argument, it rejects the AUTH command with a 501 reply. If the
server rejects the authentication data, it should reject the AUTH command with a 535 reply unless a more
specific error code, such as one listed in Error Codes below, is appropriate. Should the client successfully
complete the authentication exchange, the SMTP server issues a 235 reply.
The service name specified by this protocol's profile of SASL is "smtp".
Error Codes
The following error codes may be used to indicate various conditions as described.
432: A password transition is needed
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the user needs to transition to the selected
Authentication mechanism. This is typically done by authenticating once using the plain authentication
mechanism.
538: Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the selected authentication mechanism may only
be used when the underlying SMTP connection is encrypted.
454: Temporary authentication failure
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the authentication failed due to a temporary server
failure.
530: Authentication required
This response may be returned by any command other than AUTH, EHLO, HELO, NOOP, RSET, or
QUIT. It indicates that server policy requires authentication in order to perform the requested action.
Ver. 5.2
471
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Direct Internet Fax XMT uses Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) to transfer mail reliably and efficiently.
An important feature of SMTP is its capability to transport mail across networks, usually referred to as
SMTP mail relay by employing SMTP server.
Direct Internet Fax XMT allows you to transmit documents to another Internet Fax directly without using an
SMTP Server. For this feature to work reliably, configure the IP Address to remain unchanged (static), ask
the Network Administrator to reserve the IP Address. The Subnet Mask and Gateway must be configured
as well. The Domain Name of the machine and other record information must be properly registered on the
DNS Server.
For the Direct Internet Fax XMT to function properly, the DHCP Parameter No. 22 setting must be disabled
in the General Settings (For Key Operator).
Furthermore, in common cases only email and web service from the Internet are permitted into the
corporate intranet, and corporate network administrators are extremely unwilling to open the firewall for
other, incoming services, since each opened path represents additional, potential security threats.
This makes Direct Internet Fax XMT attractive because it can operate throughout the organization's
Intranet.
Several new service extensions were assigned.
(1) The EHLO keyword value associated with this extension is "CONNEG"
(2) A parameter using the keyword "CONNEG" is added to the RCPT-TO command
Sender
Recipient
Establish TCP connection
220
EHLO
Ver. 5.2
472
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
10 Schematic Diagram
10.1. General Circuit Diagram
*4: For DP-4510/4520/6010/6020
*1 : Factory use only
*2 : Depending on the spec. of each destination *5: For DP-3510/3520 only
*6: Not Used
*3 : Japan spec. only
1
2
2
CT 3
3
SYSTEM
CONSOLE
SENSOR
PNL GND
CN650
CN661
CN651
CN659
CN662
CN658
CN660
CN652
10
G6
nLPOW1
3
4
+5VD
+5VP
nLPOW2
+5V
6
7
8
GND
GND
11
12
3
4
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
GND
GND
+3.3V
+3.3V
14
7
8
GND
9
10
15
11
9
10
12
11
13
12
10
14
15
13
11
13
14
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
10
11
12
13
14
15
CN767
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
nLPOW1
nFCBRST
PNLSCLK
13
14
PNLLDO
nPCIRING
15
2
1
nSLPKYE
12
CN142
CN141
nADFSES
GND
9
11
12
12
13
14
15
13
14
15
LCD
2
3
4
Y2
X1
CN225
Y1
CN224
14
CN223
X2
20
18
SDI
nSEN1
18
19
17
nTX0
17
nSEN2
16
pTX0
16
20
15
nTX1
15
19
14
13
12
pTX1
11
14
13
11
10
10
GND
pTXCLK
nTXCLK
9
pTX2
nTX2
8
nMCLK
8
12
SC
PNL2
pMCLK
pSHD
8
10
11
8
10
nSHD
nSCLK
pSCLK
pGACLK
1
nGACLK
1
13
14
15
AGND
12
AGND
+3.3V
+3.3V
14
15
13
12
11
10
+5V
+5V
11
15
CN250
12
14
15
nLPOW2
13
nPNLRST
12
PNLSD
PNLRD
11
GND
11
GND
10
+5V
+5VP
10
+24V
CNSCC
10
8
9
GND
CN280
24V
CN55
PHN
13
CN56
PNL3
CN57
PMLOCK
3
PMCNT
4
PMCLK
5
GND
CN231 *6
1
2
DC
CNDCC
1
2
CN222
nLD2
PGND
GND
GND
pLD2
CN850
ITG
G5
CN230
nLD1
+24VM
1
2
PNL1
pLD1
10
5VP
ORIGINAL
SENSOR
CT
CN550
nSLSYNCB
3
2
1
CN145
6
OE
BLKCLP
nRESET
5
6
2
AGND
CLPIN
3
4
REGISTRATION
SENSOR 1
2
1
ORGSN
CN229
8
9
10
4
5
6
4
5
6
17
+5VP
+5VP
LAZERB
6
7
8
7
+5VP
4
5
LAZERA
4
5
1
2
GND
1
D11-8
RR3SN
+5V
+3.3V
1
2
CNOM
EXFM1
2
1
FAN1
HARDWARE
KEY I/F
CN69
D11-8
D11-8
CN68
CN67
CN65
SORT
MEM
CN64
FROM
CARD
CN63 *3
CN62
FRM
SLOT 2
FRM
SLOT 1
CN228 *1
SH_B
9 LAZREF 9
LAZENB
10
10
+5VP
1
+5V
2
+5V
3
+5V
4
+5V
5
GND
6
GND
7
GND
8
GND
9
GND
10
2
3
3
3
1
PGND
EXFL1
(Option)
FAN3 FAN2
REGISTRATION
CLUTCH 2
REGISTRATION
CLUTCH 1
CT
RR1SN
+5V
GND
16
SH_A
KCTCNT
4
4
+5V
KCS
KCT
GND
3
1
FM
POWSW
HSYNC
CN851
CNKCT24VM
PGND
PGND
EXFM2
EXFL3
EXFL2
EXFM3
8
7
GND
WEB TOTAL
SOLENOID COUNTER
FM FM
1
2
Key
Counter
INVERTING
SOLENOID
1
2
3
CCD
+12V
DUST OZONE
FAN
FAN
PAPER PAPER
EXIT
EXIT
DOOR
SENSOR
SENSOR
CN227 *3
CN751
1
2
PS SUCTION
FAN
FAN
FM FM FM FM
DOOR
SENSOR
ELP
1
1
CT
1
CT
11
CN757
CN765
SCAN
MOTOR
EXDOSN2
11
GND
10
+5V
9
PFOSN1
12
+5V
14
13
24VM
24VM
6
2
ELPCNT
24VM
8
7
+5V
DOSN
WEBSOL
CT
9
GND
10
PWFM
12
SCFM
11
PWFL
10
SCFL
9
PGND
8
PGND
7
DDFM
6
OZFM2
5
DDFL
4
OZFL2
3
PGND
2
PGND
1
2
24VS
LMB
LMAB
LMBB
24VS
8
7
LPCNT
PGND
1
9
3
24VS
10
11
12
16
15
GND 14
GND 13
PCSN
17
2
1
2
M
3
INVERTER
CNSPC
GND
pSPKOT
3
1
ADF
ANGLE
SENSOR
G5
SPKR
TEL
CN21
1
2
!
CN22
CN20
LINE
G3 FAX
(Option)
+5V
6
7
AGND
nCTON
pCNLD
+24V
GND
nHKOF
1
2
1
+5Vp
L2
1
3
MJR
4
3
2
1
ADF
OPEN
SENSOR
CN759
!
EXP LAMP
CN25
CN768
CN758
D11
CN22
CN393
+5V
PASN
18
CN756
LMA
CN391
1
3
CN392
80
79
FXB
3
4
CN220
+24V
+5V
3
2
GND
+5VP
GND
GND
7
6
4
4
GND
3
3
3
2
CT
1
CN390
1
RR2CLCNT
CT
2
24VO1
1
RR1CLCNT
CT
2
1
2
CN221
9
8
CN142
CN750
RR2SN
+5V
GND
2
CT
1
REGISTRATION
SENSOR 3
GND
REGISTRATION
SENSOR 2
GND
1
GND
CN144
DXSLCNT2
PINCH
SOLENOID
D3
1
2
24VO1
DXSN
+5V
2
CT
1
SW3
+5VL
GND
CN4
F1a
+24V
CN2
DXSLCNT1
EXIT
SENSOR
D3
INVERTING
SENSOR
1
2
PPSOLCNT
CN226 *1
LOW VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY 1
3
4
+24V
+3.3V
GND
3
2
1
CT
24VO1
EXSN
+5V
CN141
CN3
LVS1
+24V
GND
INVERTING
CLUTCH 2
STAMP
(Included w/ G3 Fax
Option)
CN251
INTERMEDIATE
SENSOR
GND
to DRV
1
2
CT 3
2
ACN
PGND
PGND
CN103
+5V
ADF SENSORS
DOOR
OPEN
SENSOR
GND
1
2
2
3
OPSN
1
2
STSLCNT
15
CN5
DOOR
SENSOR
CNHTC
CN106
HEATL
ACSW
GND
3
2
1 CT
14
CN51
THI1
THERMISTOR
ZCIN
Power Cord
10
SSA3
ACL
PFCLCNT
GND
TIMING
SENSOR
1
2
CT
D3
12
11
SSA2
LPHT2 LPHT1
5
1
CN726
THI2
CN723
+5V
GND
2
1
4 QDOSN
5 GND
GND
6
+5V
7
+5V
8
PCRSN
9
10 SPPSN
1
2
CT 3
3
TMGSN
SSA1
10
13
24VO1
1
2
CT
CT
GND
1
2
11 GND
GND
12
T5
12
+5V
INVERTING
CLUTCH 1
Vcnt
PAPER
FEED
CLUTCH
11
SIZE4SN
24VO1
10
GND
2
1
3
2
CT
1
+5V
SLOW
DOWN CLUTCH
24VO1
CN1
CN2
SIZE
SENSOR4
SIZE3SN
CT
SB2CLCNT
3
4
24VO1
D11
+5V
+5V
3
2
CT
1
CT
SB1CLCNT
6
7
CN656
CN704
CN710
CN721
15
SIZE
SENSOR3
24VO1
4
5
GND
3
1
SDCLCNT
+5V
MMBB
1
2
3
5
SIZE2SN
MMB
24VO1
CN290
14
3
2
CT
1
SIZE
SENSOR2
MMAB
2
5
3
1
6
4
2
4
GND
ADF
MAIN
MOTOR
11
24VO1
SIZE1SN
+5V
CN653
5
4
13
GND
3
2
CT
1
MMA
+24V
HVLKD
14
13
11
12
CN655
12
G6
CN657
11
HVDDCCNT
9
10
GND
MM
3
1
PMBB
8
7
CN654
5
4
3
ORGSN
GND
PAPER
FEED
MOTOR
24VO1
10
HVLKT
HVDACCNT
13
HVTCNT
12
CNTH
THI
1
CN1
80
79
CN66
CN80
GND
3
CT HPESN
2
+5V
1
HFSOL
L +24VM 2
HVBACCNT
HVLKB
CN52
T3
HVBDCCNT
T2
10
LOW VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY 2
(Option, except N.A.)
LVS2
+24V
HVBACCLK
CN725
24VD
+5V
F1b
1
HUMSN
2
1
GREFCNT
2
2
ACN
F2a
3
2
1
2
+5VP
28
SIZE
SENSOR1
HVLKC
CN65
1
CN64
CN102
CNLVC
ACL
T1
SW2
SHEET
BYPASS
SENSOR
G3
F2b
CN718
G4
ACD
FULP1
N E L
CN755 *3
CN66 *1
3
4
PGND
HVCNT
2
3
4
5
6
+24VM
CN715
GND
ACLD
ACND
1
CN104
CN133
CN134
GND
3
5
PM
PMB
24VO1
+5V
24
25
PMAB
12
13
14
11
9
24VO1
8
9
10
11
+5V
23
PMA
3
4
5
6
7
PGND
22
CN551
GND
PGND
21
LSU
12
CT
GND
20
G5
TONER
DENSITY
SENSOR
CN552
BPSN
11
11
TENPSN
GND
4
3
TEMP
HUMIDITY
SENSOR
TONER
BOTTLE
POSITION
SENSOR
24VO1
27
1
2
3
CN143
+5V
10
TDREF
TDSNIN
1
2
LUM1
GOPSW1
+24VM
D3 1
GND
TONER
DETECT
SENSOR
24VO1
26
1
DENSITY
SENSOR
CN719
2
3
VTED
1
2
2
3
4
VCDS
CDSN1
22
CDSN2
21
+24VM
GND
20
7 GND
8 PFSIZSN3
+5V
9
10
2
CT
1
P18FX
19
+5V
14
18
PFSIZSN2
18
TED
16
GND
19
17
GND
D11
2ND
TRAY
LIFT UP
MOTOR
TONER
BOTTLE
MOTOR
2
1
BMA
6
8
PGND
STRVP
+24VM
3
2
CT
1
AFDIN
6
18
16
PFSIZSN1
+5V
13
15
GND
BM
BMAB
2A
1A
2B
1B
BMB
12
AFCLK
AFLD
AFDIN
14
15
AFLD
12
AFENB
AFLTH
13
AFCLK
9
10
11
AFDOUT
12
AFLTH
+24V
10
nSTRX
8
pSTRX
9
10 GND
nSTTX
11
pSTTX
12
IPRXD
2
GND
3
IPTXD
4
GND
7
+24VM
3
2
CT
1
SIZE
SENSOR 3
DRHT
SIZE
SENSOR 2
ADU SENSORS
BMBB
CN105
CN59
SIZE
SENSOR 1
11
AFENB
CNHV
REGISTRATION
SENSOR
4
5
ARST
11
HVPS
1
2
CT 3
AC DRIVER
N E L
PCI 62 *2
ACN
Thermo 1
HDD 40P
ADU
INTERMEDIATE
SENSOR
(Option)
FULP3
TONER
WASTE
CONTAINER
SENSOR
Thermo 2
15
+5V
16
3
2
CT 1
NFL
CN173
GND
TFBOXSN
TONER
WASTE
SENSOR
F Lamp1
+5V
3
2
CT
1
ACLRLB
ACL
F Lamp3
HDD
(Option)
(Option)
CN172
CNGSW
GND
TFSN
GND
19
CN108
CN101
14
1
2
6
1
13
CT
1
2
GND
1
2
CT 3
PAPER
SENSOR 3
BLACK
10
CT
ROLLER
CLUTCH
WHITE
TRBLSW1
GND
CNHT2
MAGCL
RLB
L MAGNETIC
ACNRLB
CNHT4
24VM
1
CT 2
18
RRSN
ADU
REGISTRATION
SENSOR
AFDOUT
+5VD
14
1
2
1
2
3
CT
PAPER
SENSOR 2
ADU
SENSOR
17
2
3
24
ADFRRSN1
10
ADFSN
ADXSN
8
9
ARST
16
ADXSN
ADFRRSN1
15
17
1
10
ARRSN2
ARRCNT
ARRSN2
2
3
13
1
2
1
PEWSSN1
2
GND
3 CT
+5V
1
PEWSSN2
2
GND
CT
3
+5V
1
PEWSSN3
2
GND
CT
3
CLUTCH
CN720
23
REGIST- PAPER
L RATION SENSOR 1
CN709
12
CT C
14
CN724
11
22
LLUM
G1
CN132
SEPSOL
10
21
L CLUTCH
CT
+5V
CRRSN1
7
LBSN1
8
GND
9
CT
GND
10
+5V
11
PESN1
+5V
12
CT GND 13
14
1
2
CT C
+5V
SHEET BYPASS
SOLENOID
CN171
1
2
SW1
CNSW1
SEPARATION
SOLENOID
24VM
1
2
3
PAPER
SENSOR
ADU
1
2
3 CT
PFCL1
+24VM
PUSOL1
CN711
20
PTL *4
13
CN722
CN714
CN712
to ADF
CN753
1
24VO2
2
24VO2
PGND
PGND
CN716
6
7
4
5
1
2
19
17
18
15
16
20
(Option)
INVERTING
JAM
SENSOR
3
2
1
CSS I/F *1
FINISHER
CONNECTOR
(Option)
INLET
CT
2
1
Dehumidifier
Heater
(Option)
ACN
CT
SW4
INVERTING
SENSOR
CNSHD1
CN60
17
CN713
PGND
24VM
24VM
PGND
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
GND
+24V
GND
P12CNT
PVCNT
SVCNT
RVEXSN
PFOSN1
DMCLK
LPCNT
12
13
14
6
7
8
9
10
11
INVERTING
12
HDD
ADF
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
RVCLK
LMCLK
DFRST
DFDIN
MMCLK
3
CNA
2
CT 1 EXIT
SENSOR
3
16
11
CNHD1
16
PAPER
EXIT
SENSOR 2
CNHT1
15
GND
16
CT
18
17
15
19
GND
16
18
+5V
LPEWSN3
15
D3
+24VM
ARRCNT
1
2
ARVCL2
PRGDWN
15
CNB
3
2
1
11
12
3
2
14
14
GND
1
1
PTL
2
11
+24VM
1
2
DXCL1
12
2
+24VM
1
3
RRCL
2
13
+5V
4
+5V
14
ADUINSN
5
ADURRSN
15
GND
6
GND
16
+5V
7
+5V
17
ADUCRRSN
8
CT
1
2
3
4
ARVCL2
AMMCLK
APMCLK
ARVCL1
14
11
12
13
13
PRST
13
G2
SREQ
15
+5V
5
GND
8
GND
10
12V
13
12
GND
14
PFOSN2
15
RVEXSN
16
+5V
17
+5V
18
GND
19
GND
20
RVSN
21
22 RVJAMSN
CN143
SENTIM
12
PAPER TRAY
SOLENOID
OHTL
11
10
DUPRNT
11
PVSYNC
10
CN702
SACK
4 +24V
3
GND
1
2
5
CN764
VREQ
PCSSOL2
GND
BD_B
CN141
1
2
BD_A
24VM
CNDCC
13
PCSSOL1
DUACK
12
RVSSOL2
INVERTING
SOLENOID
ACL
11
10
21
22
CN142
CN727 (IPC)
CN131
20
1
2
24VM
CN708
5
6 CT
RVMBB
RVSSOL1
ADU
L
S
CLUTCH
+24VM 1
L INTERMEDIATE PAPER
PCCL
CT
C
CLUTCH PATH
2
+24VM
SENSOR
1
L SHEET
CT
HFCL
C
BYPASS
2
UPPER
CLUTCH
LIMIT
SENSOR
D3
ZH
+24VM
DXCL2
LPEWSN2
CT
+24VM
10
GND
CT
1
2
3
10
GND
9
+5V
8
7
OQFDIN
6
LCCFDIN
5
OQFLD
4
OQFCLK
3
OQFLTH
2
OQFENB
1
OQFDOUT
19
ATT
8
7
PACK
CN53
VRDY
+5V
1
2
3
PAPER
SENSOR 2
LPEWSN1
CT
PRDY
27
CT
1
2
OQMCLK
RM
10
28P
18
DRV
1
2
3
PAPER
SENSOR 3
8
7
5
6
17
RVMB
24VM
23 +5V
+5V
24
GND
PAPER
SENSOR
CT
3
5
+24VM
16
SPCTXD
1
2
3
15
CNDCC
SPCRXD
UPPER
LIMIT
SENSOR
+24VM
4 LPUSOL
+5V
5
+5V
6
7 LCRRSN
LLBSN
8
GND
9
GNG
10
+5V
11
LPESN
12
GND
13
14 +5V
CT
CN707
CNHT5
GND
1
2
3
LPFCL
+5VD
23
25
GND
21
GND
PAPER
PATH
SENSOR
GND
INVERTING
MOTOR
14
RVMAB
GND
10
20
1
2
3
4
24VM
8
7
13
19
IICSCL
RVMA
12
13
15
IICSDA
CN703
D3 2
+24VM
5
7
9
11
17
DFLD
10
ORGSN
(DP-60xx Only)
OHTN
DMLD
CLEANER
POSITON
SENSOR 2
DMBRAKE
2
1
6
7
8
PAPER
SENSOR 1
10
CNHT3
DMCLK
+5V
+5V
5VP
1
CT 2
CNN
DMPS
CT
D11
PGND
PGND
CN754
CNHT6
+5V
22
26
1
GND
DM
18
20
24
7
6
16
3
2
1
24VO1
CLEANER
POSITON
SENSOR 1
12
14
PGND
PGND
24VO1
1
2
3
4
SWN2
8
10
24VM
9
8
+5V
24VM
10
CNMM2
+5V
3
2
CT
CHPSN2
DP-3510/3520/3530
4510/4520/4530
6010/6020/6030
GND
CHPSN1
1
GND
AMMCLK
APMCLK
ARVCL1
Drawing Name
General Circuit
Diagram
GND
CORONA WIRE
CLEANER MOTOR
Model
CNDM1
OPC
DRUM
MOTOR
1
2
CLMM2
9
11
Ver. 5.2
MMLD
4
6
11
CN58
nAUTFD
6
nERROR
7
pSELECT
8
nINIT
9
pERROR
10
GND
11
pBUSY
12
nACK
13
GND
1
GND
2
PD8
3
PD7
4
PD6
5
PD5
6
PD4
7
PD3
8
PD2
9
PD1
10
GND
11
nSTROB
12
GND
13
GND
14
MMFR
2
4
CN54
GND
nSELIN
L1
CN211
Centronics I/F
PR CON
CN211
MMCLK
28
CN210
36
+5V
PH
PRINTER
+5V
MMPS
3
4
D3
CLMM1
CN61
MM
8P
LAN I/F
GND
+5V
1
2
PGND
PGND
*5
1
OHTL
9
8
10
24VM
24VM
10
MAIN
DRIVE
MOTOR
SWN1
1
2
SWL2
6
10
+5V
1
2
OHTN
PGND
SWL1
7
9
*4
24VM
CNL
CN752
CN760
CN762
2
5
HSSN1
GND
CN761
GND
CN763
+5V
HSSN3
14
GND
DFCLK
13
GND
CN766
GND
CT
12
HPSN
CT
PAPER FEED
C
CLUTCH
PAPER FEED
S
SOLENOID
11
1
2
3
10
SHEET
BYPASS
SENSOR 1
+5V
HSSN2
CT
GND
1
2
3
D11
CNMM1
1
2
3
+5V
CN701
7P
GND
ORSIZ5
+5V
SHEET
BYPASS
SENSOR 2
CN717
1
2
3
GND
ORSIZ4
+5V
2
3
CN729 (TEST) *1
DFLTH
1
2
CT
3
+5V
2
3
CN706
DFDOUT
ORIGINAL
SIZE
SENSOR 3
8P
CNADF
GND
7
8
SPC
CN728 (TEST) *1
1
2
3
4
ORIGINAL
SIZE
SENSOR 2
DFENB
ORSIZ3
4
5
SCANNER
HOME
POSITON
SENSOR
SHEET
BYPASS
SENSOR 3
ORSIZ2
CN705
ORIGINAL
SIZE
SENSOR 1
ORSIZ1
1
2
Touch
Panel
INV
*2
473
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
memo
Ver. 5.2
474
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11 Finisher Options
11.1. DA-FS600, DA-FS605, DA-SP31
11.1.1.
Introduction
11.1.1.1. Features
1. Large Tray Capacity.
Normally, the Finisher holds a stack of sheets 5.78" (147 mm) in height in its two bins (small-size
paper: equivalent to 1000 sheets) / 2.91" (74 mm) in height (large-size paper: equivalent to 500 sheets)
2. Handles Wide Variety of Paper Thickness.
The Finisher is capable of handling papers between 17 - 35.5 lb (64 - 133 g/m2).
3. Job Offset Function.
The Finisher has a job offset function for sorting non-stapled stacks of copies.
4. Four Types of Auto Stapling.
The Finisher offers a choice of four stapling modes (1-point stapling at rear, diagonal stapling in front,
diagonal stapling at rear, and 2-point stapling).
5. Buffer Roller.
The use of a buffer roller enables the finisher to accept copies without interruption from the Copier
even during stapling or offset operation.
6. Saddle Stitch Function.
The Finisher can staple along the center of paper and fold it in two (up to 15 sheets).
7. Punch Function (Option).
The Punch Unit enables the Finisher to punch the binder sheets before they are ejected. (The Punch
Unit is capable of handling plain papers between 17 - 35.5 lb (64 - 133 g/m2). The Punch Unit cannot
handle special papers, postcards, transparencies, etc.)
Ver. 5.2
475
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Item
Description
Stacking Method Trays 1 and 2: by lifting tray
Stacking
Face-down
Orientation
Face-up
A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R
Stacking Size
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R, FLS
Paper Weight
17 - 35.5 lb (64 - 133 g/m2)
Bins
Trays 1 and 2
Modes
Non-Sort
: Trays 1 and 2
Sort
: Trays 1 and 2
Staple
: Trays 1 and 2
Stacking
Non staple sort
Small-size*1 Tray 1 and 2: 57.8 in (147 mm) high (1000 sheets)*2
Capacity
Large-size*1 Tray 1 and 2: 2.91 in (74 mm) high (500 sheets)
Staple sort
Small-size*1 Tray 1 and 2: 4.33 in (110 mm) high/30 sets
(750 sheets)*2
Large-size*1 Tray 1 and 2: 2.91 in (74 mm) high/30 sets
(500 sheets)
Size Mixing
Size mixing : 1.73 in (44 mm) or less (300 sheets)*4
Stapling
: 0.86 in (22 mm) or less (150 sheets/30 sets)*4
Stacking Mixing Face-down / Face-up
Notes:
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
Item
Stapling
Stapling Position
Stapling
Capacity
Description
By rotating cam
See Fig. 1-001.
Small-size
50 sheets
Equivalent of 21 lb (80 g/m2) paper Including two
sheets
of thick stock (covers).
Large-size
30 sheets
Staple Supply
Special staple cartridge (5000 staples)
Replacement
FQ-SS66 : For DA-FS605 (Saddle Stitch)
Staples
FQ-SS50 : For DA-FS600 / 605
Staple Detection Provided
Manual Stapling Not available
Stapling Size
1-point diagonal
Front
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R
stapling
Rear
A3, B4, A4, LDR, LTR, B5
1-point
Rear
A4-R, LTR-R, LGL
2-point
A3, B4, A4, LDR, LTR, B5
Paper Detection Provided
Control Panel
Not available
Display
Not available
Ver. 5.2
476
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Item
Dimensions
Description
669 (744.5) x 661 x 1050 mm (W (with Punch Unit attached) x D x H; including saddle
stitch unit)
Weight
2 Bin Finisher
: 76 lb / 34.5 kg
2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher : 115.7 lb / 52.5 kg
Punch Unit (option)
: 11.7 lb / 5.3 kg
Power Supply
Supplied by the copier machine (24 VDC)
Maximum Power 170 W or less
Consumption
Reference:
The term small-size stands for A4, A5-R, B5, LTR, INV-R, while the term large-size stands for A3,
B4, A4-R, LTR-R, LDR, LGL, FLS, B5-R.
Stapling Position (Finisher Unit)
1- Point Stapling (Rear) 1- Point Diagonal Stapling; Front)
30
4.42 mm
Specified Paper
width -6 2 mm
B4 and B5
4.42 mm
4.42 mm
Specified Paper
width -62 mm
52 mm
30
82.74 mm
202.74 mm
52mm
52mm
A3 and A4
52mm
2- Point Stapling
62.74 mm
182.74 mm
73.74 mm
193.74 mm
Fig. 1-001
Ver. 5.2
477
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Item
Description
Stacking Method Center binding (double folding)
Folding Position See Fig. 1-002
Paper Size
A3, B4, A4-R, LDR, LTR-R
W/binding: 1 sheet (including single cover page)
Capacity
W/out binding: 2 to 15 sheets
Copy Weight
17 - 21 in (64 - 80 g/m2) (cover page up to 35.5 in (133 g/m2))*1
Stacking
10 sets (stack of 11 to 15 sheets)
Capacity
15 sets (stack of 6 to 10 sheets)
25 sets (stack of 5 sheets or less)
Stapling position
2 points (Center distribution; fixed interval)
Staple
2000 staples
accommodation
Staple supply
Special cartridge
Stapling
Staples
Special staples (FQ-SS50)
Staple detection
Provided
Manual stapling
Not available
Folding method
Roller contact
Folding mode
Double folding
Folding
Folding position
Paper center
Position
Provided
adjustment
Power Supply
Supplied by the finisher unit (24V line x 2)
160 W or less
Power
Consumption
Note:
*1:Special paper, transparencies, masters, label paper and hole-punched paper cannot be handled.
Ver. 5.2
478
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
B4
A4-R
Center of
Staple
148.51.0 mm
Center of
Staple
1821.0 mm
2101.0 mm
Staple Position
88.52.0 mm
68.52.0 mm
208.52.0 mm
188.52.0 mm
452.0 mm
1652.0 mm
LTR-R
2161.0 mm
139.71.0 mm
LDR
79.72.0 mm
199.72.0 mm
482.0 mm
1682.0 mm
Fig. 1-002
Ver. 5.2
479
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
Sequential punching
2 holes:
2 or 3 holes:
Paper Size
4 holes:
Paper Weight
Punched Hole
Diameter
64 to 133 g/m2 *1
2 holes:
2 or 3 holes:
4 holes:
2 holes:
Punch Trash
Capacity
Power Supply
Power
Consumption
6.5 mm
2 holes / 8.0 mm
3 holes / 8.0 mm
6.5 mm
Note:
*1:Transparencies, masters, label paper, postcards and hole-punched paper cannot be handled.
Hole Position (Punch Unit)
801 mm
x1
123 mm
701 mm
2 holes
A3 / A4
B5 / B4
A4-R
B5-R
108.5 3 mm
88.5 3 mm
65 3 mm
51 3 mm
2 or 3 holes
x1
LGL / LTR-R
73 3 mm
x1
123 mm
x1
LDR / LTR
1081 mm
1081 mm
31.5 3 mm
x1
123 mm
4 holes
x1
A3 / A4
28.5 3 mm
123 mm
480
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[7]
[17] [16]
[15]
[14] [13]
[1] Tray 1 / 2
[2] Shutter
[11]
[12]
[14] Stapler
Ver. 5.2
481
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[6]
[7]
[8]
[5]
[9]
[4]
[10]
[3]
[11]
[2]
[12]
[1]
Ver. 5.2
482
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[4]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[2] Cam
[4] Die
Ver. 5.2
483
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 1-006
(2) Remove any jam visible from the outside.
Fig. 1-007
(3) Open the Upper Cover, and check the inside of
the Finisher.
Fig. 1-008
Ver. 5.2
484
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Lift the Buffer Roller Cover, and remove the jam.
Fig. 1-009
(5) Lift the Buffer Roller, and remove the jam.
Fig. 1-010
(6) Return the Buffer Roller and the Buffer Roller
Cover to their original positions, and close the
Upper Cover.
Fig. 1-011
(7) Connect the Finisher to the Copier Machine.
(8) Operate as instructed on the Display.
Fig. 1-012
Ver. 5.2
485
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
If the Copier's message indicates that the staples ran out in the Finisher Unit, perform the following to
supply it with staples.
(1) Open the Front Cover.
Fig. 1-013
(2) Turn the Green Lever to the down.
Fig. 1-014
(3) Pull out the Staple Cartridge in the direction of
the arrow as illustrated.
Fig. 1-015
(4) Slide the empty Staple Case out.
Fig. 1-016
Ver. 5.2
486
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 1-018
(7) Push the Stapler Unit until it stops and turn the
Green Lever to the right to lock.
Fig. 1-019
(8) Close the Front Cover.
Fig. 1-020
Ver. 5.2
487
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
If the Copier's message indicates a staple jam in the Finisher Unit, perform the following to remove the jam.
(1) Remove the Stack waiting to be stapled from the
Delivery Tray.
Fig. 1-021
(2) Open the Front Cover.
Fig. 1-022
(3) Turn the Green Lever to the down.
Fig. 1-023
(4) Pull out the Staple Cartridge in the direction of
the arrow as illustrated.
Fig. 1-024
Ver. 5.2
488
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 1-025
(6) Remove all Slid Staple.
Fig. 1-026
(7) Push up the Staple Cartridge Tab until it stops.
(8) Turn the Green Lever to the right to lock. Close
the Front Cover.
Note:
After a Staple Cartridge has been reinstalled, the
first few sets may not staple. This is due to the
Staples need to be pre-fed to the stapling position.
Fig. 1-027
Ver. 5.2
489
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
If the Copier's message indicates a paper jam in the Saddle Stitch Unit, perform the following to remove the
jam.
(1) Holding the Finisher Unit as shown, move it to
detach it from the Copier.
Fig. 1-028
(2) Open the Front Lower Cover.
Fig. 1-029
(3) Turn the right Green Knob.
Fig. 1-030
(4) Turn the left Green Knob while pushing it in.
Fig. 1-031
Ver. 5.2
490
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 1-032
(8) Open the Inlet Cover, and remove the jam.
Fig. 1-033
(9) Close the Front Lower Cover.
(10) Connect the Finisher Unit.
Fig. 1-034
Ver. 5.2
491
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
If the Copier's message indicates the Saddle Stitch Unit ran out of staples, perform the following to supply it
with staples.
(1) Open the Front Lower Cover.
Fig. 1-035
(2) Slide out the Saddle Stitch Unit.
Fig. 1-036
(3) While pulling the Stitcher Unit towards you swing
it upward.
Fig. 1-037
Ver. 5.2
492
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 1-038
(5) Insert the new Cartridge (FQ-SS50).
Note:
You must always replace both Cartridges at the
same time.
Fig. 1-039
(6) While pulling the Stitcher Unit towards you swing
it downward, to return it to its original position.
Fig. 1-040
(7) Push in the Stitcher Unit, and close the Front
Cover.
Fig. 1-041
Ver. 5.2
493
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
If the Copier's message indicates a staple jam in the Saddle Stitch Unit, perform the following to remove the
jam.
(1) Open the Front Lower Cover.
Fig. 1-042
(2) Slide out the Saddle Stitch Unit.
Fig. 1-043
(3) While pulling the Stitcher Unit towards you swing
it upward.
Fig. 1-044
Ver. 5.2
494
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 1-045
(5) Push down on the area identified as (A), and pull
up the Tab identified as (B).
(B)
(A)
Fig. 1-046
(6) Remove the jammed staple, and return the Tab
(B) to its original position.
(B)
Fig. 1-047
(7) Reinstall the Cartridge to its original position.
Fig. 1-048
Ver. 5.2
495
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 1-049
(9) Push the Saddle Stitch Unit back to its original
position, and close the Front Lower Cover.
Note:
Whenever you remove a jammed Staple, be
sure to execute staple edging.
Fig. 1-050
Ver. 5.2
496
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
If the display indicates a paper jam in the Punch Unit, perform the following to remove the jam.
(1) Open the Front Cover of the Punch Unit.
Fig. 1-051
(2) Align the triangle mark on the knob within the
range marked by
Fig. 1-052
(3) Close the Front Cover of the Punch Unit.
Fig. 1-053
Ver. 5.2
497
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 1-054
(5) Remove the jam.
Fig. 1-055
(6) Close the Top Cover of the Punch Unit.
Fig. 1-056
Ver. 5.2
498
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.1.3.8. Removing Punch Hole Scrap from the Punch Trash Box (Optional)
If the display indicates to empty the Punch Trash Box, perform the following to remove the punch trash:
(1) Open the Front Cover of the Punch Unit.
Fig. 1-057
(2) Pull out the Punch Trash Box.
Fig. 1-058
(3) Discard the Punch Scrap.
Fig. 1-059
Ver. 5.2
499
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 1-060
Ver. 5.2
500
JAN 2006
11.1.2.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
501
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.2.1.1. Outline
The Finisher is designed to deliver copies arriving from its Copier, and its modes of delivery include simple
stacking, job offset*1, and staple.
All operations involved in these modes are controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB, according to the
appropriate commands from the Copier.
Copies from the Copier may be routed to the Saddle Stitch Unit.
Control system
Fig. 2-001
Notes:
*1:The term job offset refers to shifting each sorting job, separating a single stack into several stacks.
Ver. 5.2
502
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Finisher's sequence of operation is controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB. The Finisher Controller
PCB is a 16-bit microprocessor (CPU), and is used for communication with the Copier (serial) in addition to
controlling the finisher's sequence of operations.
The Finisher Controller PCB responds to the various commands coming from the Copier through a serial
communications line to drive solenoids, motors, and other components. In addition, it communicates the
Finisher's various states (information on sensors and switches) to the Copier through a serial
communications circuit.
The Finisher Controller PCB not only communicates with the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB but also
communicates the Saddle Stitch Unit's various states (information on sensors and switches) to the Copier.
The ICS used on the Finisher Controller PCB are designed for the following:
Q1 (CPU)
Controls sequence of operations.
Q2 (EP-ROM)
Backs up adjustment values.
Q7
Contains sequence programs.
Q8 / Q89 (RAM)
Backs up initial setting data.
Q4 (communications IC)
Communicates with the copier and the saddle stitch unit.
Q14 (regulator IC)
Generates 5V.
Flow of signals between the finisher and the options controller:
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Copier
(DC Controller PCB
PCU)
Finisher Controller
PCB communication
Motor
Q1
CPU
Solenoid
Q2
EEP-ROM
Switch
Q4
IC
Sensor
Q7
EP-ROM
Q8/Q89
RAM
Q14
Regulator IC
Fig. 2-002
Ver. 5.2
503
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
-3
-2
-1
Stapling
Tray
Sensor
PI4
J122-3
-1
-2
-1
-3
-2
Shutter
Open
Sensor
PI5
J118-3
-1
-2
-1
-3
-2
Alignment
Plate Home
Position
Sensor
PI6
J121-3
-1
-2
-4
-6
-5
Stapler
Shift Home
sensor
PI7
J129-3
-1
-2
-1
-3
-2
Tray Home
Position
Sensor
PI8
J130-3
-1
-2
J202
J134-1
-2
-3
J17-7 +5V
-9 PENT
-8
J208
PI3
Delivery
Sensor
-3
-1
-2
-5
-6
-7
J11-3 +5V
-2 PDEL
-1
J207A
-7
-9
-8
-11
-9
-10
J9A-1 +5V
-3 STPTY
-2
J205
J106-3
-1
-2
-3
-1
-2
J12B-4 +5V
-6 STOPN
-5
J207A
PI1
Inlet
Sensor
-8
-6
-7
J9A-4 +5V
-6 JOGHP
-5
J210
-3
-1
-2
J12A-7 +5V
-9 STPHP
-8
J12A-4 +5V
-6 TRYHP
-5
Fig. 2-003
Ver. 5.2
504
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Delivery
Motor
Clock
PI10
J120-1
-2
-3
Tray 1
Paper
Sensor
PI11
J101-3
-1
-2
-1
-3
-2
Tray 2
Paper
Sensor
PI12
J102-3
-1
-2
-1
-3
-2
Buffer
Path
Paper
Sensor
PI14
+5V
DELCLK
-6
-4
-5
J14-1
-3
-2
+5V
FSTTRAY*
When paper is
present on tray 1,
0.
-3
-1
-2
J14-4
-6
-5
+5V
SNDTRAY*
When paper is
present on tray 2,
0.
J110-3
-1
-2
J24-4
-6
-5
+5V
BUFPASS
When paper is in
the buffer path, 1.
PI15
J117-3
-1
-2
J12A-1
-3
-2
+5V
JOINT
Door
Open
Sensor
PI16
J113-3
-1
-2
J12B-1
-3
-2
+5V
DROPN
Buffer
Path Inlet
Paper
Sensor
PI17
J105-3
-1
-2
J24-1
-3
-2
+5V
BUFENTR
When paper is
present at the buffer
path inlet, 1.
PI18
J127-3
-1
-2
J11-8
-10
-9
+5V
SWGOPN
J400-3
-1
-2
J14-10
-12
-11
+5V
SPTCLK1
PI9
J400-6
Tray Lift
-4
Motor
-5
Clock
Sensor 2 Sensor PCB
J14-7
-9
-8
+5V
SFTCLK2
Swing
Guide
Open Sensor
Tray Lift
Motor
Clock
Sensor 1
PI19
J1010
-3
-1
-2
-1
-3
-2
J1020
-3
-1
-2
-4
-6
-5
-1
-3
-2
J204
Joint
Sensor
J207A
J9A-9
-8
-7
J201
-3
-4
-5
J201
-9
-8
-7
-3
-1
-2
Fig. 2-004
Ver. 5.2
505
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PS1
Height
Sensor
J125-1
-2
-3
J114-3
-4
-2
-1
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
-3
-4
J212
PI20
Swing
Motor Clock
Sensor
J207B
-7
-8
-9
-3
-4
-2
-1
J6-2
+5V
-1
V0
-3
Vin
-4
-1
J5-1
Door Switch
+24V
J112
N.O.
MS1
+24VMOVE
-3
-2
DRSW
N.O.
MS2
-1
J5-9
-2
-10
-3
J5-11
-4
-12
When the
front door and
the upper
cover are
closed, 1.
N.O.
MS6
+24VSTPL
SWGGCLD
When the
swing guide is
closed, 1.
J5-4
-5
-6
+24VHIFT
-3
-2
-1
J7-3
-2
-1
SHUTCLD
-1
J5-7
-2
-8
J131-3
-2
-1
TRAYSAF
N.C.
N.O.
C.
MS4
J140-1
-2
-3
J206
JI32
N.C.
+24VSHIFT
TRYLMT
When the
shutter is
closed, 1.
Fig. 2-005
Ver. 5.2
506
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PI22
+5V
J8-8
Staple Home
Position Sensor
STPDRHP*
+5V
Staple Switch
MS8
J8-10
+5V
J8-11
HOOKEMP*
+5V
J8-12
J8-7
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
J131-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
J400-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
J3-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
J132-1
J500-1
J19-1
-2
-2
-2
STPCON*
Communication line
+24V
+24V
J2-2
-3
-4
-5
-7
Copier
Communication line
+24V
J1-1
-2
Fig. 2-006
Ver. 5.2
507
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
+24V
SL1
-2
J107
-1
-2
J12A-10
-1
-11
-3
J12B-9
-2
-10
-2
J24-7
-1
-8
When 0, the
solenoid turns On.
FLPSL*
-2
J108
-1
+24V
ENTSL*
-2
J109
-1
+24V
EXITSL*
Paddle Solenoid
-1
-1
-2
-3
-10
-2
-11
J207B
J128
-2
-11
J9B-1
-10
-2
PDLSL*
Escape Solenoid
J207A
J123
-2
-2
J9A-10
-1
-11
When 0, the
solenoid turns On.
ESCPSL*
J500
-1
SL7
When 0, the
solenoid turns On.
+24V
-1
SL6
When 0, the
solenoid turns On.
+24V
-2
-1
SL5
When 0, the
solenoid turns On.
+24V
-2
J12B-7
-1
-8
BESCPSL*
When 0, the
solenoid turns On.
+24V
J10-1
-2
-3
B*
-4
A*
-5
B
-6
A
M1
According to rotation
direction/speed,
changes between +
and - in sequence.
Fig. 2-007
Ver. 5.2
508
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
-2
-4
-1
-1
-5
M2
J208
Delivery Motor
-4
J11-4
-3
-5
According to rotation
direction/speed, changes
between + and -.
+24V
Alignment Motor
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
J9B-6
-7
B*
-8
A*
-9
B
-10
A
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
J207B
M3
J124
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
+24V
M4
According to rotation
direction/speed, changes
between + and - in
sequence.
J306
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
J304-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
J302-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
J307
1 1
2 2
3 3
J305-1
-2
-3
J302-6
-5
-4
J301-14
-15
-16
-17
-18
J8-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
According to rotation
direction/speed, changes
between + and - in
sequence.
B*
A*
B
A
Staple Motor
M6
J301-6
J8-13
-5
-14
-4
-15
According to rotation
direction/speed, changes
between + and -.
According to rotation
direction/speed, changes
between + and -.
-2
J7-4
-3
-1
-5
J501-1
-1
-7
-2
-2
-6
M5
M7
J208
Swing Motor
-1
J11-7
-2
-6
According to rotation
direction/speed, changes
between + and -.
+24V
J16-1
-2
-3 B*
-4 A*
M8
According to rotation
direction/speed, changes
between + and - .
-5 B
-6 A
+24V
M9
J502-1
-1
-6
-4
J17-6
-2
-2
-5
-5
-5
-3
-3
-4
-6
-4
-4
-4
-3
-7
-3
-5
-5
-2
-8
-2
-6
-6
-1
-9
-1
J202
A
B
A
B
According to rotation
direction/speed, changes
between + and - in
sequence.
Fig. 2-008
Ver. 5.2
509
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Finisher is designed to operate according to the commands from its Copier to deliver arriving copies to
trays in the appropriate mode: simple stacking, job offset, stapling.
See Fig. 2-009 for a diagram of the 4 delivery modes.
Method of delivery
Normal delivery
Simple stacking
Job offset
Staple
Front diagonal
Rear 1-point
Rear diagonal
2-point
Fig. 2-009
Fig.2-010
Ver. 5.2
510
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Normal Delivery
a. Simple Stacking
The Finisher delivers copies directly to the Tray.
Tray
A
B
C
Tray
A
B
C
Copies
Copies
Feed Roller 1
Feed Roller 2
Delivery Roller
Fig. 2-011
b. Job Offset
The Finisher forwards all copies of each sort job to the Stapling Tray. The first sort job on the
Stapling Tray is delivered with a shift to the front of about 30 mm, and the second sort job is
delivered without being shifted. Whether the first copy or the last copy of a sort job should be shifted
is determined by the Copier.
Tray
Each sort job is
stacked alternately.
Fig. 2-012
Swing Guide
Stapling Tray
Stopper
Delivery Roller Feed Roller 1
Fig. 2-013
Results of Delivering 4 Sets
Copies handled
by job offset
Direction of delivery
Fig. 2-014
Ver. 5.2
511
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
c. Stapling
The Finisher stacks copies on the Stapling Tray, then it staples and delivers the copies to the
appropriate tray.
Tray
Copies
Staple
Swing Guide
Stapling
tray
Stopper
Delivery Roller
Feed Roller 1
Fig. 2-015
A
B
C
A
B
C
Paper width/2
2-point stapling
A
B
C
A
B
C
Fig. 2-016
2. Saddle Stitch Delivery
A copy arriving in the Finisher from the Copier is routed to the Saddle Stitch by the Paper Deflecting
Plate. The Saddle Stitch executes stitching and saddling operations on the copy and then delivers it to
the Saddle Stitch Tray. For discussions of stacks in the Saddle Stitch, see 11.3.4.
To Saddle Stitch
Fig.2-017
Ver. 5.2
512
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
This Finisher has three different paper paths for delivery, each selected to suit paper size and delivery
mode.
1. Straight Path
When stacking copies shown in Table. 2-001, the copies pass under the Buffer Roller.
Copy size
Typical copy
examples
Buffer Roller
Fig. 2-018
2. Buffer Paper Path 1
When stacking copies shown in Table. 2-002, the copies pass over the Buffer Roller, increasing the
distance between copies.
Copy size
Typical copy
examples
Feed Roller 2
Delivery Roller
Fig. 2-019
Ver. 5.2
513
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The following shows paper delivery operation in the case of two originals in the staple mode.
a. The first copy is moved in the direction of the Buffer Roller.
Buffer Roller
1st Copy
Fig. 2-020
b. The first copy wraps around the Buffer Roller and, at the same time, the second copy arrives from
the Copier.
1st Copy
2nd Copy
Fig. 2-021
c. The second copy is laid over the first copy.
1st Copy
2nd Copy
Fig. 2-022
Ver. 5.2
514
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
d. The first and second copies are simultaneously pulled into the Stapling Tray.
2nd Copy
1st Copy
Fig. 2-023
Caution:
The second copy as explained here is moved through buffer paper path 1.
This fact is omitted from the discussion to avoid interrupting the sequence of operations.
Ver. 5.2
515
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
The Finisher moves copies arriving from the Copier to the Delivery Tray, Stapling Tray, or the Saddle
Stitch Unit according to the mode of delivery. On the Stapling Tray, the copies are subjected to job
offset or stapling as instructed by the Copier. The First Feed Motor (M1), Second Feed Motor (M8) and
Inlet Feed Motor (M9) are stepping motors, and Delivery motor (M2) is a DC motor. These motors are
controlled by the microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher Controller PCB, and rotate either clockwise or
counter-clockwise.
The paper paths are equipped with the following four sensors for detection of paper (arrival,
passage):
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Delivery Sensor (PI3)
Stapling Tray Sensor (PI4)
Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14)
In addition, each delivery tray is equipped with a sensor designed to detect the presence/absence of
paper on it.
No. 1 Tray Paper Sensor (PI11)
No. 2 Tray Paper Sensor (PI12)
If a copy fails to reach or move past each sensor within a specific period of time, the Finisher Controller
PCB identifies the condition as a jam, and stops the ongoing operation and at the same time informs
the Copier of the condition.
When all doors are closed after the paper jam is removed, the Buffer Path Inlet Paper Sensor (PI17)
checks whether or not copies are being detected. In addition to the above four sensors, the Inlet
Sensor, Delivery sensor, Stapling Tray Sensor and Buffer Path Paper Sensor are also checked for the
presence of paper. If the sensors detect paper, the Finisher Unit judges that paper jams have not
completely been removed, and sends the paper jam removal signal to the Copier again.
Ver. 5.2
516
JAN 2006
Ver. 5.2
SL6
SL5
M5
M8
517
M1
PI20
M7
PI10
M2
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PI19
M9
PI9
SL3
SL2
SL1
SL7
M6
M3
M4
Fig. 2-024
JAN 2006
Ver. 5.2
PI11
PI4
518
PI3
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PI7
PI14
PI1
PI12
Fig. 2-025
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
In the job offset mode, sort jobs and entire copy groups are shifted to the front for delivery to the tray,
and other copies are delivered to the tray without a shift.
The copies are shifted by the alignment plate. The alignment plate is checked by the Alignment Home
Position Sensor (PI6) to find out whether it is at the home position.
The Finisher Controller PCB drives the Alignment Plate Motor (M3) at power-on to return the Alignment
Plate to its home position.
The Finisher Controller PCB stops the Delivery Motor (M2) when the trailing edge of the copy has
moved past the Feed Roller 2. Then, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Delivery Motor counterclockwise, and drives the Swing Motor (M7). As a result, the drive of the Delivery Motor is transmitted
to the Swing Guide to move up the guide. When the Swing Guide Open Detection Sensor (PI18)
detects the Swing Guide, the Delivery Motor stops, and the Swing Guide is held at the up position.
When the Swing Guide has moved up, the Feed Belts attached to the Feed Roller 2 move the copy to
the Stapling Tray. The presence of paper on the Stapling Tray is monitored by the Stapling Tray Paper
Sensor (PI4). (The first sheet is fed to the Stapling Tray while the Swing Guide is moving up.)
The Finisher Controller PCB drives the Alignment Motor (M3) in advance, and keeps the Alignment
Plate poised 10mm behind the trailing edge of a sheet. Whenever one sheet is moved to the Stapling
Tray, each sheet is aligned, and when the fifth or last sheet in a sort job/group is fed to the Stapling
Tray, the Guide Plate Retaining Solenoid (SL6) moves the Guide Plate away and under the Stapling
Tray. From then on, the Alignment Motor shifts the sheets to the front by 30 mm.
When the copy has been shifted, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Alignment Motor counterclockwise to move the Alignment Plate to a point 10 mm behind the trailing edge of the sheet.
This alignment operation is repeated until alignment of the fifth or last sheet in a sort job is completed.
At this time, the Swing Guide is moved down and is closed, and the Delivery Motor rotates clockwise to
deliver the sheet.
Alignment
Plate
Guide
Plate
Alignment Plate
Home Position
Sensor (PI6)
Alignment
Motor (M3)
Paper
Escape
Solenoid (SL6)
Fig. 2-026
Ver. 5.2
519
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 2-027
2. Flow of Job Offset Operations
a. The Swing Guide moves up and, at the same time, the Feed Belts move the sheet to the Stapling
Tray.
Swing Guide
Offset Sheet
Feed Roller 2
Feed Belts
Tray 1/2
Delivery
Roller
Stapling Tray
Stopper
Fig. 2-028
b. The Alignment Plate shifts the sheet to the front.
Existing Stack
Alignment Plate
Offset Sheet
Fig. 2-029
Ver. 5.2
520
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
c. The Swing Guide moves down and, at the same time, the Delivery Roller delivers the sheet.
Offset Sheet
Swing Guide
Feed Roller 2
Feed Belts
Tray 1/2
Delivery
Roller
Stapling Tray
Stopper
Fig. 2-030
Ver. 5.2
521
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
The Stapler Unit staples a stack of as many sheets as specified.
The stapling position differs according to the selected staple mode and paper size. The Stapler Unit is
checked by the Stapler Shift Home Position Sensor (PI7) to find out whether it is at the home position.
When starting operation after power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Stapler Shift Motor (M4)
to return the Stapler Unit to the home position. If the Stapler is already at the home position, then (M4)
is not turned on.
Sheets
Stapler
Fig. 2-031
Paper
width/2
Front diagonal stapling
2-point stapling
Fig. 2-032
Ver. 5.2
522
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. First Sheet
The Finisher Controller PCB stops the Delivery Motor (M2) as soon as the trailing edge of the first
sheet has moved past the Feed Roller 2. Then, it rotates the Delivery Motor clockwise to switch the
gear drive to the Swing Motor (M7), causing the Swing Guide to move up.
When the Swing Guide Open Sensor (PI18) finds the Swing Guide at the up position, the Swing Motor
stops, maintaining the Swing Guide at the up position.
When the Swing Guide has moved up, the feed belts of the Feed Roller 2 move the sheet to the
Stapling Tray. (The first sheet is fed to the Stapling Tray while the Swing Guide is moving up.) The
presence of paper on the Stapling Tray is detected by the Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (PI4).
The Finisher Controller PCB drives the Alignment Plate Shift Motor (M3) when the Stapling Tray Paper
Sensor has detected paper to put sheets in order. The Alignment Plate is kept poised 10 mm behind
the trailing edge of the paper.
The Swing Guide is kept in wait at the up position until the last sheet is output onto the Stapling Tray.
Swing Guide
1st Sheet
Feed Roller 2
Tray 1/2
Feed Belts
Delivery
Roller
Stapling
Tray
Stapler
Fig. 2-033
Swing Guide
Swing Guide Open
Sensor (PI18)
Swing Guide
Closed
Detect
Switches
(MS2/MS6)
Delivery Roller
Fig. 2-034
Ver. 5.2
523
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Finisher Controller PCB turns on the Paddle Solenoid (SL5) as soon as the trailing edge of the
second and subsequent sheets have moved past the Feed Roller 2, causing the drive of the Second
Feed Motor (M8) to rotate the Paddle. The sheets are pushed by the Paddle and moved to the Stapling
Tray.
Almost simultaneously with the trailing edge of the sheet falling into the Stapling Tray, the Belt Escape
Solenoid turns off to return the Feed Belts that were in the escape position to its original position, and
feed the sheet onto the Stapling Tray. When the sheet has been output onto the Stapling Tray, the
Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Alignment Motor (M3) to put the sheets in order.
Swing Guide
2nd and Subsequent
Sheets
Feed Roller 2
Feed Belts
Tray 1/2
SL7
Delivery
Roller
Stapling Tray
Belt Escape
Solenoid
Stapler
Fig. 2-035
Feed Belts
Escape Direction
Belt Escape
Solenoid (SL7)
Fig. 2-036
Ver. 5.2
524
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Paddles
Paddles
Paddle
Solenoid (SL5)
Stapler
M8
Stopper
Fig. 2-037
4. Last sheet
When the last sheet has been put in order, the Finisher Controller PCB turns on the Alignment Motor
(M3) to move the Alignment Plate to the alignment position (to butt the plate against the stack). Then,
the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Swing Motor (M7) counter-clockwise to move down the Swing
Guide.
The Finisher Controller PCB moves the stapler according to the staple mode for stapling. From then
on, it rotates the Delivery Motor (M2) clockwise to delivery the stack to the tray.
Swing Guide
Sheets
Feed Roller 2
Feed Belts
Tray 1/2
Delivery
Roller
Stapling Tray
Stapler
Fig. 2-038
Ver. 5.2
525
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Swing Guide
Delivery Roller
Fig. 2-039
Fig. 2-041
Ver. 5.2
526
JAN 2006
Stapling home
position detection signal
Staple motor
drive signal
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 2-042
Start signal Mode selected
Stacking
Delivery Motor (M2)
Stapling Delivery
Fig. 2-043
Ver. 5.2
527
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Stopper
Stapling Tray
Delivery
Direction
Stopper
Guide Plate
Stapler
Fig. 2-044
b. Rear 1-point Stapling
The Stapler is kept in wait at the center position. The Stapler is moved to and from the stapling
position for each stapling operation.
Stopper
Stapling Position
Wait Position
Stapling Tray
Delivery Direction
Stopper
Stapler
Guide Plate
Fig. 2-045
Ver. 5.2
528
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Wait Position
Stapling Position
Stopper
Stapling Tray
Delivery Direction
Stopper
Guide Plate
Fig. 2-046
d. 2-Point Stapling
The Stapler is kept in wait at the center of paper. Stapling occurs at two points, first at the rear and
then at the front.
Stopper
Stapling position
Wait position
Stapler
Stapling Tray
delivery direction
Stapling position
Stopper
Guide Plate
Fig. 2-047
Ver. 5.2
529
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Finisher has two delivery trays for normal delivery, each accepting sheets. Each tray is moved up and
down by the Tray Lift Motor (M5).
The position of tray is identified with reference to the number of clock pulses of the Tray Lift Motor Clock
Sensor 1/2 (PI9/PI19) coming from the Tray Home Position Sensor (PI8). The Finisher Controller PCB finds
out in which direction (up or down) the tray is moving based on combinations of pulses from the two clock
sensors.
The Finisher Controller PCB drives the Tray Lift Motor (M5) to return the tray to the home position at poweron. If the tray is already at the home position, then (M5) is not turned on.
The Finisher Controller PCB moves up and down the tray selected by the Copier so that it is positioned at
the delivery slot.
The upper limit of the tray is detected by the Tray Upper Limit Detecting Switch (MS5). The Finisher
Controller PCB stops the drive (up) of the Tray Lift Motor (M5) as soon as the Tray Upper Limit Detecting
Switch turns on.
The height of the stack on the tray is identified by the Height Sensor (PS1), which measures its distance
from the top of the stack. The tray is moved down when the distance between the top of the stack and the
Delivery Assembly drops to a specific measurement.
The Finisher Controller PCB cuts off the +24V power of the Tray Lift Motor (M5) as soon as the Safety Zone
Detecting Switch (MS3) turns on while the Shutter and the Swing Guide are open, stopping the operation of
the Finisher.
Tray Guide
Tray 1
Tray 2
Encoder
Tray Lift Motor Clock
Sensor 2 (PI9)
Fig. 2-048
Ver. 5.2
530
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
The number of sheets delivered to the tray and the number of sets (number of stapling operations) are
stored in memory by the Finisher Controller PCB. The height of the paper checked by the Height
Sensor (PS1). See Table. 2-004 for the maximum loading capacity of each tray.
The Finisher Controller PCB stops operation when the conditions in Table. 2-004 occur, informing the
Copier that the tray is full.
Stacking mode
Non-staple sort
Tray
Small-size Large-size
5.79 in
(147 mm)
Tray 1 high
(1000
sheets)
5.79 in
(147 mm)
Tray 2 high
(1000
sheets)
1.73 in
(44 mm)
high
(500
sheets)
2.91 in
(74 mm)
high
(500
sheets)
Staple sort
Mixed
sizes
1.73 in
(44 mm)
high
(300
sheets)
1.73 in
(44 mm)
high
(300
sheets)
Mixed
sizes
4.33 in
2.91 in
0.87 in
(110 mm) (74 mm)
(22 mm)
high
high
high
(750 sheets (500 sheets (150 sheets
/ 30 sets)
/ 30 sets)
/30 sets)
4.33 in
2.91 in
0.87 in
(110 mm) (74 mm)
(22 mm)
high
high
high
(750 sheets (500 sheets (150 sheets
/ 30 sets)
/ 30 sets)
/ 30 sets)
Small-size Large-size
Notes:
1. The capacity for the non-staple sort mode is approximate and computed based on 21 lbs
(80g/m2) paper.
2. Alignment for stacks containing 750 sheets or more is not guaranteed.
3. Stacking height specification is 7 mm.
Caution:
1. The term small-size stands for A4, A5-R, B5, LTR, and INV-R.
2. The term large-size Stands for A3, A4-R, B4, B5-R, LGL, LDR, LTR-R, and FLS.
Table. 2-004
Fig. 2-049
Ver. 5.2
531
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
When the Top Output Tray reaches capacity, the output is then switched to another tray. Using the Tray Lift
Motor (M5) the Finisher Controller PCB closes the shutter mounted on the delivery slot before moving the
tray. This prevents the existing stack on the tray from interfering with the delivery slot, and prevents any
access by hand while the trays are moving.
The shutter moves up (to close) when the Second Feed Motor (M8) rotates counter-clockwise, and is held
in position when the motor stops. When the Second Feed Motor rotates counter-clockwise once again, it
moves down (to open) to enable delivery.
When the shutter is held at the up position, claws slide out of the Swing Guide to engage the back of the
shutter. This way, the existing stack and the Swing Guide engage while the tray is moved, preventing the
guide from opening. The claws slide in when the shutter is moved down to release the engagement.
The upward movement of the shutter is monitored by the Shutter Closed Detecting Switch (MS4), and the
downward movement is monitored by the Shutter Open Sensor (PI5).
See the following diagrams for how these operations take place.
1. The Second Feed Motor rotates counter-clockwise to move the shutter up.
M8
Fig. 2-050
2. The Tray Lift Motor rotates, and the new tray moves to the stacking lower limit. The distance of
movement is detected by the Tray Shift Motor Clock Sensor 1/2 (PI9/19).
M5
Fig. 2-051
Ver. 5.2
532
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. The Second Feed Motor rotates counter-clockwise, and the shutter moves down.
M8
Fig. 2-052
4. The Tray Lift Motor rotates, and the tray moves to suit the height of the stack. The appropriate height in
relation to the existing stack is checked by the Height Sensor (PS1).
Height Sensor
(S1)
M5
Fig. 2-053
Claw
Shutter
Claw
Shutter Closed
Detecting
Switch (MS4)
Shutter Open
Sensor
(PI5)
M8
One-Way
Cam
Fig. 2-054
Ver. 5.2
533
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Tray
moved
Shutter
opened
Tray
moved
Fig. 2-055
Ver. 5.2
534
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
This machine is provided with a buffer paper path for continuously receiving paper from the Copier during
stapling and stack job offset operation on the Stapling Tray. A maximum of three copies (three originals or
more in the staple mode) are wrapped around the Buffer Roller. During this time, stack job offset and
stapling are performed on the Stapling Tray.
1st Sheet
SL2
OFF
Fig. 2-056
2. When the leading edge of the sheet has moved past the Buffer Path Inlet Paper Sensor (PI17), the
Buffer Outlet Solenoid (SL3) turns on so as to cause the sheet to wrap around the Buffer Roller.
Buffer Outlet
Solenoid
SL3
ON
Fig. 2-057
3. When the leading edge of the sheet has moved past the Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14), the Buffer
Roller stops and waits for the second sheet.
1st Sheet
2nd Sheet
Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14)
Fig. 2-058
Ver. 5.2
535
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. When the second sheet arrives and its leading edge reaches the Inlet Sensor (PI1), the Buffer Roller
starts to operate once again.
1st Sheet
2nd Sheet
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Fig. 2-059
5. The Buffer Roller continues to rotate, and the 2nd sheet stacks on the 1st sheet.
1st 2nd Sheet
Sheet
Fig. 2-060
6. When the leading edge of the 2nd sheet has moved past the Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14), the
Buffer Roller stops and waits for the 3rd sheet.
1st 2nd Sheet
Sheet
3rd Sheet
Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14)
Fig. 2-061
Ver. 5.2
536
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
7. When the 3rd sheet arrives and its leading edge reaches the Inlet Sensor (PI1), the Buffer Roller starts
to operate once again.
1st 2nd Sheet
Sheet
3rd Sheet
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Fig. 2-062
8. When the Buffer Roller starts to operate, the Buffer Outlet Solenoid (SL3) turns off so that the path is
directed in the direction of delivery. (The actual switch-over will occur after the trail edge of the first
sheet has moved past the flapper.)
Buffer Outlet
Solenoid
SL3
1st Sheet
OFF
3rd Sheet
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Fig. 2-063
9. The Buffer Roller continues to rotate, and all the sheets are fed together towards the Delivery Roller.
Fig. 2-064
Ver. 5.2
537
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The following sensors are used to detect the presence/absence of paper and to make sure that
sheets are moved properly:
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Delivery Sensor (PI3)
Stapling Tray Sensor (PI4)
Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14)
A jam is identified with reference to the presence/absence of paper at each specific sensor at the times
programmed in the memory of the Microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher Controller PCB.
When the CPU identifies a jam, it suspends the Finisher's delivery operation and informs the Copiers DC
controller of the presence of a jam. When all doors are closed after the paper jam is removed, the Buffer
Path Inlet Paper Sensor (PI17) checks whether or not paper is being detected in addition to the above four
sensors (Inlet Sensor, Delivery Sensor, Stapling Tray Sensor and Buffer Path Paper Sensor). If the sensors
detect paper, the Finisher Unit judges that paper jams have not completely been removed, and sends the
paper jam removal signal to the Copier again.
The Tray 1 Paper Sensor (PI11) and Tray 2 Paper Sensor (PI12) are not used to detect jams.
PI3
PI14
PI1
PI4
Fig. 2-065
No.
PI1
PI3
PI4
PI14
Sensor Names
Inlet Sensor
Delivery Sensor
Stapler Tray Sensor
Buffer Path Paper Sensor
Table. 2-005
Ver. 5.2
538
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Equivalent of 400 mm
Equivalent of 400 mm
Jam check
Jam check
Jam
Normal
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Fig. 2-066
2. Inlet Sensor Stationary Jam (21H)
The sheet does not move past the Inlet Sensor when an equivalent of twice the feeding length of the
sheet has been fed after the sensor turned on.
Equivalent of size x2
Equivalent of size x2
Jam check
Jam check
Jam
Normal
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Fig. 2-067
3. Buffer Path Paper Sensor Delay Jam (13H)
The Buffer Inlet Sensor does not detect paper when an equivalent of 540 mm has been fed after the
Inlet Sensor turned on.
Equivalent of 540 mm
Equivalent of 540 mm
Jam check
Jam check
Jam
Fig. 2-068
Ver. 5.2
539
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Equivalent of Size x2
Equivalent of Size x2
Jam check
Buffer Path Paper
Sensor (PI14)
Jam check
Buffer Path Paper
Sensor (PI14)
Normal
Jam
Fig. 2-069
5. Delivery Sensor Delay Jam (14H)
a. Straight Path
The Delivery Sensor does not detect paper when an equivalent of 285 mm has been fed after the
Inlet Sensor turned on.
Equivalent of 285 mm
Equivalent of 285 mm
Jam check
Jam check
Normal
Jam
Fig. 2-070
b. Buffer Path
The Delivery Sensor does not detect paper when an equivalent of 480 mm has been fed after the
Inlet Sensor turned on.
Equivalent of 480 mm
Jam check
Equivalent of 480 mm
Jam check
Normal
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Jam
Fig. 2-071
Ver. 5.2
540
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Equivalent of size x2
Jam check
Equivalent of size x2
Jam check
Normal
Jam
Delivery Sensor (PI3)
Second Feed Motor
(M8)
Delivery Motor (M2)
Fig. 2-072
7. Stapling Tray Sensor Stationary Jam (25H)
The sheet does not move past the Stapling Tray Sensor 1 sec after the Delivery Motor (M2) turned on.
1 sec
Jam check
Stapling Tray
Sensor (PI4)
1 sec
Jam check
Stapling Tray
Sensor (PI4)
Normal
Jam
Fig. 2-073
8. Timing Jam (05H)
The Inlet Sensor (PI1) detects a sheet before the delivery signal is received from the Copier.
9. Staple Jam (05H)
When the Staple Motor (M6) is rotating clockwise, the Staple Home Position Sensor (PI22) does not
turn on within 0.5 sec. after it has turned off. However, the sensor turns on within 0.5 sec. after the
motor has been rotated counter-clockwise.
10. Power-On Jam (07H)
The Inlet Sensor (PI1), Delivery Sensor (PI3), Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI4) and/or Buffer Path Inlet
Paper Sensor (PI17) detects paper at power-on.
11. Door Open Jam (08H)
The Joint Sensor (PI15), Door Open Sensor (PI16) or Door Switch (MS1) detects the cover open
during operation (including the Upper Door Switch (MS1P) and Front Door Switch (MS2P) when the
optional punch unit is mounted).
12. Punch Jam (0AH)
The Punch Home Sensor (PI3P) does not turn on again within 200 misc. after turning off.
Ver. 5.2
541
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Finisher Controller PCB is supplied with 24 VDC power when the Copier is turned on. The 24 VDC
power line is used to drive the motor and solenoids. It also serves for sensors and ICs on PCBs after being
converted to 5 VDC by the Regulator IC(Q14) on the Finisher Controller PCB. The 24 VDC power is also
used to feed power from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB. The power is also
supplied to the Punch Driver PCB when the optional Punch Unit is mounted.
Some of the 24 VDC power used to drive motors is cut off when the Door Switch (MS1) is open.
The power to the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB and the Punch Driver PCB, however, will not be cut off.
Fig. 2-074 is a block diagram showing the power supply system.
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Motor
24V
Motor
24V
Circuit Breaker
(CB1)
Copier
24V
Solenoid
Sensors
(Q14)
5V
Regular IC
Logic
Fig. 2-074
Ver. 5.2
542
JAN 2006
11.1.3.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.3.1.1. Outline
The unit stitches (2 points) a stack of sheets delivered by the Finisher Unit and folds it in two for delivery.
All these operations are controlled by the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB in response to commands from the
Copier via the Finisher Unit.
Finisher Unit Control System
Control System
Paper Positioning
Plate Drive System
Alignment Drive
System
Saddle Stitch Drive
System
Delivery Drive System
Feed Drive System
Paper Pushing Plate
Drive System
Paper Folding Roller
Drive System
Fig. 3-001
Ver. 5.2
543
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The sequence of operations used for the Saddle Stitch is controlled by the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB.
The Saddle Stitch Controller PCB has a microprocessor. This microprocessor is used to control the
sequence of operations and to handle serial communications with the Finisher Controller PCB, driving
solenoids and motors in response to the various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB.
The Saddle Stitch Controller PCB is also used to communicate the state of various sensors and switches to
the Finisher Controller PCB in serial.
The functions of the major ICs mounted on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB are as follows:
Q1
Controls the sequence of operations.
Q2
Contains sequence programs.
Q3
Controls the sequence of operations.
Q4
Handles IPC communications.
Electrical Circuitry Block Diagram
Sensor
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Motor
Q1 CPU
Switch
Solenoid
Q2
ROM
Q3
RAM
Q4
Communications IC
Copier
Fig. 3-002
Ver. 5.2
544
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.3.1.3. Inputs to and Outputs from the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB
1. Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB
J107-1
-2
-3
J11-15 +5V
-14 LUNGECLK
-13
PI2S
J104-3
-1
-2
J11-10 +5V
-12 FDR
-11
PI3S
J103-3
-1
-2
PI4S
J102-1
-3
-2
PI5S
J101-3
-1
-2
PI6S
J100-3 -1
-1 -3
-2 -2
PI7S
J106-3
-1
-2
Delivery Cover
Sensor
Paper Folding
Motor Clock
Sensor
Alignment
Plate Home
Position Sensor
Paper Tray
Sensor
Paper
Positioning Plate
Home Position
Sensor
J303-1
-3
-2
J203-3
-1
-2
J309-1
-3
-2
J209-3
-1
-2
-3 -4
-1 -6
-2 -5
-1
-3
-2
J302
J202A
J202
Front Door
Open/Closed
Sensor
PI1S
J502
J209A
J402
Paper Pushing
Plate Motor
Clock Sensor
J11-7 +5V
-9 EJCVR
-8
J11-6 +5V
-5 FLDCLK
-4
J11-1 +5V
-3 JOGHP
-2
-3
-1
-2
J6-7 +5V
-9 TRYPAR
-8
-6
-4
-5
J6-4
-6 +5V
-5 PAPPOS
Fig. 3-003
Ver. 5.2
545
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Paper
Positioning
Plate Paper
Sensor
J105-3
-1
-3
PI9S
J124-3
-1
-2
PI11S
J525-3
-1
-2
PI12S
J126-3
-1
-2
J9-4 +5V
-6 FDRLHP
-5
PI13S
J117-3
-1
-2
J9-7 +5V
-9 GIDHP
-8
PI14S
Paper
Pushing
Plate Home
Position Sensor
J128-3
-1
-2
J9-10 +5V
-12 LUNGEHP
-11
PI15S
Paper
Pushing
Plate Top
Position Sensor
J129-3
-1
-2
J9-13 +5V
When the paper
-15 LUNGETOP
pushing plate is at
-14
PI16S
J131-3
-1
-2
J13-1 +5V
-3 STPLHP*
-2
PI17S
J132-3
-1
-2
J13-4 +5V
-6 VPJM
-5
When paper is
present in the vertical
path, 1.
PI21S
J130-3
-2
-1
J18-1 +5V
-3 PAFLDHP*
-2
Crescent
Roller Phase
Sensor
Guide Home
Position
Sensor
Saddle Stitch
Unit IN
Sensor
Vertical Path
Paper
Sensor
Paper Folding
Home
Position Sensor
-2
-4
-3
-3
-1
-2
J225
J125
-2
-4
-3
J425
J325
Delivery
Sensor
-3
-1
-2
J6-1 +5V
-3 PPOSPAR
-2
J10-6 +5V
-8 INLTCVR
-7
-3
-1
-2
J9-1 +5V
-3 DELV
-2
When paper is
present at the paper
positioning plate, 1.
When the inlet cover
is closed, 1.
When paper is
present in the delivery
sensor unit, 1.
When the flag of the
crescent roller is at
the sensor, 1.
When the guide is at
home position, 1.
the
leading edge, 1.
-1
-3
-2
J308
J208A
J208
Inlet Cover
Sensor
-1
-3
-2
J301
J201A
J201
PI8S
-4
-2
-3
Fig. 3-004
Ver. 5.2
546
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PI19S
No. 2 Paper
Sensor
J123-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
J304
J204A
J204
PI18S
No. 1 Paper
Sensor
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
J10-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
+5V
1STPA
2NDPA
3RDPA
PI20S
No. 3 Paper
Sensor
-1
-2
-7
-6
-5
Staple
Sensor (rear)
MS6S
MS4S
-1
-2
J120
-5
-5
J8-3 STCHHP1*
-7
-6
-1 HKEMP1
-2
JD2
JD1
J315-3
-7
-6
-5
J121
MS7S
J306
Saddle Stitch
Home Position
Sensor (front)
Staple
Sensor (front)
J305
-7
-6
J8-10
STCHHP2*
-8
HKEMP2
-9
+24V
N.O.
J4-1
MS1S
-2
INLTCVRMS
FDROPN
DELVMS
J4-3
MS2S
-4
J305
J205
N.O.
J4-5
-6
Fig. 3-005
Ver. 5.2
547
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
J118
SL1S
+24V
-2
J15-1
-1
-2 FLPSL1*
+24V
-2
J15-3
-1
-4
-2
J15-5
-1
-6
-1
-4
J5-1
-2
-3
-2
-2
-3
-1
-4
-2
J117
-1
When 0, the
solenoid turns ON.
FLPSL2*
+24V
-2
J116
-1
SL4S
When 0, the
solenoid turns ON.
When 0, the
solenoid turns ON.
RLNIPSL*
M1S
-3
-4
J115A
Feed Motor
A
A*
B
B*
J4-8
-1
-7
J119-5
J12-1
-4
-2
-3
-3
-2
-4
-1
-5
J114-5
J7-6
-4
-7
-3
-8
-2
-9
-1
-10
J113-5
J7-1
-4
-2
-3
-3
-2
-4
-1
-5
M2S
+24V
Guide Motor
M3S
M4S
Alignment Motor
M5S
B*
A*
B
A
B*
A*
+24V
B
A
B*
A*
+24V
B
A
Fig. 3-006
Ver. 5.2
548
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
-3
-5
-2
-6
-1
-7
J316-4
-4
J8-11
-5
-3
-12
-2
-13
-1
-14
-6
J120
-4
-5
J305
M7S
J315-4
-7
M6S
-6
J306
J121
JD2
JD1
Saddle Stitch
motor (front)
-7
Saddle Stitch
motor (rear)
J4-9
-2
-10
M8S
J131-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
J2-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
Communication line
+24V
+24V
J500-1
J132-1
J1-1
-2
-2
-2
Fig. 3-007
Ver. 5.2
549
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Saddle Stitch Unit aligns the sheets coming from the Finisher unit and stitches the resulting stack for
delivery to the Delivery Tray according to the commands coming from the Finisher Controller PCB.
The machine's operation consists of the following:
1. Receives the sheets
2. Aligns the sheets
3. Stitches the stack
4. Feeds the stack
5. Folds and delivers the stack
5. Folds and
delivers the stack
Fig. 3-008
Ver. 5.2
550
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Receiving Sheets
The Saddle Stitch Unit receives the sheets from the Finisher unit and sends them to the vertical path in
a vertical orientation.
The vertical path assembly uses two deflecting plates and a paper positioning plate to position the
center of the stack so it matches the stapling / folding requirements.
Sheets coming later are output closer to the delivery slot, and the volume of paper that may be output
is as follows:
15 sheets (maximum of 14 sheets of 80g/m2 + 1 sheet of 133g/m2)
Direction of delivery
2nd Sheet
1st Sheet
Paper Positioning Plate
Fig. 3-009
2. Aligning the Sheets
The Alignment Plates operate to set the sheets in order each time a sheet of paper is sent to the
vertical path assembly. The Alignment Plates are mounted at the edge of the vertical path assembly.
The Alignment Plates also operate after stapling to prepare the stack for delivery.
Sheets
Alignment Plate
Alignment Plate
Fig. 3-010
Ver. 5.2
551
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Stitching
When all the sheets are properly set in the vertical path assembly, the two stitchers, stitch the stack.
The Stitchers are positioned so that they face the center of a stack.
The two Stitchers are not operated simultaneously so as to prevent the paper from wrinkling between
the two staples and to limit the load on the power supply.
If only one sheet of paper arrives from the Copier, stitching does not take place and the sequence goes
to the next operation (stack feeding).
Stitcher
Staple
Fig. 3-011
Ver. 5.2
552
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 3-012
5. Folding / Delivering the Stack
The Paper Pushing Plate pushes the center of the stack again to move it in the direction of the Paper
Folding Rollers. In response, the Paper Folding Rollers pick the stack along its center and folds it in
two. The Paper Folding Rollers together with the Delivery Roller then move the stack along to output it
on the Delivery Tray.
Paper Folding
Roller
Delivery Roller
Fig. 3-013
Ver. 5.2
553
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The paper output mechanism serves to keep a stack of sheets coming from the Finisher in place for the
next operation (stapling, folding). The paper inlet is equipped with the No. 1 Flapper and the No. 2 Flapper,
which operate to configure the paper path to suit the paper size. The Paper Positioning Plate is kept poised
at a predetermined location to suit the paper size. The Paper Positioning Plate is driven by the Paper
Positioning Plate Motor (M4S), and the position of the plate is identified in reference to the number of motor
pulses coming from the Paper Positioning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI7S).
A sheet moved by the Inlet Roller is handled by the Feed Rollers and the Crescent Roller and held in a
predetermined position. The Feed Plate moves the sheets by coming into contact with or moving away from
the sheets as needed. The Alignment Plates sets the stack in order each time a sheet is ejected. The
Alignment Plates are driven by the Alignment Motor (M5S), whose position is identified in reference to the
number of motor pulses coming from the Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5S).
To prevent interference between paper and the Paper Folding Rollers when the paper is being ejected, the
Folding Rollers are designed to be covered by a Guide Plate. The Guide Plate moves down before paper is
folded so as to expose the Paper Folding Rollers. The Inlet is equipped with the No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3
Paper Sensors (PI18S, PI19S, PI20S) each suited for a specific paper size, and the Paper Positioning Plate
is equipped with a Paper Positioning Plate Paper Sensor (PI8S).
Ver. 5.2
554
JAN 2006
Ver. 5.2
555
M6S/
M7S
M3S
SL2S
SL1S
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB (1/2)
M5S
M1S
SL4S
M8S
PI1S
M2S
PI4S
M4S
Fig. 3-014
JAN 2006
Ver. 5.2
PI8S
PI7S
556
No. 1 paper detection signal 1STPA
PI12S
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
PI17S
PI11S
PI21S
PI15S
PI14S
PI13S
PI6S
Fig. 3-015
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
The two Flappers mounted at the Paper Inlet are operated to configure the feed path according to the
paper size.
The Flappers are used to enable the following:
a) To detect the passage of the trailing edge of the paper being detected by an appropriate Sensor.
b) To prevent the following sheet from butting against the top of the existing stack Table. 3-001 shows
the relationship between Sensors and paper sizes.
Sensor
No. 1 Paper Sensor
(PI18S)
No. 2 Paper Sensor
(PI19S)
No. 3 Paper Sensor
(PI20S)
Ledger / 11 x 17 in
(A3 / 279 x 432 mm)
B4
LTR-R/A4-R
Used
Used
Used
Not Used
Used
Used
Not Used
Not Used
Used
Table. 3-001
Each Flapper is driven by its own solenoid.
Table. 3-002 shows the relationship between solenoids and paper sizes.
Solenoid
No. 1 Paper Deflecting
Plate Solenoid (SL1S)
No. 2 Paper Deflecting
Plate Solenoid (SL2S)
Ledger / 11 x 17 in
(A3 / 279 x 432 mm)
B4
A4-R/LTR-R
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Table. 3-002
Ver. 5.2
557
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
OFF
No passage of paper
No. 2 paper
Sensor PI19S SL2
OFF
No. 2 Paper Deflecting
No passage of paper
Plate Solenoid
No. 3 Paper Sensor
PI20S
Top edge
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
Fig. 3-016
Ver. 5.2
558
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Passage of paper
No. 1 Paper
Sensor PI18S
SL1
No. 2 Paper
Sensor PI19S
ON
Passage of paper
SL2
No. 3 Paper
Sensor PI20S
OFF
No passage of paper
PI18S
PI19S
Top edge
PI20S
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
Entry of 1st sheet
Fig. 3-017
Ver. 5.2
559
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
No.1 Paper
Sensor PI18S
Passage of paper
SL1
No.2 Paper
Sensor PI19S
ON
Passage of paper
SL2
No.3 Paper
Sensor PI20S
ON
Passage of paper
PI18S
PI19S
Top edge
PI20S
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
Enty of 1st sheet
Fig. 3-018
Ver. 5.2
560
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
When the leading edge of a sheet has moved past the Inlet Flapper, the Intermediate Feed Roller and the
crescent Roller start to move the sheet forward.
The Intermediate Feed Roller is normally not in contact with the Path Bed. When the leading edge of a
sheet reaches the Intermediate Feed Roller contact section, the Feed Plate contact Solenoid (SL4S)
causes the roller to come into contact with the Path Bed so as to move the sheet. The contact is broken as
soon as the leading edge of the sheet reaches the Paper Positioning Plate. This series of operations is
executed each time a sheet arrives.
When the leading edge of the first sheet reaches the Paper Positioning Plate, the Paper Positioning Plate
Paper Sensor (PI18S) turns ON. The arrival of the second and subsequent sheets will not be checked since
the first sheet will still be over the sensor. The Crescent Roller keeps rotating while the sheets are being
output, butting the leading edge of each sheet against the Paper Positioning Plate, and ultimately, keeping
the leading edge of the stack in order.
The Alignment Plate Motor (M5S) drives the Alignment Plates for each sheet so as to set both left and right
edges of the sheet in proper alignment.
1. The Solenoid turns ON while the paper is being moved so that the Feed Plate comes into contact.
Intermediate Feed Roller
Feed Roller
M1S
ON
SL4S
Feed Plate Contact Solenoid
Fig. 3-019
2. The Solenoid turns OFF when the paper butts against the Paper Positioning Plate. The Feed Motor
continues to rotate.
M1S
OFF
SL4S
Fig. 3-020
Ver. 5.2
561
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. The Solenoid turns ON when the next sheet arrives, and the Feed Plate comes into contact.
M1S
ON
SL4S
Fig. 3-021
Alignment
Plate
Fig. 3-022
2. The Alignment Plates move away from the edges of the stack over a short distance and then butt
against the edges once again (2nd alignment).
Fig. 3-023
Ver. 5.2
562
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 3-024
4. When the following stack arrives, steps 1 through 3 above are repeated.
5. The Alignment Plates butt against the stack once again, during which, stitching takes place.
Fig. 3-025
6. The Alignment Plates separate by 10 mm from the edges of the stack, after which, folding and delivery
take place.
Fig. 3-026
7. When the first sheet of the following stack reaches the No. 1 Paper Sensor, the Guide moves to a
position 10 mm from the edge of the stack and prepares for the next alignment operation.
Fig. 3-027
Ver. 5.2
563
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
In case of 2 sheets:
Entry of Entry of
1st sheet 2nd sheet
[1]
[2] [3]
[4]
[1] :
[2] :
[3] :
[4] :
: Escape
Alignment Plate
Alignment Motor
M5S
Alignment Plate
Stack
Alignment Plate
Home Position
Sensor (PI5S)
Paper
Positioning Plate
Fig. 3-029
Ver. 5.2
564
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
If alignment was executed with the Crescent Roller in contact with the stack of sheets, the resulting
friction against the roller causes the stack to move inappropriately (fig. 3-030). To prevent this problem,
the phase of the roller is identified and used to determine the timing of alignment.
The phase of the Crescent Roller is identified by the Crescent Roller Phase Sensor (PI12S). The flag
for the Crescent Roller Phase Sensor is mounted to the Crescent Roller Shaft. The flag will leave the
Sensor while the Roller Shaft rotates, turning the Sensor ON or OFF, enabling the assumption that the
Crescent Roller is positioned at the opposite side of the stack (fig. 3-032). The Alignment Plates are
operated to correspond with this change in the state of the Sensor.
Crescent Roller Phase
Sensor (PI12S)
Alignment Plates
Flag
Crescent Roller
M1S
Feed Motor
Stack
Fig. 3-030
Alignment Plates
Fig. 3-031
Ver. 5.2
565
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Alignment operation is
started when the flag
has covered the sensor
and the crescent roller is
away from the stack.
Fig. 3-032
1st sheet
3rd sheet
2nd sheet
4th sheet
Crescent Roller Phase
Sensor (PI12S)
Feed motor
stops
Alignment operation
Feed Motor (M1)
Fig. 3-033
Ver. 5.2
566
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
The stitching system stitches the center of an output stack with Staples.
To enable stitching at two locations on a stack, two Stitcher Units (front, rear) are used. Each Stitcher
Unit is equipped with a Stitcher Motor (M7S, M6S) for drive, a Stitcher Home Position Sensor (MS7S,
MS5S) for detection of position and a Staple Sensor (MS6S, MS4S) for detection of the presence/
absence of staples.
The Stitcher Base is designed so that it may be drawn out to the front from the Saddle Stitch for
replacement of the Staple Cartridge or removal of a staple jam. The Stitcher Unit in Sensor (PI16S) is
used to make sure that the Stitcher Base is properly fitted to the Saddle Stitcher.
Safety Switches are not mounted for the Saddle Stitch Unit (front, rear), as the location does not allow
access by the user.
Stitcher (rear)
Stitcher (front)
Stack
Fig. 3-034
Ver. 5.2
567
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 3-035
Stitcher Home Position Sensor
(front) (MS7S)
Stitcher Motor (front) (MS7)
Stitcher Home Position Sensor
(rear) (MS5S)
Stitcher Motor (rear) (M6S)
No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S)
Alignment Motor (M5S)
: Alignment
: Escape
Fig. 3-036
Cam
Mount
Fig. 3-037
Ver. 5.2
568
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
The paper folding mechanism consists of a Guide Plate, Paper Folding Rollers, Paper Pushing Plate,
and Paper Positioning Plate.
The Guide Plate is used to cover the Folding Rollers while sheets are output as to prevent sheets from
coming into contact with the Folding Rollers during output. Before the stack is folded, the Guide Plate
moves down to enable the Folding Rollers to operate. The Folding Rollers are driven by the Paper
Folding Motor (M2S), and the drive of the motor is monitored by the Paper Folding Motor Clock Sensor
(PI4S). The mechanism is also equipped with a Paper Folding Home Position Sensor (PI12S) for
detecting the position of the Paper Folding Rollers.
The Paper Pushing Plate is driven by the Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8S), and the drive of the Paper
Pushing Plate Motor is monitored by the Paper Pushing Plate Motor Clock Sensor (PI1S). The Paper
Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor (PI14S) and the Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor
(PI15S) are used to detect the position of the Paper Pushing Plate.
After being folded in half by the Paper Folding Rollers, the stack is moved ahead by the Delivery Roller
for delivery. The Delivery Roller is driven by the Paper Folding Motor. The Delivery Sensor (PI11S) is
mounted to the Delivery Assembly to detect delivery of paper. The Tray Paper Sensor (PI6S) is used to
detect the presence/absence of paper on the tray, but does not detect jams. The Vertical Path Paper
Sensor (PI17S) serves to detect the presence of paper after jam removal.
2. Controlling the Movement of Stacks
When a stack has been stitched (2 points), the Paper Positioning Plate lowers so that the stack will
move to where the Paper Folding Rollers come into contact with the stack and where the Paper
Pushing Plate is located. The position of the Paper Positioning Plate is controlled in reference to the
number of motor pulses coming from the Paper Positioning Home Position Sensor (PI7S).
At the same time as the Paper Positioning Plate operates, the Guide Plate lowers so that folding may
take place.
Stitcher ends
Equivalent of specific
number of pulses
Fig. 3-038
Ver. 5.2
569
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Folding a Stack
A stack is folded by the action of the Paper Folding Rollers and the Paper Pushing Plate. The Paper
Pushing Plate pushes against the center of a stack toward the roller contact section. The Paper
Pushing Plate starts at its home position and waits at the leading edge position until the stack has been
drawn to the Paper Folding Roller and is gripped for a length of 10 mm. When the Paper Folding Roller
has gripped the stack for a length about 10 mm, the Paper Pushing Plate Motor starts to rotate once
again, and the Paper Pushing Plate returns to its home position. The stack gripped in this way by the
Paper Folding Roller is drawn further by the Paper Folding Roller and then is moved by the Delivery
Roller to the Paper Tray.
Half of the peripheral area of the Paper Folding Rollers excluding the center part is punched out. This
punched out area only feeds the paper as the Paper Feeding Roller (lower) contacts the Paper
Feeding Roller (upper) only at the center of the roller to prevent the paper from wrinkling. As the Paper
Feeding Roller (lower) contacts the Paper Feeding Roller (upper) at their entire surfaces on the
remaining half of the peripheral area, paper folding starts from this half of the peripheral area, and
paper is fed while it is being folded. The stop position of the Paper Folding Rollers is in this half of the
peripheral area.
The paper folding start and stop positions on the Paper Folding Rollers is controlled according to the
motor lock signals from the Paper Folding Home Position Sensor (PI21S).
Paper Pushing Plate Top
Position Sensor (PI15S)
M8S
M2S
Paper Pushing
Plate Motor
Stack of Sheets Paper
Folding Motor
Fig. 3-039
Paper Pushing Plate Top Paper Pushing Plate Home
Position Sensor (PI15S) Position Sensor (PI14S)
Sensor Flag
Paper Folding Home
Position Sensor
(PI21S)
M8S
M2S
Paper Pushing
Plate Motor
Paper
Folding Motor
Fig. 3-040
Ver. 5.2
570
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Stack of Sheets
Sensor Flag
Paper Folding
Home Position
Sensor (PI21S)
Paper folding/feeding is performed.
Paper feeding is performed.
Fig. 3-041
[Paper folding roller stop position]
Delivery outlet
Sensor flag
Paper folding
home position
sensor (PI21S)
Paper folding/feeding is performed.
Paper feeding is performed.
Fig. 3-042
Ver. 5.2
571
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Paper Folding Motor (M2S)
: Motor CCW
Fig. 3-043
4. Double Folding a Stack
To fold a stack consisting of 10 or more A4-R or LTR-R sheets, folding is executed twice for the same
sheet.
The Paper Folding Rollers rotate in reverse for an equivalent of 20 mm after gripping the stack for a
length of 20mm, enabling the Paper Folding Rollers to apply an increased degree of pressure along
the crease on the stack. Then, the Paper Folding Rollers rotate normally, and the Paper Pushing Plate
returns to its home position while the stack is being delivered. This way, a stack requiring a large force
may properly be folded with less pressure.
a. The Paper Pushing Plate pushes the stack in the direction of the Paper Folding Rollers.
M2S
M8S
Fig. 3-044
Ver. 5.2
572
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
b. The Paper Folding Rollers grip the stack for a length of about 20 mm.
20mm
(appro
x
.)
M2S
Fig. 3-045
c. The Paper Folding Rollers rotate in reverse, pushing back the stack for a length of about 20 mm
(reverse feeding).
20mm
(appro
x
.)
M2S
Fig. 3-046
Ver. 5.2
573
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
d. The Paper Folding Rollers rotate again, feeding out the stack. The Paper Pushing Plate returns to
its home position.
M2S
M8S
Fig. 3-047
Gripping of paper stack
Equivalent of 20mm
: Motor CCW
Fig. 3-048
Ver. 5.2
574
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
PI11S
PI17S
PI15S
PI14S
Fig. 3-049
No.
PI11S
PI14S
PI15S
PI17S
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
Sensor
Delivery Sensor
Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor
Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor
Vertical Path Paper Sensor
No. 1 Paper Sensor
No. 2 Paper Sensor
No. 3 Paper Sensor
Table. 3-003
Ver. 5.2
575
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
T:
100 (mm)
Delivery speed (mm/sec)
T:
Jam
Load stops
100 (mm)
Delivery speed (mm/sec)
Fig. 3-050
3. Inlet Stationary Jam (A1H)
The No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S), No. 2 Paper Sensor (PI19S), and No. 3 Paper Sensor (PI20S) on the
Paper Sensor PCB do not turn OFF when the stack has been fed for a specific period after the No. 1
Paper Sensor (PI18S) turns ON. The Paper Sensor used varies according to the paper size.
a. Ledger / 11 x 17 in (A3 / 279 x 432 mm) Stack
No. 1 Paper Sensor
(PI18S)
Normal
T
Jam
Load stops
Fig. 3-051
Ver. 5.2
576
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
b. B4 Stack
T
No. 1 Paper Sensor
(PI18S)
T
T
Normal
Normal
Jam
T
Jam
Load stops
Note:
The illustration shows two Sensors checking for jams. Single detection, however, uses only one
sensor.
Fig. 3-052
c. LTR-R / A4-R Stack
T
Normal
Normal
Normal
Jam
Jam
Jam
Load stops
Note:
The illustration shows two Sensors checking for jams. Single detection, however, uses only one
sensor.
Fig. 3-053
4. Delivery Delay Jam (92H)
a. By Delivery Sensor
The Delivery Sensor (PI11S) does not turn ON within a specific period of time after the Paper
Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor has turned ON.
T
Paper Pushing Plate Top
Position Sensor (PI15S)
Delivery Sensor
(PI11S)
T
Paper Pushing Plate Top
Position Sensor (PI15S)
Delivery Sensor
(PI11S)
Normal
Jam
T : Equivalent of 180 mm
T : Equivalent of 180 mm
Fig. 3-054
Ver. 5.2
577
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Normal
Delivery Sensor
(PI11S)
Delivery Sensor
(PI11S)
T : Feeding of
Paper length
130 +50 mm
2
T : Feeding of
Jam
Paper length
130 +50 mm
2
Note:
The length 130 mm is the length of the feeding path from the Vertical Path Paper Sensor to the
Delivery Paper Sensor, while the length 50 mm is a margin.
Fig. 3-055
b. By Delivery Sensor
T
Delivery Sensor
(PI11S)
Normal
Delivery Sensor
(PI11S)
Jam
Load stops
Paper length
x 1.5 mm
2
T : Feeding of
Paper length
x 1.5 mm
2
Fig. 3-056
6. Power-ON Jam (87H)
Any of the No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S), No. 2 Paper Sensor (PI19S), No. 3 Paper Sensor (PI20S),
Vertical Path Paper Sensor (PI17S) and Delivery Sensor (PI11S) on the Paper Sensor PCB detects
paper at power-ON.
7. Door Open Jam (88H / 89H)
The Front Door Open/Closed Sensor (PI2S), Outlet Cover Sensor (PI3S), or Inlet Cover Sensor (PI9S)
finds that the Respective Cover is open during operation.
8. Stitcher Staple Jam (86H)
When the Stitcher Motor (M7S/M6S) is rotating clockwise, the Stitcher Home Position Sensor (MS7S/
MS5S) does not turn ON within 0.5 sec. after it has turned OFF. In addition, the sensor turns ON within
0.5 sec after the motor has been rotated counter-clockwise.
Reference:
When all doors are closed after the user has removed the jam, the Saddle Stitch Unit checks
whether the Vertical Path Paper Sensor (PI17S) has detected the presence of paper. If the sensor
has detected paper, the unit will identify the condition as being faulty jam removal and send the jam
signal to the Copier once again.
Ver. 5.2
578
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
When the Copier Power Switch is turned ON, two 24V Power Lines are supplied by the Finisher
Controller PCB.
Of the two 24V Lines, one is used to Drive Solenoids. The 24V Power from the Finisher Controller PCB
to solenoids does not pass through any interlocks. The 24V Power to motors, on the other hand, will
not be supplied if any of the three door Switches is open.
The 24V line is used for the generation of 5V power intended for sensors.
Inlet Door Front Door Delivery
Switch
Switch Door Switch
(MS1S)
(MS2S)
(MS3S)
24V
24V
Circuit
Breaker
(CB1)
Finisher
Controller
PCB
24V
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
5V
Motor systems
Solenoids
Sensors
(Q6)
24VR
Regulator IC
5V
Logic
Fig. 3-057
2. Protective Mechanisms
The 24VDC Power Supply used for motors and solenoids is equipped with a Circuit Breaker (CB1).
The 24V Power Supply used to drive the Feed Motor (M1S), Alignment Motor (M5S), and the Paper
Positioning Plate Motor (M4S) is equipped with a fuse designed to blow when an overcurrent flows.
Ver. 5.2
579
JAN 2006
11.1.4.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.4.1.1. Outline
The Punch Unit (option) is attached on the feed path between the Copier and the Finisher.
The Punch Unit does not have a paper feed mechanism. Paper from the Copier is fed by feed drive from the
Finisher via the Punch Unit. When the trailing edge of the paper from the Copier reaches the Punch Unit,
the paper stops temporarily, and the Punch Shaft is rotated to punch the trailing edge of the paper. This
operation is controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB, and each of the parts on the Finisher is driven by the
Punch Driver PCB.
Punch
drive
system
Horizontal
registration
drive
system
Fig. 4-001
Ver. 5.2
580
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
J102-3
-2
-1
J1A-1
+5V
-2
SREGHP
-3
PI2P
J105-1
-2
-3
J1B-6
+5V
-5
PUNCHCLK
-4
PI3P
J104-2
-3
-1
J1B-2
+5V
-3
PUNCHHP*
-1
Horizontal
Registration
Home
Position Sensor
Punch
Motor
Clock
Sensor
Punch
Home
Position
System
Upper
Door
Switch
+24V
N.O.
J5-1
-2
Front
Door
Switch
MS1P
N.O.
UDROPN
J5-3
MS2P
-4
FDROPN
Photosensor PCB
+5V
PTR1
PTR2
PTR3
PTR4
PTR5
+5V
J115-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
J7-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-1
-13
SREG1*
SREG2*
SREG3*
SREG4*
PAEND*
When a paper is
detected, 0.
Fig. 4-002
Ver. 5.2
581
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
J116-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
J7-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-1
-6
LEDON5
LEDON4
LEDON3
LEDON2
LEDON1
When 1, LED is
ON.
+5V
LED6
J1B-8
PTR6
LEDON*
DFULL
Punch Motor
J114-1
J2-1
-2
-2
J114-5
J1A-7
M1P
Horizontal Registration
Motor
+24V
-8 B*
-9 A*
-4
M2P
According to direcrtion of
motor rotation, changes
between + and -.
-3
-10 B
-11 A
-2
-1
Fig. 4-003
Ver. 5.2
582
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
J3A-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
J21B-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
J3B-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
+24V
J4-4
-3
-2
-1
Fig. 4-004
Ver. 5.2
583
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Punch Unit is located on the feed path between the Copier and the Finisher, and successively punches
holes when the paper stops temporarily. When the trailing edge of the paper reaches the Punch Unit, the
Inlet Roller of the Finisher Unit temporarily stops the paper and holes are punched on the trailing edge of
the paper.
The Punch Unit consists of a die and hole puncher (punch blade). The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch
Motor (M1P). The Hole Puncher is attached to the eccentric cam of the Punch Shaft, and rotary action of
the Punch Shaft is converted to reciprocal motion to perform punching.
Punch Motor (M1P) is a DC Motor. The home position of the Punch Shaft is detected by Punch Home
Position Sensor (PI3P). To stop the DC Punch Motor accurately at its home position, the Punch Motor Clock
Sensor (PI2P) counts a predetermined number of clock pulses to stop the Punch Motor. A single punch
operation is performed by rotating the Punch Shaft 180 from its home position. Five Light Sensors
(Photosensor PCB) are located at the upper side of the inlet paper feed path of the Punch Unit and a set of
five LEDs (LED PCB) are located at the lower side. These Sensors and LEDs function as five Sensors. The
Frontmost Sensor (LED5, PTR5) are the Trailing Edge Sensor and are used for detecting the trailing edge
of the paper. The remaining Sensor (LED1 to LED4, PTR1 to PTR4) are Horizontal Registration Sensors,
and are used for detecting the inner position of the paper for determining the hole punching position.
The Punch Motor, Punch Unit and above Sensors comprise the Punch Slide Unit. This Unit moves
backwards and forwards according to the size of the paper. Backward and forward movement is driven by
the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the
Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI1P). The Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is a 2phase stepping motor.
The Punch Motor and Horizontal Registration Motor is driven by the Punch Driver PCB according to control
signals from the Finisher Controller PCB.
Punch scraps caused by punching are stored in the Punch Trash Box. Detection of the paper scraps in the
Punch Trash Box is performed by a deflective sensor (LED6 and PTR6 on the Punch Trash Box Full
Detector PCB unit).
Ver. 5.2
584
JAN 2006
Ver. 5.2
585
5
2
4
3
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PTR1
LED1
Fig. 4-005
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch Motor (M1P). The hole puncher home position is detected by the
Punch Home Position Sensor (PI3P).
In all there are four types of Punch Unit depending on the destination: 2- hole type (Punch Unit A1), 2-/3hole Dual Use (Punch Unit B1), and two 4-hole types (Punch Unit C1 and Punch Unit D1). With the 2-hole
and 4-hole types, the Hole Puncher is moved reciprocally and punching is performed by the Punch Shaft
rotating 180 from its home position. With the 2-/3-hole dual use type, too, the Hole Puncher is moved
reciprocally and punching is performed by the Punch Shaft rotating 180 from its home position. However,
half of the peripheral area of the Punch Shaft can be used as a 2-hole type while the other half can be as a
3-hole type. Whether the Punch Shaft is used as a 2-hole punch or a 3-hole punch depends on the
instructions from the Copier.
1. 2- / 4-hole Type
At the home position, the Punch Home Position Sensor is ON. Punching of the first sheet ends when
the Punch Shaft has rotated in the forward direction 180, and the state of the Punch Home Position
Sensor has changed from OFF to ON. Punching of the second sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has
rotated in the reverse direction 180, and the state of the Punch Home Position Sensor has changed
from OFF to ON.
The following illustrates when two sheets are punched.
a. A hole is punched in the trailing edge of the first sheet.
Punch Home
Position
Sensor (PI3P)
Sensor Flag
Punch Shaft
Eccentric
Cam
Die
Hole
Puncher
Sheet
Die
[punch shaft
stopped/home
position]
Punch Trash
[punch shaft is
rotated 90 in the
forward direction/
hole punched]
Fig. 4-006
Ver. 5.2
586
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[punch shaft
stopped/home
position]
[punch shaft is
rotated 90 in the
reverse direction/
hole punched]
Fig. 4-007
Ver. 5.2
587
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Sensor Flag
Punch Shaft
Eccentric
Cam
Die
Hole
Puncher
Sheet
Die
[punch shaft
stopped/home
position]
Punch Trash
[punch shaft is
rotated 90 in the
forward direction/
hole punched]
Fig. 4-008
When two holes are punched, the 3-Hole Puncher is fed reciprocally in the escape direction (hole
puncher rise direction) as shown below.
[punch shaft
stopped/home
position]
[punch shaft is
rotated 90 in the
reverse direction/
hole puncher rises
to topmost position]
Fig. 4-009
Ver. 5.2
588
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[punch shaft
stopped/home
position]
[punch shaft is
rotated 90 in the
reverse direction/
hole punched]
Fig. 4-010
When two holes are punched, the 3-Hole Puncher is fed reciprocally in the escape direction (hole
puncher rise direction) as shown below.
[punch shaft
stopped/home
position]
[punch shaft is
rotated 90 in the
reverse direction/
hole puncher rises
to topmost position]
Fig. 4-011
Ver. 5.2
589
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Horizontal registration drive of the Punch Slide Unit is performed by the Horizontal Registration Motor
(M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the Horizontal Registration Home Position
Sensor (PI1P). The Punch Slide Unit detects the trailing edge of the paper by the Trailing Edge Sensor
(LED5, PTR5) and Horizontal Registration Sensors (LED1 to 4, SREG1 to 4) and is moved to the trailing
edge position matched to the paper size.
The following shows horizontal registration operation.
1. When the leading edge of the paper from the Copier is detected by the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5,
PTR5) on the Punch Unit, the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) starts to move the Punch Slide Unit
towards the front.
Sheet Delivery
Direction
Sheet
Fig. 4-012
2. After the Horizontal Registration Sensors (LED1 to 4, PTR1 to 4) detect the edge of the paper at its
inner side in keeping with the paper size signals arriving from the Copier, the Horizontal Registration
Motor (M2P) drives the Punch Slide Unit to a predetermined position further towards the front, and
stops the Unit at this position.
Fig. 4-013
Ver. 5.2
590
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. When the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PTR5) detects the trailing edge of the paper, drive of the Inlet
Feed Motor (M9) and First Feed Motor (M1) on the Finisher is stopped to stop paper feed. Next, the
Punch Motor (M1P) is driven to punch the holes.
Punch
Fig. 4-014
4. When the punching operation ends, drive of the Inlet Feed Motor (M9) and First Motor (M1) on the
Finisher is started, the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is operated in the reverse direction, and the
Punch Slide Unit is returned to its home position where it comes to a stop.
5. Even if paper to be punched continues to arrive, the Punch Slide Unit returns to its home position for
each arriving sheet, and steps 1 to 4 are repeated.
Inlet Feed Motor (M9)
First Feed Motor (M1)
Trailing Edge Detection Sensor
(LED5, PTR5)
Horizontal Registration Sensor
(LED1 to 4, PTR1 to 4)
Horizontal Registration Motor
(M2P)
Horizontal Registration Home
Position Sensor (PI1P)
Punch Motor (M1P)
Punch Home Position Sensor
(PI3P)
: Motor CW
: Motor CCW
Fig. 4-015
Ver. 5.2
591
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
24V power and 5V power are supplied from the Finisher Controller PCB when the Power Switch on the
Copier is turned ON.
24V power is used for driving Motors, while 5V power is used for driving Sensors and the ICs on the
Punch Driver PCB.
24V power to the Motors is not supplied when either of the two Door Switches on the Punch Unit is
open.
Upper Door
Switch
(MS1P)
Front Door
Switch
(MS2P)
24V
24V
Motor System
Finisher
Controller
PCB
5V
5V
5V
Sensor
Logic
Fig. 4-016
2. Protection Function
The 24V power supplies for the Punch Motor (M1P) and Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) are
equipped with a fuse designed to blow when an overcurrent flows.
Ver. 5.2
592
JAN 2006
11.1.5.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Mechanical Construction
[3]
Front
Door
Fig. 5-001
1. Removing of the Front Door Assembly.
[4]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
Fig. 5-002
Ver. 5.2
593
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[3]
Rear
Cover
[2] Screws
Fig. 5-003
3. Removing the Upper Door Assembly.
[1]
[2]
Fig. 5-004
4. Removing the Front Cover.
(1) Open the Front Door Assembly [1].
(2) Remove 1 Screw [2], and remove the Front
Cover [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
Fig. 5-005
Ver. 5.2
594
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[3]
[1]
Fig. 5-006
[6]
[4] [5]
[7]
Fig. 5-007
[1]
Caution:
When reinstalling the Tray Rack Assembly back
into the Finisher Assembly, before inserting it, be
sure to release the Tray Lift Motor Gear Clutch [1]
with a Screwdriver or a similar object. Take extra
care during this operation.
Fig. 5-008
Ver. 5.2
595
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[4]
[2]
[2]
[3]
Fig. 5-009
7. Removing the Grate-Sharped Lower Guide.
[1]
[2]
[3]
Fig. 5-010
[6]
[4]
(4) Free the Harness [5] from the Harness Stop [4].
(5) Disconnect 2 Connectors [6], and remove the
Grate-Sharped Lower Guide [3].
[5]
[3]
Fig. 5-011
Ver. 5.2
596
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
Fig. 5-012
[1]
[3]
[2]
Fig. 5-013
[5]
[6]
(6) Open the Front Cover [5] and push the Stapler
Unit [6] backward as illustrated.
Fig. 5-014
Ver. 5.2
597
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 5-015
[8]
[9]
[8]
[8]
Fig. 5-016
Ver. 5.2
598
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[2]
[1]
[3]
Fig. 5-017
(3) Remove the Ground Lead [4] and 3 Screws [5],
and pull down the PCB [6] towards you.
[6]
[5]
[5]
[4]
Fig. 5-018
(4) Remove the Harness Leads [8] from 2 Edge
Saddles [7], and remove the PCB Base.
[8]
[7]
[7]
Fig. 5-019
[10]
[9]
[9]
[9]
Fig. 5-020
Ver. 5.2
599
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Caution:
Before re-attaching the Feed Drive Unit back on
the Finisher Unit, loosen the Move Gear Stop
Screw [11] to relieve the tension, and then fasten
the Screw after attaching the Feed Drive Unit.
The Move Gear Attachment must be adjusted
when removing and attaching the Swing Unit.
If you forget to fasten the Screw, the Gear Teeth
may disengage, resulting in defective feed.
[11]
Fig. 5-021
Ver. 5.2
600
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[3]
[1]
[2]
Fig. 5-022
[5]
[4]
[5]
Fig. 5-023
4. Removing the Stapler.
[2]
Fig. 5-024
Ver. 5.2
601
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[4]
[3]
Fig. 5-025
(5) Remove 2 Screws (M4) used to hold the Stapler
Cover.
[5]
Stapler
Cover
Fig. 5-026
11.1.5.1.3. PCBs
1. Removing the Finisher Controller PCB.
(1) Remove the Rear Cover. (See Fig. 5-003.)
(2) Disconnect 16 Connectors [1].
(3) Remove 4 Screws [2], and remove the Finisher
Controller PCB [3].
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
Fig. 5-027
Ver. 5.2
602
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[1]
Rear
Lower
Cover
(4)
Fig. 5-028
1. Removing the Front Lower Door Assembly.
(1) Open the Lower Door Assembly [1].
(2) Remove 1 Screw [2] and remove the Bushing
[3], and then remove the Front Lower Door
Assembly.
[3]
[2]
[1]
Fig. 5-029
2. Removing the Rear Lower Cover.
(1) Remove 4 Screws [1], and remove the Rear
Lower Cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
Fig. 5-030
Ver. 5.2
603
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[4]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Fig. 5-031
4. Removing the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly.
[1]
[2]
Fig. 5-032
(2) Remove the Door Shaft [3] in the direction of the
arrow, and draw out towards the front of the
Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly [4].
[4]
[3]
Fig. 5-033
Ver. 5.2
604
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Fig. 5-034
5. Removing Upper Delivery Guide Assembly.
(1) Remove the Grate-Shaped Lower Guide.
(See Fig. 5-010.)
(2) Remove 2 Screws [1] and Ground Lead [2], and
remove the Upper Delivery Guide Assembly [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
Fig. 5-035
6. Removing the PCB Cover.
[1]
[2]
[1]
Fig. 5-036
Ver. 5.2
605
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[1]
[2]
Fig. 5-037
(10) Remove Harness Stop [3] and Harness Lead [4].
[4]
[3]
Fig. 5-038
(11) Remove 1 Screw [5].
[5]
Fig. 5-039
Ver. 5.2
606
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[6]
[6]
[7]
Fig. 5-040
Caution:
When removing the Saddle Unit from the Finisher
Unit Body, prevent the Timing Belt [8] from
catching on the Communications Cable Bracket
[9].
[8]
[9]
Fig. 5-041
Ver. 5.2
607
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 5-042
(6) Disconnect 2 Connectors [2], remove 3 Screws
[3], and remove the Paper Pushing Motor Mount
[4].
[4]
[2]
[2]
[3]
Fig. 5-043
(7) Remove the Tension Springs (front [5], rear [6]).
[5]
Fig. 5-044
[6]
Fig. 5-045
Ver. 5.2
608
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[9]
[7]
[8]
Fig. 5-046
(9) Remove 2 C-Rings [10], and remove the 2 Gears
[11] on the front.
[11]
[10]
Fig. 5-047
(10) Remove 2 Bearings [12].
[12]
Fig. 5-048
[16]
[14]
[14]
[15]
[13]
Fig. 5-049
Ver. 5.2
609
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[1]
Fig. 5-050
4. Removing the Stitcher Mount Unit.
(1) Remove the Front Inside Cover.
(See Fig. 5-032.)
(2) Remove 1 E-Ring [1], Roller [2], and Shaft [3].
[2] [1]
[3]
Fig. 5-051
(3) Pull out the Stitcher Mount Unit [4] to the front.
[4]
Fig. 5-052
Ver. 5.2
610
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[1]
[2]
Fig. 5-053
(6) Remove the Saddle Stitch Positioning Tool [3]
from the back of the Cover.
[3]
Fig. 5-054
(7) If you must adjust the Front Saddle Stitch,
remove the Center Guide Plate [5] and Front
Guide Plate [4] (one screw each). If you must
adjust the Rear Saddle Stitch, remove the
Center Guide Plate [5] and the Rear Guide Plate
[6] (one screw each).
[6]
[5]
[4]
Fig. 5-055
[9]
[8]
[7]
Fig. 5-056
Ver. 5.2
611
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(9) Insert the Tool [10] into the Staple Slot of the
Saddle Stitch [9].
[10]
[9]
Fig. 5-057
(10) Shift down the Saddle Stitch, and turn the Saddle
Stitch Gear so that the boss on the Tool [11] and
the recess of the Mount Match. Then, tighten the
Screws [12] on the Mount to fix them in place.
[11]
[12]
Fig. 5-058
Ver. 5.2
612
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[3]
[6]
[1]
[4]
[5]
Fig. 5-059
7. Removing the No. 1 and No. 2 Paper Deflecting Plates.
[1]
[2]
Fig. 5-060
[3]
Fig. 5-061
Ver. 5.2
613
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.5.2.3. PCBs
1. Removing the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
Fig. 5-062
[2]
Upper
Cover 2
[4]
Right Guide
Assembly (5)
Front
Door [3]
Fig. 5-063
1. Removing the Right Guide Assembly.
(1) Remove 5 Screws [1], and remove the Right
Guide Assembly [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
Fig. 5-064
Ver. 5.2
614
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[4]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
Fig. 5-065
[3]
[2]
Fig. 5-066
2. Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor.
[2]
[1]
[3]
Fig. 5-067
Ver. 5.2
615
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3]
Fig. 5-068
Caution:
Exercise care as the Punch Slide Unit opens when
it is removed.
If necessary, perform operations with the Punch
Slide unit open.
(1) Remove the Right Guide Assembly.
(See Fig. 5-065.)
(2) Remove the Upper Cover. (See Fig. 5-066.)
(3) Remove the Photosensor PCB. (See Fig. 5-078.)
(4) Hold the 2 Lock-type Tie Wraps [1] between your
fingers to remove. (Exercise care not to cut the
Tie Wraps when removing.)
(5) Disconnect 3 Connectors [2].
(6) Remove Harness Lead [4] from the 3 Harness
Stops [3].
(7) Remove the E-Ring [5], and Puncher Spring [6].
[6]
[5]
Fig. 5-069
Ver. 5.2
616
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[8]
[7]
Fig. 5-070
(9) Disconnect the Connector [9], and remove 1
Screw [10] and Horizontal Registration Home
Position Sensor [11].
[11]
[10]
[9]
Fig. 5-071
(10) Remove 2 Screws [12] and Sensor Base [13].
[12]
[13]
[12]
Fig. 5-072
Ver. 5.2
617
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[14]
Fig. 5-073
(12) Rotate the Gear [7] in the direction of the arrow,
and slide the Punch Slide Unit Assembly [8]
away from you.
[8]
[7]
Fig. 5-074
(13) Lift up the front side of the Punch Slide Unit
Assembly, and then slide the Unit in the direction
of the arrow to remove.
Fig. 5-075
Ver. 5.2
618
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.5.3.3. PCBs
1. Removing the LED PCB.
[2]
[1]
Fig. 5-076
2. Removing the Photosensor PCB.
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Fig. 5-077
3. Removing the Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB Unit.
[3]
[2]
[1]
Fig. 5-078
Ver. 5.2
619
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
Fig. 5-079
Ver. 5.2
620
JAN 2006
11.1.6.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Preventive Maintenance
11.1.6.2. PM Items
Some of the parts of the Machine may need to be replaced once or more times because of wear or tear
during the machines warranty period. Replace them as necessary.
Name
Parts No.
Qty.
Estimated Life
Stapler
FB2-9999-000
500,000 operations
Feed belt
Paddle
2
2
4
1,000,000 copies
FB4-6656-000
FG5-8178-000
FB4-5825-000
1,000,000 copies
Remarks
5,000 operations /
cartridge
Paddle unit
Paddle rubber only
Name
Stitch
Parts No.
FB3-7860-000
Qty.
2
Estimated Life
200,000 operations
Remarks
2,000 operations /
cartridge
Ver. 5.2
Name
Parts No.
FG6-6156-000
Punch Slide Unit FG6-6157-000
FG6-6158-000
Qty.
1
Remarks
2-hole (Punch Unit)
1,000,000 operations 2-/3-hole (Punch Unit)
4-hole (Punch Unit)
621
Estimated Life
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.6.3. PM Interval
Item
Interval
Feed Belt
When preventive
Paddle
maintenance is performed
Transmission Sensor on the copier.
(Punch Unit) (option)
Ver. 5.2
622
Work
Remarks
Use moist cloth
Cleaning
Use dry cloth
JAN 2006
11.1.7.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Troubleshooting
11.1.7.1. Adjustments
11.1.7.1.1. Electrical System (finisher unit)
1. Adjusting the Height Sensor (PS1)
Perform the following adjustments whenever you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB or the
Height Sensor (PS1).
a. Set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON
Fig. 7-001
b. Make sure that there is no unwanted paper on the Trays.
c. Press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB.
This causes the Finisher to execute automatic adjustment, in which the Tray Unit will shift Tray 1,
and Tray 2 in sequence.
At the end of adjustment, Trays will return to their home positions.
During adjustment, LED1 flashes. At the end of adjustment, LED1 turns and remains ON.
If automatic adjustment fails, the mechanism stops while the Tray in question is being adjusted. (At
the same time, LED1 turns OFF.)
d. Shift all bits on SW3 to OFF, and turn OFF the Copier once.
2. Adjusting the Alignment Position
If you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB or if an alignment fault occurs, adjust as follows.
Performing the steps will affect all paper sizes.
a. Remove the Rear Cover of the Finisher Unit.
b. Set SW3 of the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON
Fig. 7-002
c. If you are using A4 paper, press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB. If you are using LTR paper,
press SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB.
Pressing SW1 or 2 will open the Swing Guide and cause the Alignment Plate to move to A4/LTR
positions.
d. Place 10 sheets of A4/LTR paper between the Alignment Plate and the Guide Plate, butting them
against the stoppers.
e. Press SW1 or SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB, and butt the Alignment Plate against the sheets.
Pressing SW1 will shift the Alignment Plate to the front in 0.35 mm increments.
Pressing SW2 will shift the Alignment Plate to the rear in 0.35 mm increments.
Ver. 5.2
623
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Alignment Plate
Shift by SW2
A4/LTR Paper
Shift by SW1
Stopper
Stopper
Guide Plate
Fig. 7-003
f. Press SW1 and SW2 simultaneously to store the adjustment value.
(This will lower the Swinging Guide.)
g. Shift all bits of SW3 to OFF, and install the Rear Cover of the Finisher Unit.
3. Adjusting the Staple Position (stapler movement range)
Adjust as follows if you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB. Performing the steps will affect all
paper sizes and all stapling positions.
a. Remove the Rear Cover from the Finisher Unit.
b. Set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON
Fig. 7-004
c. If you are using A4 paper, press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB. If you are using LTR paper,
press SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB.
Pressing SW1 or 2 will open the Swing Guide and cause the feed belt to rotate.
d. Within 5 sec. after pressing the Switch, place one sheet of A4/LTR paper between the Alignment
Plate and the Guide Plate, butting it against the stoppers.
When the Finisher detects the paper, it will lower the Swing Guide and execute stapling (rear, 1position). Take out the stapled paper manually as delivery will not be executed.
Ver. 5.2
624
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Alignment Stapler
Plate
Stopper
Stopper
Guide Plate
Fig. 7-005
e. If the stapling position is correct, set all bits on SW3 to OFF to end the adjustments. If you need to
change the stapling position, on the other hand, go to the next step.
f. To suit the position of the staple on the paper, press SW1 or SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB as
many times as necessary.
Pressing SW1 will shift the stapling position to the front in 0.3 mm increments.
Pressing SW2 will shift the stapling position to the rear in 0.3 mm increments.
2902mm (A4)/
2732mm (LTR)
Staple
Paper
Shift by
SW2
Shift by
SW1 Feeding direction
Fig. 7-006
g. Press SW1 and SW2 simultaneously.
This will open the Swing Guide, and cause the feed belt to rotate. Placement of one sheet of A4/
LTR paper will cause the Finisher to start stapling.
h. Check the stapling position. If good, set all bits of SW3 to OFF. If re-adjustments are necessary, go
back to step f).
Caution:
The settings held by the Finisher Controller PCB are changed as soon as SW1 or SW2 is
pressed. As such, to recover the previous settings after the press, you must press the other of
the two Switches as many times as you pressed previously.
Ver. 5.2
625
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Winding
amount
1st sheet
Fig. 7-007
a. Set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON
Fig. 7-008
b. Turn the Copier OFF then back ON again.
c. Set the mode setting on the Copier to 1 and the number of originals (A4 or LTR) to 3 in the staple
mode.
d. Press the copy start key.
Copying starts, three sheets for the first copy are output as a stack on the Staple Tray, and copying
stops with the copies held at the Exit Roller.
e. Remove the stack of sheets from the Finisher exit taking care to prevent the offset of the output
sheets from changing.
Ver. 5.2
626
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
f. Measure the winding amount (shift) of the stack of sheets, and compare this amount with the
standard amounts.
This amount should be measured at the center of the paper leading edge.
Fig. 7-009
g. If the amount is within the standard, turn the Copier OFF, and then set all bits of SW3 to OFF. If the
amount is outside the standard, perform the following.
h. Turn the Copier OFF, and set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated. If EEPROM (Q2) on
the Finisher Controller PCB has been replaced, proceed to step j).
ON
Fig. 7-010
i. Turn the Copier ON, and then press SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB.
The current setting values are displayed at LED1.
Adjustment value 0
Adjustment value +N
Adjustment value N
Fig. 7-011
Ver. 5.2
627
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Paper exit
direction
3rd sheet
2nd sheet
1st sheet
Movement of
direction of
1st sheet by SW2
Movement of
direction of
1st sheet by SW1
Fig. 7-012
l. Repeat steps a. though f. twice. Check that the winding amount is within the standard in both times.
m. Turn the Copier OFF, and set all bits of SW3 to OFF.
This completes the adjustment.
5. Setting the Upward Curling Sheet Mode
(1) Outline
Upward curling of sheets stacked on the Tray sometimes increases depending on the state of the
copy paper. If this happens, the stacked sheets are pushed out by subsequent output sheets. This
sometimes increases the alignment deviation.
See the stacking example below.
Subsequent output
sheets contact stacked
sheets
Subsequent output
sheets contact stacked
sheets.
Fig. 7-013
If this happens:
a. Turn over the paper in the Paper Tray and load the paper again.
If upward curling is larger than before the paper was loaded again, return the paper in the Paper
Tray to its original orientation.
From here on, too, if upward curling is excessive, resulting in stacked sheets being pushed out
by subsequent output sheets, try setting the upward curling sheet mode as indicated.
Ver. 5.2
628
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 7-014
c. Turn the copier ON.
When the Machine enters the upward curling sheet mode, the stop position of the Stacking Tray
is lowered by about 15 mm when stack sheets are output to prevent subsequent output sheets
from catching on the sheets on the Stacking Tray.
After setting this mode, if sheets with little curling or downward curling sheets are output and
stacked, the Stacking Tray is lowered too far. For this reason, sheets are sometimes stacked
away from the stacking wall. (Fig 7-015). Set this mode after carefully checking the type of paper
used by the customer.
Fig. 7-015
6. Setting the Downward Curling Sheet Mode
(1) Outline
Downward curling of sheets stacked on the tray sometimes increases depending on the state of the
copy paper, If this happens, the sheets are sometimes stacked away from the stacking wall when
they are output and stacked on the Stacking Tray.
See the stacking example below.
Fig. 7-016
Ver. 5.2
629
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
If this happens:
a. Turn over the paper in the Paper Tray and load the paper again.
If downward curling is larger than before the paper was loaded again, return the paper in the
Paper Tray to its original orientation.
From here on, too, if downward curling is excessive, resulting in output sheets being stacked
incorrectly, try setting the downward curling sheet mode as indicated.
(2) Setting the downward curling sheet mode
a. Turn the Copier OFF.
b. Set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON
Fig. 7-017
c. Turn the Copier ON.
When the Machine enters the downward curling sheet mode, the stop position of the Stacking
Tray is raised by about 10mm when stack sheets are output so that output sheets are stacked
without being away from the stacking wall.
After setting this mode, if sheets with little curling or upward curling sheets are output and
stacked, the stacking tray is raised too far. For this reason, sheets are stacked pressed out by
subsequent output sheets. (Fig. 7-018). Set this mode after carefully checking the type of paper
used by the customer.
Fig. 7-018
Ver. 5.2
630
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 7-019
b. Remove the Rear Cover of the Saddle Stitch Unit, and tape the actuator of the Inlet Cover Open
Sensor (PI9S) and the Inlet Cover Open Detection Switch (MS1S) of the Saddle Stitch Unit in place.
c. Press SW2 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB so that the Feed Motor (M1S) starts to rotate.
d. Open the Inlet Cover, and insert two sheets of A3 or LDR paper. (Push them in by hand until the
leading edge of the sheets butts against the Paper Positioning Plate.)
Ledger / A3 Paper
Insert direction
Fig. 7-020
Ver. 5.2
631
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Sheets
Mark
Fig. 7-021
e. Close the Inlet Door while holding it down with your hand.
f. Press SW2 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB.
The Saddle Stitch Unit will stitch the sheets, and fold and deliver the stack automatically.
g. Measure the distance (L) between the stitching position and the folding position. Then, perform
positive width adjustment or negative width adjustment to suit the relationship between the
stitching position and the folding position.
If the stitching position is below the folding position, perform positive width adjustment.
If the stitching position is above the folding position, perform negative width adjustment.
Positive Width
Adjustment
Negative Width
Adjustment
Folding position
Stitching position
Stitching position
Folding position
Unit: mm
Example: If L is 1 mm, provide +1 mm.
Unit: mm
Example: If L is 0.5 mm, provide -0.5 mm.
Fig. 7-022
h. Change the settings of bits 6 through 8 on DIPSW1 referring to Table 7-001 below.
If the width adjustment is 0,
The stitching position and the folding position match, requiring no change.
If for positive width adjustment,
Set DIPSW1 so that the difference resulting from subtraction of the interval from the appropriate
setting in Table 7-001 is provided.
For instance, if the DIPSW1 is currently set to +2 and the interval is +1 mm, set DIPSW1 to reflect
2.
If for negative width adjustment
Set DIPSW1 so that the sum resulting from addition of the interval from the appropriate setting is
provided.
For instance, if the DIPSW1 is currently set to 1 and the interval is +0.5 mm, set DIPSW1 to reflect
+1.
Ver. 5.2
632
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Settings
(in units of 0.5 mm)
+3
+2
+1
0
-1
-2
-3
Bit 7
OFF
Bit 8
OFF
Table 7-002
Fig. 7-024
c. Press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB.
Pressing this Switch automatically adjusts sensor output.
d. Set all bits on DIPSW2 to OFF.
2. Registering the Number of Punch Holes
This operation registers which Punch Unit is attached to the IC on the Punch Driver PCB so that the
Punch Unit can be identified by the Finisher. For this reason, this operation must be performed when
the Punch Driver PCB has been replaced. This operation, however, is not necessary on the Japanese
market as the 2-Hole Puncher is already registered as the default for new service parts.
The following describes a reference example of how to register the number of punch holes.
a. Remove the Rear Cover of the Finisher Unit.
b. Set bits 1 through 6 of DIPSW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON
Fig. 7-025
c. Set bits 7 and 8 on DIPSW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB to match the number of punch holes of
Ver. 5.2
633
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Table 7-003
As the number of punch holes on domestic models is two, bits 7 and 8 of DIPSW3 are both OFF.
Settings for overseas models are provided for reference.
d. Press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB. Press SW2 when setting a 2-/3- hole model (Punch
Unit-B1). Pressing this switch registers the number of punch holes to the Punch Driver PCB.
e. Set all bits on DIPSW3 to OFF.
3. Checking the Sensitivity Level of the Transmission Sensor
How dirty the Transmission Sensor (Photosensor PCB/LED PCB) can be checked by the number of
times that LED1 on the Finisher Controller PCB lights. For this reason, how dirty the Transmission
Sensor is serves as a guide for when to perform cleaning during periodic maintenance.
a. Remove the Rear Cover of the Finisher Unit.
b. Set bits 1 through 6 of DIPSW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON
Fig. 7-026
c. Press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB.
Pressing this Switch lights LED1 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated in Table 7-003 so that
you can check the sensitivity level of the Transmission Sensor.
Sensitivity Level
Sensor not dirty
Sensor slightly dirty
Sensor dirty
Table 7-004
d. Set all bits of DIPSW3 of OFF.
Ver. 5.2
634
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PI18
PI17
PS1
PI10
PI14
PI20
PI6
PI3
PI4
PI8
PI19
PI16
PI11
PI15
PI1
PI9
PI12
PI5
PI21
PI22
PI7
Fig. 7-027
Ver. 5.2
635
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Name
Photo-interrupter
Height Sensor
Notation
PI1
PI3
PI4
PI5
PI6
PI7
PI8
PI10
PI11
PI12
PI14
PI15
PI16
PI17
PI18
PI19
PI9
PI20
PI21
PI22
PS1
Function
Detects paper in the inlet area
Detects paper in the delivery area
Detects paper on the Stapling Tray
Detects the state (open) of the Shutter
Detects alignment plate at home position
Detects the stapler at home position
Detects the tray at home position
Detects delivery motor clock pulses
Detects paper on Tray 1
Detects paper on Tray 2
Detects paper in the buffer path
Detects the finisher joint
Detects the state (open) of the Door
Detects paper at the inlet to the buffer path
Detects the state (open) of the Swing Guide
Detects tray lift motor clock pulses 1 (on sensor PCB)
Detects tray lift motor clock pulses 2 (on sensor PCB)
Detects swing guide clock
Detects edging of staples (inside stapler)
Detects staple drive home position (inside stapler)
Detects the height of the stack on the tray
Table. 7-005
Ver. 5.2
636
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Micro Switches
MS5
MS2
MS6
MS3
MS1
MS4
MS8
Fig. 7-028
Name
Micro Switches
Notation
Function
MS1
Detects the state (open) of the front door and the upper
door
MS2
Detects the state (closed) of the swing guide 1
MS3
Detects the safety range
MS4
Detects the state (closed) of the shutter
MS5
Detects the tray at the upper limit
MS6
Detects the state (closed) of the swing guide 2
MS8
Detects the presence/absence of staples (inside stapler)
Table 7-006
Ver. 5.2
637
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Motors
M8
M7
M1
M9
M2
M3
M5
M4
M6
Fig. 7-029
Name
Motor
Notation
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
Function
First Feed motor
Delivery motor
Alignment motor
Stapler shift motor
Tray lift motor
Staple motor
Swing motor
Second feed motor
Inlet feed motor
Table 7-007
Ver. 5.2
638
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. Solenoids
SL2
SL5
SL3
SL7
SL1
SL6
Fig. 7-030
Name
Solenoid
Notation
SL1
SL2
SL3
SL5
SL6
SL7
Function
Flapper solenoid
Buffer inlet solenoid
Buffer outlet solenoid
Paddle solenoid
Escape solenoid
Belt escape solenoid
Table 7-008
Ver. 5.2
639
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5. PCBs
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
Fig. 7-031
Reference
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Name
Finisher Controller PCB
Relay PCB 4
Relay PCB 3
Sensor PCB
Tabl3 7-009
Ver. 5.2
640
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PI18S
PI19S
PI16S
PI20S
PI9S
PI14S
PI21S
PI2S
PI15S
PI11S
PI17S
PI6S
PI12S
PI13S
PI5S
PI8S
PI3S
PI7S
PI4S
PI1S
Fig. 7-032
Ver. 5.2
641
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Name
Photo-interrupter
Notation
PI1S
PI2S
PI3S
PI4S
PI5S
PI6S
PI7S
PI8S
PI9S
PI11S
PI12S
PI13S
PI14S
PI15S
PI16S
PI17S
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
PI21S
Function
Detects clock pulses from the paper pushing plate motor
Detects the state (open) of the front door
Detects the state (open) of the delivery cover
Detects clock pulses from the paper folding motor
Detects the alignment plates at home position
Detects paper on the tray
Detects paper positioning plate at home position
Detects paper on the paper positioning plate
Detects the state (open) of the inlet cover
Detects paper in the delivery area
Detects the phase of the crescent roller
Detects the guide at home position
Detects the paper pushing plate at home position
Detects the paper pushing plate at top position
Detects the state (in) of the stitcher unit
Detects paper in the vertical path
Detects paper (No.1; on paper sensor PCB)
Detects paper (No. 2; on paper sensor PCB)
Detects paper (No. 3; on paper sensor PCB)
Detects the paper folding at home position
Table 7-010
Ver. 5.2
642
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Micro Switches
MS1S
MS4,5S
MS6,7S
MS2S
MS3S
Fig. 7-033
Name
Micro Switches
Notation
MS1S
MS2S
MS3S
MS4S
MS5S
MS6S
MS7S
Function
Detects the state (open) of the inlet door
Detects the state (open) of the front door
Detects the state (open) of the delivery door
Detects the presence of staples (rear)
Detects stitching home position (rear)
Detects the presence of staples (front)
Detects stitching home position (front)
Table 7-011
Ver. 5.2
643
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Motors
M6S
M7S
M4S
M3S
M1S
M5S
M2S
M8S
Fig. 7-034
Name
Motor
Notation
M1S
M2S
M3S
M4S
M5S
M6S
M7S
M8S
Function
Feed Motor
Paper Folding Motor
Guide Motor
Paper Positioning Plate Motor
Alignment Motor
Stitcher Motor (rear)
Stitcher Motor (front)
Paper Pushing Plate Motor
Table 7-012
Ver. 5.2
644
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. Solenoids
SL1S
SL2S
SL4S
Fig. 7-035
Name
Solenoid
Notation
Function
SL1S
No. 1 Paper Deflecting Plate Solenoid
SL2S
No. 2 Paper Deflecting Plate Solenoid
SL4S
Feed Plate Contact Solenoid
Table 7-013
Ver. 5.2
645
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5. PCBs
[2]
[1]
Fig. 7-036
Reference
[1]
Saddle Stitch Controller PCB
[2]
Paper Sensor PCB
Name
Table 7-014
Ver. 5.2
646
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PI2P
PI3P
PI1P
Fig. 7-037
Name
Photo-interrupter
Notation
Function
PI1P
Horizontal registration home position detection
PI2P
Punch motor clock detection
PI3P
Punch home position detection
Table 7-015
Ver. 5.2
647
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Micro Switches
MS1P
MS2P
Fig. 7-038
Name
Micro Switches
Notation
Function
MS1P
Upper door open detection
MS2P
Front door open detection
Table 7-016
Ver. 5.2
648
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Motors
M1P
M2P
Fig. 7-039
Name
Motor
Notation
Function
M1P
Punch Motor
M2P
Horizontal Registration Motor
Table 7-017
Ver. 5.2
649
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. PCBs
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
Fig. 7-040
Reference
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Name
Punch Driver PCB
Photosensor PCB
LED PCB
Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB
Fig. 7-018
Ver. 5.2
650
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
This section discusses the LEDs and check pins used in the Machine that are needed in the field.
Caution:
The VRs and check pins not discussed in this section are for factory use only. Making adjustments and
checks using these will require special tools and instruments and adjustments must be to high accuracy.
Do not touch them in the field.
1. Finisher Controller PCB
11
11
8 1
J3
J12 11
12 11
7 1
SW1
41
J6
J14
J2
11
6
J16
J9 11
SW2
J17
1
1
J27
LED1
LED2
1
14
J21
14
SW3
1
1
4
J25
1
J11
10
1
CB1
J1
1 2
J19
J7
15
J5
J10
6
1 15
2 J19
Fig. 7-041
Switch
SW1
SW2
SW3
Function
Adjust the height sensor / alignment plate position / stapling position and move
the trays up, etc.
Adjust the alignment plate position / staple position and move the trays down, etc.
Adjust the height sensor / alignment plate position and stapling position, etc.
Table 7-019
Ver. 5.2
651
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
J18
1
J13
3 1
J2
7
J11
1
10
J7
J10
8
1
1
10
J9
J4
1
15
CB1
1
J6
2
1
J1
J8
14
J15
1
J5
1
J12
1
Fig. 7-042
Switch
DIPSW1
(bits 1-2)
DIPSW1
(bits 6-8)
SW2
Function
Starts correction of discrepancy between stitching position and folding position.
Stores corrected settings for stapling position and folding position.
Starts correction of discrepancy between stitching position and folding position.
Table 7-020
Ver. 5.2
652
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.7.3. Troubleshooting
11.1.7.3.1. Finisher Unit
Yes
/ No
Yes End.
Step
Checks
Finisher Controller
PCB, Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Wiring
Power Supply
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Action
Correct it.
Power Supply
Connector
Adjustment
Ver. 5.2
Checks
Turn the Copier OFF then ON.
Is the problem corrected?
Is the wiring between the Finisher
Controller PCB and the sensors
normal?
Measure the voltage between J6-2(+)
and J6-4(-) on the Finisher Controller
PCB. Is it 5 VDC?
Is J6 on the Finisher Controller PCB,
J114 on the height sensor, or the relay
connector J212 disconnected?
Measure the voltage between J6-2(+)
and J6-4(-) on the Finisher Controller
PCB. Is it 5 VDC?
653
Yes
/ No
Yes End.
Action
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Checks
Turn the Copier OFF then ON. Is the
problem corrected?
Replace the Finisher Controller PCB
and punch driver PCB. Is the problem
corrected?
Yes
/ No
Yes End.
Action
Yes End.
Yes
Action
/ No
Turn the delivery roller by hand. Does it No Correct mechanical
turn smoothly?
operation.
Check the delivery clock sensor. Is the
No Replace the sensor.
sensor normal?
Does the voltage between J11-4 and
No Replace the Finisher
J11-5 on the Finisher Controller PCB
Controller PCB.
change to 24 VDC as soon as the
Yes Check the wiring from the
delivery motor starts to rotate?
motor to the controller PCB.
If normal, replace the motor.
Checks
Checks
Yes
Action
/ No
No Replace the sensor.
Ver. 5.2
Checks
Is the wiring between the stapler and
the Finisher Controller PCB normal?
Replace the stapler. Is the problem
corrected?
654
Yes
Action
/ No
No Correct the wiring.
Yes End.
No Replace the Finisher
Controller PCB.
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Checks
Yes
Action
/ No
No Replace the sensor.
No Correct the wiring.
Checks
Ver. 5.2
Yes
Action
/ No
No Correct the swing
mechanism.
No Replace the microswitch.
No Correct mechanical
operation.
Yes Replace the Finisher
Controller PCB.
Does the swing motor rotate in reverse No Replace the motor.
at a specific timing?
Yes Replace the Finisher
Controller PCB.
Is the swing guide open sensor normal? No Replace the sensor.
Check the safety range switch. Is the
No Replace the switch.
switch normal?
Is the safety range detection switch
No Correct mechanical
pressed correctly?
operation.
Check the swing guide clock sensor. Is No Replace the sensor.
the sensor normal?
Does the voltage of the swing motor
No Replace the Finisher
between J11-6 and -7 on the Finisher
Controller PCB.
Controller PCB reach 24 V at a specific Yes Check the wiring from the
rotation timing?
motor to the Finisher
Controller PCB. If normal,
replace the motor.
655
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
Yes
Action
/ No
Check the tray home position sensor. Is No Replace the sensor.
it normal?
Check the tray lift mechanism. Is the
No Correct the mechanism.
mechanism normal?
Is the tray lift motor supplied with 24
No Replace the Finisher
VDC by the Finisher Controller PCB as
Controller PCB.
soon as the tray is driven?
Check the wiring from the finisher
No Correct the wiring.
controller PCB to the tray lift motor. Is
Yes Replace the tray lift motor.
the wiring normal?
Is the tray at the tray upper limit switch? Yes Lower the tray.
Check the tray upper limit switch. Is the No Replace the switch.
switch normal?
Check the wiring from the Finisher
No Correct the wiring.
Controller PCB to the tray upper limit
Yes Replace the Finisher
switch. Is the wiring normal?
Controller PCB.
Does the tray move up / down?
No Go to a. on the left.
Yes Go to c. on the left.
a. Is the motor supplied with power by
Yes Go to b. on the left.
the Finisher Controller PCB as soon
No Replace the Finisher
as the tray moves up / down?
Controller PCB.
b. Is there a fault in the tray lift
Yes Correct the tray lift
mechanism?
mechanism.
No Replace the tray lift motor.
c. Is the tray lift motor clock sensor 1/2 No Replace the sensor PCB.
normal?
Yes Replace the Finisher
Controller PCB.
Checks
656
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Shutter Open
Detection Sensor
(PI5)
Finisher Controller
PCB
Shutter Closed
Detection Switch
(MS4)
Safety Range Switch
(MS3)
Finisher Controller
PCB
Ver. 5.2
Yes
Action
/ No
Does the second feed motor in reverse No Replace the second feed
at a specific timing?
motor or the Finisher
Controller PCB.
Are the shutter and the shutter upper /
No Engage them correctly.
lower bar engaged correctly?
Turn the feed roller 2 in reverse by
No Correct mechanism from
hand. Does the shutter upper / lower
the shutter upper/lower bar
bar move up / down?
to the gear of the feed roller
2.
Is the shutter open detection sensor
No Replace the sensor.
normal?
Checks
657
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Yes
Action
/ No
Check the paper positioning plate home No Replace the sensor.
position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Checks
Do the paper positioning plates operate Yes Replace the Saddle Stitch
at a specific timing?
Controller PCB.
No Check the positioning plate
drive mechanism. If a fault
is found, correct it.
Otherwise, go to step 3.
Replace the paper positioning plate Yes End.
motor. Is the problem corrected?
No Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB.
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Ver. 5.2
Checks
Check the paper folding motor clock
sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Check the paper folding home position
sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Yes
Action
/ No
No Replace the sensor.
No Replace the sensor.
Does the paper folding motor operate at Yes Replace the Saddle Stitch
a specific timing?
Controller PCB.
No Check the paper folding
roller drive mechanism. If a
fault is found, correct it.
Otherwise, go to step 4.
Replace the paper folding motor. Is the Yes End.
problem corrected?
No Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB.
658
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Yes
Action
/ No
Guide Home Position Check the guide home position sensor. No Replace the sensor.
Sensor (PI13S)
Is the sensor normal?
Saddle Stitch
Does the guide motor operate at a
Yes Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
specific timing?
Controller PCB.
Guide Motor (M3S)
No Check the guide plate drive
mechanism. If a fault is
found, correct it. Otherwise,
go to step 3.
Saddle Stitch
Replace the guide motor. Is the problem Yes End.
Controller PCB
corrected?
No Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB.
Cause
Checks
Checks
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Yes
Action
/ No
No Replace the sensor.
Checks
Are the front (E7-46) and rear (E7-45)
stitchers and bases installed correctly?
Is the stitching home position switch of
the front and the rear stitchers normal?
Do the front and the rear stitchers
operate at a specific timing?
Stitcher Motor
(M7S / M6S)
Ver. 5.2
659
Yes
Action
/ No
No Install them correctly.
No Replace the front or rear
stitcher.
Yes Check the wiring between
the stitcher and the Saddle
Stitch Controller PCB. If
normal, replace the
controller PCB.
No Replace the front or the rear
stitcher.
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB
Paper Pushing Top
Position Sensor
(PI15S)
Paper Pushing Plate
Motor Clock Sensor
(PI1S)
Checks
Check the paper pushing plate home
position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Yes
Action
/ No
No Replace the sensor.
Checks
Yes
Action
/ No
No Connect the connectors.
Ver. 5.2
660
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Checks
Switch Actuator
Yes
Action
/ No
No Correct the mechanism.
Ver. 5.2
661
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Yes
Action
/ No
Punch Motor Clock
Check the punch motor clock sensor. Is No Replace the sensor.
Sensor (PI2P)
the sensor normal?
Punch Home Position Check the punch home position sensor. No Replace the sensor.
Sensor (PI3P)
Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
Is the wiring between the punch home
No Correct the wiring.
position sensor and the Finisher
Controller PCB normal?
Punch Mechanism
Is there any trouble with the punch
Yes Correct the punch
mechanism?
mechanism.
Punch Motor (M1P)
No Replace the punch motor.
Punch Driver PCB
Replace the punch driver PCB. Is the
No Replace the Finisher
problem corrected?
Controller PCB.
Yes End.
Cause
Checks
Horizontal
Registration
Mechanism
Horizontal
Registration Motor
(M2P)
Punch Driver PCB
Ver. 5.2
Checks
Check the horizontal registration home
position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Yes
Action
/ No
No Replace the sensor.
662
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The CPU (Q1) on the machines Finisher Controller PCB or on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB is equipped
with a self diagnosis function. This function runs a check at programmed times and sends an error code to
the copier upon detection of any detected abnormalities.
E7-26
E7-21
E7-22
E7-23
E7-24
Ver. 5.2
Error Type
Description
Communication Error
663
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Error
Code
E7-48
E7-27
E7-20
Ver. 5.2
Error Type
Description
664
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
E7-42
E7-43
Error Type
Description
E7-44
E7-45
E7-46
Ver. 5.2
665
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Error
Code
E7-47
E7-49
E7-50
Error Type
Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8S)
Paper Pushing Plate Home Position
Sensor (PI4S)
Ver. 5.2
Description
The paper pushing plate home position sensor does
not turn ON even when the paper pushing plate
motor has been driven for 0.3 sec or more.
The paper pushing plate home position sensor does
not turn OFF even when the paper pushing plate
motor has been driven for 80 msec or more.
The paper pushing plate top position sensor does
not turn OFF even after the paper pushing plate
motor has been driven for 80 msec or more.
The number of clock pulses for the paper pushing
plate motor clock sensor drops below a specific
value.
The paper pushing plate top position sensor does
not turn ON when the paper pushing plate motor has
been driven for 0.3 sec or more.
The connector of the guide home position sensor is
identified as being disconnected.
The connector of the paper pushing plate home
position sensor is identified as being disconnected.
The connector of the paper pushing plate top
position sensor is identified as being disconnected.
After any of the following three photo-interrupters
used for the covers has found that its respective
door is closed, the inlet door switch is identified as
being open as soon as copying status or 1 sec or
more after the start of the copier initial rotation.
Inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
Front door open / closed sensor (PI2S)
Delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
(The front door switch (MS2S) or the delivery door
switch (MS3S) may be also open.)
After any of the following three photo-interrupters
used for the covers has found that its respective
door is closed, the front door switch is identified as
being open as soon as copying status or 1 sec or
more after the start of the copier initial rotation.
Inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
Front door open / closed sensor (PI2S)
Delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
(The delivery door switch (MS3S) may be also
open.)
After any of the following three photo-interrupters
used for the covers has found that its respective
door is closed, the delivery door switch is identified
as being open as soon as copying status or 1 sec or
more after the start of the copier initial rotation.
Inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
Front door open / closed sensor (PI2S)
Delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
666
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
E7-29
Ver. 5.2
Error Type
Punch Motor (M1P)
Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI2P)
Punch Home Position Sensor (PI3P)
Description
The punch motor clock sensor cannot detect the
clock pulse within 100 ms.
The puncher does not leave the punch home
position sensor even after the punch motor has
operated for 200 ms.
The puncher does not return to the punch home
position sensor even after the punch motor has
operated for 200 ms.
The target number of clock pulses cannot be
obtained from the punch motor clock sensor at start
of operation.
The puncher does not leave the horizontal
registration home position even after the horizontal
registration motor has operated for 4 sec.
The puncher does not return to the horizontal
registration home position even after the horizontal
registration motor has operated for 4 sec.
667
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Item
Finisher / Inverting Unit / Inverting Shift Tray (option) open
Finisher Copy Paper removal
Staple Cover / Top Door open (option)
Finisher Punch Cover open
Finisher Saddle Unit paper removal
Finisher Saddle Unit Feed Cover open
Finisher Saddle Staple Unit is not installed
Finisher Saddle Unit Saddle Front Cover open
Finisher Saddle Unit Saddle Paper Exit Cover open
Finisher overflow
See Page
1. User Error
Code
Item
U4 Finisher Inverting Unit / Inverting Shift
Tray (option)
U11
Ver. 5.2
Check Points
1) Are the exit options installed correctly?
2) Exit options connector is shorted or broken.
3) Exit options connector is defective.
4) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
5) Finisher CPU PCB is defective.
6) LVPS connector is shorted or broken.
7) LVPS is defective.
8) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken.
9) CPU PCB is defective.
1) Copy paper is already in at least one bin.
2) Copy paper which is unsuitable size for stapler
use is in the bin.
3) There is a double feed from the duplex unit in the
bin.
4) Finisher paper detecting sensor connector is
shorted or broken.
5) Finisher paper detecting sensor is defective.
6) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
7) Finisher CPU PCB is defective.
8) LVPS connector is shorted or broken.
9) LVPS is defective.
10) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken.
11) CPU PCB is defective.
668
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Code
Item
U12 Staple Door / Top Door open
U30
U31
U32
Ver. 5.2
Check Points
1) Is the stapler door or top door closed correctly?
2) Stapler door or top door open/close sensor
connector is shorted or broken.
3) Stapler door or top door open close sensor is
defective.
4) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
5) Finisher CPU PCB is defective.
6) LVPS connector is shorted or broken.
7) LVPS is defective.
8) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken.
9) CPU PCB is defective.
1) Is the punch cover closed correctly?
2) Punch cover open/close sensor connector is
shorted or broken.
3) Punch cover open/close sensor is defective.
4) Punch unit CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
5) Punch unit CPU PCB is defective.
6) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
7) Finisher CPU PCB is defective.
8) LVPS connector is shorted or broken.
9) LVPS is defective.
10) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken.
11) CPU PCB is defective.
1) Copy paper is already in finisher saddle unit.
2) Copy paper which is unsuitable size is in saddle
unit.
3) Too many copy paper in saddle unit.
4) Finisher saddle unit paper detecting sensor
connector is shorted or broken.
5) Finisher saddle unit paper detecting sensor is
defective.
6) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
7) Finisher CPU PCB is defective.
8) LVPS connector is shorted or broken.
9) LVPS is defective.
10) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken.
1) Is the saddle unit feed cover closed correctly?
2) Saddle unit feed cover open / close sensor
connector is shorted or broken.
3) Saddle unit feed cover open / close sensor is
defective.
4) Saddle unit CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
5) Saddle unit CPU PCB is defective.
6) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
7) Finisher CPU PCB is defective.
8) LVPS connector is shorted or broken.
9) LVPS is defective.
10) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken.
11) CPU PCB is defective.
669
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Code
Item
U33 Finisher Saddle Staple Unit is not
installed
U34
U35
oF
Ver. 5.2
Check Points
1) Is the saddle staple unit installed properly?
2) Saddle staple unit storage sensor connector is
shorted or broken.
3) Saddle staple unit storage sensor is defective.
4) Saddle unit CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
5) Saddle unit CPU PCB is defective.
6) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
7) Finisher CPU PCB is defective.
8) LVPS connector is shorted or broken.
9) LVPS is defective.
10) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken.
Finisher Saddle Unit Saddle Front Cover
1) Is the saddle front cover closed correctly?
open
2) Saddle front cover open / close sensor connector
is shorted or broken.
3) Saddle front cover open / close sensor is
defective.
4) Saddle unit CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
5) Saddle unit CPU PCB is defective.
6) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
7) Finisher CPU PCB is defective.
8) LVPS connector is shorted or broken.
9) LVPS is defective.
10) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken.
Finisher Saddle Unit Saddle Paper Exit
1) Is the saddle paper exit cover closed correctly?
Cover open
2) Saddle paper exit cover open/close sensor
connector is shorted or broken.
3) Saddle paper exit cover open/close sensor is
defective.
4) Saddle unit CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
5) Saddle unit CPU PCB is defective.
6) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
7) Finisher CPU PCB is defective.
8) LVPS connector is shorted or broken.
9) LVPS is defective.
10) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken.
11) CPU PCB is defective.
Finisher over flow
Too many copies in the finisher bin.
The paper must be removed and press the finisher
mode key.
670
JAN 2006
11.1.8.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Appendix
Ver. 5.2
671
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
672
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
673
JAN 2006
674
3
2
1
1
2
3
SL7
PI11
PI12
PS1
MS1
PI16
SL1
Belt Escape
Solenoid
No. 1 Tray
Paper Sensor
No. 2 Tray
Paper Sensor
Height Sensor
Door Switch
Door Open
Sensor
Flapper
Solenoid
3
2
1
J12A-1
J12A-2
J12A-3
J12A-4
J12A-5
J12A-6
J14-12
J14-11
J14-10
J14-9
J14-8
J14-7
J107-1
J107-2
J210-1
J210-2
J210-3
J130-1
J130-2
J130-3
J117-1
J117-2
J117-3
J108-1
J108-2
J500-1
J500-2
J205-3
J205-1
J205-2
J205-3
J113-1
J113-2
J113-3
J112-1
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J12A
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J12B
+24V
TRYLIM
+24VSHIFT
TRAYSAFE
+24VSHIFT
+24VMOVE
DRSW
SWGGCLD
+24VMOVE (TRYLMT)
+24VSHIFT
+24VMOVE
BESCPSL
+24V
STOPN
G
+5V
DROPN
G
+5V
ENTSL
+24V
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FLPSL
+24V
STPHP
G
+5V
TRYHP
G
+5V
JOINT
G
+5V
J12A
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J12B
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SHUTCLD
ESCPSL
+24V
+5V
DELCLK
+5V
JOGHP
G
+5V
STPTY
G
+5V
A
B
A
B
+24V
+5V
SWGCLK
G
PDLSL
+5V
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J9A J9A
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J9B J9B
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J207A-1
J207A-2
J207A-3
J207A-4
J207A-5
J207A-6
J207A-7
J207A-8
J207A-9
J207A-10
J207A-11
J207B-1
J207B-2
J207B-3
J207B-4
J207B-5
J207B-6
J207B-7
J207B-8
J207B-9
J207B-10
J207B-11
J7-1
J7-2
J7-3
J128-6
J128-5
J128-4
J9A-11
J9A-10
J9A-9
J9A-8
J9A-7
J9A-6
J9A-5
J9A-4
J9A-3
J9A-2
J9A-1
J9B-11
J9B-10
J9B-9
J9B-8
J9B-7
J9B-6
J9B-5
J9B-4
J9B-3
J9B-2
J9B-1
J11-7
J11-6
J11-5
J11-4
J11-3
J11-2
J11-1
1
2
3
J206
1
2
3
J205
1
2
3
J206
3
2
1
J205
J207A
J207A
FG4
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J207B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
J207B
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J208
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
J208
J204
1
2
3
J204
MS4-C
MS4-N0
MS4-NC
J118-1
J118-2
J118-3
J123-2
J123-3
J120-1
J120-2
J120-3
J121-1
J121-2
J121-3
J122-1
J122-2
J122-3
J124-1
J124-2
J124-3
J124-4
J124-5
J125-1
J125-2
J125-3
J126-1
J126-2
J501-1
J501-2
J119-1
J119-2
J134-1
J134-2
J134-3
J127-1
J127-2
J127-3
MS6-N0
MS6-C
MS2-N0
MS2-C
J206-1
J206-2
J206-3
J205-1
J205-2
J205-3
J206-4
J206-5
J207A-7
J207A-8
J207A-9
J206-1
J206-2
J206-3
J207A-4
J207A-5
J207A-6
J207A-1
J207A-2
J207A-3
J207A-11
J207A-10
J207B-6
J207B-7
J207B-8
J207B-9
J207B-10
J207B-2
J207B-2
J206-8
J206-7
J207B-3
J207B-4
J207B-5
J204-1
J204-2
J204-3
J209-2
J209-2
J209-4
J209-3
1
2
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
J140
3
2
1
J118
2
1
J119
3
2
1
J120
3
2
1
J134
3
2
1
J121
3
2
1
J122
J123
5
4
3
2
1
J124
J128
J501
3
2
1
J125
3
2
1
J127
C
N0
NC
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
1
2
3
2
1
3
2
1
N0
N0
FG5
PI5
Shutter
Closed
Sensor
3
2
1
J117
3
2
1
J130
1
2
3
4
5
6
J400
J5-6
J5-5
J5-4
J5-7
J5-8
J5
J5
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J7
J7
7
6
5
4
+5V 3
PDEL 2
G 1
J204-1
J204-2
J204-3
J206-1
J206-2
J206-3
J206-4
J206-5
J206-6
J206-7
J400-1
J400-2
J400-3
J400-4
J400-5
J400-6
J201-1
J201-2
J201-3
J201-4
J201-5
J201-6
J11-10
J11-9
J11-8
4
3
2
1
M2
Delivery
Motor
J12B-10
J12B-9
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
1
J209-4
J209-3
J209-2
J209-1
J132-2
J132-1
J131-1
J131-2
J131-1
J112-2
4 G
3 Vin
2 +5V
1 V0
4
3
2
1
J11 J11
SWGOPN 10 10
G 9
9
+5V 8
8
FSTTRAY
G
+5V
SNDTRAY
G
+5V
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J16-6
J16-5
J16-4
J16-3
J16-2
J16-1
4
3
2
1
J209
Swing Guide
J109
J12A-11
J12A-10
PI9
Tray Shift
Motor Clock
Sensor 1
1
2
J12B-1
J12B-2
J12B-3
PI19
Tray Shift
Motor Clock
Sensor 2
1
2
3
2
1
MS3
Safety Range
Switch
J113
3
2
1
J131
1
2
J17-1
J17-2
J17-3
J17-4
J17-5
J17-6
J17-7
J17-8
J17-9
J6
J6
PENT
G
+5V
+24V
+24V
B
A
B
A
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J14 J14
6
5
4
3
2
1
J5-12
J5-11
J5-10
J5-9
J2-2
J2-4
J2-5
J2-6
J2-7
SL
J107
1
2
3
J5-1
J5-3
MS5
Tray Upper
Limit Detect
Switch
1
2
C
NC
N0
C
NC
N0
J132
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J115-1
J115-2
J206-3
J206-2
J206-1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SFTCLK1
G
+5V
SFTCLK2
G
+5V
6
5
4
3
2
1
J16 J16
JS1-5A
JS1-7A
JS1-1A
JS1-2A
JS1-3A
JS1-4A
7A
6A
5A
4A
3A
2A
1A
J2-1
JS1
11
PI10
Delivery
Motor
Clock
Sensor
3
2
1
J113
1
2
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J202
J7-5
J7-4
J17
J17
EXITSL
+24V
BUFPASS
G
+5V
BUFENTR
G
+5V
A
B
A
B
+24V
+24V
4
3
2
1
G 6
+24V 5
JS1-C2
JS1-C3
C4
C3
C1
C2
J1-1
FG-1
J1-2
10
PI3
Delivery
Sensor
1
2
J112
J6-1
J6-2
J6-3
J6-4
3
2
1
J106
1
2
J115
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
J2
G 2
+24V 1
J1
J1
PI6
Alignment
Guide Home
Position Sensor
3
2
1
1
2
3
2
1
PI1
Inlet Sensor
J112
1
2
3
J14-1
J14-2
J14-3
J14-4
J14-5
J14-6
6
5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
V
V
V
6
5
4
3
2
1
J201
M9
J114
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Tray Lift
Motor
J1020
3
2
1
J1010
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
J24
J24
1 2 3 4 5 6
HOOKEMP
CRTSET
STPDRHP
STPCON
HOOKTOP
+24V
B
A
B
A
J10
J102
1
2
3
M5
J502
J114-1
J114-2
J114-3
J114-4
J202-2
J202-3
J202-4
J202-5
J202-6
J202-1
J202-2
J202-3
J202-4
J109-1
J109-2
J110-1
J110-2
J110-3
J105-1
J105-2
J105-3
G
+5V
J6
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J6
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PI4
Stapling
Tray Sensor
C
N0
NC
PI17
Buffer Path
Inlet Sensor
SL6
Escape
Solenoid
3
2
1
J12-8
J12-7
J12-7
J12-8
J12-9
J301
J10 1 2 3 4 5 6
JS1-C1
M3
Alignment
Motor
4
3
2
1
PI14
Buffer Path
Paper Sensor
1
2
J500
PI7
V
V
V
SL3
Buffer
Outlet
Solenoid
J101
2
1
3
2
1
J210
SL
1
2
J24-8
J24-7
J24-6
J24-5
J24-4
J24-3
J24-2
J24-1
3
2
1
J210
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
J10-6
J10-5
J10-4
J10-3
J10-2
J10-1
12
Schematic Diagram
3
2
1
3
2
1
SL
J600
1
2
3
J105
3
2
1
J129
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J305
5
4
3
2
1
J304
2
1
1
2
3
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
J306
SL5
Paddle
Solenoid
1
2
Stapler Shift
Home Position
Sensor
1
2
3
M6
Staple Motor
J110
Stapler Unit
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J307
M4
Stapler Shift
Motor
1
2
3
2
1
J109
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
Relay PCB 3
Relay PCB 4
M7
Swing Motor
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
MS6
MS2
PI18
PI20
Swing Guide Swing Guide Swing Guide
Swing Guide
Closed Detect Closed Detect Closed Sensor Clock Sensor
Switch 2
Switch 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
3
4
5
Ver. 5.2
A
B
A
B
+24V
+24V
1
2
3
J302
11.1.9.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Shutter Unit
MS4
Shutter Closed
Detect Switch
Host Machine
M8
Second Feed Motor
M1
First Feed Motor
Sensor PCB
PI8
PI15
Tray Home
Position
Sensor
Joint
Sensor
Buffer Inlet
Solenoid
SL2
SL
SL
JAN 2006
Stitcher Unit
(Front)
Stitcher Unit
(Rear)
675
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
M6S
Stitcher
Motor
1
2
3
4
PI20S
PI19S
PI18S
No. 3 Paper No. 2 Paper No. 1 Paper
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
3
2
1
J9-1
J9-2
J9-3
1
2
3
4
5
6
J125
J2
3 G
2 1PAFDJP
1 +5V
J2
J18
INLTCVR
G
+5V
G
3RDPA
2NDPA
1STPA
+5V
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J18
J10
J10
1
2
3
4
+24V 5
G 6
J225
J130-1
J130-2
J130-3
J124-1
J124-2
J124-3
J204-1
J204-2
J204-3
J204-4
J204-5
LUNGETOP
G
+5V
LUNGEHP
G
+5V
GIDHP
G
+5V
FDRLHP
G
+5V
DELV
G
+5V
J17
J13
J13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
J325
J8-8
J8-9
J8-10
J8-11
J8-12
J8-13
J8-14
J9
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J9
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
TRYPAR
G
+5V
PAPPOS
G
+5V
PPOSPAR
G
+5V
B
B
A
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
J425
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J129-1
J129-2
J129-3
J128-1
J128-2
J128-3
J127-1
J127-2
J127-3
J126-1
J126-2
J126-3
J125-1
J125-2
J125-3
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+5V
G
STPLHP
+5V
G
VPJM
J525
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
J121
J8-1
J8-2
J8-3
J8-4
J8-5
J8-6
J8-7
J6
J6
Saddle Sticher
Controller PCB
J9-4
J9-5
J9-6
J306
J316
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J120
J202-1
J202-2
J202-3
J202-4
J202-5
J202-6
J201-1
J201-2
J201-3
J14
STDHP1
G
HKEMP1
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
J12-1
J12-2
J12-3
J12-4
J12-5
STDHP2
G
HKEMP2
J126
3
2
1
J9-7
J9-8
J9-9
J9-10
J9-11
J9-12
J305
J315
5
4
3
2
1
J120
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J11
3
FDROPN 4
5
DELVMS 6
7
8
9
10
J7
+24V 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J11
J16
+5V
G
JOGHP
G
FLDCLK
+5V
+5V
G
EJCVR
+5V
G
FDR
G
LUNGECLK
+5V
B
A
B
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
J4
J4
+24V 1
INLTCVRMS 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
B
A
B
A
+24V
J1
J1
+24V 1
G 2
J209-3
J209-2
J209-1
J102-3
J102-2
J102-1
J203-3
J203-2
J203-1
J104-3
J104-2
J104-1
J107-3
J107-2
J107-1
J113-5
J113-4
J113-3
J113-2
J113-1
J114-5
J114-4
J114-3
J114-2
J114-1
J109-1
J109-2
J110-1
J110-2
J205-1
J205-2
J112-1
J112-2
J108-1
J108-2
J132-1
J132-2
J11-7
J11-8
J11-9
J11-1
J11-2
J11-3
J6-4
J6-5
J6-6
J6-7
J6-8
J6-9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
J303
1
2
3
J203
3
2
1
J309
J402
J11-13
J11-14
J11-15
J11-10
J11-11
J11-12
J11-4
J11-5
J11-6
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
N0
N0
N0
PI2S
Front Door
Open/Closed
Sensor
PI21S
Paper folding
home position
sensor
PI9S
Inlet cover
sensor
3
2
1
J107
3
2
1
J104
3
2
1
J103
3
2
1
J102
3
2
1
J101
J100
1
2
3
3
2
1
J106
3
2
1
J105
3
2
1
J131
3
2
1
J132
1
2
3
J111
3
2
1
J110
3
2
1
J109
J502
1
2
3
3
2
1
J301
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
J201
J308
4
3
2
1
1
2
1
2
3
2
1
J208
1
2
J108
1
2
3
J112
2
1
J205 J305
3
2
1
J209
J302
J202
J6-1
J6-2
J6-3
J13-1
J13-2
J13-3
J13-4
J13-5
J13-6
J4-9
J4-10
J4-7
J4-8
J4-6
J4-5
J4-4
J4-3
J4-2
J4-1
11
PI3S
Delivery
Cover
Sensor
SL
PI15S
Paper Pushing
Plate Top Position
Sensor
PI14S
Paper Pushing
Plate Home Position
Sensor
PI13S
Guide Home
Position Sensor
PI12S
Crescrent Roller
Phase
Sensor
PI11S
Delivery
Sensor
MS4S
Staple Sensor (Rear)
J127
M7S
Stitcher
Motor
(Front)
3
2
1
MS5S
Stitcher
Home Position
Swtich (Rear)
3
2
1
MS6S
Staple Sensor (Front)
J128
MS7S
Stitcher
Home Position
Switch (Front)
J9-13
J9-14
J9-15
M3S
Guide
Motor
3
2
1
M4S
Paper
Positioning
Plate Motor
A
B
A
B
+24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
J129
J5-2
J5-1
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
2
1
J7-6
J7-7
J7-8
J7-9
J7-10
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J3
J12
J118
J118a
J5-4
J5-3
5
4
3
2
1
J114
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J31
J12
3
2
1
1
2
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
J19
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
J117
J117a
J5-6
J5-5
2
1
2
1
J31
J32
J32
J5
4
3
2
1
RLNPSL
+24V
FSPSL2
+24V
FLPSL1
+24V
3
2
1
1
2
J2-1
J2-2
J2-3
J2-4
J2-5
J2-6
J1-2
J1-1
J5
SL2S
SL1S
No. 2 Deflecting No. 1 Deflecting
Plate Solenoid
Plate Solenoid
J116
2
1
4
3
2
1
J116a
1
2
3
4
J5-1
J5-2
J5-3
J5-4
J7-1
J7-2
J7-3
J7-4
J7-5
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PI4S
Paper Folding
Motor Clock
Sensor
1
2
3
SL4S
Feed
Plate Contact
Solenoid
SL
J15
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PI5S
Alignment Plate
Home Position
Sensor
J124
SL
J15
PI6S
Tray Paper
Sensor
1
2
3
J115
5
4
3
2
1
J119-1
J119-2
J119-3
J119-4
J119-5
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PI7S
Paper Positioning
Plate Home Position
Sensor
1
2
3
J113
J115-1
J115-2
J115-3
J115-4
J8
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PI8S
Paper Positioning
Plate Sensor
J10-8
J10-7
J10-6
1
2
3
5
4
3
2
1
J116-1
J113-2
J117-1
J117-2
J118-1
J118-2
J8
PI16S
Stitcher Unit
Home Position
Sensor
J123
J121-1
J121-2
J121-3
J121-4
J121-5
J121-6
J121-7
J120-1
J120-2
J120-3
J120-4
J120-5
J120-6
J120-7
PI7S
Vertical
Path
Sensor
J107
Finisher Unit
M8S
Paper Pushing
Plate Motor
J304
J18-3
J18-2
J18-1
M5S
Alignment
Motor
1
2
3
4
5
M1S
Feed
Motor
M2S
Paper Folding
Motor
5
4
3
2
1
MS3S
Delivery Door
Switch
J204
1
2
3
4
5
Ver. 5.2
MS2S
Front Door
Switch
5
4
3
2
1
MS1S
Inlet Door
Switch
J10-1
J10-2
J10-3
J10-4
J10-5
12
PI1S
Paper Pushing
Plate Motor Clock
Sensor
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
J131-3
J131-2
J131-1
J208-4
J208-3
J208-2
1
2
J131-6
J131-5
J131-4
J131-3
J131-2
J131-1
JAN 2006
Ver. 5.2
676
3
2
1
J106
J5
4 FDROPN
3
2 UDROPN
1 +24V
J5
4
3
2
1
J7
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J7
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
G
SREGHP
+5V
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
J1A J1A
A 11 11
B 10 10
9
A 9
8
B 8
7
+24V 7
LEDON
+5V
+5V
PUNCHCLK
G
8
7
6
5
4
PUNCHHP 3
+5V 2
G 1
G 10
DFULL 9
11
J1B J1B
2
1
2
1
J102-1
J102-2
J102-3
J101-1
J101-2
J101-3
J101-4
J105-1
J105-2
J105-3
J104-1
J104-2
J104-3
J112-1
J112-2
J112-3
J112-4
J10-1
J10-2
J10-3
J10-4
J10-5
J10-6
J11-1
J11-2
J11-3
J11-4
J11-5
J11-6
J11-7
2
1
2
1
J114 J114
2
1
J113
2
1
J1A-1
J1A-2
J1A-3
J1B-4
J1B-5
J1B-6
J1B-3
J1B-2
J1B-1
J1A-7
J1A-8
J1A-9
J1A-10
J7-7
J7-8
J7-9
J7-10
J7-11
J7-12
J7-13
J7-1
J7-2
J7-3
J7-4
J7-5
J7-6
J1B-7
J1B-8
J1B-9
J1B-10
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
J102
3
2
1
J105
3
2
1
J104
1
2
3
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
J101 J101
J11
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J10
J10
J11
4
3
2
1
J112
4
3
2
1
J112
PI2P
Punch Motor Clock
Sensor
MS2P
Front Door Switch
MS1P
Upper Door Switch
Finisher Unit
NC
C
N0
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
G
+5V
SREG1
SREG2
SREG3
SREG4
PAEND
G
LEDON1
LEDON2
LEDON3
LEDON4
LEDON5
J2
J2
PI3P
Punch Home Position
Sensor
3
2
1
J106
J4
J4
J23
M2P
Horizontal Registration
Motor
NC
C
N0
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4 +24V
3
2
1 G
J3A J3A
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J38 J38
J21A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
J21B
Photosensor PCB
LED PCB
Scrap full
Detection PCB
M1P
Punch Motor
10
11
12
PI1P
Punch Home Position
Sensor
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2. DA-FS330
11.2.1.
Introduction
Description
50 - 95 F / 10 - 35 C
15 - 80% RH
Horizontal
Lower Bin Lift
Upper Bin:
Lower Bin:
LDR/A3, LGL/B4
LTR/A4, LTR-R/A4-R
INV-R/A5-R
B5, B5-R Post card
LTR/A4 only
Ver. 5.2
677
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Stapling Position:
60
62.5 mm
62.5 mm
ABCDE
FGHIJK
62 mm
ABCDE
FGHIJK
62 mm
<North America>
<Europe / Others>
D
B
B
A
C2
C2
A
C1
A
A
B
l C1 - C2 l
D
106 0.5 mm
8 0.5 mm
Less than 2 mm
9.5 1.0 mm
C1
80 0.5 mm
6 0.5 mm
Less than 2 mm
10.5 1.0 mm
Function
Upper Bin
Lower Bin (LTR/A4 only)
Ver. 5.2
Shift Mode
No
Yes
Staple Mode
No
Yes
678
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.1.2. Features
Upper Tray
Paper Exit
(Face Down)
Lower Tray
Guide Plate
Assembly
Lower Left Cover
I/F Cable
Ver. 5.2
679
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Paper Feed
Guide
Upper Tray
Registration Roller
Lower Tray
Inverting Roller
Interstage Stack
Stapler Unit
2. Electrical Parts
CPU PCB
Transport
Motor (M1)
Paper Full
Detecting
Sensor (PC9)
Sheet Detecting
Sensor (PC7)
Cartridge Sensor
(SW2)
Staple Home
Position Sensor
(PC13)
Staple Sensor
(SW3)
Staple Motor
(M5)
Exit Sensor (Face Down)
(PC3)
Ver. 5.2
680
JAN 2006
11.2.2.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
681
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
When the Punch Registration Sensor detects the paper, the Transport Motor (M1) and Belt Motor (M3) are
driven, driving gears and belts, which revolve rollers.
1. Upper Tray paper path (Discharged into Upper Tray)
The Paper Transport Sensor detects the paper when the Transport Motor (M1) is driven and each roller
is rotated. Then the Path Select Gate is switched to the direction of [A] by Gate Solenoid, and the
paper is discharged into the Upper Tray by the Exit Roller.
Upper Tray
Face Up Exit Roller
Bearing
[A]
Registration Roller
Face Up Exit Roller
Ver. 5.2
682
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Paddle Roller
Registration Roller
Paper Stack
Paper Pass Sensor
Belt Motor
Paper Stack
Belt Motor
Belt
Belt Home Position Sensor
Ver. 5.2
683
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Cam
Drive Shaft
Punch Bar
Punch Clutch (CL2)
Paper Feed
Sensor
Registration Roller
Bearing
A
B
Registration
Punch Registration
Roller
Clutch (CL1)
CL1 is turned OFF, the driving force is transmitted to the Registration Roller, and the paper is transported.
Ver. 5.2
684
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Pinion
Gear
Jogging Motor
B
A
<Jogging Operation>
The Jogging Bar moves the papers stacked in interstage stack to the Reference Plate, and jogs the
papers toward the STS. The papers are detected by the Sheet Detecting Sensor when they are in the
position where stapling is possible.
This procedure ensures stapling of the arranged papers.
The Reference Plate also ensures the discharge into a fixed position.
<Shift Operation>
Papers jogged to the direction of the STS go through a shift operation. Therefore, single paper shifts by
the Shift Bar are sorted when discharged.
(There is no shift operation for the stapled paper.)
<Jogging/Shift Mechanism>
Jogging and shift operations are carried out by the Jogging Bar and Shift Bar which are moved by the
pinion, which is driven by the A and B movement of the Jogging Motor (M2) Gear.
The Holding Spring pushes the rack toward the pinion to ensure proper engagement of the Rack and
Pinion. The Jogging Bars range of movement differs depending on the paper size (A4, LTR only).
<Home Position Detection>
The Jogging Bars home position is decided by the light blocking plate integrated into the Pinion and the
Home Position Sensor.
The Jogging Bars home position is the point where the sensors light starts being blocked by the
Blocking Plate.
The Jogging Bar and Shift Bars range of movement, which differs depending on paper size, is calculated
based on this position.
Ver. 5.2
685
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
FQ-SS32
Staple Cartridge
Staple Motor
Cam
Staple Sensor
Cartridge
Sensor
Staple Home Position
Sensor
Staple Table
The Staple Motors rotation drives the stapler by rotating the cam via a gear.
The link is in contact with the Cam. When the Cam revolves, the link moves around its supporting point.
Stapling Mechanism 2.
Cam
Staple Plate
Staple Table
Ver. 5.2
686
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Wire
Hook Plate
Elevating Bottom
Sensor
Ver. 5.2
687
JAN 2006
11.2.3.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Preventive Maintenance
11.2.3.1. General
1. A Preventive maintenance inspection should be performed on the Finisher at a regular basis. If the
preventive maintenance inspection is correctly performed, the Finisher can be maintained for a long
period of time, machine down time and the number of service calls can be minimized.
2. Refer to the attached chart for parts replacement schedule.
3. A high voltage hazard remains even when the machine is not operating.
Always disconnect the Copier System from its power source (wall outlet) before servicing or
disassembly.
Ver. 5.2
Parts Number
GH03 - 7811
GH03 - 7801
(North America)
GH03 - 7802
(Except North America)
GH03 - 3504
GH03 - 4601
GH03 - 4602
GH03 - 6204
Qty per
Maintenance Cycle
Unit
1
200,000 copies
1
1
2
2
1
688
500,000 copies
(including electro-magnetic clutch)
500,000 copies
500,000 copies
500,000 copies
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Lower Tray
Ver. 5.2
689
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(2)
(2)
(2) (2)
(3)
(3)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(5)
Ver. 5.2
690
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(6)
(5)
Ver. 5.2
691
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(8)
(6)
(7)
(3)
(3)
Ver. 5.2
692
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(5)
(6)
(6)
(7)
(4)
(8)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Ver. 5.2
693
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(2)
(4)
(7)
(5)
(6)
(3)
Ver. 5.2
694
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4)
(5)
(5)
(3)
Ver. 5.2
695
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4)
(6)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(4)
Ver. 5.2
696
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(7)
(6)
(6)
(4)
(3)
(3)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(5)
(5)
Ver. 5.2
(5)
697
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(6)
(7)
(3)
(2)
Ver. 5.2
698
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(2)
(2)
(5)
(2)
(2)
(4)
(6)
(6)
(3)
(5)
(5)
(5)
Ver. 5.2
699
JAN 2006
11.2.4.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Electrical
Set Switch
(SW1)
2
3
Cartridge Sensor
Staple Sensor
Staple Home Position
Sensor
(SW2)
(SW3)
Function
Detects the setting condition of the Finisher, resets paper
jam and resets staple jam.
Detects the Staple Cartridge.
Detects staples.
(PC13)
Sensor
Symbol
(PC1)
(PC2)
(PC8)
(PC3)
(PC4)
(PC5)
(PC6)
12
(PC7)
13
(PC9)
14
(PC10)
15
(PC11)
9
10
11
Ver. 5.2
700
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Paper Transport Motor for Finisher is of outer rotor type DC, brushless. Its control circuit is shown
below.
2. Pulse signals from P35 of P.C.B. (PWB-A) IC1 controls the speed. Signal L from IC1-P10 starts the
motor, while signal H stops the Motor.
GND
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
M1
R10
PJ6 6
PJ6 7
IC1
RA1
IC7
2
79
99
R10
P10
P35
IC7
GND
DC24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
7
10
15
A
3 PJ5
A
5 PJ5
B
4 PJ5
B
6 PJ5
15
SM
1
2
3
4
5
6
COM
SM
DC24V
IC15
COM
DC24V
RA3
IC12
IC9
3
I1
6
I2
11
I3
14
I4
O1
O2
O3
O4
2
5
6
9
O1
O2
O3
O4
M2
JOGGING MOTOR
C6
1
OUTA
RSA
11
C5
IC1
RA1
6
INA
5
INA
17
INB
16
INB
18
20
19
23
P23
P21
P22
P20
C7
OUTA
2
TdA
13
TdB
REFA
R6
R7
REFB
R6
14
M3
BELT MOTOR
OUTB
18
A
PJ4 3
A
PJ4 5
B
PJ4 4
B
PJ4 6
OUTB
1
2
3
4
5
6
RSB
1
2
3
4
5
6
SM
10
SM
C4
R9
R5
R4
R3
R2
GND
Ver. 5.2
701
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Elevation Motor, which moves the Lower Tray up and down, is a +24V DC motor. Its control circuit is
shown below.
2. It is controlled by the combination of signals from P30 and P31 of IC1 in P.C.B. (PWB-A).
3. Lower tray is elevated when H and L are output from P30 and P31 respectively. Lower Tray descends
when L and H are output from P30 and P31 respectively.
4. Motor is stopped when L is output from P30 and P31, and brakes when H is output from P30 and P31.
DC5V
1
2
SM
3
7 PJ4
1
2
8 PJ4
M4
ELEVATION MOTOR
C15
5
C17
OUT1
OUT2
4 GND
SM
VCC 7
DC24V
RA3
IC16
1
IC3
6
IN1
IN2
P30
P31
GND2
C19
C18
GND
M5
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
STAPLE MOTOR
PLT8
PJ1
PJ1
PJ1
PJ1
8
9
11
12
PLT9
GND
DC5V
R18
DC24V
R16
3
4
5
R15
R14
Q2
R17
IC8
Q3
RA1
IC8
12
Q6
Q1
Q5
R12
R13
1
2
13
Q4
IC1
IC5
2
P32
P33
IC5
R15
GND
Ver. 5.2
702
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Gate Solenoid, which switches between straight discharge and invert discharge, is a +24V DC plunger
solenoid. Its control circuit is shown below.
2. Solenoid is turned ON and switched to straight discharge when signal L is transmitted from P25 of IC1
in PC Board (PWB-A), and invert discharge when the signal H is transmitted.
DC24V
DC5V
IC1
SM
SM
IC14
10
PJ4
16
15
14
13
SL1
PATH SELECT SOLENOID
12
11
10
O1
I1
O2
I2
O3
I3
O4
I4
O5
I5
O6
I6
O7
I7
RA3
13
P25
2
3
4
5
6
7
DC24V
IC14
IC1
SM
1
2
16
SM
15
1
4
14
PJ7
13
12
11
CL1
PAPER STANDSTILL CLUTCH
10
O1
I1
O2
I2
O3
I3
O4
I4
O5
I5
O6
I6
O7
I7
1
2
RA3
11
P27
4
5
6
7
DC24V
SM
1
2
16
1
2
PJ7
15
14
13
12
CL2
PUNCH CLUTCH
Ver. 5.2
IC1
IC14
SM
11
10
703
O1
I1
O2
I2
O3
I3
O4
I4
O5
I5
O6
I6
O7
I7
1
2
RA3
12
P26
3
4
5
6
7
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Connection
Input/Output
1 5V
12
2 GND
11
Function
+5V
DC+5V
Ground
0V
3 NC
10
Staple Home
4 Position
Sensor
IC1
P45
5 Staple Sensor
IC1
P46
Not Used
5V
Home
0V
5V
Staple
0V
Stapler
Cartridge
Sensor
7 NC
Staple
Motor +
Staple
9
Motor +
10 NC
Staple
Motor Staple
12
Motor 11
Ver. 5.2
IC1
P13
5V
Cartridge
0V
5
4
Ground
Normal
Rev.
24V
Inverse
Rev.
0V
Not Used
Normal
Rev.
704
Inverse 24V
Rev.
0V
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PJ3
No. Signal Name
Connection
24V
1 (from Power
Outlet)
Input/Output
5
Function
+24V
DC+24V
Power PCB
CN2B
2 NC
GND
3 (from Power
Outlet)
Not Used
Ground
0V
PJ4
No. Signal Name
Connection
Input/Output
Function
1 24V
+24V
DC+24V
2 24V
+24V
DC+24V
Belt Motor
3 Belt Motor A
4 Belt Motor B
5 Belt Motor A
6 Belt Motor B
Elevation
Motor
IC1
P23
IC1
P22
IC1
P21
IC1
P20
Pulse
5
6
IC1
P30
24V
CCW
CW
0V
Elevation
Motor
8
Elevation
Motor
IC1
P31
Ver. 5.2
IC1
P25
24V
CCW
CW
0V
Gate
Solenoid
9 24V
Gate
10 Solenoid
(Signal)
+24V
DC+24V
24V
ON
0V
705
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PJ5
No. Signal Name
Connection
Input/Output
Function
1 24V
+24V
DC+24V
2 24V
+24V
DC+24V
Joging Motor
3
4
5
6
Joging Motor
A
Joging Motor
B
Joging Motor
A
Joging Motor
B
IC12
Q1
IC12
Q3
IC12
Q2
IC12
Q4
Pulse
4
3
PJ6
No. Signal Name
Connection
Input/Output
1 24V
2 GND
Function
+24V
DC+24V
Ground
0V
3 5V
+5V
DC+5V
Transport
Motor
4 GND
Ground
0V
5 H/L
Ground
0V
Transport
Motor Clock
Transport
7 Motor ON/
OFF
Ver. 5.2
IC1
P10
IC1
P35
Pulse
24V
ON
0V
706
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Transport
Motor LD
Connection
IC1
P12
Input/Output
Function
24V
Normal
0V
PJ7
No. Signal Name
Connection
1 24V
Input/Output
1
Function
+24V
DC+24V
Punch Clutch
2
ON
0V
3 24V
Punch
Registration
4 Clutch
(Signal)
24V
+24V
DC+24V
Punch
Registration
Clutch
IC1
P27
24V
Normal
0V
PJ8
No. Signal Name
Connection
1 GND
Input/Output
Function
Ground
0V
Paper Exit
Sensor
2 (Inverting)
(Signal)
3 5V
Ver. 5.2
Paper Exit
IC1
Sensor
P01
(Inverting)
5V
No Paper
0V
+5V
707
DC+5V
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Connection
4 GND
Input/Output
Function
Ground
0V
Paper Exit
Sensor
5 (Straight)
(Signal)
Paper Exit
IC1
Sensor
P41
(Straight)
5V
No Paper
0V
6 5V
7 GND
+5V
DC+5V
Ground
0V
Paper Feed
8 Sensor
(Signal)
9 5V
5V
No Paper
0V
+5V
DC+5V
PJ9
No. Signal Name
Connection
1 GND
Input/Output
Function
Ground
0V
Paper Full
Detecting
2 Sensor
(Signal)
3 5V
Ver. 5.2
Paper Full
IC1
Detecting
P44
Sensor
5V
No Paper
0V
+5V
708
DC+5V
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Connection
4 GND
Input/Output
Function
Ground
0V
Paper Upper
Surface
IC1
5 Detecting
P14
Sensor
(Signal)
Paper Upper
Surface
Detecting
Sensor
5V
Not
Detected 0V
6 5V
7 GND
+5V
DC+5V
Ground
0V
Paper Path
8 Sensor
(Signal)
5V
No Paper
0V
9 5V
10 GND
+5V
DC+5V
Ground
0V
Belt Home
Position
11 Sensor
(Signal)
Belt Home
IC1
Position
P43
Sensor
5V
Home
0V
12 5V
13 GND
+5V
DC+5V
Ground
0V
Sheet
Detecting
14 Sensor
(Signal)
15 5V
Ver. 5.2
Sheet
IC1
Detecting
P42
Sensor
5V
No Paper
0V
+5V
709
DC+5V
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PJ10
No. Signal Name
Connection
1 GND
Input/Output
Function
Ground
0V
Joging Home
Joging Home
Position
IC1
2 Sensor
Position
P15
Sensor
(Signal)
3 5V
4 GND
5V
Home
0V
+5V
DC+5V
Ground
0V
Elevation
Celing
5
Sensor
(Signal)
Elevation
IC1
Celing
P17
Sensor
6 5V
7 GND
Elevation
Bottom
8 Sensor
(Signal)
IC1
P03
Punch Box
Detecting
11 Sensor
(Signal)
12 5V
Ver. 5.2
Ground
0V
5V
Bottom
0V
Punch Box
Detecting
Sensor
DC+5V
IC1
P43
+5V
9 5V
10 GND
Ceiling
0V
Elevation
Bottom
Sensor
5V
+5V
DC+5V
Ground
0V
5V
No box
0V
+5V
710
DC+5V
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Connection
Input/Output
Function
13 NC
Not Used
PJ12
No. Signal Name
1 ISOTRX
2 SOTRX
Connection
IC13
TZ
IC13
1Y
3 GND
Input/Output
Function
Inverse Signal Received by
Finisher
11
Pulse
12
I/F Cable
10
Ground
0V
4 ISOTTX
5 SOTTX
IC13
1B
IC13
1A
Pulse
PJ13
No. Signal Name
Connection
1 Set Switch
Input/Output
1
Function
+24V
DC+24V
Set Switch
2 Set Switch
24V
Set
0V
Ver. 5.2
711
JAN 2006
11.2.5.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Section V Troubleshooting
oF
Problem
Finisher Inverting Unit/Inverting Shift Tray
(Option)
Cause/Check
1) Are the exit options installed correctly?
2) Exit option connector(s) is shorted or loose.
3) Exit option connector(s) is defective.
4) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or
loose.
5) Finisher CPU PCB is defective.
6) LVPS connector is shorted or loose.
7) LVPS is defective.
8) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or
loose.
9) CPU PCB is defective.
Copies exceeded the maximum capacity of
the finisher tray. Remove the copies from the
finishers tray and press the Start key. (Face
Down only)
2. Paper Jam
Code
J60
J62
Ver. 5.2
Contents
When the finisher is installed.
a) The finisher entry paper feed sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time
after the copier paper exit sensor detected paper.
b) The finisher entry paper feed sensor does not turn off within a predetermined time.
c) The finisher paper exit sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the
finisher entry paper feed sensor detected paper.
d) The finisher paper exit sensor (straight) does not turn off within a predetermined time.
e) The finisher paper exit sensor (invert) does not turn off within a predetermined time.
The Paper is Jammed in the Inverter.
The Paper Exit Sensor (Inverting) (PC3) detects paper jam in the Inverter or/and paper exit.
712
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Function
Condition
Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C16
C17
C18
Ver. 5.2
Cartridge is installed.
Staple is detected.
Stapler in home position.
Paper is detected.
Bin is placed beyond the lower
limit.
Paper is detected.
Paper is not detected.
Bin is placed beyond the upper
limit.
713
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
b. Output Check
Activate the door switch before executing output check. Press the Start key to start and press the
Stop key to reset.
Code
Item
No.
c109
Finisher bin movement 1
c110
c111
c113
c114
c116
c117
c118
Ver. 5.2
Function
The bin moves downward for one second,
then moves up to the home position.
The bin moves downward, then moves up to
the home position.
Paper transport motor rotates.
Tamper drive motor rotates.
The stapler operates one time, then resets.
Belt motor rotates once.
The solenoid turns on/off for one second
cycle.
The hole punch operates one time, then
resets.
714
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
General Description
11.3.1.1. Features
1. Through-type Stapler
Adoption of a through-type stapler allows a stapler to carry out saddle stitching.
2. Three Different Auto Stapling Positions
Three different stapling positions (Front 1-point stapling, Rear 1-point stapling, and Middle 2-point
stapling) are supported.
3. Saddle Stitching
A maximum of ten sheets of paper can be delivered stapled and folded in the middle.
4. Punch Mechanism (Option)
Installation of a Punch Unit enables punching holes in sheets before delivery (64 to 133 g/m2 paper; no
transparencies).
Ver. 5.2
715
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Feed Reference
Stacking Paper Size
Paper Weight
Mode
Mixed Stack
Paper Detection
Control Panel
Display
Size (W x D x H)
Weight
Power Supply
Maximum Power
Consumption
Stapling
Stapling Position
Stapling Thickness
Staple Supply
Replacement Staples
Staple Detection
Ver. 5.2
Description
2 locations
(1) Delivery Tray (descending type; 1 tray)
Face-down
(2) Bind Tray (fixed type)
Center reference
A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, LDR, LGL, LTR,
LTR-R, INV-R, FLS
Finisher assembly: 64 to 90 g/ m2
Saddle Assembly : 64 to 90 g/ m2
Non-Sort stack
Sort stack
Staple stack
Bind stack
Non-Sort Staple
Large-size : 500 sheets
Small-size : 1000 sheets (Note 2)
Staple Sort
Large-size : 30 sets or 500 sheets
Small-size : 30 sets or 1000 sheets
Folded stack
Stack of 6 to 10 sheets : 10 sets
Stack of 1 to 5 sheets : 20 sheets
Size mix : 500 sheets (Note 3)
Staple mix: 30 sheets (same paper configuration)
Delivery tray : Yes
Bind tray
: Yes
No
No
26.18 x 24.21 x 21.85 in
(665 x 615 x 555 mm)
59.40 lb (27 kg)
24 VDC from host machine
At standby
: 13 W
In operation : 84 W (staple sort)
Rotary cam type
See Fig. 1-001.
Finisher
Large-size
: 25 sheets
Small-size
: 50 sheets
Saddle
: 10 sheets
Cartridge of special staples (5000 Staples)
DQ-SS35
Yes (nearly empty : 40 remaining staples)
716
Remarks
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Item
Stapling Size
Manual Stapling
Folding Method
Folding Mode
Folding Position
Saddling Size
Description
Remarks
Front 1-Point Stapling :
A3, A4-R, B4, LDR, LGL, LTR-R
Rear 1-Point stapling :
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTRR
Middle 2-Point Stapling :
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR- With the saddle in use.
R
Middle 2-Point Stapling :
A3, A4-R, B4, LDR, LTR-R
None
Roller contact
Double-folding (single-sheet non-stapling available)
Center of sheet
Requires a margin of 0.2
in ( 5 mm) in the center of
the sheet for a middle
margin.
A3, A4-R, B4, LDR, LTR-R
No special paper.
Note 1 :
The number of sheets is computed based on 80 g/m2 paper.
Note 2 :
Alignment is not guaranteed if the stack consists of 750 sheets or more.
Note 3 :
Alignment is not guaranteed if the stack consists of sheets of different sizes.
Ver. 5.2
717
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Staple Position
0.180.08 in
(4.52 mm)
0.20.08 in
(52 mm)
0.180.08 in
(4.52 mm)
0.20.08 in
(52 mm)
A3 or A4
A4-R
0.20.08 in
(52 mm)
B4 or B5
0.20.08 in
(52 mm)
0.20.08 in
(52 mm)
0.20.08 in
(52 mm)
LGL or LTR-R
8.5 FLS
B4
Folding
position
A4-R
Transfer direction
A3
LTR-R
LDR
Fig. 1-001
Delivery Direction
Fig. 1-002
Ver. 5.2
718
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Paper Weight
Description
Reciprocating method
(sequential processing method)
2- / 3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU) :
2-hole / LGL, LTR-R
3-hole / LDR, LTR
4-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB) :
A3, A4
Weight
Power Supply
Maximum Power
Consumption
Manual Stapling
Folding Method
Folding Mode
Folding Position
Saddling Size
Punch Waste
Size (W x D x H)
Remarks
Table 1-002
Ver. 5.2
719
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Hole Position
[1] 2-Holes (Puncher Unit-J1)
A3/A4
B5/B4
A4-R
B5-R
0.470.12 in
(123 mm)
1
LGL/LTR-R
LDR/LTR
4.250.04 in 4.250.04 in
(1081 mm) (1081 mm)
1.240.12 in
(31.53 mm)
0.470.12 in
(123 mm)
A3/A4
Fig. 1-003
Ver. 5.2
720
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[2]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[9]
[10]
[6]
[7]
[11]
[3] Paddle
[10] Stapler
Ver. 5.2
721
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Saddle Unit
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[4]
(1) Die
(2) Cam
Timing
When prompted (indicator on host machine control panel)
When prompted (indicator on host machine control panel)
Table 1-003
Ver. 5.2
722
JAN 2006
11.3.2.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Outline of Operation
Control System
Fig. 2-001
Caution:
The position of delivery is shifted to the Front/Rear for each stack to assist sorting.
Ver. 5.2
723
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The sequence of finisher operations is controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB. The Finisher Controller
PCB is a 16-bit microprocessor (CPU), and is also used for combination with the Host Machine (serial).
The Finisher Controller PCB Drive Motors and other loads in response to the various commands from the
Host Machine. It also communicates such data as on the states of various sensors and switches to the Host
Machine by way of the serial communication line.
The ICs mounted to the Finisher Controller PCB have the following functions:
IC13 (CPU)
Controls sequence of operations.
IC12 (EEP-ROM)
Backs up adjustment settings.
IC6 (EP-ROM)
Stores sequence programs.
IC11 (communication IC)
Communicates with the host machine.
IC1 (regulator IC)
Generates 5 V.
Fig. 2-001 shows the flow of signals between finisher and options controller.
Finisher Unit
Finisher
Controller
PCB
IC13
CPU
Host Machine DC
Controller PCB
PCU
Motor
Clutch
IC12
EEP-ROM
Switch
IC11
Communication
IC
Sensor
IC6
EP-ROM
IC1
Regulator IC
Motor
Fig. 2-002
Ver. 5.2
724
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Inlet Sensor
Paddle Home
Position Sensor
Swing Guide
Home Position
Sensor
Aligning Plate
Home Position
Sensor (Front)
Aligning Plate
Home Position
Sensor (Rear)
PI2
PI3
PI4
PI5
-1
-2
-3
-2
-1
-2
CN16-10
+5V
-12 ENT_S
-11
CN51-1
CN9-1
+5V
-3 PDL_HP
-2
CN55-3
CN54-1
CN53-3
-1
-2
-3
-2
-1
-2
+5V
-9 BDL_ROL_HP
-8
CN23-3
CN4
+5V
-3 F JOG_HP
-2
CN36-3
CN9-7
CN5-13
+5V
-15 R JOG_HP
-14
-1
-2
CN30-3
CN29-1
CN28-9
-1
-2
-3
-2
-7
-8
+5V
-3 ADJ_TRAY_S
-2
CN31-3
-4
-6
-4
-1
-2
-6
-5
-4
-5
+5V
-6 EJCT_BLT_HP When the delivery belt
is at home position, 1.
-5
CN32-3
-7
-3
-7
-1
-2
-9
-8
-1
-2
CN35-3
CN34-1
CN33-3
-1
-2
-3
-2
-1
-2
PI10 CN39-3
CN38-1
CN37-9
-2
-1
-2
-3
-8
-7
PI7
PI8
Folding Position
Sensor
CN42-3
-1
-2
PI6
Paper Surface
Sensor
CN43-1
-3
-2
Processing
Tray Sensor
Delivery Belt
Home Position
Sensor
CN44-3
PI9
CN5-1
+5V
-9 TRY_EMPS
-8
CN5-10
+5V
-12 LVL_S
-11
CN16-1
+5V
-2 BIND_P
-3
BIND_L
When paper is
detected, 0.
When LED is lit, 1.
Fig. 2-003
Ver. 5.2
725
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PI11
PI12
PI13
Staple/Fold Motor
Clock Sensor
PI15
Joint Switch
Stapler Safety
Switch
MS2
N.O.
MS1
N.O.
MS3
N.O.
CN40-3 CN38-4
-1
-6
-2
-5
CN41-3
-1
-2
-7
-9
-8
-3
-1
-2
CN47-3
-1
-2
CN15-1 +5V
-3 BIND_EMPS
-2
CN52-1
-2
-3
CN9-6 +5V
-5 BIND_CLK
-4
CN50-3
-1
-2
CN15-10 +5V
-12 SIFT_UPLMT
-11
CN49-3
-1
-2
CN15-7 +5V
-9 SIFT_DNLMT
-8
CN48-3
-1
-2
CN15-4 +5V
-6 SIFT_CLK
-5
CN25-3
-1
-2
CN4-7 +5V
-9 FDOOR_S
-8
CN24-3
-1
-2
CN4-4 +5V
-6 TOPCOV_S
-5
CN73-3
-1
-2
CN19-1 +5V
-3 PAPER_F
-2
+24VP
CN69-2
CN8-6
-1
-5
CN68-2
CN8-4
-1
-3
CN66-2
CN8-2
-1
-1
JOINT SW
When connected to
the host machine, 1.
FRONT SW
STPLSAFE SW
Fig. 2-004
Ver. 5.2
726
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
CN72
Binding Clutch
-2
CN18-1
-1
-2
CL1
-2
Feed Motor
-6
-1
CN10-7
-5
-2
-8
-4
-3
-9
-4
-10
-2
-5
-11
-1
-6
-12
B_CLU
M1
-3
CN57
+24V
PDLMTR_A
PDLMTR_*A
PDLMTR_B
PDLMTR_*B
+24V
Paddle Motor
CN56-2
M2
CN10-1
-5
-2
-3
-3
-1
-4
-4
-5
-6
-6
FEEDMTR_A
FEEDMTR_*A
FEEDMTR_B
FEEDMTR_*B
+24V
M3
Alignment Motor
(Front)
M4
Alignment Motor
(Rear)
M5
-6
-1
CN13-1
-5
-2
-2
-4
-3
-3
-4
-4
-2
-5
-5
-1
-6
-6
-3
CN59
Delivery Motor
EJCTMTR_A
EJCTMTR_*A
EJCTMTR_B
EJCTMTR_*B
+24V
CN63-1
CN62-5
CN3-1
-2
-4
-2
-3
-3
-3
-4
-2
-4
-5
-1
-5
CN65-1
CN64-5
CN3-6
-2
-4
-7
-3
-3
-8
-4
-2
-9
-5
-1
-10
FJOGMTR_A
FJOGMTR_*A
FJOGMTR_B
FJOGMTR_*B
+24V
RJOGMTR_A
RJOGMTR_*A
RJOGMTR_B
RJOGMTR_*B
Fig. 2-005
Ver. 5.2
727
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
-2
-1
-1
-2
CN70
-1
CN70
-2
M6
CN6-1
SIFTMTR_1
-2 SIFTMTR_0
-1
Staple/Fold Motor
-1
-2
CN71
-2
M7
CN6-3
BINDMTR_1
-4 BINDMTR_0
-1
Fig. 2-006
Ver. 5.2
728
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Stapler Unit
Slide Home
Position Sensor
+5V
PI18
CN72-5 CN72A-5
CN72-4 CN72A-4
CN72-3 CN72A-3
CN72-2 CN72A-2
CN72A-2 CN11-6
CN72A-6 CN11-2
CN72-1 CN72A-1
CN72A-1 CN11-7
CN72-7 CN72A-7
CN72A-7 CN11-1
CN72-10 CN72B-5
CN72B-5
CN72-11 CN72B-4
CN72B-4
CN72-12 CN72B-3
CN72B-3
CN72-13 CN72B-2
CN72B-2
Staple Home
Position Sensor
+5V
PI19
Staple Empty
Sensor
PI20
+5V
Staple Top
Position Sensor
+5V
PI21
Slide Motor
M8
SELF_P
+5V
STPL_CNCT
CN7-3 SLIDMTR_A
CN7-4
SLIDMTR_*A
CN7-5
SLIDMTR_B
CN7-6
SLIDMTR_*B
+24V
CN2-1
-3
-4
-5
-7
-6
Host
Machine
GND
GND
TXD
RXD
Communication line
+24V
CN1-1
-2
Fig. 2-007
Ver. 5.2
729
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.1.4. Inputs to and Outputs from the Punch Controller PCB (Option)
1. Inputs to and Outputs from the Punch Controller PCB
Punch Controller PCB
PI1P
J2008-3
Punch Home
Position Sensor
Horizontal
Registration
Home Position
Sensor
J1006-4
+5V
-6
-5 PUNCH
-1
-2
PI2P
J2007-3
J1006-1
+5V
-3
-2 SLIDE
-1
-2
PI3P
J2009-3
Punch Motor
Clock Sensor
J1006-7
+5V
-9
-8 CLOCK
-1
-2
+5V
J1005-1
LED121
-2
DUSTLED
DUSTPTR
-4
Photosensor PCB
+5V
+5V
J1007-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
PT1
PT2
PT3
PT4
PT5
SREG1*
SREG2*
SREG3*
SREG4*
PAEND*
When paper is
detected, 0.
-13
Fig. 2-008
Ver. 5.2
730
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
+5V
J1007-6
LED5
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
-1
-5
-4
-3
-2
LEDON5
LEDON4
LEDON3
LEDON2
LEDON1
Punch Motor
J1002-1
M1P
Switches between +
and - according to
the direction of motor
rotation.
-2
Horizontal
Registration
Motor
J1001-1
-2
M2P
-3
-4
A
B
A*
B*
Fig. 2-009
Ver. 5.2
731
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Machine performs the following in response to the commands coming from its host machine on the
sheets arriving from the Host Machine for delivery: simple stacking, job offset, and stapling or folding (in
two).
If a Punch Unit (option) is installed, the sheets are punched and delivered to the Delivery Tray.
Sheets may be delivered in either of five ways (including one for the Punch Unit):
Delivery
method
Normal
delivery
Punching
Simple stacking
Job offset
Stapling
Saddle delivery
Stitching
Fig. 2-010
1. Normal Delivery
a. Simple Stacking
The Machine pulls in the sheet once to the processing tray and then delivers it to the Delivery Tray.
Tray
Paper
Fig. 2-011
Ver. 5.2
732
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
b. Job Offset
The Machine pulls the sheet once to the Processing Tray. It then moves the sheet to the front or the
rear using the Aligning Plate. When it has deposited a specific number of sheets, it delivers them in
the form of an aligning plane. When the number of sheets stacked on the Processing Tray reaches
a specified value, the sheets are delivered in a form of a stack. Even if the specified value is not
reached, stacked sheets are temporarily delivered when 10 sheets of large-size paper (300 mm or
longer) or 30 sheets of small-size paper (299 mm or shorter) have been stacked. (5- and STMTsizes: 10 sheets)
2nd set
1st set
(Delivery Direction)
Fig. 2-012
Ver. 5.2
733
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
c. Stapling
The Machine stacks sheets coming from its host machine on the Processing Tray. When the
number of sheets stacked on the Processing Tray reaches a specified value, the Finisher staples
them, and delivers the stapled stack to the Delivery Tray.
Fig. 2-013
d. Saddle Delivery
The Machine deposits a stack of sheets on the Processing Tray, staples it (middle 2-point), and then
moves it to the Saddle Unit. The Saddle Unit folds the stack in two, and delivers it to the Bind Tray.
Fig. 2-014
Ver. 5.2
734
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
The Machine forwards the sheets coming from its host machine to the Delivery Tray, Processing Tray,
or Saddle Unit according to the type of delivery used. The sheets forwarded to the processing tray or
the Saddle Unit are offset, stapled, or folded.
Fig. 2-015 shows the motors that are associated with moving and aligning sheets. These motors are
controlled (rotated clockwise or counter-clockwise) by the microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher
Controller PCB.
The paper path is equipped with the sensors shown in Table 2-002 used to monitor the arrival or
passage of sheets.
If a sheet fails to arrive at or move past a specific sensor within a specific period of time, the Finisher
Controller will assume a jam, and stops the ongoing operation and, at the same time, communicates
the presence of a jam to the Host Machine.
Notation
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M7
Name
Paddle Motor
Feed Motor
Delivery Motor
Alignment Plate Motor (Front)
Alignment Plate Motor (Rear)
Staple / Fold Motor
Description
Stepping Motor
Stepping Motor
Stepping Motor
Stepping Motor
Stepping Motor
Brush DC Motor
Connector on Finisher
Controller PCB
CN10
CN10
CN13
CN3
CN3
CN6
Table 2-001
Ver. 5.2
735
JAN 2006
Ver. 5.2
M5
M2
736
Staple/Fold Motor Clock Detect Signal
BIND_CLK
M4
Feed Motor
Drive Signal FEEDMTR
Paddle Motor
Drive Signal PDLMTR
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
M1
M3
CL
M6
M8
M7
PI14
Fig. 2-015
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PI1
PI10
Fig. 2-016
Notation
PI1
PI10
Name
Inlet Sensor
Fold Position Sensor
Description
Photo Interrupter
Photo Interrupter
Connector on Finisher
Controller PCB
CN16
CN16
Table 2-002
Ver. 5.2
737
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
"Job offset" refers to the operation by which the machine delivers a set of sheets with them pulled
forward or backward for sorting.
Switching between the forward and backward directions is accomplished by using an aligning plate
(Front) and an aligning plate (Rear).
The sheet coming between the Delivery Rollers is fed onto the Processing Tray and then fed toward
the stopper by the Paddle.
A swing guide is at the upper position while a sheet is being pulled onto the Processing Tray or during
alignment. It is at the lower position during stack feeding, stack delivery, or stapling.
At power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Aligning Plate (Front) Motor (M4) and the Aligning
Plate (Rear) Motor (M5) to return the two aligning plates to their home positions.
Sensor
Aligning Plate (Front)
Home Position Sensor
Aligning Plate (Rear)
Home Position Sensor
Swing Guide Home
Position Sensor
Paddle Home Position
Sensor
Symbol Connector
Function
PI4
CN4-3
Drives the Aligning Plate
(Front)
PI5
CN5-15
Drives the Aligning Plate
(Rear)
PI3
CN9-9
Drives the Swing Guide
Drive
PI2
CN9-3
Drives the Paddle (feeds
paper)
Motor
Aligning Plate
(Front) Motor
Aligning Plate
(Rear) Motor
Paddle Motor
Symbol
M4
Paddle Motor
M2
M5
M2
Table 2-003
Aligning plate (Rear)
Light-shielding plate
Aligning Plate
(Front)
Light-Shielding Plate
Paper
(Front)
Aligning Plate (Front) Home Position Sensor (PI4)
Fig. 2-017
Ver. 5.2
738
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Aligning Plate
Paddle
Stack Delivery Roller (Upper)
Swing Guide
Delivery Belt
Fig.2-018
3. Offset Operation
Each sheet is pulled forward or backward using the Aligning Plate (Front) and the Aligning Plate
(Rear).
The offset operation is performed each time a sheet is pulled onto the Processing Tray.
Aligning Plate (Rear)
Sheet to be offset
Tray
Aligning Plate (Front)
Sheet to be offset
Tray
Aligning Plate (Front)
Ver. 5.2
739
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Paddle Motor rotates and the Swing Guide descends to hold the paper stack between the Upper
and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers. The Delivery Motor rotates in the forward direction to rotate the
Delivery Rollers, feeding the paper stack in the delivery direction. The Delivery Belt Home Position
Sensor is turned OFF. The Delivery Motor is driven a specified number of pulses, causing the Swing
Guide to ascend. Next, the Paper Delivery Motor is driven. Next, the Delivery Motor is driven to deliver
the paper stack with the nails of the Delivery Belt that rotates in sync with the Stack Delivery Rollers.
Swing Guide
Fig. 2-021
Job offset sequence
Start signal
Host machine delivery signal
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Processing Tray Sensor
(PI6)
Feed Motor (M1)
Delivery Motor (M3)
Delivery Belt Home
Position Sensor (PI7)
Paddle Motor (M2)
Paddle Home Position
Sensor (PI2)
Swing Guide Home
Position Sensor (PI3)
Stapler Safety Switch
(MS3)
Alignment Motor (Front)
(M4)
Aligning Plate Home Position
Sensor (Front) (PI4)
Alignment Motor (Rear)
(M5)
Aligning Plate Home Position
Sensor (Rear) (PI5)
360msec
360msec
60msec
360msec
30msec
360msec
220msec
CW rotation
CCW rotation
Fig. 2-022
Ver. 5.2
740
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Staple operation is performed to staple specified sheets of paper using a stapler unit.
The stapling position depends on the staple mode and paper size.
When the Machine starts immediately after power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Slide Motor
(M8) to return the Stapler Unit to the home position. The Stapler Unit starts moving toward the front of the
Stapler Frame. It stops when the Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18) on the Slide PCB located under the
Stapler Unit. Next, the Slide Motor is driven a specified number of pulses. The Stapler Unit moves to rear
standby position at the back of the Machine, entering the standby state.
Sensor
Slide Home Position
Sensor
Staple Home Position
Sensor
Staple Empty Sensor
Symbol
PI18
PI19
PI20
PI21
Function
Moves the Stapler.
Performs Stapling Operation.
Connector
Function
CN11-3
Detects the home position for the
stapler moving back and forth
CN11-4
Detects the home position for the
stapling operation
CN11-5
Detects presence or absence of
staples in the cartridge
CN11-6
Detects the staple top position
Motor
Slide Motor
Staple/Fold
Motor
Symbol
M8
M7
Remarks
In the stapler
In the stapler
In the stapler
Remarks
Table 2-004
Stapler
(Deliver Direction)
Paper Stack
Light-Shielding Plate
Slide Motor
(M8)
Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18)
Fig. 2-023
Ver. 5.2
741
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
When stacking and alignment of paper on the Processing Tray are complete, the Finisher Controller PCB
drives the Paddle Motor (M2) in the reverse direction and lowers the Swing Guide. When the Swing Guide
descends, the paper stack is sandwiched between the Upper and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers.
The Finisher Controller PCB moves the stapler for stapling according to the specified stapling position
(when rear 1-point stapling is specified, the stapler does not move but it staples at the standby position). As
a stapler moves forward, the Processing Tray Stopper is folded forward.
Paper Stack
Swing Guide
Stack Delivery Roller (Upper)
Processing Tray Stopper
Stapler
Delivery Tray
Stack
Delivery
Roller
(Lower)
Fig. 2-024
Swing Guide Home
Position Sensor (PI3)
Paddle Motor (M2)
Light-Shielding Plate
Swing Guide
Stack Delivery Roller
(Upper)
123 mm
Fig. 2-025
Ver. 5.2
742
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
When stapling is complete, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Deliver Motor in the forward direction to
feed the paper stack (sandwiched between the Stack Delivery Rollers) in the delivery direction.
The Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor is turned OFF. The Delivery Motor is driven a specified number of
pulses, causing the Swing Guide to ascend. At the same time, the Slide Motor is driven to return the stapler
back to the standby position, followed by driving of the Delivery Motor. Then, the paper stack is delivered
with the nails of the Delivery Belt that rotates in sync with the Stack Delivery Rollers.
Paper Stack
Swing Guide
Stapler
Delivery Tray
Delivery Belt
Stack Delivery
Roller (Lower)
Fig. 2-026
Swing Guide
Home Position Sensor (PI3)
Paddle Motor (M2)
Light-Shielding Plate
Staple Safety
Switch (MS3)
Swing Guide
Fig. 2-027
Ver. 5.2
743
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Staple/Fold Motor (M7) is used to perform stapling operation. This motor rotates the Cam one turn for
stapling. The home position of this cam is detected by the Staple Home Position Sensor (PI19).
The Staple/Fold Motor is rotated in the forward or reverse direction under the control of the Micro Computer
(IC13) on the Finisher Controller PCB.
When the Staple Home Position Sensor is OFF, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Staple/Fold Motor in
the forward direction until the sensor turns ON, allowing the Staple Cam to the original position.
The Staple Empty Sensor (PI20) is used to detect presence/absence of a staple cartridge in the Machine
and presence/absence of staples in the Cartridge.
The Staple Top Position Sensor (PI21) is used to determine whether staples are pushed up to the top of the
Staple Cartridge.
The Finisher Controller circuit does not drive the Staple/Fold Motor (M7) unless the staple safety switch
(MS3) is ON (the Swing Guide is closed). This assures safety in case where you happen to put your finger
in the stapler.
Fig. 2-028
M7
Fig. 2-029
Ver. 5.2
744
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 2-030 shows the standby position of the Stapler and the stapling position depending on the staple
mode.
a. Front 1-Point Stapling
The Stapler waits at the back. The Stapler moves to and returns from the stapling position for each
stapling operation.
Standby position
Stapler
Feed direction
Stopper
Stapling position
Fig. 2-030
b. Rear 1-Point Stapling
The Stapler waits at the back. The stapling position is the same as the standby position.
Standby position
Stapling position
Stapler
Feed direction
Stopper
Fig. 2-031
Ver. 5.2
745
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Stapler
Stapling position
Stopper
Feed direction
Stapling position
Fig. 2-032
d. Middle 2-Point Stapling (Bind Mode)
The Stapler waits at the back. The stapler moves to and returns from the stapling position for each
stapling operation. The stapler first staples a paper stack at the rear stapling position and then
staples it at the front stapling position.
Standby position
Stapler
Stapling position
Stopper
Feed direction
Stapling position
Fig. 2-033
Ver. 5.2
746
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Start Signal
Host Machine Delivery Signal
Staple
???
360msec
CCW rotation
Fig. 2-034
Ver. 5.2
747
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Machine has a delivery tray in the Finisher Unit and a bind tray in the Saddle Unit.
The Bind Tray in the Saddle Unit is of the fixed type and all the folded paper stacks are delivered to this tray.
This tray has a bind tray sensor (PI13) to detect presence/absence of paper.
The Delivery Tray in the Finisher Unit is moved up and down using a shift motor (M6).
The Finisher has a tray paper sensor (PI8) to detect presence/absence of paper on the Stack Tray.
The Home Position Sensor of the Delivery Tray is detected by the Paper Surface Sensor (PI19). When
paper has already been stacked on the Delivery Tray, the home position is on the top surface of the stacked
paper. When paper has not yet been stacked on the Delivery Tray, the home position is at the position
where the edge of the Delivery Tray is detected. At power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Shift
Motor (M6) to return the Delivery Tray to the home position.
When the paper coming from the Processing Tray is stacked on the Delivery Tray, the Shift Motor is driven
a specified number of pulses, causing the Delivery Tray to descend. Clock pulses are detected by the Shift
Motor Clock Sensor (PI17). Then, the Delivery Tray returns to the home position for the next stacking
operation.
The upper limit of the Delivery Tray is detected by the Shift Upper Limit Sensor (PI15). When the Shift
Upper Limit Sensor (PI15) is turned ON, the Finisher Controller PCB stops the Shift Motor (M6) that is
ascending.
The lower limit of the Delivery Tray is detected by the Shift Lower Limit Sensor (PI16). When the Shift Lower
Limit Sensor (PI16) is turned ON, the Finisher Controller PCB stops the Shift Motor (M6) that is descending.
The Finisher Unit has a full stack sensor (PI24) to detect overstacking of large-size or mixed paper
according to the stack height.
Fig. 2-035
Ver. 5.2
748
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
The Machine stitches a stack of sheets (middle 2-point), then folds the stack in two in the Finisher.
These operations are controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB.
The Finisher Controller PCB is controlled by the commands from the Host Machine.
2) Stitching
1) Paper feed-in
3) Stack feed
4) Folding/delivery
Fig. 2-036
Ver. 5.2
749
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
a. Paper Feed-in
After being aligned on the Processing Tray, a stack of sheets is sandwiched between the Stack
Delivery Rollers. As the Stack Delivery Rollers rotate, the stack is fed toward the Saddle Unit.
Stack Delivery Roller (Upper)
Paper Stack
Fig. 2-037
b. Stitching
When the center of the paper stack (stitching position) reaches the stapler's staple position, the
Stapler stitches the paper stack.
When only one sheet is fed from the Host Machine, the next step (stack feed) is performed without
performing the stitching operation.
Staple
Stapler (Upper)
Stapler (Lower)
Fig. 2-038
Ver. 5.2
750
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
c. Stack Feed
The Stack Feed Rollers feed the paper stack to the stack folding/delivery position where the center
of the stack (stitched position) is level with the Paper Pushing Plate and Paper Folding Roller's nip
part.
Fig. 2-039
d. Folding / Delivery
The Paper Pushing Plate pushes in the center of the paper stack to feed it toward the Paper Fold
Rollers. Then, the Paper Fold Rollers and Bind Delivery Rollers deliver the paper stack to the Bind
Tray.
Fig. 2-040
Ver. 5.2
751
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
The paper feed system feeds a stack of sheets (coming from the Finisher) to the position where the
center of the paper stack (stitching position) is aligned to the stapler's staple, allowing the next step
(stitching and folding) to be performed.
When sheets of paper have been stacked and aligned on the Processing Tray, the Paddle Motor (M2)
rotates in the reverse direction, causing the Swing Guide to descend. As the Swing Guide descends,
the paper stack is sandwiched between the Upper and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers. The Delivery
Motor (M3) rotates in the reverse direction, feeding the paper stack toward the Saddle Unit. When the
leading edge of the paper stack reaches the Folding Position Sensor (PI10), the Finisher Controller
PCB drives the Delivery Motor a specified number of motor pulses to stop the center of the paper stack
(stitching position) at the stapler's staple position. Before the paper stack passes through the Stack
Feed Rollers, the Feed Motor (M1) is driven to rotate the Stack Feed Roller (lower) so that the leading
edge of the paper stack is not bent.
Stack Delivery Roller (Upper)
Paper stack
Fig. 2-041
Ver. 5.2
752
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
The stack feed system feeds the stitched paper stack to the folding position.
When stitching is complete, the Feed Motor (M2) rotates, causing the Stack Feed Roller (upper) to
descend. The paper stack is sandwiched between the Stack Feed Rollers. Then, the Bind Clutch (CL1)
is turned ON to rotate the Feed Motor (M2) in the forward direction, thus feeding the paper stack to the
folding position. The feed amount is equivalent to the number of pulses used to drive the Feed Motor
(M2) unit the paper stack reaches the folding position.
Fe
ed
Am
ou
nt
Fig. 2-042
Ver. 5.2
753
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
The paper fold mechanism consists of a Guide Plate, Paper Fold Rollers, and a Paper Pushing Plate.
The Guide Plate, Paper Fold Rollers, and Paper Pushing Plate are driven by the Staple/Fold Motor
(M7). The drive force is transferred with a combination of gears and cams. Motor operation is
monitored by the Staple/Fold Motor Lock Sensor (PI14).
Until the paper stack reaches the folding position, the Guide Plate covers the Paper Fold Rollers to act
as a paper path through which a paper stack is fed to the Saddle Unit and to prevent a paper stack
from touching the rollers.
A Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11) is provided to detect the positions of the Paper Fold Rollers
and Paper Pushing Plate.
The paper stack folded in two by the Paper Fold Rollers is delivered by Bind Delivery Rollers.
The Bind Delivery Rollers are also driven by the Staple/Fold Motor (M7).
A Bind Tray Sensor (PI13) is provided on the Bind Tray to detect presence/absence of a paper stack;
however, it is not used to detect a jam.
2. Paper Folding
Paper is folded using paper fold rollers and a paper pushing plate.
Almost concurrently with the start of roller rotation, the Paper Pushing Plate starts operating to push
the paper stack into the gap between the Paper Fold Rollers. When the paper stack is fed about 10 mm
with the rotation of the Paper Fold Rollers, the Paper Pushing Plate returns to the home position. Then,
the paper stack is delivered to the Bind Tray using the Paper Fold Rollers and Bind Delivery Rollers.
Half the entire surface of each paper fold roller is uncovered excluding the central area and the area at
the left and right ends. The uncovered surface of the Upper Paper Fold Roller comes in touch with the
uncovered surface of the Lower Paper Fold Roller only at the center and left and right ends, allowing a
paper stack to be fed without causing creases. The other half of the Upper Paper Fold Roller that is
covered comes in touch with the other half of the Lower Paper Fold Roller that is also covered, allowing
a paper stack to be folded while being fed.
Sensor Flag
Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11)
Cam
Paper Pushing Plate
Paper stack
Staple/Fold
Motor
M7
Fig. 2-043
Ver. 5.2
754
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Folding
Home Position Sensor (PI11)
Paper Pushing Plate
Staple/Fold M7
Motor
Paper stack
Fig. 2-044
[Paper Folding Start Position]
Paper Stack
Inlet
Fig. 2-045
Ver. 5.2
755
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Staple
?????
13571msec
50msec
CW rotation
CCW rotation
Fig. 2-046
Ver. 5.2
756
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
The Punch Unit is an option and is designed for installation to the Pickup Assembly of the Finisher. The
Punch Unit is not equipped with a paper feeding mechanism, and the sheets from the Host Machine
move through the Punch Unit and then the feed system of the Finisher.
When the trailing edge of a sheet from the Host Machine reaches the Punch Unit, the sheet is stopped
once, and the Punch Shaft is rotated to punch a hole along the trailing edge. These operations are
controlled with various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB as well as the commands from the
Punch Controller PCB.
Punch Drive System
Horizontal Registration
Drive System
Punch Controller
PCB
Fig. 2-047
Ver. 5.2
757
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
The Punch Unit is located in the pickup assembly of the Finisher, and is used to punch holes in sheets
that have been sent from the Host Machine and stopped inside it. When the trailing edge of a sheet
reaches the Punch Unit, the Inlet Roller of the Finisher Assembly stops the sheet to punch a hole along
the trailing edge of the sheet.
The Punch Unit consists of a Die and Hole Puncher (Punch Blade).
The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch Motor (M1P). It is attached to the Eccentric Cam of the Punch
Shaft, and the rotation of the Punch Shaft is converted into reciprocating motion for punching
operation.
The Punch Motor (M1P) is a DC motor. The home position of the Punch Shaft is detected by the Punch
Home Position Sensor (PI1P). To make sure that the Punch Motor, which is a DC motor, stops exactly
at its home position, the Punch Motor is stopped in relation to the count of the clock pulses kept by the
Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI3P).
A single punching operation is executed by rotating punch shaft 180 from its home position.
As many as five light-receiving transistors (Photo Sensor PCB) are mounted over the inlet paper path
of the Punch Unit; on the other hand, as many as five LEDs (LED PCB) are mounted under the path,
together serving as five Sensors. The Frontmost Sensor (LED5, PT5) is used to detect the training
edge of sheets, and the remaining four (LED1 through LED4, PT1 through PTR4) are used as
Horizontal Registration Sensors to detect the rear position of sheets when punching holes.
The Punch Motor, Punch Unit, and Sensors make up the Punch Slide Unit, which moves to the Front/
Rear to suit the selected paper size. The movement to the Front/Rear is driven by the Horizontal
Registration Motor (M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the Horizontal
Registration Home Position Sensor (PI2P), and the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is a Stepping
Motor.
The Punch Motor and Horizontal Registration Motor are controlled with various commands from the
Finisher Controller PCB as well as the commands from the Punch Controller PCB.
The waste paper occurring as the result of punching is collected in the Waste Paper Case. The case is
monitored by the LED121 on the Waste Full LED PCB and PT131 on the Waste Full Photo Sensor
PCB.
Ver. 5.2
758
JAN 2006
Ver. 5.2
LED121
5
4
2
759
Punch Home Position (PI1P)
Detection Signal PUNCHHP
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3
PT1
3
LED1
PT131
Fig. 2-048
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Punching Operation
The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch Motor (M1P). The home position for the Hole Puncher is
detected by the Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P).
The Punch Unit comes in three types, selected to suit the country of installation: 2-hole (Punch Unit
DA-SP41-AZ), 2- and 3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU), or 4-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB).
The 2-hole and 4-hole types punch a hole when the Punch Shaft is rotated 180 from the home
position, causing the punch to make a single round trip. The 2-/3-hole type punches a hole, but the
circumference of the Punch Shaft is divided into two (half for 2-hole and the other half for 3-hole).
a. 2-Hole, 4-Hole Type
The home position is identified when the Punch Home Position is ON. The punching operation for
the first sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180 and the Punch Home Position Sensor
goes ON; the punching operation for the second sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180
in reverse and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON.
The punching operation takes place as follows when making a hole in two sheets of paper.
1) A hole is punched along the trailing edge of the 1st sheet.
Sensor Flag
Punch Home Position
Sensor (PI1P)
Punch Shaft
Eccentric Cam
Die
Hole
Puncher
Paper
Die
(Punch Shaft at
Rest/Home Position)
Waste Paper
(Punch Shaft CW Rotation (Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 180 /
by 90 /Hole Made)
Punching operation Ends)
Fig. 2-049
2) A hole is made along the trailing edge of the 2nd sheet.
Fig. 2-050
Ver. 5.2
760
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
b. 2-/3-Hole Type
The home position is identified when the Punch Home Position Sensor is ON. To make two holes,
the punching operation for the first sheet ends when the Punch Shaft rotates 180 (half
circumference) and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON. At this time, the 3-Hole Puncher
makes a single round trip in escape direction (moving up the Hole Puncher) on a half circumference
of the Punch Shaft.
The punching operation for the second sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180 counterclockwise and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON (half circumference). At this time, the 3Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape direction (moving up the Hole Puncher) on the
other half circumference of the Punch Shaft.
The punching operation takes place as follows when making two holes in two sheets of paper:
1) A hole is made along the trailing edge of the 1st sheet.
Sensor Flag
Punch Home Position
Sensor (PI1P)
Punch Shaft
Eccentric Cam
Die
Hole
Puncher
Paper
Die
Waste Paper
Fig. 2-051
While two holes are being made, the 3-Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape
direction.
Fig. 2-052
2) Holes are made along the trailing edge of the 2nd sheet.
Fig. 2-053
Ver. 5.2
761
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
While two hole are being made, the 3-Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape direction
(moving up the Hole Puncher).
Fig. 2-054
3. Horizontal Registration Operation
The horizontal registration drive for the Punch Slide Unit is provided by the Horizontal Registration
Motor (M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the Horizontal Registration
Home Position Sensor (PI2P). The Punch Slide Unit detects the trailing edge of sheets using the
Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PT5) and the Horizontal Registration Sensors (LED1 through 4, SREG1
through 4), and causes a move to a specific position matching the trailing edge of each sheet (in
relation to the size of the sheet).
The horizontal registration operation takes place as follows:
1) When the leading edge of a sheet from the Host Machine is detected by the Trailing Edge Sensor
(LED5, PT5), the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) starts to move the Punch Slide Unit toward
the front.
(Direction of
Paper Delivery)
Paper
Fig. 2-055
Ver. 5.2
762
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2) When the Horizontal Registration Sensor (LED1 though 4, PT1 through) suited to the paper size
signal from the Host Machine detects the rear edge of the sheet, the Horizontal Registration Motor
(M2P) causes a farther move to a specific position, and stops the Punch Slide Unit.
Horizontal Registration Sensor (LED1, PT1);
used to detect the edge of sheets of A3, A4,
LTR, 279x432 (11"x17").
Horizontal Registration Sensor 2 (LED2, PT2);
used to detect the edge of sheets of B4, B5,
LTR-R, LGL.
Horizontal Registration Sensor 3 (LED3, PT3);
used to detect the edge of sheets of A4-R.
Horizontal Registration Sensor 4 (LED4, PT4);
used to detect the edge of sheets of B5-R.
Fig. 2-056
3) When the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PT5) detects the trailing edge of the sheet, the drive of the
Feed Motor (M2) is stopped, thereby stopping the sheet. Then, the Punch Motor (M1P) is driven to
punch holes in the sheet.
Punch
Fig. 2-057
4) When the punching operation ends, the Feed Motor (M2) of the Fisher Unit is driven and, at the
same time, the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is rotated in reverse to return the Punch Slide
Unit to its home position.
5) For each sheet that arrives in succession, the Punch Slide Unit is returned to its home position, and
is caused to repeat steps 1 through 4.
Trailing Edge Sensor
(LED5, PT5)
Horizontal Registration
Sensor (LED1~4, PT1~4)
Punch Home Position
Sensor (PI1P)
Horizontal Registration Home
Position Sensor (PI2P)
Horizontal Registration
Motor (M2P)
Punch Motor (M1P)
Feed Motor (M2)
CW Rotation
CCW Rotation
Fig. 2-058
Ver. 5.2
763
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher Controller PCB is programmed to check for jams in the Finisher/
Saddle/Puncher (option) at such times as set in advance. It identifies a jam in reference to the presence/
absence of paper at a specific sensor. If a jam is found, the Finisher Controller PCB communicates the
nature of the jam to the Host Machine in the form of a code (which may be checked in service mode of the
Host Machine).
PI1
PI10
Fig. 2-059
1. Inlet Sensor Delay Jam (1011)
If the Inlet Sensor does not detect the paper 3 times the specified period of time after the paper out
signal was sent from the hooked-up machine.
Host machine delivery signal
approx. 1.5sec.
approx. 1.5sec.
Jam check
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Jam check
Normal
Jam
Fig. 2-060
2. Inlet Sensor Stationary Jam (1021)
If the paper does not pass the Inlet Sensor 3 times the specified period of time after the Inlet Sensor
detected the paper's front edge.
approx. 2sec.
approx. 2sec.
Jam check
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Jam check
Normal
Jam
Fig. 2-061
Ver. 5.2
764
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1200 ms
Jam Check
Folding Position
Sensor (PI10)
1200 ms
Jam Check
Folding Position
Sensor (PI10)
Normal
Jam
Fig. 2-062
4. Folding Position Sensor Stationary Jam (1022)
In bind mode, paper does not leave the Holding Position Sensor approximately 10.5 sec after the
Staple/Fold Motor is driven.
Approx. 10.5sec.
Approx. 10.5sec.
Jam Check
Folding Position
Sensor (PI10)
Staple/Fold
Motor (M7)
Jam Check
Normal
Folding Position
Sensor (PI10)
Staple/Fold
Motor (M7)
Jam
Fig. 2-063
5. Door Open Jam (paper present)(1008)
The Finisher is disconnected from its host machine or the Front Door, or the Upper Cover is opened
while the system is in operation (paper on the move).
6. Staple Jam (1006)
The Staple Home Position Sensor (PI19) does not go OFF 600 msec after the Stapler is driven. Or, it
does not return to its home position (where the sensor goes ON).
7. Punch Jam
Paper stuck at punch stapler
Punching not ended 1 second after the punching request signal.
Ver. 5.2
765
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
When the Host Machine is turned on, it supplies the Finisher Controller PCB with two channels of 24
VDC; one is for the motors and clutches, and the other is turned into 5 VDC by the Regulator IC (IC1)
of the Finisher Controller PCB for use by the sensors and ICs on PCBs.
If a punch unit (option) is installed, power is also supplied to the Punch Controller PCB. Some of 24
VDC used to drive motors is cut off when the Joint Switch (MS2), Front Door Switch (MS1), or Stapler
Safety Switch (MS3) is open.
Fig. 2-061 is a block diagram of the power supply system :
Joint Switch
(MS2)
24V
Motor
Motor
24VP
24V
Circuit Breaker
(CB1)
Clutch
Finisher
Controller PCB
Host
Machine
5V
Sensor
(IC1)
24VL
5V
Regulator IC
Logic System
Fig. 2-064
2. Protective Mechanism
A circuit breaker (CB1) is monitored to protect the 24 VDC system sued to drive the motors against
overcurrent. The 24-V system used to drive the Feed Motor (M1), paddle motor (M2), and delivery
motor (M3) is equipped with a fuse that melts in the presence of overcurrent.
Ver. 5.2
766
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
24V
Finisher
Controller
PCB
Motors
5V
5V
Sensors
Logic System
Fig. 2-065
2. Protective Mechanisms
The 24-V system used to drive the Punch Motor (M1P) and the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is
equipped with a built-in fuse that melts in the presence of overcurrent.
Ver. 5.2
767
JAN 2006
11.3.3.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Mechanical Systems
[5]
[6] [2]
[7]
[4]
[3]
Fig. 3-001
1-1. Removing the Delivery Tray
(1) Remove the four Screws [1], and detach the
Delivery Tray [2].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-002
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[4]
Fig. 3-003
Ver. 5.2
768
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[6]
[5]
[5]
Fig. 3-004
[3]
[1]
Fig. 3-005
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-006
Ver. 5.2
769
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[1]
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-007
[6]
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-008
Ver. 5.2
770
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-009
(5) While lifting the Processing Tray Upper Cover
[3], disconnect the Connector [4]; then, detach
the Processing Tray Upper Cover [3].
[3]
[4]
Fig. 3-010
Ver. 5.2
771
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[3]
[1]
Fig. 3-011
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-012
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[3]
Fig. 3-013
(6) Shift the Side Guide [4] lightly to the front, and
free the engagement of the Paper surface
Detecting Lever (rear) [5]; then, detach the Side
Guide [4].
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-014
Ver. 5.2
772
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[5]
[6]
Caution:
Be sure to mount the Side Guide after securely
fitting the Paper Surface Detecting Lever (rear) [5]
in the groove of the Paper Surface Detecting Lever
(middle) [6].
After mounting, push the Paper Surface Detecting
Lever several times to make sure that Side Guide
is mounted securely.
[5]
[6]
Fig. 3-015
Ver. 5.2
773
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-016
Caution:
Do not remove the stapler from the Stapler Frame
Shaft. If removed, the position where the Staple
Driver (Lower Unit of the Stapler) [4] shoots
staples will shift from the position where the Staple
Clincher (Upper Unit of the Stapler) [5] receives
Staples.
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-017
Gear
Timing Belt
Gear
Fig. 3-18
Ver. 5.2
774
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[4]
(1) Detach the Gear Cover [2] from the Staple Driver
[1].
(2) Remove the E-Ring [3] to detach the Side Cover
[5] of the Stapler Clincher [4].
[3]
[5]
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-019
[7]
[8]
[6]
[9]
[11]
[10]
[12]
Fig. 3-020
[15]
[14]
[13]
Fig. 3-021
Ver. 5.2
775
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(7) Turn the Gear [16] to align the round hole in the
Staple Driver Gear with the Round Hole [17] at
the back.
[16]
[17]
Fig. 3-022
(8) Insert a Pin [18] with a diameter of approximately
2 mm (use of a 2 mm Allen wrench is
recommended) in the Round Hole to secure the
Gear.
[18]
Fig. 3-023
[19]
(9) Turn the Gear [19] to align the Round Hole in the
Staple Clincher Cam with the Round Hole [20] at
the back.
[20]
Fig. 3-024
Ver. 5.2
776
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[21]
Fig. 3-025
(11) With the Gears and Cam fixed, install the Timing
Belt [22] on Gears [23] and [24].
[23]
[22]
[24]
Fig. 3-026
[26]
[25]
[27]
Fig. 3-027
[28]
[31]
[29]
[32]
[30]
[33]
Fig. 3-028
Ver. 5.2
777
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-029
[3]
[4]
[5]
Fig. 3-030
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-031
Ver. 5.2
778
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-032
[6]
[7]
[8]
Fig. 3-033
[10]
[9]
[9]
[11]
Fig. 3-034
2-5. Removing the Processing Tray Assembly
(1) Remove the processing Tray Upper Cover.
(See 1-5.)
(2) Remove the Side Guide. (See 1-7.)
(3) Remove 2 Screws [1], and disconnect 5
Connectors [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Fig. 3-035
Ver. 5.2
779
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[4]
[3]
Fig. 3-036
(5) Disconnect 3 Connectors [7].
(6) Release 2 Claws [8] of the harness retainer, and
detach the Motor Harness [9].
[9]
[8]
[7]
Fig. 3-037
Ver. 5.2
780
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(7) Remove the Stop Ring [10], the flange [15], and
detach the Timing Belt [11].
(8) Disconnect the Connector [12], and free the
Harness [14] from the Edge Saddle [13].
[12]
[11]
[14]
[15]
[10]
[13]
Fig. 3-038
(9) Remove 2 Screws [15], and slide the Processing
Tray Assembly [16] to the rear; then, lift it to
detach.
[16]
[15]
Fig. 3-039
Ver. 5.2
781
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[1]
[2]
Fig. 3-040
(3) Detach the Timing Belt [3], and remove 2 Screws
[4].
[4]
[3]
[4]
Fig. 3-041
(4) Separate the Processing Tray Assembly [5] and
the Paddle Assembly [6] as shown.
[6]
[5]
Fig. 3-042
Ver. 5.2
782
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-043
(2) Remove 1 screw [3], and detach the Interface
Retainer [4].
(3) Free the six Harness Retainers [5], and
disconnect the Connector [6].
(4) Free the Harness [7] from the Harness Retainer
[5].
(5) Free the Harness [7] from the Edge Saddle [8];
then, disconnect the two Connectors [9].
[9]
[8]
[7]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[3]
[7]
[5]
[5]
[4] [5] [7]
Fig. 3-044
[14]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[10]
Fig. 3-045
Ver. 5.2
783
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[15]
[16]
[17]
Fig. 3-046
(10) Disconnect 2 Connectors [18], and free the
Harness [20] from the Edge Saddle [19].
[18]
[20]
[18]
[19]
Fig. 3-047
(11) Remove 3 Screws [21].
[21]
[21]
[21]
Fig. 3-048
Ver. 5.2
784
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[22]
[23]
Fig. 3-049
[3]
[3]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[6]
[5]
Fig. 3-050
Ver. 5.2
785
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[1] [3]
[2]
Fig. 3-051
(6) Remove 3 Screws [4].
[4]
Fig. 3-052
Ver. 5.2
786
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[8]
(7) Remove the Gear [5], and detach the Gear [6]
while spreading the Claw.
(8) Remove the Stop Ring [7], and detach the
Bushing [8].
(9) Remove 1 Screws [9], and detach the Inlet
Sensor [10].
(10) Remove the Lower Paper Guide [11].
[5]
[9]
[10]
[7]
[6]
[11]
Fig. 3-053
(11) Remove the Feed Roller [12].
[12]
Fig. 3-054
[1]
Fig. 3-055
Ver. 5.2
787
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-056
(4) Push up the Stack Delivery Roller (upper) [4]
from below to free the Stack Deliver Roller
(upper) [4] from the Shaft [5].
[4]
[5]
Fig. 3-057
[6]
[4]
Fig. 3-058
Ver. 5.2
788
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[1]
Fig. 3-059
(3) Turn the Gear [2] in the direction of the arrow to
move up the Stack Delivery Roller Assembly
(upper) [3].
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-060
(4) Push up the Safety Guide [4] from below to free
one side of the Safety Guide [4] from the Shaft
[5].
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-061
Ver. 5.2
789
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[4]
[5]
Fig. 3-062
[1]
Fig. 3-063
[1]
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-064
(3) Remove the Processing Tray Stopper [4].
[4]
Fig. 3-065
Ver. 5.2
790
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[5]
[7]
[6]
Fig. 3-066
(5) Remove 1 Screw [8]; then, while freeing the
Claw [9], detach the Paper Guide (rear) [10].
[8]
[10]
[9]
Fig. 3-067
(6) Remove 2 Stop Rings [11]; then, move 2
Bushings [12] to the inside.
[12]
[11]
[11]
[12]
Fig. 3-068
(7) Remove 4 Screws [13]; then, lift the Stack
Delivery Roller Assembly (lower) [14] to detach.
[13]
[13]
[14]
Fig. 3-069
Ver. 5.2
791
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[16]
[15]
Fig. 3-070
Caution:
Be sure to mount them so that the Edges [17] of
the Claws of the Delivery Belts are flush.
[17]
Fig. 3-071
11.3.3.1.3. PCBs
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[4]
Fig. 3-072
3-2. Removing the Slide Home Position PCB
(1) Open the Front Door [1], and turn the Tab [2] on
the stapler slide in the direction of the arrow to
slide the Stapler to the frontmost point.
(2) Remove the Stapler Unit. (See 2-1.)
[1]
[2]
Fig. 3-073
Ver. 5.2
792
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[4]
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-074
[2]
[6]
[7]
Fig. 3-075
[8]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[9]
Fig. 3-076
Ver. 5.2
793
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[2]
[1]
[3]
Fig. 3-077
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[5]
Fig. 3-078
[1]
[2]
Fig. 3-079
[3]
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-080
Ver. 5.2
794
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[6]
[8]
[7]
Fig. 3-081
(7) Remove 1 Screw [9] and Washer [10].
(8) Disconnect the Connector [11].
(9) Remove 2 Screws [12] to detach the Base Cover
[13].
[9]
[10]
[13]
[11]
[12]
Fig. 3-082
Ver. 5.2
795
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[15]
[14]
[14]
[16]
[14]
Fig. 3-083
(11) Remove the Punch Unit [18] from the Horizontal
Registration Motor Assembly [17].
[17]
[18]
Fig. 3-084
11.3.3.2.2. PCBs
[3]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-085
Ver. 5.2
796
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-086
(4) Disconnect the Connector [5] to remove the
Photosensor PCB [6].
[6]
[5]
Fig. 3-087
[1]
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-088
Ver. 5.2
797
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[5]
[8]
[6]
[7]
Fig. 3-089
[10]
[9]
[11]
Fig. 3-090
Ver. 5.2
798
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[1]
Fig. 3-091
(3) Disconnect the Connector [3] to remove the
Waste-full Photosensor PCB [4].
[3]
[4]
Fig. 3-092
2-5. Removing the Waste Full LED PCB
(1) Remove 1 Screw [1].
(2) Disconnect the Connector [2] to remove the
Waste-full LED PCB [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
Fig. 3-093
Ver. 5.2
799
JAN 2006
11.3.4.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Part Name
Stapler
Part No.
4G1-4268-000
Qty
1
Expected Life
300,000 operations
Remarks
A single cartridge is
good for about 5,000
operations.
Table. 4-001
Description
Remarks
Wiping with water.
Cleaning
Dry wiping.
Table. 4-002
Ver. 5.2
800
JAN 2006
11.3.5.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Troubleshooting
Fig. 5-001
2) Adjust the folding position by pressing the PSW1 or PSW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB a
required number of times. Pressing the switch once moves the folding position about 0.16mm.
To move the folding position in the "-" direction, press the PSW1.
To move the folding position in the "+" direction, press the PSW2.
Turn on Points 1, 4 and 8 of SW1 on the circuit board first and then press PSW1 and PWS2 at
once, and settings can be cleared.
- direction
+ direction
Fig. 5-002
3) When adjustment of the folding position is complete, set all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher
Controller PCB to OFF.
4) Enter the bind mode of the Host Machine and check whether the folding position is adjusted
properly. If adjusted improperly, adjust the folding position again (Adjustable range 5 mm).
Ver. 5.2
801
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 5-003
2) Adjust the stapling position by pressing the PSW1 or PSW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB a
required number of times. Pressing the switch once moves the stapling position about 0.14mm.
To move the stapling position in the "-" direction, press the PSW1.
To move the stapling position in the "+" direction, press the PSW2.
Turn on Points 1, 4 of SW1 on the circuit board first and then press the PSW1 and PSW2 at the
same time clears the adjustment value.
- direction
+ direction
Fig. 5-004
3) When adjustment of the stapling position is complete, set all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher
Controller PCB to OFF.
4) Enter the bind mode of the Host Machine and check whether the stapling position is adjusted
properly. If adjusted improperly, adjust the stapling position again.
Ver. 5.2
802
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 5-005
2) Press SW1002 or SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB. A press will automatically adjust the
sensor output.
The adjustment is over when all LEDs on the Punch Controller PCB are ON: LED1001, LED1002,
LED1003.
3) Shift all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF.
2. Registering the Number of Punch Hole
Perform the following to register the type of punch unit (number of holes) used to the IC on the Punch
Controller PCB for identification by the Finisher. Be sure to register the type whenever you have
replaced the Punch Controller PCB.
1) Set bits 1 through 4 on the DIPSW1001 on the Punch Controller PCB as follows :
ON
Fig. 5-006
2) Press SW1002 on the Punch Controller PCB to select the appropriate number of punch holes.
Each press on SW1002 moves the selection through the following (repeatedly from top to bottom).
Number of Punch Hole
2 holes (Punch Unit DA-SP41-AZ)
2 / 3 holes (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU)
4 holes (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB)
LED1001
ON
ON
OFF
LED1002
OFF
ON
ON
LED1003
OFF
OFF
OFF
Table 5-001
3) Press SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB twice. The presses will store the selected number of
punch holes on the Punch Controller PCB.
A single press on SW1003 will cause the LED indication to flash; another press on SW1003 will
cause the indication to remain ON to indicate the end of registration.
4) Shift all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF.
Ver. 5.2
803
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 5-007
3) Press SW1002 and SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB at the same time.
The presses will initialize the EEP-ROM. At the end, all LEDs (LED1001, LED1002, LED1003) will
go ON.
4) Adjust the sensor output, and store the number of punch holes.
Ver. 5.2
804
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
MS3
PI14
PI16
PI24
PI4
MS1
PI23
PI17
PI22
PI13
PI19
PI20
PI21
MS2
PI18
PI15
PI3
PI2
PI5
PI7
PI8
PI12
PI1
CL1
PI9
PI6
PI11
PI10
Fig. 5-008
Ver. 5.2
805
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Name
Photo-interrupters
Micro Switch
Clutch
Notation
PI1
PI2
PI3
PI4
PI5
PI6
PI7
PI8
PI9
PI10
PI11
PI12
PI13
PI14
PI15
PI16
PI17
PI18
PI19
PI20
PI21
PI22
PI23
PI24
MS1
MS2
MS3
CL1
Description
Inlet paper detection
Paddle home position detection
Stack roller home position detection
Aligning plate home position (front) detection
Aligning plate home position (rear) detection
Processing tray paper detection
Delivery belt home position detection
Tray paper detection
Paper surface detection
Folding position detection
Folding home position detection
Folding roller home position detection
Bind tray paper detection
Stapler / fold motor clock detection
Shift upper limit detection
Shift lower limit detection
Shift motor clock detection
Slide home position detection (inside stapler)
Stapler drive home position detection (inside stapler)
Staple detection (inside stapler)
Staple top position detection (in stapler)
Front door open detection
Upper cover open detection
Paper full detection
Front door open detection
Joint open detection
Staple safety detection
Bind clutch
Table 5-002
Ver. 5.2
806
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Motor PCBs
M1
M2
M8
M3
M7
M5
M4
[1]
M6
Fig. 5-009
Ver. 5.2
807
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Name
Motor
Finisher Controller
PCB
Notation
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
[1]
Description
Paddle Motor
Feed Motor
Delivery Motor
Alignment Motor (front)
Alignment Motor (rear)
Shift Motor
Staple / Fold Motor
Slide Motor
Finisher Control
Table 5-003
Ver. 5.2
808
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PI3P
PI1P
PI2P
Fig. 5-010
Name
Photo-interrupters
Notation
PI1P
PI2P
PI3P
Description
Puncher home position detection
Horizontal registration home position detection
Punch motor clock detection
Table 5-004
Ver. 5.2
809
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Motors
M1
M2
Fig. 5-011
Name
Motor
Notation
M1P
M2P
Description
Punch Motor
Horizontal Registration Motor
Table 5-005
Ver. 5.2
810
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. PCBs
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[5]
Fig. 5-012
Ref.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Name
Punch Controller PCB
Photosensor PCB
LED PCB
Waste Full Photosensor PCB
Waste Full LED PCB
Table 5-006
Ver. 5.2
811
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Of the LEDs and check pins used in the Machine, those needed during servicing in the field are discussed.
Caution:
Do not touch the check pins not found in the list herein. They are exclusively for factory use, and require
special tools and a high degree of accuracy.
1
1
CN10
12
CN3
6
CN13
10
CB1
CN7
CN6
1
2
1 CN18
CN16
1
CN15
12
1 5
CN19
CN12
CN5
CN2
15
1 1
5
CN14
CN4
CN1
CN8
12
CN17
6
SW1
CN11
Fig. 5-013
Switch
SW1
PSW1
PSW2
PSW3
Description
Folding position adjustment, middle 2-point stapling adjustment etc.
Folding position adjustment, middle 2-point stapling adjustment etc.
Folding position adjustment, middle 2-point stapling adjustment etc.
Factory mode
Table 5-007
Ver. 5.2
812
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
J1005
91
4
13
SW1001
SW1002
SW1003
LED1001
LED1002
LED1003
J1003
1
J1002
J1001
51
2
1 1
J1006
J1007
J1004
10 1
Fig. 5-014
Switch
SW1001
SW1002
SW1003
Description
Punch hole count registration / sensor output adjustment, etc.
Punch hole count registration / sensor output adjustment, etc.
Punch hole count registration / sensor output adjustment, etc.
Table 5-008
Ver. 5.2
813
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.5.4. Troubleshooting
11.3.5.4.1. Troubleshooting (Finisher / Saddle Unit)
1. E7-26, Finisher Unit Back-Up Memory Fault
Ver. 5.2
814
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
815
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
816
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
817
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
818
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
819
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Waste Full Sensor (Waste Full Photo Sensor PCB / Waste Full LED PCB)
1) Check the waste full sensor. Is the sensor normal?
NO : Replace the sensor.
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the punch controller PCB and the waste full sensor normal?
NO : Correct the wring.
Punch Controller PCB, Finisher Controller PCB
3) Try replacing the punch controller PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO : Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
Table 5-030
6. E7-29, Horizontal Registration Motor Fault
Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI2P)
1) Check the horizontal registration home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
NO : Replace the sensor.
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the horizontal registration
home position sensor normal?
NO : Correct the wring.
Horizontal Registration Mechanism, Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P)
3) Is there a fault in the horizontal registration mechanism?
YES: Correct the horizontal registration mechanism.
NO : Replace the horizontal registration motor.
Punch Controller PCB, Finisher Controller PCB
4) Try replacing the punch controller PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO : Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
Table 5-031
Ver. 5.2
820
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Error
Condition
Timing of
Detection
Monitored at all
times
Operation
Resetting
Set the stapler.
Table 5-034
Ver. 5.2
821
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Error
Punch Waste
Paper Full
Punch Waste
Paper Excess
(Overflow)
Condition
Timing of
Detection
During punching.
The amount of
waste paper in the
waste case has
reached the limit.
The amount of
During punching.
waste paper in the
waste case has
exceeded the limit.
Operation
Resetting
Normal operation
will continue.
Punching will be
disabled.
Table 5-035
Ver. 5.2
822
JAN 2006
11.3.6.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Appendix
Ver. 5.2
823
JAN 2006
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.2
824
JAN 2006
Ver. 5.2
PI23
Front Door
Sensor
PI5
Folding
Position
Sensor
825
Folding
Stack Feed
Home Position Roller (Upper)
Sensor
Home Position
Sensor
PI12
PI16
PI15
PI2
Shift
Limit
Sensor
Shift Upper
Limit
Sensor
Paddle Home
Position
Sensor
DC+5V
SGND
PDL_HP
PI3
DC+5V
SGND
PAPER_F
PI14
CN73-3
CN73-2
CN73-1
DC+5V
SGND
BDL_ROL_HP
PI17
Shift Motor
Clock
Sensor
CN55-3
CN55-2
CN55-1
PI13
Bind Tray
Sensor
DC+5V
BIND_CLK
DC+5V
PI1
Inlet
Sensor
CN52-3
CN52-2
CN52-1
CN51-3
CN51-2
CN51-1
DC+5V
SGND
SIFT_UPLMT
DC+5V
SGND
SIFT_DNLMT
CN49-3
CN49-2
CN49-1
CN50-3
CN50-2
CN50-1
DC+5V
SGND
SIFT_CLK
DC+5V
SGND
BIND_EMPS
CN48-3
CN48-2
CN48-1
CN47-3
CN47-2
CN47-1
DC+5V
SGND
ENT_S
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
10
11
12
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN54-1
CN54-2
CN54-3
CN43-1
CN43-2
CN43-3
CN38-1
CN38-2
CN38-3
CN38-4
CN38-5
CN38-6
CN38-7
CN38-8
CN38-9
CN34-1
CN34-2
CN34-3
CN29-1
CN29-2
CN29-3
CN29-4
CN29-5
CN29-6
CN29-7
CN29-8
CN29-9
CN33-3
CN33-2
CN33-1
CN28-9
CN28-8
CN28-7
CN28-6
CN28-5
CN28-4
CN28-3
CN28-2
CN28-1
CN42-3
CN42-2
CN42-1
DC+5V
CN53-3
SGND
CN53-2
BDL_ROL_HP CN53-1
DC+5V
SGND
ELT_S
CN37-9
DC+5V
CN37-8
BIND_P
BIND_L
CN37-7
DC+5V
CN37-6
SGND
CN37-5
BIND_HP
CN37-4
DC+5V
CN37-3
SGND
CN37-2
BIND_ROL_HP CN37-1
DC+5V
SGND
LVL_S
DC+5V
SGND
ADJ_TRAY_S
DC+5V
SGND
EJCT_BLT_HP
DC+5V
SGND
TRY_EMPS
To Host
Machine
10
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
SGND
DC+24VP
RXD
TXD
SGND
N.C.
SGND
CN20A-1
CN20A-2
CN20A-3
CN20A-4
CN20A-5
CN20A-6
CN20A-7
CN20B-1
CN20B-2
CN20B-3
CN20B-4
CN20B-5
CN20B-6
CN20B-7
CN20B-8
FGND
PGND
DC+24VP
N.C.
CN20-1
CN20-2
CN20-3
CN20-4
CN20A-1
CN20A-2
CN20A-3
CN20A-4
CN20A-5
CN20A-6
CN20A-7
CN20-1
CN20-2
CN20-3
CN20-4
4
3
5
6
8
9
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4
5
6
7
8
CN5-1
CN5-2
CN5-3
CN5-4
CN5-5
CN5-6
CN5-7
CN5-8
CN5-9
CN5-10
CN5-11
CN5-12
CN5-13
CN5-14
CN5-15
CN4-1
CN4-2
CN4-3
CN4-4
CN4-5
CN4-6
CN4-7
CN4-8
CN4-9
CN2-1
CN2-2
CN2-3
CN2-4
CN2-5
CN2-6
CN2-7
CN1-1
CN1-2
CN1-3
SGND
TXD2
RXD2
DSR
DTR
RESET
DC+5V
SGND
PAPER_F
DC+5V
SGND
PDL_HP
SGND
BIND_CLK
DC+5V
DC+5V
SGND
BDL_ROL_HP
DC+5V
SGND
BIND_EMPS
DC+5V
SGND
SIFT_CLK
DC+5V
SGND
SIFT_DNLMT
DC+5V
SGND
SIFT_UPLMT
CN17-1
CN17-2
CN17-3
CN17-4
CN17-5
CN17-6
CN19-1
CN19-2
CN19-3
CN9-1
CN9-2
CN9-3
CN9-4
CN9-5
CN9-6
CN9-7
CN9-8
CN9-9
CN15-1
CN15-2
CN15-3
CN15-4
CN15-5
CN15-6
CN15-7
CN15-8
CN15-9
CN15-10
CN15-11
CN15-12
CN16-1
DC+5V
CN16-2
BIND_P
BIND_L
CN16-3
DC+5V
CN16-4
SGND
CN16-5
BIND_HP
CN16-6
DC+5V
CN16-7
SGND
CN16-8
BIND_ROL_HP CN16-9
DC+5V
CN16-10
SGND
CN16-11
ENT_S
CN16-12
DC+5V
SGND
ADJ_TRAY_S
DC+5V
SGND
EJCT_BLT_HP
DC+5V
SGND
TRY_EMPS
DC+5V
SGND
LVL_S
DC+5V
SGND
RJOG_HP
DC+5V
SGND
FJOG_HP
DC+5V
SGND
TOPCOV_S
DC+5V
SGND
FDOOR_S
DC+24VL
N.C.
SGND
SGND
TXD
SGND
RXD
DC+24V
N.C.
PGND
+24V
FJOGMTR_A
FJOGMTR_*A
FJOGMTR_B
FJOGMTR_*B
+24V
RJOGMTR_A
RJOGMTR_*A
RJOGMTR_B
RJOGMTR_*B
CN3-1
CN3-2
CN3-3
CN3-4
CN3-5
CN3-6
CN3-7
CN3-8
CN3-9
CN3-10
CN14-1
CN14-2
CN14-3
CN14-4
CN14-5
CN12-1
CN12-2
CN12-3
CN12-4
CN12-5
CN7-1
CN7-2
CN7-3
CN7-4
CN7-5
CN7-6
CN7-7
CN11-1
CN11-2
CN11-3
CN11-4
CN11-5
CN11-6
CN11-7
CN18-1
CN18-2
CN6-1
CN6-2
CN6-3
CN6-4
PNCH_+5V
PNCH_SGND
PNCH_PGND
N.C.
PNCH_+24V
PNCH_TXD
SGND
PNCH_RXD
PNCH_CNCT
PNCH_TM_S
+24V
+24V
SLIDMTR_A
SLIDMTR_*A
SLIDMTR_B
SLIDMTR_*B
N.C.
STPL_CNCT
DC+5V
SLID_HP
STPL_HP
HOOK_S
SELF_P
SGND
+24V
B_CLU
SIFTMTR_1
SIFTMTR_0
BINDMTR_1
BINDMTR_0
STPLSAFE_SW
FRONT_SW
FRONT_SW
JOINT_SW
JOINT_SW
DC+24VP
+24V
+24V
EJCTMTR_A
EJCTMTR_*A
EJCTMTR_B
EJCTMTR_*B
CN13-1
CN13-2
CN13-3
CN13-4
CN13-5
CN13-6
CN8-1
CN8-2
CN8-3
CN8-4
CN8-5
CN8-6
+12V
+12V
FEEDMTR_A
FEEDMTR_*A
FEEDMTR_B
FEEDMTR_*B
+24V
+24V
PDLMTR_A
PDLMTR_*A
PDLMTR_B
PDLMTR_*B
CN10-1
CN10-2
CN10-3
CN10-4
CN10-5
CN10-6
CN10-7
CN10-8
CN10-9
CN10-10
CN10-11
CN10-12
12
9
10
11
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
1
2
CN72-2
CN72-1
CN71-2
CN71-1
CN70-2
CN70-1
14
8
9
10
11
12
13
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+24V
B_CLU
1
2
1
2
1
2
SGND
SELF_P
HOOK_S
STPL_HP
SLID_HP
DC+5V
STPL_CNCT
N.C.
+24V
+24V
SLIDMTR_A
SLIDMTR_*A
SLIDMTR_B
SLIDMTR_*B
N.C.
FG
CN72-1
CN72-2
CN71-2
CN71-1
CN70-2
CN70-1
CN72A-1
CN72A-2
CN72A-3
CN72A-4
CN72A-5
CN72A-6
CN72A-7
CN72A-8
CN72B-7
CN72B-6
CN72B-5
CN72B-4
CN72B-3
CN72B-2
CN72B-1
CN72C-1
BINDMTR_1
BINDMTR_0
SIFTMTR_1
SIFTMTR_0
CN72-1
CN72-2
CN72-3
CN72-4
CN72-5
CN72-6
CN72-7
N.C.
CN72-8
CN72-9
CN72-10
CN72-11
CN72-12
CN72-13
CN72-14
CN72-15
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
STPL_HP
Stapler Home
Position Sensor
SLIP HP
Stapler Slide Home
Position Sensor
HOOK S
Hook Sensor
SLIDMTR
Slide Motor (M8)
NO
COM
NO
COM
CN70-2
CN70-1
JOINT_SH
DC+24VP
FDOOR_SH
JOINT_SH
STPLSAFE_SH NO
FDOOR_SH COM
CN65-1
CN65-2
CN65-3
CN65-4
CN65-5
CN63-1
CN63-2
CN63-3
CN63-4
CN63-5
CN59-6
CN59-5
CN59-4
CN59-3
CN59-2
CN59-1
CN57-6
CN57-5
CN57-4
CN57-3
CN57-2
CN57-1
CN56-6
CN56-5
CN56-4
CN56-3
CN56-2
CN56-1
SIFTMTR_1
SIFTMTR_0
CN69-2
CN69-1
CN68-2
CN68-1
CN66-2
CN66-1
+24V
RJOGMTR_A
RJOGMTR_*A
RJOGMTR_B
RJOGMTR_*B
+24V
FJOGMTR_A
FJOGMTR_*A
FJOGMTR_B
FJOGMTR_*B
+24V
+24V
EJCTMTR_A
EJCTMTR_*A
EJCTMTR_B
EJCTMTR_*B
+24V
+24V
PDLMTR_A
PDLMTR_*A
PDLMTR_B
PDLMTR_*B
+12V
+12V
FEEDMTR_A
FEEDMTR_*A
FEEDMTR_B
FEEDMTR_*B
CN70-2
CN70-1
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN64-5
CN64-4
CN64-3
CN64-2
CN64-1
CN62-5
CN62-4
CN62-3
CN62-2
CN62-1
CN59-1
CN59-2
CN59-3
CN59-4
CN59-5
CN59-6
CN57-1
CN57-2
CN57-3
CN57-4
CN57-5
CN57-6
CN56-1
CN56-2
CN56-3
CN56-4
CN56-5
CN56-6
Stapler Unit
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
M8
P121
P120
P119
P118
CLU
MOT
MOT
MOT
MOT
MOT
MOT
MOT
Slide Motor
Staple/Fold Motor
Shift Motor
Joint Switch
M5
M4
M3
M2
M1
CL1
M7
M6
MS2
MS1
MS3
Delivery Motor
Paddle Motor
Feed Motor
Schematic Diagram
CN44-3
CN44-2
CN44-1
PI11
DC+5V
8
SGND
9
BIND_ROL_HP
CN41-3
CN41-2
CN41-1
4
5
6
1
2
3
13
14
15
1
2
3
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
DC+5V
SGND
BIND_HP
PI10
CN40-3
CN40-2
CN40-1
DC+5V
BIND_P
BIND_L
PI9
CN39-3
CN39-2
CN39-1
DC+5V
SGND
RJOG_HP
PI8
CN36-3
CN36-2
CN36-1
DC+5V
SGND
TRY_EMPS
CN32-3
CN32-2
CN32-1
PI7
DC+5V
SGND
LVL_S
DC+5V
SGND
EJCT_BLT_HP
CN31-3
CN31-2
CN31-1
PI6
CN35-3
CN35-2
CN35-1
DC+5V
SGND
ADJ_TRAY_S
PI22
CN30-3
CN30-2
CN30-1
DC+5V
SGND
FDOOR_S
DC+5V
SGND
TOPCOV_S
CN24-3
CN24-2
CN24-1
PI4
CN25-3
CN25-2
CN25-1
DC+5V
SGND
FJOG_HP
11
CN23-3
CN23-2
CN23-1
12
11.3.7.
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Full Stack
Sensor
PI24
JAN 2006
12
11
10
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
CN14 CN14
CN12 CN12
10 10
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
J2003
J1003
J1007
J2004
J1004
J1007
J2011-1
J2011-2
J2011-3
J2011-4
J2011-5
J2011-6
J2011-7
J2010-1
J2010-2
J2010-3
J2010-4
J2010-5
J2010-6
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
826
1
2
J1002
J1002
1
2
J1001
5
4
3
2
1
J1006
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J1006
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J1001
5
4
3
2
1
J1005
4
3
2
1
J1005
4
3
2
1
J2010
1
2
3
4
5
6
J2010
1
2
3
4
5
6
J1007-6
J1007-5
J1007-4
J1007-3
J1007-2
J1007-1
J2002
1
2
M1P
Punch Motor
PI2P
Horizontal Registration
Home Position
Sensor
PI1P
Punch Home Position
Sensor
PI3P
Punch Motor Clock
Sensor
M2P
Horizontal Registration
Motor
1
2
3
J2007
1
2
3
J2001
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
J2008
1
2
3
J2009
1
2
3
LED PCB
J2011
1
2
Photo-sensor
3
PCB
4
5
6
7
J2011
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
J1007-13
J1007-12
J1007-11
J1007-10
J1007-9
J1007-8
J1007-7
Ver. 5.2
M
Finisher Unit
JAN 2006
88
Panasonic
Software
Operating Instructions
Network Firmware Update Tool
(Service Tool)
Version 3
DZSD001829-11
Table of Contents
1.
General
1.1
Supporting OS .......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2
2.
Installation
2.1
2.2
2.3
3.
3.1
Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 6
3.1.1
For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher)
6
3.1.2
For other models
6
3.2
4.
1st Edition :
2002 March 20
2nd Edition :
2002 August 1
3rd Edition :
2002 December 5
4th Edition :
2003 April 10
5th Edition :
2003 April 22
6th Edition :
2003 December 18
7th Edition :
2004 April 7
8th Edition :
2004 August 3
9th Edition :
2004 August 20
10th Edition :
2004 October 22
11th Edition :
2005 March 18
Page 2
1. General
The Network Firmware Update Tool allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine connected via LAN (TCP/IP) to
program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the
Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the LAN.
1.1 Supporting OS
This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS
Windows 98 / Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Page 3
2. Installation
2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Network
Firmware Update then click Network Firmware Update Configuration.
2.
3.
Page 4
1.
2.
Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware
Update then click Uninstall Network Firmware Update Tool.
3.
4.
For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add or
change configurations (i.e. Administrator).
Page 5
1.
If the device password is changed (Remote Password) from the default value (blank = 0000), it is
not possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the
Default Password in the Configuration dialog box or enter the password at each communication.
2.
Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...).
Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.
3.1.2
1.
2.
Page 6
2.
Note:
1) Make sure the Key Operator Password on the remote unit and FTP Password on this application
are set correctly.
2) Make sure the remote unit is not in an operating condition (Copying or Printing etc...).
3) Do not run other applications on this PC while it is transferring the firmware data to the remote
unit, or a communication error may occur.
4) Do not operate or reset the power of the device while it is updating the firmware code, or the
firmware update isnt done properly and the device will not boot up again.
5) If the Network Firmware Update fails and the unit does not reboot automatically for more than 20
minutes, you may need to recover the firmware update again via a Parallel/USB port using the
Local Firmware Update Tool or with the FROM card.
3.
Page 7
5.
Page 8
6a1
Page 9
6a3
Extracting...
6a4
6a5
Page 10
6b2
6b3
Page 11
6c1
6c2
Page 12
6c4
7.
Page 13
9.
Page 14
Page 15
memo
Panasonic
Software
Operating Instructions
Local Firmware Update Tool
(Service Tool)
Version 3
DZSD000965-16
Table of Contents
1.
General
1.1
Supporting OS .......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2
2.
Installation
2.1
2.2
2.3
Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only) ................................................. 5
2.4
3.
3.1
3.2
4.
1st Edition :
2nd Edition :
1999 February 10
1999 September 30
3rd Edition :
2000 September 8
4th Edition :
2000 November 28
5th Edition :
2001 June 20
6th Edition :
2001 September 7
7th Edition :
2003 April 10
8th Edition :
2003 April 22
9th Edition :
2003 December 18
10th Edition :
2004 January 19
11th Edition :
2004 February 10
12th Edition :
2004 April 20
13th Edition :
2004 August 3
14th Edition :
2004 August 20
15th Edition :
2004 October 22
16th Edition :
2005 March 18
Page 2
1. General
The Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB) allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine to emulate a Flash
Memory Card Writer and create a Master Firmware Card, or to program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit
directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the Flash Memory Card or the Firmware Code Memory of
the Unit through the Parallel/USB Port on the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine. The installation and operation are
very similar to the Printer Interface.
1.1 Supporting OS
This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS
Windows 98 / Me
Windows NT 4.0 (Parallel Port only)
Windows 2000 / XP
Page 3
2. Installation
2.1
Prepare the Parallel cable or USB cable for connecting the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine and
your PC.
Please install the Parallel Port/USB Port Assembly into one of the supporting Panasonic
Fax/Copier models by following the appropriate option installation instructions for that model.
Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.
2.2
Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.
Page 4
Program Folder
2.3
Copying...
Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only)
After installation of the Local Firmware Update Tool, if you need to install the USB Firmware
Update Driver, please set the unit to "Update from USB/* IN PROGRESS *" in the Service
Mode first, and then connect the USB Cable. The required Driver will then be installed
automatically.
Note: For instructions of how to get into the Service Mode, refer to your machine's Service
Manual.
Searching...
Installing driver...
Note:
1. The installation screens will vary, and are dependant on the OS.
2. For Windows 2000 or XP, through the "Digital Signature Not Found" or "Software Installation" window will be
displayed during the installation and indicate "Unknown software package" or "not passed Windows Logo testing", please
click [YES] or [Continue Anyway] button to continue the installation
3. If you are asked for the Inf file location, please specify the following folder.
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\UsbDrv1
4. After the USB Firmware Update Driver is installed, and you are not updating the machine's firmware at this time, turn the
Power Switch OFF and ON again to return your machine to the Standby mode.
Page 5
1.
2.
Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware
Update then click Uninstall Local Firmware Update Tool.
3.
4.
For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add or
change configurations (i.e. Administrator).
Note: The Firmware Update Driver is not deleted by the Uninstaller. Please delete it from the Control
Panel\Printers folder by manually. When you delete USB Firmware Update Driver, please delete it
after you connect the PC to the unit with the USB cable and driver enabled, or it cannot be
deleted properly.
Page 6
Page 7
Set the machine to the Firmware Update Mode and then connect the unit and PC with a Parallel
cable or USB cable.
Note: For the USB Port Models, the Plug & Play of the Printer mode is activated when the
USB cable is connected without the unit set in the USB Firmware Update Mode. If
this happens, please click the [Cancel] button for the Plug and Play Driver
installation.
Page 8
Status Monitor
Port Controller
5a1
5a2
5a3
Extracting...
Page 9
5a5
Page 10
5b2
5b3
Page 11
Page 12
5c2
5c3
Page 13
Page 14
Page 15
DZZSM00298